Today’s News 25th April 2023

  • Escobar: The Empire's Revenge – Set Fire To Southern Eurasia
    Escobar: The Empire’s Revenge – Set Fire To Southern Eurasia

    Authored by Pepe Escobar,

    The collective cognitive dissonance displayed by the pack of hyenas with polished faces driving U.S. foreign policy should never be underestimated.

    And yet those Straussian neo-con psychos have been able to pull off a tactical success.

    Europe is a ship of fools heading for Scylla and Charybdis – with quislings such as France’s Le Petit Roi and Germany’s Liver Sausage Chancellor cooperating in the debacle, complete with the galleries drowning in a maelstrom of  hysterical moralism.

    It’s those driving the Hegemon that are destroying Europe. Not Russia.

    But then there’s The Big Picture of The New Great Game 2.0.

    Two Russian analysts, by different means, have come up with an astonishing, quite complementary, and quite realistic road map.

    General Andrei Gurulyov, retired, is now a member of the Duma. He considers that the NATO vs. Russia war on Ukrainian soil will end only by 2030 – when Ukraine would basically have ceased to exist.

    His deadline is 2027-2030 – something that no one so far has dared to predict. And “ceasing to exist”, per Gurulyov, means actually disappearing from any map. Implied is the logical conclusion of the Special Military Operation – reiterated over and over again by the Kremlin and the Security Council: the demilitarization and denazification of Ukraine; neutral status; no NATO membership; and “indivisibility of security”, equally, for Europe and the post-Soviet space.

    So until we have these facts on the ground, Gurulyov is essentially saying that the Kremlin and the Russian General Staff will make no concessions. No Beltway-imposed “frozen conflict” or fake ceasefire, which everyone knows will not be respected, just like the Minsk agreements were never respected.

    And yet Moscow, we got a problem. As much as the Kremlin may always insist this is not a war against the Slavic Ukrainian brothers and cousins – which translates into no American-style Shock’n Awe pulverizing everything in sight – Gurulyov’s verdict implies the destruction of the current, cancerous, corrupt Ukrainian state is a must.

    comprehensive sitrep of the crucial crossroads, as it stands, correctly argues that if Russia was in Afghanistan for 10 years, and in Chechnya, all periods combined, for another 10 years, the current SMO – otherwise described by some very powerful people in Moscow as an “almost war” – and on top of it against the full force of NATO, could well last another 7 years.

    The sitrep also correctly argues that for Russia the kinetic aspect of the “almost war” is not even the most relevant.

    In what for all practical purposes is a war to the death against Western neoliberalism, what really matters is a Russian Great Awakening – already in effect: “Russia’s goal is to emerge in 2027-2030 not as a mere ‘victor’ standing over the ruins of some already-forgotten country, but as a state that has re-connected with its historic arc, has found itself, re-established its principles, its courage in defending its vision of the world.”

    Yes, this is a civilizational war, as Alexander Dugin has masterfully argued. And this is about a civilizational rebirth.

    And yet, for the Straussian neo-con psychos, that’s just another racket towards plunging Russia into chaos, installing a puppet and stealing its natural resources.

    Fire in the hole

    The analysis by Andrei Bezrukov neatly complements Gurulyov’s (here, in Russian). Bezrukov is a former colonel in the SVR (Russian foreign intel) and now a Professor of the Chair of Applied Analysis of International Problems at MGIMO and the chairman of the Council on Foreign and Defense Policy think tank.

    Bezrukov knows that the Empire will not take the incoming, massive NATO humiliation in Ukraine lying down. And even before the possible 2027-2030 timeline proposed by Gurulyov, he argues, it is bound to set fire to southern Eurasia – from Turkey to China.

    President Xi Jinping, in his memorable visit to the Kremlin last month, told President Putin the world is now undergoing changes “not seen in 100 years”.

    Bezrukov, appropriately, reminds us of the state of things then: “In the years from 1914 to 1945, the world was in the same intermediate state that it is in now. Those thirty years changed the world completely: from empires and horses to the emergence of two nuclear powers, the UN, and transatlantic flight. We are entering a similar period, which this time will last about twenty years.”

    Europe, predictably, will “whither away”, as “it is no longer the absolute center of the universe.” Amidst this redistribution of power, Bezrukov goes back to one of the key points of a seminal analysis developed in the recent past by Andre Gunder Frank: “200-250 years ago, 70 percent of manufacturing was in China and India. We are going back to about there, which will also correspond to population size.”

    So it’s no wonder that the fastest-developing region – which Bezrukov characterizes as “southern Eurasia” – may become a “risk zone”, potentially converted by the Hegemon into a massive power keg.

    He outlines how southern Eurasia is peppered by conflicting borders – as in Kashmir, Armenia-Azerbaijan, Tajikistan-Kyrgyzstan. The Hegemon is bound to invest in a flare-up of military conflicts over disputed borders as well as separatist tendencies (for instance in Balochistan). CIA black ops galore.

    Still Russia will be able to get by, according to Bezrukov: “Russia has very big advantages, because we are the biggest producer of food and supplier of energy. And without cheap energy there will be no progress and digitalization. Also, we are the link between East and West, without which the continent cannot live, because the continent has to trade. And if the South burns, the main routes will not be through the oceans in the South, but in the North, mainly overland.”

    The biggest challenge for Russia will be to keep internal stability: “All states will divide into two groups at this historic turning point: those that can maintain internal stability and move reasonably, bloodlessly into the next technological cycle – and then those that are unable to do so, that slip off the path, that bloom a bloody internal showdown like we had a hundred years ago. The latter will be set back ten to twenty years, will subsequently lick their wounds and try to catch up with everyone else. So our job is to maintain internal stability.”

    And that’s where the Great Awakening hinted at by Gurulyov, or Russia reconnecting with its true civilizational ethos, as Dugin would argue, will play its unifying role.

    There’s still a long way to go – and a war against NATO to win.

    Meanwhile, in other news, Hegemon hacks are spinning that the North Atlantic has relocated to South China. Goodnight, and good luck.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 23:40

  • Job Recruiter Warns Tech Layoff Cycle "Not Done Yet"
    Job Recruiter Warns Tech Layoff Cycle “Not Done Yet”

    The biggest threat to the US economy is a credit crunch in regional banks with the possibility of spillover into commercial real estate. This issue is exacerbated by the Federal Reserve’s aggressive monetary tightening to tame the hottest inflation in four decades, increasing the likelihood of an economic downturn. Consequently, due to the mounting uncertainty, one job recruitment firm warns the layoff cycle is far from over. 

    On Monday morning, Yahoo Finance Live’s Julie Hyman asked RecruitGyan Founder and CEO Neha Naik, “Where do you think we are in the layoff cycle?” 

    Naik responded, “We are definitely not done yet. I definitely think there is more to come, and it’s primarily because – not just recession – but there was overstocking of workers during the pandemic.” 

    She said, “All the companies are getting rid of employees they overstocked in the last two years — and obviously with the upcoming recession — tech companies have a couple of choices: first is to increase prices, second is to sell more services, and or third is to layoff employees to maintain profit margins.” 

    Naik pointed out that founders and officers of tech companies are paring down risks amid “the upcoming recession.”

    Watch the full interview.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    So far this year, 608 tech companies have laid off 173,880 employees. And judging by Naik’s interview with Yahoo, that number might steadily increase through the year’s second half. 

    Naik noted her firm can still place tech workers from top firms in 6 to 9 weeks. 

    While the economic storm clouds gather, expect even more tech layoffs in the months ahead. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 23:20

  • Remote Work Is "Bulls**t", Says CRE Billionaire Sam Zell
    Remote Work Is “Bulls**t”, Says CRE Billionaire Sam Zell

    Real estate mogul Sam Zell told an audience of New York University graduate students that remote work is a “bunch of bullshit” and they should dismiss the idea of working from home, according to commercial real estate news website GlobeSt

    “One of the biggest lies in the world is that people working from home are more productive than people working in the office,” Zell told the audience at NYU SPS Schack Institute of Real Estate’s annual REIT Symposium, held at NYC’s Pierre Hotel on Fifth Avenue, on Wednesday. 

    “You have much less productivity if you’re working from home in your pajamas with three little kids running around than if you’re in an office,” he continued. 

    When asked about the current state of the office market and the impact of work, Zell provided this answer: 

    “I wouldn’t want to be an owner of a lot of Class B offices right now.” 

    The billionaire made it clear that remote work trends are temporary: 

     “On the first day of Covid, nobody was in our office. Six months later, everyone was in our office—and they have been for over two years.” 

    He said many professional skills critical for young people are developed in office environments, and working from home stymies that. 

    “There’s an enormous difference between a Zoom board meeting and a meeting in person.

    “A Zoom board meeting is a board meeting where everyone sits and listens to recitations. An in-person meeting is where the real discussion takes place.”

    Zell’s view on remote work is biased, considering he’s made much of his fortune in the CRE space, and remote work has led to rising vacancy rates and sliding property value.

    The gold-standard measure of office occupancy trends is the card-swipe data provided by Kastle Systems. The average office occupancy nationwide is around 46%, still well off the highs from pre-pandemic levels. 

    We have cited the regional bank turmoil as likely going to have spillover effects in the CRE space — especially the office sector. JPMMorgan Stanley, and Goldman Sachs have all joined the gloom parade, warning about impending CRE turmoil.  

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 22:40

  • Montana Transgender Lawmaker Censured For 'Hateful' Comments
    Montana Transgender Lawmaker Censured For ‘Hateful’ Comments

    Authored by Naveen Athrappully via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    A transgender lawmaker from Montana has been censured in the House after the individual made “hateful rhetoric” while debating a bill ending transgender procedures for minors.

    A transgender individual shows a testosterone ampoule at a hospital in Santiago, Chile, on Jan. 8, 2020. (Claudio Reyes/AFP via Getty Images)

    The SB 99 bill, also known as the “Youth Health Protection Act,” bans minors in the state from receiving surgical procedures, puberty blockers, and hormones.

    “The only thing I will say is if you vote yes on this bill and yes on these amendments I hope the next time there’s an invocation when you bow your heads in prayer, you see the blood on your hands,” state Rep. Zooey Zephyr, a Democrat, said during the House debate on Tuesday, referring to the chamber’s opening prayer. Zephyr is the first transgender lawmaker in the history of the Montana Legislature.

    House Majority Leader Sue Vinton called Zephyr’s comments disrespectful. In the evening, the Montana Freedom Caucus, a group of conservative lawmakers, demanded that Zephyr be censured for “attempting to shame the Montana legislative body and by using inappropriate and uncalled-for language during a floor debate.”

    This kind of hateful rhetoric from an elected official is exactly why tragedies such as the Covenant Christian School shooting in Nashville occurred,” the caucus said in an April 18 press release.

    “Combined with former Montana Supreme Court Justice Jim Nelson’s recent calls for ‘jihad’ and a ‘fight to the death’, there is unmistakable evidence of a desire for some to engage in violence over political beliefs. This must stop.”

    On Thursday, Speaker Matt Regier did not allow Zephyr to speak against a bill that sought to define male and female in binary terms in the state code. On Friday, Zephyr was once more prevented from speaking on a bill that sought to block minors from seeing porn online.

    Regier’s decision to prohibit Zephyr from speaking was taken after consultation with other lawmakers, according to The Associated Press. Though Democrats raised objections, the decision was eventually upheld in party-line votes.

    Protecting Minors

    SB 99 seeks to “prohibit certain medical and surgical treatments to treat minors with gender dysphoria.” A person is prohibited from “knowingly” offering medical treatments to a minor to address the child’s perception that their gender or sex is different from their birth gender or sex. Such treatments include surgical procedures, puberty blockers, and doses of testosterone or other androgens.

    Physicians or health care professionals who violate these rules will be deemed as having engaged in “unprofessional conduct.”

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 22:20

  • Majority Of US Voters Think 'Cheating' Affected Outcome Of 2022 Midterm Elections
    Majority Of US Voters Think ‘Cheating’ Affected Outcome Of 2022 Midterm Elections

    According to a new poll, 60% of US voters say it’s likely that ‘cheating’ affected the outcome of the 2022 midterm elections, while 35% of voters don’t think cheating was a factor in some races, Rasmussen reports in a Thursday poll.

    Of the 60% who said yes, 37% of them said it was ‘very likely’ the case.

    By party, 48% of Democrats think cheating was a factor in the 2022 midterms, compared to 78% of Republicans.

    62% of those polled also say they think the government is likely “ignoring evidence of widespread election fraud.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The survey of 915 likely US voters was conducted on April 17-19, 2023 by Rasmussen Reports, and has a margin of error of +/- 3%, with a 95% level of confidence.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 22:00

  • Ghost Particle: A Neutron That Could Solve The Mystery Of Existence
    Ghost Particle: A Neutron That Could Solve The Mystery Of Existence

    Authored by Sumaya Hazarika via The Epoch Times,

    “Truly the universe is full of ghosts, not sheeted churchyards specters, but the inextinguishable elements of individual life, which having once been, can never die, though they blend and change, and change again forever.”

    – H. Rider Haggard

    When we think about the universe, it simply seems vast with boundless space filled with large and minute particles unknown to human beings. Undoubtedly, there is a lot that we have come to understand about our planet, the universe, and also ourselves, but what if everything we know is only a fraction of the vastness that is the universe?

    The study of “ghost particles,” or neutrinos, must make scientists feel the same way. We know everything and nothing at the same time. The ultimate paradox.

    A neutrino, as the name suggests, is electrically neutral and a fundamental particle, which means it is not composed of other particles like electrons, quarks, antiquarks, etc. Because of its small mass (earlier considered to be zero), neutrinos have a very weak gravitational interaction making it able to pass through normal matter unimpeded and undetected.

    Multi-wavelength compilation image of Kepler’s supernova remnant, SN 1604. (NASA/wikimedia)

    They are the most abundant particles in the universe that least interact with any other matter.

    To think about it, we are living in a world of countless trillions of neutrinos that can pass through us like we don’t exist. The combination of this ghostly presence and the important role they play in our universe is what’s captivating our physicists.

    Proposed in 1930 and later verified in 1950, a neutrino is a cosmic mystery to scientists (pdf) even decades after its discovery, as to:

    How much mass do they have? How many varieties of neutrinos exist? Do they have any magnetic properties? Are neutrinos their own antiparticles (antimatter)?

    In their latest book, physicist Alan Chodos and science journalist James Riordon explore this perplexing particle.

    “Ghost Particle: in search of the elusive and mysterious Neutrino” (2023) discusses the particle’s past and current discoveries, while they suggest it’s not just physicists who await those answers.

    Riordon says “neutrinos are incredibly important both for understanding the universe and our existence in it.” In simpler words, neutrinos can reveal how matter evolved from simple particles into more complex ones, creating everything around us.

    Are Neutrinos Their Own Antiparticles?

    Every single property discovery of neutrinos has been baffling and also intriguing for our researchers, the biggest being, whether the ghost particle is its own antimatter.

    If we are to believe in the Big Bang theory, the explosion should have created equal amounts of matter and antimatter, i.e the counterparts of electrons, protons and so on. Essentially, when matter and antimatter come into contact, they annihilate each other suggesting that our universe should be empty, but, evidently, that’s not the case. In contrast, the universe is filled with a lot of matter and a little antimatter, for reasons unknown.

    Physicists are still trying to understand the manner in which neutrinos interact with other particles, which is a challenge, as the particle has neutral charge with very low mass.

    Why Are Ghost Particles a Topic of Interest?

    The same property of neutrinos that makes them difficult to detect, i.e their weak interaction with surrounding particles, interests physicists, as this feature can be useful in probing environments that other radiations such as light or radio waves cannot penetrate.

    Another important role of a neutrino is in observation of supernovas, a luminous explosion of massive stars.

    The core collapse phase of a supernova is highly energetic, and so dense that no known particle is able to escape its core front, except for neutrinos.

    Neutrinos also have a crucial part to play in the research of “dark matter.” Its significance in probing cosmological phenomena is considered exceptional, and is thus a major focus of research in astrophysics.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 21:40

  • Global Military Spending Hits All-Time High As World War III Threats Persist
    Global Military Spending Hits All-Time High As World War III Threats Persist

    Whether it begins in Eastern Europe or the South China Sea, World War III threats are mounting with each passing week. The latest data shows global military spending increased for the eighth consecutive year in 2022 to an all-time high. The surge in European spending primarily drove this increase due to the ongoing conflict in Ukraine.

    Global defense expenditures increased by 3.7% in real terms to a record high of $2.24 trillion in 2022, the Stockholm International Peace Research Institute (SIPRI) wrote in a report. 

    The sharpest rise was 13% in European arms budgets, the largest increase in 30 years. Russia’s invasion of Ukraine has spurred many surrounding countries, as did ones in Asia due to rising tensions in the South China Sea and Taiwan Strait, to increase spending. 

    Some of the sharpest military spending increases in Europe were in Finland (36 %), Lithuania (27%), Sweden (12%), and Poland (11%) — many of these countries are near Russia. The largest increases globally also include Qatar and Saudi Arabia. 

    Source: Bloomberg 

    “The continuous rise in global military expenditure in recent years is a sign that we are living in an increasingly insecure world,” said Dr. Nan Tian, Senior Researcher with SIPRI’s Military Expenditure and Arms Production Programme. 

    “States are bolstering military strength in response to a deteriorating security environment, which they do not foresee improving in the near future,” Tian said. 

    SIPRI estimated that military aid to Ukraine from the US was around $19.9 billion, which accounted for a 2.3% increase in total US military spending last year. The US is still the world’s biggest military spender, nearly reaching $900 billion in 2022 (Maybe $1 trillion soon?). China is the second largest military spending, then Russia. 

    Combine the military spending of the three largest arms spenders US, China, and Russia, and they all accounted for 56% of global expenditures. 

    Surging military spending is a symptom of an increasingly insecure world.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 21:20

  • Tucker Carlson Fired By Lachlan Murdoch; Here's What We Know
    Tucker Carlson Fired By Lachlan Murdoch; Here’s What We Know

    Update (2114ET): After an entire day wondering why in the hell Fox News would can the highest-rated cable news host in the world, ever, the New York Times comes out with this;

    Who:

    The decision to let Mr. Carlson go was made on Friday night by Lachlan Murdoch, the chief executive of Fox Corporation, and Suzanne Scott, chief executive of Fox News Media, according to a person briefed on the move. Mr. Carlson was informed on Monday morning by Ms. Scott, another person briefed on the move said.

    Why?

    [T]he power that Mr. Carlson, 53, wielded outside Fox News could not insulate him from a growing list of troubles inside the network related to his conduct on and off the air, some of which had been grating on Mr. Murdoch and his father, Rupert Murdoch, the chairman of Fox Corporation, who co-founded the network in 1996, according to the two people with knowledge of the company’s decision.

    The host, a polarizing and unpopular figure at the network outside of his own staff, was exposed as part of a defamation lawsuit by Dominion Voting Systems as a bully who denigrated colleagues and sources, often in profane and sexist language, and called for the firing of Fox journalists whose coverage he disliked. He has also drawn condemnation from the right and left for his role in fostering a revisionist account of the assault on the United States Capitol on Jan. 6, 2021.

    So he was mean to people?

    We also know that last week, Tucker attacked Big Pharma in one of his monologues.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Oh, there’s more:

    One early point of contention was Mr. Carlson’s 2021 documentary, “Patriot Purge,” which advanced the conspiracy theory that the attack that day was a so-called false flag operation designed to discredit the former president and his political movement. Lachlan Murdoch was said to have been caught off guard by the program, which also led two conservative Fox News contributors to quit in protest, Jonah Goldberg and Stephen Hayes.

    In March, Mr. Carlson edited down tens of thousands of hours of footage from the attack given to him by Speaker Kevin McCarthy and used them to falsely portray the rioters as people Mr. Carlson called “mostly peaceful” onlookers who had innocently ambled into the Capitol. The broadcast drew a rebuke from Senator Mitch McConnell, who is a friend of Rupert Murdoch’s and said Mr. Carlson had drawn “offensive and misleading conclusions.”

    So he showed the public the January 6th footage and dared question the event.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Times also says that one of Carlson’s former producers said he ran a “toxic” workplace.

    And yet, is any of that worth giving up tens of millions in Tucker-related ad revenue? It seems that if you routinely question the regime, it is.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *  *  *

    Tucker Carlson, the highest rated cable news host in history, is out at Fox News. The news comes days after the network cut ties with host Dan Bongino 48 hours after the network settled with Dominion Voting Systems for nearly $800 million.

    “Fox News Media and Tucker Carlson have agreed to part ways,” reads a statement from the network, which thanks him for his service “as a host and prior to that as a contributor.”

    Carlson’s executive producer, Justin Wells, is also out at the network according to Semafor.

    According to the statement, Carlson’s last show was Friday, April 21st as he continued to dominate, and his slot will now be filled by ‘an interim show helmed by rotating FOX News personalities until a new host is named.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Full statement from the network (emphasis ours),:

    FOX News Media and Tucker Carlson have agreed to part ways. We thank him for his service to the network as a host and prior to that as a contributor.

    Mr. Carlson’s last program was Friday April 21st. Fox News Tonight will air live at 8 PM/ET starting this evening as an interim show helmed by rotating FOX News personalities until a new host is named.

    FOX News Media operates the FOX News Channel (FNC), FOX Business Network (FBN), FOX News Digital, FOX News Audio, FOX News Books, the direct-to-consumer streaming services FOX Nation and FOX News International and the free ad- supported television service FOX Weather. Currently the number one network in all of cable, FNC has also been the most watched television news channel for more than 21 consecutive years, while FBN ranks among the top business channels on cable. Owned by Fox Corporation, FOX News Media reaches nearly 200 million people each month.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Shares of 21st Century Fox dropped like a rock on the news, and is now sitting at January lows (the drop in FOXA’s market cap is around the same as the settlement with Dominion).

    One of Carlson’s last monologues at Fox

    Were Carlson and Bongino sacrificed as part of the settlement?

    And where to next?

    Rumble..?

    Twitter…?

    ZeroHedge?

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 21:13

  • Antony Blinken And The 'Made Men' Of The Biden Administration
    Antony Blinken And The ‘Made Men’ Of The Biden Administration

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    Below is my column in The Hill on the recent disclosure that the organizer of the infamous “Russian Disinformation” letter on the Hunter Biden laptop was prompted by then Biden campaign adviser Antony Blinken. He is, of course, now our Secretary of State and he follows a pattern of the “made men” of the Biden Administration.

    Here is the column:

    Secretary of State Antony Blinken would really, really prefer to talk about grain in Ukraine this week. But many people are less interested in what Blinken is doing as secretary of state than in what he did to become secretary of state.

    This week, Blinken was implicated in a political coverup that could well have made the difference in the 2020 election. According to the sworn testimony of former acting CIA Director Michael Morrell, Blinken – then a high-ranking Biden campaign official – was “the impetus” of the false claim that the Hunter Biden laptop story was really Russian disinformation. Morrell then organized dozens of ex-national security officials to sign the letter claiming that the Hunter laptop story had “all the classic earmarks of a Russian information operation.”

    Morrell further admitted that the Biden campaign “helped to strategize about the public release of the statement.”

    Finally, he admitted that one of his goals was not just to warn about Russian influence but “to help then-Vice President Biden in the debate and to assist him in winning the election.”

    Help it did. Biden claimed in a presidential debate that the laptop story was “garbage” and part of a “Russian plan.” Biden used the letter to say “nobody believes” that the laptop is real.

    In reality, the letter was part of a political plan with the direct involvement of his campaign, but Biden never revealed their involvement. Indeed, over years of controversy surrounding this debunked letter, no one in the Biden campaign or White House (including Blinken) revealed their involvement.

    Of course, the letter was all the media needed. Discussion of the laptop was blocked on social media, and virtually every major media outlet dismissed the story before the election.

    That was also all Biden needed to win a close election. The allegations that the Biden family had cashed in millions through influence peddling could have made the difference. It never happened, in part because of Blinken’s work.

    Once in power, Blinken was given one of the top Cabinet positions. He was now one of the “made” men of the administration.

    He was not alone. The 2016 election was marred by false allegations of Russian collusion with the Trump campaign. Unlike the influence peddling allegations made against Biden, the media ran with those stories for years. It later turned out that the funding and distribution of the infamous Steele dossier originated with the Clinton campaign. The campaign, however, reportedly lied in denying any such funding until after the election. It was later sanctioned for hiding the funding as legal expenses.

    Those involved in spreading this false story were rewarded handsomely. For example, the second collusion story planted in the media by the campaign concerned the Russian Alfa Bank. The campaign used key Clinton aide Jake Sullivan, who went public with the entirely false claim of a secret back channel between Moscow and the Trump campaign.

    Sullivan was also a “made” man who was later made Biden’s national security adviser. Others who were implicated in either the Steele dossier or Alfa Bank hoaxes also later found jobs in the administration. The Brookings Institution proved a virtual turnstile for these political operatives.

    Many signatories on the Russian disinformation letter continue to flourishMSNBC analyst Jeremy Bash signed the letter and was put on the president’s Intelligence Advisory Board. As with Sullivan, it did not seem to matter that Bash had gotten one of the most important intelligence stories of the election wrong.

    Former CIA head James Clapper was referenced by Biden on the letter and was also a spreader of the Russian collusion claims. Despite those scandals and a claim of perjury, CNN gave him a media contract.

    They are all “made” men in the Beltway, but they could not have succeeded without a “made” media.

    These false stories planted by the Clinton and Biden campaigns succeeded only because the media played an active and eager role. In any other country, this pattern would fit the model of a state media and propaganda effort. However, there was no need for a central ministry when the media quickly reinforced these narratives. This is a state media by consent rather than coercion. The Biden campaign knew that reporters would have little interest or curiosity in how the letter came about or the involvement of campaign operatives.

    If Republicans did not control the House of Representatives, the Morrell admission would never have occurred. The Democrats repeatedly blocked efforts to investigate this story and the influence peddling allegations. Even this week, some Democrats called it a “tabloid story.”

    Given the career paths of figures such as Blinken and Sullivan, there is a concern that other officials may see the value in “earning their bones” as “made” men and women. There is now a senior IRS career official who is seeking to disclose what he claims was special treatment given to Hunter Biden in the criminal investigation.

    While the 51 former intelligence figures were eager to raise Russian disinformation claims before the election, most have become silent.

    After all, the letter served its purpose, as Morrell indicated, “to assist [Biden] in winning the election.”

    After the false stories planted before the 2016 and 2020 elections, the question is what is in store for 2024?

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 21:00

  • Total Ban On G7 Exports To Russia "Simply Not Doable" – Japan, EU Officials Say
    Total Ban On G7 Exports To Russia “Simply Not Doable” – Japan, EU Officials Say

    As expected, an initiative by some leading Western allies in the Group of Seven (G-7) to ratchet the economic war on Moscow further – to the point of enacting an outright ban on all exports to Russia – has failed before it so much as got off the ground. 

    The move came as the US-led economic war has clearly failed to stop Moscow’s war machine in Ukraine, and as the US, Britain, Canada, France, Germany, Italy, Japan and the European Union are looking ahead to their major summit set for May in Hiroshima.

    On the table is a draft statement to implement a complete export ban on Russia, replacing the current sector-by-sector sanctions regime which critics have said leaves gaping holes for the Kremlin and sympathetic countries (or at least more neutral, like India or Brazil) to exploit. It’s expected to contain limited exemptions, such as for medicine and food items. 

    On Monday the Financial Times is citing officials who say the significant policy shift will be a no-go for key countries that must sign off: “But representatives from Japan and EU countries suggested in a preparatory meeting last week that such a move would not be feasible, according to three people briefed on the discussions,” the report indicates.

    “From our perspective it is simply not do-able,” one of the officials told FT. Importantly, all 27 members of the European Union would have to agree to the sanctions before it could be passed, making it extremely unlikely, despite the ten packages which have already been passed (and were subject of intense wrangling and whole countries, like Hungary, being exempted for some sectors like energy). 

    However, some aspects of the draft statement which are expected to carry at next month’s G-7 summit include efforts to uphold current sanctions, tightening measures that restrict “evasion and circumvention” of sanctions and punishing countries “willfully supporting the financing of Russia’s war.”

    Source: Bloomberg

    The Miami Herald reported last week that “So far sanctions have almost halved the value of E.U. and G-7 exports to Russia, with limits on everything from electronics to luxury items.” It remains “That still leaves $66 billion worth of goods from Europe, the U.S., Canada and Japan going in, according to the Geneva-based Trade Data Monitor.”

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 20:40

  • Transgender Teacher Spoke About Wanting To Shoot Students, Parents Accuse District Of 'Cover-Up'
    Transgender Teacher Spoke About Wanting To Shoot Students, Parents Accuse District Of ‘Cover-Up’

    Authored by Patricia Tolson via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    It took three weeks for parents to discover that a transgender middle school teacher in Florida confessed to a guidance counselor that the teacher was having “bad thoughts” of self-harm and shooting students.

    Fox Chapel Middle School in Spring Hill, Fla., on April 20, 2023. (Patricia Tolson/The Epoch Times)

    Now parents are demanding answers, accusing the district of a cover-up, and petitioning Florida’s governor to remove certain members of the Hernando County School Board as well as the superintendent.

    Ashlee Renczkowski, a biological male who presents as a female, is the teacher who allegedly made the comments while at the school on March 24.

    Kerry Thornton is an assistant principal at Fox Chapel Middle School in Spring Hill, Florida, which is part of the Hernando School District.

    According to a report filed with the Hernando County Sheriff’s Office by Fox Chapel School Resource Officer Brian Timothy, Thornton alerted Timothy the afternoon of March 24 that Renczkowski “had just made concerning statements about self-harm and then possibly making statements about shooting students.”

    Thornton had visited Renczkowski in the classroom and asked how the teacher was doing, according to Timothy’s report. Renczkowski replied, “Not good, I’m having bad thoughts.” Thornton radioed for guidance counselor Kimberly Walby and brought Renczkowski to Walby’s office.

    Social Media Triggers

    In Walby’s office, Renczkowski spoke of “a social media post where people were talking negatively” about Renczkowski’s “sexual orientation,” according to Timothy. He also said that Renczkowski was triggered by social media posts critical of the “sexual orientation and lifestyle” of Renczkowski’s wife, Fawn Renczkowski, who also teaches at the school.

    Thornton and Walby advised the school resource officer about Renczkowski’s comments.

    Renczkowski told Walby about wanting “to shoot some students” because they weren’t performing to their ability, according to the police report. Walby then said Renczkowski recanted the statement. But Walby also “began to reiterate that she has short-term memory issues” and was “starting to second-guess the conversation” when it came to “details and the order of events,” according to Timothy’s report.

    Renczkowski also admitted to owning three handguns.

    Sandra Hurst, the mental health coordinator for the Hernando School District, traveled to the middle school and met with Renczkowski to conduct a threat assessment. Both Hurst and Thornton agreed that Renczkowski was not an immediate threat to students and therefore could not be involuntarily committed under the Baker Act, but the sheriff’s office did send an officer to Renczkowski’s home that evening to collect the firearms, which Renczkowski surrendered without issue.

    In his report about the incident, Timothy said that after meeting with Renczkowski, Hurst “advised that a plan will be devised to meet with Ashlee prior to her returning to work with students. The school principal and Safe Schools was made aware of this incident.”

    Parents didn’t learn about the incident until a local reporter named Tom Lemons broke the story on April 7.

    An April 17 news release from the district indicated that Renczkowski was not at school March 27–29 but returned to work on March 30. Renczkowski was then teaching in the classroom until April 13, when the Florida Department of Education intervened to have Renczkowski removed.

    The Epoch Times contacted Renczkowski for comment but did not receive a response by press time.

    ‘Respondent May Be Seriously Mentally Ill’

    To provide “clarification,” Hernando County Sheriff Al Nienhuis issued a press release on April 12, saying “the investigation revealed that no criminal offense(s) occurred; therefore, no arrest(s) could be made.”

    Deputies also determined that “the individual did not, at that moment, meet the required criteria for involuntary commitment under the Baker Act.”

    But Nienhuis also said, “In an abundance of caution, the HCSO petitioned the court for a temporary Risk Protection Order,” which the court “granted immediately.”

    Banners at Fox Chapel Middle School in Spring Hill, Fla., on April 20, 2023. (Patricia Tolson/The Epoch Times)

    In an April 13 statement, HCSD Superintendent John Stratton said the district was going to “take a hard look at all the actions that were taken on that day, and in the days following the incident, and determine if any steps were missed.”

    As is our longstanding practice, while the matter is under investigation, the teacher will be removed from all student contact,” Stratton assured. No return date has been set.

    In response, the Florida Department of Education (DOE) issued its own press release, informing the public that it was only after the DOE expressed concern directly to Stratton that he chose to remove Renczkowski from the school.

    In an April 17 news release, Stratton again said that “the district’s threat assessment was conducted by trained Safe Schools staff and the Hernando County Sheriff’s Office” and “all investigating agencies agree the teacher did not meet criteria for imminent harm to self or others.”

    However, according to the risk protection order obtained by The Epoch Times—“served upon the respondent” on March 28, signed by Renczkowski, and “filed in open court” on April 10—it was determined by the HCSO that “the Respondent may be seriously mentally ill or may have recurring mental health issues.”

    Renczkowski was ordered to immediately surrender all firearms, ammunition, and “any license to carry a concealed weapon or firearm,” and the document further ordered that Renczkowski may not possess, purchase, or receive any firearm or weapon for one year.

    Parents Want Answers

    In the wake of the March 27 shooting at The Covenant School in Nashville, Tennessee, many Fox Chapel parents are afraid. They’re frustrated by the lack of transparency and dismissive responses from the school district.

    Now, a new petition alleges that “the delay in notification was due to a ‘cover-up’ that involved District administration and ranking members of the School Board and other agencies.”

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 20:20

  • Which Countries Are Granted The Most New Patents? (Spoiler Alert, Not USA)
    Which Countries Are Granted The Most New Patents? (Spoiler Alert, Not USA)

    Every year, the UN’s World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) tracks hundreds of thousands of patents across industries.

    These patents grant their inventors exclusive intellectual property rights over their creations. They encourage new ideas, spur scientific development, and lead to new technologies and entire sectors being born.

    However, the number of patents granted varies greatly across nations. When viewing the origin of each patent’s applicant, we see a handful of countries dominating certain industries.

    In this graphic, Visual Capitalist’s Jacqueline Ann DeStefano-Tangorra uses 2021 WIPO data to showcase which countries were granted the most new patents, along with their sector categorizations.

    Countries with the Most New Patents

    In 2021, out of 1,608,375 patents across multiple fields, 87% were granted to innovators from just six countries.

    Applicants by Country Granted Patents (2021) % of Total
    🇨🇳 China 607,758 37.8%
    🇺🇸 United States 286,205 17.8%
    🇯🇵 Japan 256,890 16.0%
    🇰🇷 South Korea 156,972 9.8%
    🇩🇪 Germany 69,672 4.3%
    🇬🇧 United Kingdom 20,009 1.2%
    ❓ Unknown 24,677 1.5%
    🌎 Other Countries 186,192 11.6%
    World Total 1,608,375 100.0%

    After rapidly increasing its patent output in recent years, China topped the chart in 29 out of 36 total fields including computer technology, electrical machinery, and digital communication. The Chinese government’s focus on innovation led to the nation’s applicants receiving 38% of the 1.6 million patents granted in 2021.

    The United States—home to the world’s largest tech companies—came in second with 286,205 granted patents by origin. The U.S. also topped four fields of its own: medical technology, engines and turbines, basic communication processes, and unknown (for inventions that can’t be assigned to a specific field).

    Not far behind is Japan with 256,890 granted patents. It dominated the other nations in the fields of semiconductors, optics, and furniture and games, cementing its well-earned reputation of technological innovation.

    “Unknown” origin applicants, for which the nationality or country of residence couldn’t be determined for the inventor(s), accounted for 24,677 of granted patents.

    The Origin of New Patents by Field

    When assessing which technological fields inventors are pursuing in 2021, it’s not unexpected that digital and electrical technologies are in the lead:

    Rank Main Field of Technology % of Granted Patents
    1 Computer technology 10.3%
    2 Electrical machinery, apparatus, energy 6.6%
    3 Digital communication 6.5%
    4 Measurement 5.9%
    5 Medical technology 4.8%
    6 Transport 4.5%
    7 Civil engineering 3.7%
    8 Other special machines 3.6%
    9 Audio visual technology 3.3%
    10 Semiconductors 3.3%
    11 Machine tools 2.9%
    12 Chemical engineering 2.8%
    13 Handling 2.7%
    14 Optics 2.6%
    15 Pharmaceuticals 2.4%
    16 Materials, metallurgy 2.4%
    17 Control 2.4%
    18 Mechanical elements 2.3%
    19 Telecommunications 2.3%
    20 Furniture & games 2.3%
    21 Basic materials chemistry 2.3%
    22 Engines, pumps, turbines 2.2%
    23 Biotechnology 2.1%
    24 Organic fine chemistry 2.0%
    25 IT methods for management 1.9%
    26 Macromolecular chemistry, polymers 1.7%
    27 Other consumer goods 1.7%
    28 Environmental technology 1.6%
    29 Thermal Processes and apparatus 1.6%
    30 Surface technology, coating 1.5%
    31 Textile & paper machines 1.5%
    32 Food chemistry 0.9%
    33 Basic communication processes 0.6%
    34 Analysis of biological material 0.6%
    35 Micro structural & nano technology 0.2%
    36 Unknown 0.003%

    There are also many patents granted mainly in infrastructure-related fields, which have become all the more important following the COVID-19 pandemic and an increasing focus on trade.

    These include medical technology, transport, civil engineering, and semiconductors.

    A Tech-Savvy Future

    The number of patents granted in 2021 is a testament to the growing importance of innovation around the world.

    While a select few nations have dominated the patent landscape so far, there are many others making significant contributions to innovation and intellectual property.

    As technology continues to advance and the global economy becomes more interconnected, the importance of intellectual property rights will only continue to grow.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 20:00

  • Pfizer Quietly Financed Groups Lobbying For COVID Vaccine Mandates: Fang
    Pfizer Quietly Financed Groups Lobbying For COVID Vaccine Mandates: Fang

    Authored by Lee Fang via leefang.substack.com,

    In the midst of a contentious debate about Chicago’s plan to force employers to require their workers to take the COVID-19 vaccine, Karen Freeman-Wilson, president of the Chicago Urban League, appeared on television to dismiss complaints that such rules would disproportionately harm the Black community.

    “The health and safety factor here far outweighs the concern about shutting people out or creating a barrier,” Freeman-Wilson said on WTTW in August 2021.
     

    Earlier that year, her group had received a $100,000 grant from Pfizer, the manufacturer of one of the most commonly used COVID-19 vaccines in the United States, for a project to promote “vaccine safety and effectiveness.” Although the Chicago Urban League is not normally shy about disclosing its corporate donors, the support from Pfizer is not listed in the “partners” section on its website. The drug industry funding likewise went unmentioned during the interview.

    Pfizer’s grant to the Chicago Urban League was one of many that Pfizer made to nonprofits and trade organizations. Pfizer doled out special funding to groups across the country that lobbied in favor of government policies to mandate the COVID-19 vaccine.

    The extensive list of those with funding from the pharmaceutical giant includes consumer, doctor, and medical groups, as well as public health organizations and civil rights nonprofits. Many of those groups did not disclose the funding they received from Pfizer while they were advocating for policies that would force workers to get the vaccine. 

    There were several different and sometimes overlapping vaccine mandates in the country. At the federal level, President Joe Biden issued an executive order, which was ultimately struck down in court, mandating vaccinations at all employers with 100 workers or more. A number of state and local governments forced public employees to get vaccinated and tried to force private-sector employers to follow suit. And many large employers required their employees to get vaccinated without any prodding from the government. 

    Critics of these employer mandates have noted that the majority of the proposed mandates, including Biden’s, made no exception for individuals with natural immunity through prior infection. Proponents of the mandates claimed that the vaccines would prevent transmission of COVID-19, an argument that lacked sound scientific basis at the time and has further unraveled.

    “You’re not going to get COVID if you have these vaccinations,” Biden falsely claimed in July 2021, as his administration and local governments were preparing mandate orders. Rochelle Wallensky, director of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, similarly stated that vaccinated individuals “do not carry the virus.”

    But it wasn’t just these unsupported claims by leading government officials that shaped the groundwork for COVID-19 mandates. A coalition of highly visible groups backed by Pfizer and the pharmaceutical industry provided much of the lobbying support for coercive vaccine policies. Here are the most important examples:

    • The National Consumers League, a century-old corporate watchdog group, announced support for “government and employer mandates requiring [COVID-19] vaccination” in August 2021, during roughly the same period in which it accepted $75,000 from Pfizer earmarked for “vaccine policy efforts.” The organization is also led in part by Andrea LaRue, who serves as an NCL board member. LaRue’s work as a highly paid contract lobbyist to Pfizer, focused on vaccine policy, is not disclosed by NCL’s website. 

    • The Immunization Partnership, a Houston-based public health nonprofit, lobbied publicly against Texas legislation in 2021 designed to prevent vaccine passports and municipal vaccine mandates. The Immunization Partnership claimed that the bills “erode the vital role of our state’s public health and medical experts in combating this pandemic.” The partnership did not disclose that it received $35,000 from Pfizer that year for “legislative advocacy.”

    Subscribers to Lee Fang can read the rest by clicking here…

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 19:40

  • Office Buildings Are Emptying In Major U.S. Cities Like Houston, Dallas, New York And San Francisco
    Office Buildings Are Emptying In Major U.S. Cities Like Houston, Dallas, New York And San Francisco

    For anyone looking to keep their finger on the pulse of how commercial real estate is holding up, look no further than major U.S. cities like Houston, Dallas, New York And San Francisco.

    Those were the four cities mentioned in a new Yahoo Finance report detailing how landlords are “having a tougher time filling their empty office buildings with new tenants”, citing data from CoStar and JP Morgan. 

    The glut is a result of overbuilding while interest rates were lower, the report says, noting that Houston and Dallas “put up more new office space between 2010 and 2021 than all regions except New York”. Even more alarming is the fact that they have “millions more square feet under construction”, Yahoo says. And despite discounting, vacancies are now highest in those two cities compared to any other metro area. 

    Houston and Dallas had 18.8% and 17.2% of office space vacant at the end of last year, respectively. The national average is 12.5%, with New York, San Jose, San Francisco, and Chicago posting vacancy rates of 12.3%, 12%, 16.4%, and 15.1%, Yahoo wrote. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The vacancies in Houston and Dallas come not only despite aggressive discounting, but even as both cities have had better luck with employees returning to the office than other cities. For example, worker attendance was 60% in Houston and 50% in Dallas, as of the first week in April 2023. Those figures are higher than cities like New York and San Jose. 

    About $1 billion in outstanding commercial mortgage backed security loans in Houston, secured by office properties, are coming due this year, Yahoo writes. Dallas faces and aggregate of over $1 billion in maturities by 2024, as well. 

    Itziar Aguirre, CoStar’s director of market analytics for Houston, commented: “Refinancing risk over the near term is high and it’s gonna be really tough because interest rates are so high. There’s gonna be a lot of foreclosures. I think there’s gonna be bankruptcies. There’s gonna be a lot of distressed sales.”

    You can read Yahoo’s full report here

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 19:20

  • New Report Exposes Growing, Billion Dollar Budget Fiasco In Illinois' Free Medicaid Program For Undocumented Immigrants
    New Report Exposes Growing, Billion Dollar Budget Fiasco In Illinois’ Free Medicaid Program For Undocumented Immigrants

    Authored by Mark Glennon via Wirepoints.org,

    How can it happen that an annual program would cost 94 times times what Illinoisans were told it would cost just three years ago – $188 million in its first year? With subsequent extensions it now costs nearly $1 billion per year and growing, money the state doesn’t have.

    A better question: How could it not happen, given the abject disregard for cost of the program and Illinois’ routinely scandalous budget process?

    And wait ’till you hear the excuse for the fiasco from Gov. J.B Pritzker’s administration.

    Here’s what happened: In May 2020 Illinois, became the first state to provide Medicaid for undocumented seniors. The coverage was “tucked in near the end of the 465-page budget implementation bill that passed the Illinois General Assembly late Saturday night,” as reported by the State Journal-Register at the time. That’s how Illinois’ budget is routinely implemented. A budget plus an implementation bill, usually totaling at least a thousand pages, is put up for a vote with only hours of review.

    The program would cost just $2 million per year, the bill’s sponsor said at the time. That’s Delia Ramirez, a Chicago Democrat in the Illinois House at the time. Pritzker signed the bill without any cost estimate by his office. That’s all we knew at the time.

    But the cost of the program blew though the appropriation for it even within the first month of implementation and soared beyond all subsequent estimates and appropriations. That’s according to a closed-door presentation by the Illinois Department of Healthcare and Family Services to lawmakers last month that became public last week.

    For the year from March 2022 through February 2023, cost of care for the 65 and over age group was nearly $188 million, which is 94 times what Ramirez claimed.

    Since then, the state expanded the program twice, lowering the age limit to 55 in 2021 and 42 a year later. The cost estimates of those expansions also shatter estimates made along the way. Now, the expanded program is estimated to cost $990 million for the fiscal year that starts July 1. That’s an increase of $768 million over this year, which was the first full year under the expanded program.

    No portion of that cost is reimbursable by the federal government.

    More details are reported in a particularly good column by Capital News Illinois.

    The problem and the cost uncertainty are still growing, largely because nobody really knows how many illegal immigrants are here and millions more enter the country every year.

    Undeterred, House Democrats recently filed House Bill 1570 to further expand free health benefits for undocumented immigrants by adding ages 19-41 to the program.

    Why was the report exposing this discussed only behind closed doors last month in the General Assembly?

    I have found no excuse.

    Is anybody being held accountable?

    Certainly not Ramirez.

    She got a promotion from voters who elected her to the United States House of Representatives in 2022.

    How about Pritzker?

    Pritzker’s office has given two answers, the first of which is to blame legislators. His office says they didn’t prepare their own cost estimates before the program became law because it was a lawmaker-driven initiative. Republicans have complained that the program was never vetted in committee before being added to the budget, but that apparently didn’t concern Pritzker.

    Pritzker’s second answer is a doozy, essentially saying, “How dare you you question us about budgeting. We Democrats are great with budgets.” Specifically, here’s what Pritzker’s press spokesman, Jordan Abudayyeh, told CapitalFax:

    The Republicans said it’s time we have some adults in the room when it comes to budgeting. To be clear, the only lawmakers with a proven record of balancing the budget and improving state finances are Governor Pritzker and the Democratic supermajority in the General Assembly. The Governor just proposed another balanced budget that invests in education, healthcare, and communities. The credit ratings agencies have so much trust in his track record that after his proposal the state received two credit upgrades.

    Let’s review some history. Who eliminated the bill backlog that reached $16 billion left by the Republican governor? Democrats. Whose prudent fiscal decisions led to eight credit upgrades? Democrats. Who paid additional pension payments? Democrats. Who invested hundreds of millions of dollars to rebuild our human services infrastructure after the Republican budget impasse? Democrats. Who rebuilt the rainy day fund to nearly $2 billion? Democrats. Who balanced the budget four years in a row? Democrats.

    The budget, of course, isn’t remotely close to being balanced for other reasons, as we’ve often explained.

    But even if it were, the Pritzker Administration apparently wants us to accept that unbudgeted spending should be overlooked because of its supposed budget prowess.

    Pritzker’s office says there is about $300 million available to cover the $768 million increased cost for the coming year over the current year. Where the difference will come from remains to be seen.

    Illinois House Republicans, at a Thursday press conference, called for a moratorium and an audit on the program. They complained bitterly about how the program and each extension were slipped into other legislation with no review. “Zero transparency, zero accountability, zero public input,” said Assistant Republican Leader C.D. Davidsmeyer (R-Jacksonville),

    The Republicans noted that the additional pressure on Medicaid from the program and its expansions is happening at the same time the state is expected to lose $760 million in special Medicaid federal funding for its own citizens that was provided to states during the pandemic.

    Davidsmeyer indicated that he fears the pending, further expansion of the program to younger age groups will again be stuck into a budget bill or some other massive omnibus bill at the end of this legislative session, without real review.

    “The sad fact is Illinois has become a sanctuary state for undocumented immigrants,” he said.

    “The State of Illinois gives them free healthcare benefits, driver’s licenses, mortgage and renters’ assistance, as well as other taxpayer-funded benefits. All I can say is ‘If you build it, they will come.’”

    And “cost be damned,” he might have added.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 19:00

  • Chinese Foreign Minister Reminds West Beijing Will "Never Back Down" On Taiwan
    Chinese Foreign Minister Reminds West Beijing Will “Never Back Down” On Taiwan

    Chinese Foreign Minister Qin Gang reaffirmed in Friday remarks that China would “never back down” on the issue of Taiwan – a warning to the West which came during a speech focused on China’s central contributions to the global economy. 

    “The Taiwan problem is at the core of China’s core interests,” Qin said near the end of the speech. “We will never back down in the face of any act that undermines China’s sovereignty and security. Those who play with fire on the question of Taiwan will burn themselves.”

    Getty Images via AFP

    He also addressed recent and ongoing accusations that China is seeking to change the “status quo” across the Taiwan Strait. “It is not the Chinese mainland but the Taiwan independence separatist forces and a handful of countries attempting to disrupt the status quo,” he asserted.

    Over a month ago his words were even more forceful, and aimed directly at the United States. He said in early March, not long after taking charge as China’s foreign minister at the end of December, that “If the United States does not hit the brake, but continues to speed down the wrong path, no amount of guardrails can prevent derailing, and there surely will be conflict and confrontation.”

    But on the other side the West isn’t ready to back down from supporting Taiwan security and sovereignty either, seen especially in EU Foreign Policy Chief Josep Borrell’s controversial call for the bloc’s navies to patrol the the Taiwan Strait. He published the words in a French weekly, Journal Du Dimanche, on Sunday.

    Borrell wrote that the self-ruled island “concerns us economically, commercially and technologically” – and urged for European navies to ensure its protection. He said, “That’s why I call on European navies to patrol the Taiwan Strait to show Europe’s commitment to freedom of navigation in this absolutely crucial area.

    As for Beijing, it has spent years warning the West not to “play with fire” regarding the status of the self-ruled island. Officially, China’s policy is to see peaceful reunification via political means, but sees Washington’s frequent high level contacts with Taipei’s leadership as interference.

    Chinese state-owned Global Times has specifically responded to Borrell’s plan as follows: “If European warships still want to show off their might in the Pacific today, the result would only be an embarrassing failure.” The CCP mouthpiece added: “For the People’s Liberation Army, which has powerful strength to defend its homeland, facing European warships that come to provoke and show off is not even worth raising an eyebrow. We advise them not to bring shame upon themselves.”

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 18:40

  • Senators Question Feasibility Of EPA's New Vehicle Emissions Standards
    Senators Question Feasibility Of EPA’s New Vehicle Emissions Standards

    Authored by Nathan Worcester via The Epoch Times,

    Lawmakers questioned the feasibility of new vehicle tailpipe emissions proposals from the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), which the agency predicts will lead to the mass adoption of electric light- and medium-duty vehicles within a decade.

    The April 18 hearing was held by the Subcommittee on Clean Air, Climate and Nuclear Safety of the Senate Environment & Public Works Committee.

    Subcommittee Chair Ed Markey (D-Mass.) lauded the proposals, which the EPA released on April 12.

    He suggested that the new EPA standard for light-body vehicles “could be expanded upon,” saying that over $135 billion in spending last Congress was being used “to build America’s electric vehicle future.”

    “Strong proposed regulations are critical to driving climate progress forward, but they are more doable than ever, thanks to the billions in clean vehicle investments passed by Congress,” Markey said.

    Sen. Ed Markey (D-Mass.) speaks during a press conference in Washington on Sept. 10, 2020. (Jemal Countess/Getty Images for Green New Deal Network)

    Describing the advantages of stricter regulations, he argued that “those benefits are a bonanza of benefits to our climate, to drivers, and to our health.”

    “We need to make sure they also benefit Union-American workers,” he added.

    Lummis Questions Mineral Sourcing

    Sens. Cynthia Lummis (R-Wyo.) and Kevin Cramer (R-N.D.) voiced skepticism regarding the EPA’s vision.

    Lummis asked one expert witness, Kathy Harris of the Natural Resources Defense Council, whether focusing on tailpipe emissions alone ignored greenhouse gas emissions from the rare earth mining needed to produce electric vehicle batteries.

    “There have been many studies that have shown that electric vehicles today, from well to wheel, are still cleaner than compared to a gasoline vehicle,” Harris responded.

    Senator Cynthia Lummis (R-Wyo.) meets with the media in Washington on Nov. 9, 2020. (Stefani Reynolds-Pool/Getty Images)

    The Wyoming senator also ran through a list of minerals used in electric vehicle batteries, pointing out that China, Indonesia, and the Democratic Republic of the Congo dominate production and downstream processing.

    “Do any of these countries have anywhere near the stringent environmental regulations the United States has?”

    “I cannot speak to that today,” Harris said before apologizing and correcting herself: “Not to my awareness.”

    “I have a rare earth mine in my state that has been trying to open for over ten years and still doesn’t have the environmental permitting to open,” Lummis said.

    A staffer for Lummis told The Epoch Times that the lawmaker had in mind the Rare Element Resources Bear Lodge Project.

    Soil containing various rare earth elements for export at a port in Lianyungang, China, in a file photo. (STR/AFP via Getty Images)

    “There is no way that the standards and the materials needed to produce and manufacture in the United States can happen in ten years, and to ramp up the supply even in foreign countries that have far lower environmental standards, not to mention human labor standards—this is not possible to do,” Lummis said.

    ‘Not Even a Consideration for Trucking’

    Sen. Kevin Cramer (R-N.D.) questioned another expert witness, Andrew Boyle.

    Boyle is co-president of the trucking company Boyle Transportation and first vice chairman of the American Trucking Associations, a trade group representing the trucking industry.

    Boyle had earlier testified to the risks of a rapid push for electric-powered trucks because of their current technological limitations.

    “A clean diesel truck can spend 15 minutes fueling anywhere in the country and then have a range of about 1,200 miles before fueling again. In contrast, today’s long-haul battery-electric trucks have a range of about 150 to maybe 330 miles and can take up to ten hours to charge,” he said.

    Cramer asked Boyle about the cost of insuring a large electric truck.

    “It’s hard to tell because the consumer-facing EV product is so much further ahead,” Boyle said.

    Sen. Kevin Cramer (R-N.D.) speaks to reporters at the U.S. Capitol Building on Oct. 06, 2021. (Anna Moneymaker/Getty Images)

    He told the senator about what he sees as the negative consequences of another recent EPA decision—namely, granting California a waiver for its clean vehicle regulation, which would mandate that all drayage trucks purchased in the state be zero-emission starting in 2024. Old trucks would be grandfathered in by the California Air Resources Board (CARB).

    “If the power and the infrastructure’s not available, it’s not even a consideration for trucking, yet California wants to make it effective next January, that’s the only choice—no diesel trucks,” he said.

    “We have the cart before the horse right now.”

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 18:20

  • Anger, Pushback As Russia's Lavrov Chairs UN Security Council Meeting
    Anger, Pushback As Russia’s Lavrov Chairs UN Security Council Meeting

    There were fireworks at Thursday’s United Nations Security Council meeting chaired by Russia’s Foreign Minister Sergey Lavrov. Already tensions are high in the UNSC due to Russia’s chairing the council for the month of April (based on the scheduled monthly rotation). 

    Lavrov told the council that the world has become a more dangerous place, possibly more so than at the height of the Cold War. “As was case in Cold War, we have reached the dangerous, possibly even more dangerous, threshold,” he said.

    Via AFP

    The meeting which Lavrov chaired was titled the “Maintenance of international peace and security,” but came under criticism by those countries opposed to the Kremlin’s war in Ukraine. Western diplomats had complained upon Russia’s April 1st takeover of the lead seat at the UNSC that it must be an “April Fool’s joke”. 

    In the Thursday address, Lavrov accused the US and its allies of “abandoning diplomacy and demanding clarification of relations on the battlefield.”

    But the response of Western allies in the UN was fierce. Olaf Skoog, European Union representative to the UN, said that “Russia is trying to portray itself as a defender of the UN charter and multilateralism. Nothing can be further from the truth. It’s cynical.”

    He added that “We all know that while Russia is destroying, we are building. While they violate, we protect.”

    Additionally UN Secretary-General Antonio took a swipe at Lavrov and Russia, saying it’s the invasion  “causing massive suffering and devastation to the country and its people” and fueling “global economic dislocation triggered by the COVID-19 pandemic.”

    “Tensions between major powers are at an historic high. So are the risks of conflict, through misadventure or miscalculation,” Guterres warned – at least seeming to agree with Lavrov on the extreme dangers of the times.

    But it was the US’s Linda Thomas-Greenfield that pushed back hardest, calling Lavrov “hypocritical”…

    Our hypocritical convener today, Russia, invaded its neighbor, Ukraine, and struck at the heart of the UN Charter. This illegal, unprovoked and unnecessary war runs directly counter to our most shared principles – that a war of aggression and territorial conquest is never, ever acceptable,” Thomas-Greenfield said.

    Likely these tensions at the security council will continue so long as Russia is chairing the meetings, also making for awkward business even when Russia-Ukraine is not the topic at hand.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 18:00

  • David Stockman On Why Decades Of Inflationary Finance Are Finally Coming Home To Roost
    David Stockman On Why Decades Of Inflationary Finance Are Finally Coming Home To Roost

    Authored by David Stockman via InternationalMan.com,

    Eventually, the inflationary credit emitted by the Fed works its way through the global economy and comes home to roost in the form of reduced domestic output and rising prices.

    In this regard, there is no more powerful tell than the round trip of the PCE deflator for durable goods during the past 28 years.

    As shown in the chart below, prices for durable goods, which are now mostly manufactured abroad, plunged continuously and by a staggering 40% between early 1995 and the Covid-Lockdown bottom in Q2 2020. There is no broad-scale deflationary gale quite like it in all of recorded history.

    PCE Deflator for Durable Goods, 1995-2022

    What caused it, of course, was a one-time arbitrage of labor and other local production costs on the massively expanded global supply chain enabled by modern technology.

    Again, however, that wasn’t a wonder of capitalism alone. What drove the global supply chain deep into the interior of China and other ultra-low labor cost venues was the Fed’s lunatic inflation-targeting policies—originally de facto under Greenspan and then eventually (2012) official under Bernanke.

    The truth is, when Mr. Deng declared that to be rich was glorious and opened China’s great export factories, sound money in the US would have resulted in a continuous deflation of the drastically swollen US cost and price level that had emerged from the Great Inflation of the 1970s.

    Obviously, Alan Greenspan, the once and former champion of the gold standard, was having none of it. Had he permitted the nation’s swollen cost structure to deflate in order to keep domestic production competitive, he would not have been the toast of the town in Washington. He would have been vilified by the politicians because the indicated cure of soaring interest rates and shrinking domestic credit on the free market would have made financing the giant Federal deficits which emerged in the Reagan era well nigh impossible.

    So Greenspan pretended to be the champion of sound money by taking credit for a phony gain he was pleased to call “disinflation”. The latter amounted to deliberately depreciating the purchasing power of savers and wage earners, but just not quite as rapidly as during the worst days before Volcker.

    Needless to say, in a globalized economy inflationary money is quite the trickster. In the initial instance it led to the massive and relentless off-shorting of production, and the re-importing of the same goods produced abroad via the cheap labor being requisitioned from China’s vast interior rice paddies.

    Inflation of the dollar came back as deflation of durable goods prices!

    It also allowed the Fed to claim that it had vanquished inflation and that its altogether new challenge was the madness called “lowflation” or too little inflation.  That’s truly when the Keynesian central bankers lost their minds.

    Alas, the trouble with “lowflation” is that it was a one-time aberration, not a permanent or sustainable condition. As the above sharp hook in the chart attests, the sub-index for durables is now up by 15% from the bottom, even as the global supply chain continues to contract owing to the exhaustion of cheap labor in China and badly lagging political patience with free trade in the US and throughout the west.

    Not surprisingly, therefore, the deeply embedded inflation that has has been fostered by the Fed and its fellow-traveling central banks is now proving to be far more stubborn than our Keynesian money-printers ever anticipated; and far more vicious that the clownish perma-bulls of Wall Street ever imagined.

    Here is still one more reminder. We have long-argued that the proper approach to fashioning a “core” inflation gauge is not to arbitrarily drop items out of the price basket like food, energy and now shelter, too. Take that far enough and inflation drops to zero because you are no longer measuring anything that even remotely resembles the general price level.

    By contrast, the trimmed mean CPI is just the ticket because each month it drops out the high and low 8% of items, respectively, but these are never the same components. So you are smoothing the monthly perturbations, not eliminating great gobs of the price structure.

    In any event, the chart below presents the 16% trimmed mean CPI on both a year-over-year basis (purple line) and a monthly annualized basis (black line).

    16% Trimmed Mean CPI, Y/Y Change Versus Annualized Rate of Monthly Change,  2018-2023

    In short, decades of inflationary finance are coming home to roost. The Fed is not in charge of the cycle and it’s not over-doing its belated attempt to permit interest to return to some semblance of rationality relative to the underlying rate of inflation.

    So now would be a good time to duck and cover.

    They say that the Fed always breaks something but that is only partially true. What it actually broke was the money and capital markets long ago, and now there is only more demolition to come.

    *  *  *

    The truth is, we’re on the cusp of an economic crisis that could eclipse anything we’ve seen before. And most people won’t be prepared for what’s coming. That’s exactly why bestselling author Doug Casey and his team just released a free report with all the details on how to survive an economic collapse. Click here to download the PDF now.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 17:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 24th April 2023

  • Germany's Green Energy Delusion Has An Enormous Environmental & Economic Price-Tag
    Germany’s Green Energy Delusion Has An Enormous Environmental & Economic Price-Tag

    Authored by Magyar Nemzet’s Gergely Kiss via Remix News,

    With the closure of Germany’s last three nuclear power plants, the country’s 60-year era of nuclear power generation has come to an end. The move was originally planned for the end of last year. However, due to uncertainty over energy supplies in the wake of the Russian-Ukrainian war and sanctions, the coalition government extended the deadline until after winter.

    For a long time, nuclear energy has been one of the most divisive areas of energy policy in the EU’s supply. The technology offers stable energy supplies and has positive environmental and economic indicators, but the radical Green parties of Europe have worked hard to convince many that these plants should be closed.

    This has been achieved mainly in Germany and Austria. Downsizing has begun and further investment has become impossible. Reality, however, has shown that this ideology-driven energy policy comes at a heavy price. It was not by chance that energy policy expert Oliver Hortay recently recalled an estimate by a Berkeley University researcher that the social cost of German nuclear plant closures had already reached $12 billion a year.

    The threat of energy shortages in Europe has led to a change in the perception of nuclear power among EU citizens.

    In Germany, for example, the percentage of people who oppose nuclear power has fallen from 65 to 20 percent. But it seems that the will of the electorate does not matter.

    “It’s a black day for climate protection in Germany,” Jens Spahn, a conservative member of the CDU, told RTL television the other day.

    It is hard to talk about a green transition when carbon emissions are rising.

    The huge expansion of solar and wind capacity in Germany is no guarantee of security of supply. The country is increasingly using coal instead of Russian gas. In fact, mines that had previously been closed down have had to be reopened, and a German energy company has even started to dismantle a wind farm to allow for the expansion of a neighboring coal mine.

    On average, 30,000 tons of coal are transported daily by trains from North Sea ports to large power stations across Germany. Last year, the war caused the country to increase its coal imports by 8 percent to 44.4 million tons. These are the hard facts.

    The Greens went after gas boilers, too. They will now be banned in German homes from 2024.

    Greens say they cannot meet their climate commitments otherwise.

    However, it is coal-fired power stations, not residential gas boilers, that threaten climate targets.

    Péter Szijjártó, the Hungarian minister of foreign affairs and trade, often warns that it is impossible to supply the economy with gas or oil, or even to heat houses and apartments, with ideology or political statements instead of actual supply chains.

    In other words, the Hungarian government continues to treat energy security as a physical and not an ideological issue. That means it is not willing to give up working, proven and reliable sources.

    An ideology-driven energy policy is very expensive, has harmful consequences, and in the future, could even end with us freezing in our homes if an especially cold winter hits Europe.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/24/2023 – 02:00

  • The Garland, Blinken, And Morell Morass
    The Garland, Blinken, And Morell Morass

    Authored by Roger Kimball via AmGreatness.com,

    Doubtless your mother used to tell you to count your blessings. It was good advice.

    Your situation may be bad. In the case of the United States, things indisputably are bad, and worsening. You know that. But look on the bright side.

    Sure Merrick Garland, the first American Gothic attorney general of the United States, is a partisan horror showwithholding real protection from Supreme Court justices who are threatened by violent criminals even as he stigmatizes as “domestic terrorists” parents who criticize their local school boards and orders the FBI to conduct dawn raids on critics of the regime. He is a horrible man and a dangerous partisan hack, the very instantiation of the two-tier application of the law that has made such a mockery of justice during Biden’s tenure. 

    But again, look on the bright side. Garland will soon be gone. And remember, he almost made it to the Supreme Court. Obama nominated him in the waning days of his administration. But Donald Trump had other ideas and—let’s give credit where credit is due—Senate Minority Leader Mitch McConnell (R-Ky.) made sure that Garland’s nomination got lost when Republicans held the majority. I am no fan of McConnell’s, but I try to remember to say a little prayer for him whenever I list my intentions. By scotching Garland’s ascension to the Court, McConnell did the country a huge favor. 

    I say Garland will “soon” be gone. Most of my readers will assume I mean on or about January 20, 2025, when the next Republican president assumes office. 

    It might take that long. But recent developments have me wondering whether he might make his congé even earlier.

    A few days ago, it was reported that an unnamed, senior IRS special agent was seeking whistle-blower status in connection with the ongoing investigation of First Son Hunter Biden, who has serious tax problems

    According to a letter from the agent’s lawyer to several House and Senate committees, the agent laid out multiple examples of “preferential treatment and politics improperly infecting decisions and protocols that would normally be followed by career law enforcement professionals in similar circumstances if the subject [i.e., Hunter Biden] were not politically connected.”

    The agent’s allegations also “contradict sworn testimony to Congress by a senior political appointee” and “involve failure to mitigate clear conflicts of interest in the ultimate disposition of the case” against Hunter Biden.

    An “unnamed senior political appointee,” eh? Well, that unnamed status didn’t last long. On Thursday, the New York Post reported that the international man of mystery was none other than Merrick Garland himself.

    Back in March, Garland had insisted to Congress that the investigation into Hunter Biden’s extracurricular activities was free from political interference. David Weiss, the U.S. Attorney investigating the case, had full autonomy, Garland said. Quoth Garland, “The U.S. attorney has been advised that he has full authority to make kind of those referrals you’re talking about or to bring cases in other jurisdictions if he feels it is necessary, and I will assure that if he does, then he will be able to do that.” 

    It was not reported whether that claim was greeted with titters. I assume that the echoing claim from the White House, that the investigation would be “free from any political interference by the White House,” was greeted by at least restrained and incredulous laughter. 

    Thierry Monasse/Getty Images

    What does it all portend? Probably about the same thing that the revelation last week regarding Secretary of State Antony Blinken portends. Blinken, it transpired, was the origin of the campaign against the story, first reported by the New York Post, about Hunter Biden’s “laptop from hell.” Forget about the salacious bits—the drugs, the guns, the whores. More damaging were the emails detailing some of the Biden family’s corrupt business dealings with various foreign entities, dealings that clearly implicated the “Big Guy,” Joe Biden. 

    The Post bombshell was detonated a scant two weeks before the 2020 presidential election. It promised disaster for the Biden campaign. What to do? Remember the 51 former intelligence specialists, including such senior figures as former CIA director John Brennan and Director of National Intelligence James Clapper, who signed a letter testifying that the laptop bore “all the classic earmarks of a Russian information operation”? 

     According to the sworn testimony of Michael Morell—a senior Democratic operative—it was he, working hand-in-glove with Blinken, then a Biden campaign official, who organized the letter and helped shut down the story.

    Why did he do this?

    Two reasons.

    He wanted to help Joe Biden in his debates with Donald Trump, so he wanted the story buried. Beyond that, he said, he wanted Biden “to win the election.”

    What better way to help than to use the power of the state to censor the media and thereby suppress an unflattering story, one that would probably have altered the outcome of the election

    It is possible that both Garland and Blinken will have to answer for their alleged malfeasance. Both might easily be impeached and forced from office.

    If they are, it will be a signal that the Regime is about to expel Joe Biden and find another candidate for 2024. I don’t really expect that to happen, though anything is possible in this increasingly yeasty situation. More likely, I think, is that our deeply ensconced two-tier system of “justice” will prevail, just as it is, for the benefit of Hunter Biden.

    More’s the pity, but the longer such outrages continue, the more definitive the reverse peristalsis of swampy denizens in Washington, D.C. will be in November 2024. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 23:30

  • Bush, Clinton And Obama NGO Teams Up With AmEx Global To Fly Migrants Into The US
    Bush, Clinton And Obama NGO Teams Up With AmEx Global To Fly Migrants Into The US

    A new nongovernmental organization (NGO) launched by former Presidents Obama, Clinton and George W. Bush, Miles4Migrants, is teaming up with American Express Global Business Travel (AmEx GBT) and Welcome.US, in order to fly migrants to communities throughout the United States, according to Breitbart.

    Welcome.US was originally intended to facilitate the resettlement of some of the 85,000 Afghans who fled to the US in 2021 and 2022 following the Biden administration’s disastrous pullout from the country. The organization (surprise!) has ties to George Soros’ Open Society Foundation through several board members who sit on their “National Welcome Council.”

    Now, the NGO is teaming up with the open borders group Miles4Migrants as well as American Express Global Business Travel to fund flights to American communities for migrants from Cuba, Haiti, Venezuela, Ukraine, and Nicaragua. -Breitbart

    “Donations are needed to fund the flights for newcomers to travel to the United States,” the website for the initiative states.

    Those forced to flee often leave behind all but what they can carry, and the costs of international travel can be prohibitive. Welcome Connect Travel removes the cost of travel as a barrier for both sponsors in the United States and the displaced families they are supporting through humanitarian sponsorship. [Emphasis added]

    With the average cost of a single flight at $1,600, public donations through our partner Miles4Migrants will help provide a lifeline to newcomers, giving them the opportunity to safely travel to their new communities. Donate below to help newcomers access safe travel. [Emphasis added]

    Last week Senator Ron Johnson (R-WI) said that close to five million illegal migrants have entered the Untied States since Biden took office in early 2021, a figure which doesn’t include those released into the US interior, those who got away, and migrants who were never caught in the first place.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 23:00

  • It's Not That The Capital Doesn't Exist, It’s Just Trapped In A Different Time… Which Means Inflation Will Be Far Worse
    It’s Not That The Capital Doesn’t Exist, It’s Just Trapped In A Different Time… Which Means Inflation Will Be Far Worse

    By Eric Peters, CIO of One River Asset Management

    Time Travelers:

    “I like sci-fi, but prefer time travel stories to dystopian superintelligence ones,” said Lindsay Politi, our inflation portfolio manager, early one morning, our Bloomberg’s aglow. “Maybe that’s why I still think the better sci-fi tale playing out in real time is happening in the financial markets, not in Silicon Valley with its latest AI advances. Interest rates are the price of time, so, in a way, last decade’s monetary policy experiment was really a time distortion experiment. Crossing the zero bound in interest rates, like exceeding the speed of light with matter, causes our sense of time to become unfixed. Future values and present values converged and became indistinguishable. Time became irrelevant,” said Lindsay. 

    “Financial valuation, at its core, is about valuing future cash flows,” continued Lindsay. “Taking interest rates near or below zero across almost all-time horizons completely distorted the idea of time in that cash flow valuation process. It compressed present values and future values to the point of being nearly identical. Being able to pretend that time doesn’t matter is alluring but completely unhinged from reality. Distorting the pricing of time doesn’t make time irrelevant, even if it seemed that way for a while, and having to consider time again as an extremely relevant variable is destabilizing for today’s markets, quite literally.” 

    “Now that time matters again, we’re starting to realize that a lot of money we thought was on hand is trapped in the future,” said Lindsay. “You hear it all the time from the house you no longer want to sell because the mortgage rate is too low, to the PE deal you’re holding longer than you anticipated. Good or bad, people have all kinds of financial holdings they thought they’d be trading in the present but it’s now too expensive not to hold well into the future. It is creating all kinds of unexpected illiquidity and distortions. It’s not that the capital doesn’t exist. It’s just that it exists in a different time than we thought it did. And inflation is a catalyst that exposes these time distortions.”

    “All this trapped capital means inflation will be worse than most think,” said Lindsay. “There are supply issues, capital investment is needed to resolve them, but that capital is locked up in investments that we now realize are much longer term than originally anticipated. Negative and zero interest rates are so distorting that even a slight move away from that was always going to create a substantial shift towards value of the present — liquidity, cash, current cash flow, etc. Inflation itself is all about time preference for the present, wanting the ability to buy today before it’s more expensive tomorrow. This natural shift towards wanting assets and consumption in the present creates an inherent inflationary push that’s hard to anticipate. It means that prices rebound more quickly on dips than we expect.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 22:30

  • 'X-Files-Like Mystery' In Texas As Cattle Found Dead With Missing Tongues
    ‘X-Files-Like Mystery’ In Texas As Cattle Found Dead With Missing Tongues

    Authorities in Texas are investigating the mysterious deaths of six cattle found with their tongues “completely removed” by precision “clean cuts.” 

    Ranchers in Madison County, about 100 miles southeast of Waco, found the mutilated remains of a 6-year-old longhorn-cross cow lying on her side at their ranch. 

    Madison County Sheriff’s Office said, “A straight, clean cut, with apparent precision, had been made to remove the hide around the cow’s mouth on one side, leaving the meat under the removed hide untouched. The tongue was also completely removed from the body with no blood spill.” 
    “It was noted there were no signs of struggle and the grass around the cow was undisturbed,” investigators from the sheriff’s office said. 

    Investigators added: “No footprints or tire tracks were noted in the area.” 

    Ranchers also reported five similar cases involving four adult cows and one yearling in Brazos and Robertson counties. 

    The exact cause of death of the six livestock is unknown; each was found the same way, with “face cut along the jaw line and the tongue removed” in “straight, clean cut, with apparent precision,” the sheriff’s office said. 

    One commenter on the Facebook post wrote, “This is just to dristraxt of from how high inflation is.” 

    The discovery of the cattle resembles a storyline from an episode of “The X-Files.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 22:00

  • Washington Legislature Passes Semi-Automatic Rifle Ban
    Washington Legislature Passes Semi-Automatic Rifle Ban

    Authored by Elizabeth Dowell via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Another gun control restriction has been passed by Washington state legislatures, implementing a ban on dozens of models of semi-automatic rifles on Wednesday.

    Semi-automatic rifles fill a wall at a gun shop in Lynnwood, Wash., on Oct 2, 2018. (Elaine Thompson/AP)

    Democrat Gov. Jay Inslee is expected to sign the bill (HB 1240) into law and posted his reaction to this latest effort to stop the growing list of mass shootings in the United States.

    WA does not and will not accept gun violence as normal. Banning the sale of assault weapons, our bill to enact training requirements and a waiting period, and the bill to improve the accountability of manufacturers and retailers will save lives,” the governor posted on Twitter in response to the bill’s approval.

    Washington Gov. Jay Inslee speaks during the Presidential Gun Sense Forum in Des Moines, Iowa, on Aug. 10, 2019. (Scott Morgan/Reuters)

    The Washington law would block the sale, distribution, manufacture, and importation of more than 50 gun models, including AR-15s, AK-47s, and similar-style rifles. Some exemptions are included for sales to law enforcement agencies and the military in Washington. The measure does not bar the possession of weapons by people who already have them.

    Republican state lawmakers opposed the ban, with some contending school shootings should be addressed by remodeling buildings to make them less appealing as targets and others saying it infringes on people’s right to defend themselves.

    HB 1240 clearly violates our state and federal constitutions, which is why it will end up in court immediately,” state Sen. Lynda Wilson of Vancouver said in a statement.

    President Joe Biden called for stronger gun control laws during a visit to Monterey Park, California, in March, where he met the families of the mass shooting that claimed 11 lives and injured nine others in January 2023.

    “I’m here on behalf of the American people, to mourn with you, to pray with you. To let you know you’re loved and not alone. Every case is different. But I know what it’s like. I know what that’s like to get that call,” Biden said in his speech.

    Requirements should be enforced more effectively before an individual can buy a firearm.

    It’s just common sense to check whether someone is a felon, a domestic abuser before they buy a gun,” Biden added.

    Gun manufacturing CEOs Marty Daniel of Daniel Defense and Christopher Killoy of Sturm, Ruger & Co. both testified last year before Congress and denied any responsibility in connection to America’s mass shootings over the decade.

    “I believe that these murders are a local problem that has to be solved locally,” Daniel said in a statement. “These acts are committed by murderers. The murderers are responsible.”

    Killoy, the CEO of the largest manufacturer of rifles in the United States, said blaming an “inanimate object” for deaths caused by murderers isn’t accurate.

    “We firmly believe that it is wrong to deprive citizens of their constitutional right to purchase a lawful firearm they desire because of the criminal acts of wicked people,” Killoy said in a statement. “A firearm, any firearm, can be used for good or for evil. The difference is in the intent of the individual possessing it, which we respectfully submit, should be the focus of any investigation into the root causes of criminal violence involving firearms.”

    Texas Gov. Greg Abbott believes raising the minimum age to buy assault-style rifles from 18 to 21 years old wouldn’t help solve the murder problem and would be unconstitutional.

    It is clear that the gun control law that they are seeking in Uvalde—as much as they may want it—has already been ruled as unconstitutional,” Abbott said in a statement during his reelection campaign last year.

    California is one of the strictest states when it comes to gun control laws as Gov. Gavin Newsom continues to push for tighter reforms leading the nation.

    “From our schools to our parks to our homes, our kids deserve to be safe—in California, we’re making that a reality. As the Supreme Court rolls back important gun safety protections and states across the country treat gun violence as inevitable, California is doubling down on commonsense gun safety measures that save lives,” Newsom said in a statement. “The lives of our kids are at stake, and we’re putting everything on the table to respond to this crisis.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 21:30

  • Watch: Ohio Senate Candidate Floats Reparations For White People
    Watch: Ohio Senate Candidate Floats Reparations For White People

    An Ohio candidate for US Senator, Bernie Moreno, has suggested that the white descendants of northern Civil War soldiers should receive some type of reparations.

    Bernie Moreno. (File Photo)

    “We stand at the shoulders of giants, don’t we? We stand on shoulders of people like John Adams, James Madison, Alexander Hamilton, George Washington. That this group of people took on the largest empire in history. They said no, we will not stand for this. And won,” Moreno told supporters at a campaign event last week.

    “That same group of people later, white people, died to free black people. It’s never happened in human history before, but it happened here in America. That’s not taught a lot in schools much is it?” continued Moreno, who’s looking to challenge US Senator Sherrod Brown.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    They make it sound like America is a racist, broken country. You name a country that did that: that freed slaves, died to do that. You know, they talk about reparations. Where are the reparations for the people in the North who died to save the lives of black people?

    Moreno, a business owner, is the second GOP candidate to jump into the race and faces a primary from Ohio State Senator Matt Dolan. The 2024 Ohio Senate race is a top target for Republicans looking to reclaim the upper chamber.

    Though Ohio has a long history as a battleground, it has trended red in recent years. Incumbent Brown is the last major elected statewide Democrat. Ohio strongly backed former president Trump in 2016 and 2020 and sent his preferred candidate, J.D. Vance, to the Senate last year. –NY Post

    According to a spokesman for Moreno, Conor McGuinness, the point about reparations had everything to do with political correctness.

    “Bernie was right when he said political correctness is killing our country, and the crocodile tears from the left expose the Democrat hypocrisy he was referring to in the clip,” said McGuinness. “However, it’s unsurprising that the liberal media missed his point, since they’ve been complicit with the identity politics charade for years.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 21:00

  • Republicans Help Democrats Advance Biden’s Judicial Nominees Amid Feinstein’s Absence
    Republicans Help Democrats Advance Biden’s Judicial Nominees Amid Feinstein’s Absence

    Authored by Zachary Steiber via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Republican senators joined Democrat colleagues in advancing multiple judicial nominees from a Senate panel after a weekslong pause due to the absence of a Democrat senator.

    Sen. Lindsey Graham (R-S.C.) in Washington on May 25, 2022. (Ting Shen/Pool/Getty Images)

    The Senate Judiciary Committee discharged seven nominees from President Joe Biden on April 20 as at least one Republican joined all remaining Democrats on the panel.

    GOP senators helped advance Jeffrey Cummings and LaShonda Hunt, nominated as U.S. District Court judges for the Northern District of Illinois; Orelia Merchant, nominated as U.S. District Court judge for the Eastern District of New York; Michael Farbiarz and Robert Kirsch, nominated as U.S. District Court judges for the District of New Jersey; and Monica Almadani and Wesley Hsu, nominated as U.S. District Court judges for Central District of California.

    Democrats control the Senate, giving them the chair and a majority on each committee. Democrats have 11 members, including Chairman Dick Durbin (D-Ill.), on the judiciary panel. Republicans have 10 members. Sen. Dianne Feinstein (D-Calif.) has been absent since February as she deals with shingles. Feinstein asked to be temporarily replaced, but Ranking Member Lindsey Graham (R-S.C.) blocked that bid.

    Durbin, though, said he’d spoken to Graham and had chosen to hold the first hearing in weeks to vote on the nominees.

    Our agenda includes a number of judicial nominees who have been sitting on the agenda for some time. Some have bipartisan support. There’s nothing to prevent us from calling and voting on these nominees today even in Sen. Feinstein’s absence,” he said. “I understand we now have agreement to vote on several of them. I’ve spoken to Sen. Graham.”

    “Today I’m going to do my part, and my colleagues will vote the way they think is best, to keep the committee moving forward,” Graham said.

    Both Graham and Durbin said they wished Feinstein well and hope she returns soon.

    Without Republican support, Democrats cannot advance nominees to the full Senate. The judiciary panel is charged with considering nominees offered by Biden. Feinstein voted by proxy for each nominee, but proxy votes are only allowed under committee rules if they are not the deciding vote, CNN reported.

    Graham was the only Republican to vote for three of the nominees. Multiple Republicans, such as Sens. Chuck Grassley (R-Iowa) and Mike Lee (R-Utah), voted for others.

    Durbin held back other appointees, including Kato Crews, indicating they may not have had any Republican support.

    Senate Minority Leader Mitch McConnell (R-Ky.) said on the Senate floor recently that nominees “who are mainstream and qualified” would get bipartisan support but that Feinstein’s absence would mean “that Democrats aren’t able to push through a small fraction of their nominees who are so extreme and so unqualified that they cannot win a single Republican vote in committee.”

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 20:30

  • Tesla Market Share In California Tumbles To 59.6% From 72.7%
    Tesla Market Share In California Tumbles To 59.6% From 72.7%

    It looks like the bad news could only be getting started for Tesla.

    The EV maker, which tumbled nearly 10% to end the week after reporting disappointing earnings and margins that failed to impress the street, is now also starting to lose its stronghold in the state of California, Reuters reported Saturday morning. 

    The report shows that the company controlled just 59.6% of the battery electric market in California in Q1 2023, which is down from 72.7% in the year prior period. It’s also the lowest market share Tesla has had in California since 2017. 

    Reuters made the calculation using data from the California Energy Commission and found that legacy automakers like Volkswagen, General Motors, Chevy and Kia all expanded their market share in the state, despite still sitting in the single digits, far behind Tesla. 

    Last year, sales in California accounted for 16% of the company’s global deliveries, the report says. It’ll be no surprise that the West Coast state is also the largest in the U.S. for zero emission vehicles, making it a necessary stronghold for those who want to compete in EVs in the United States. 

    Tesla, meanwhile, has been in a back-and-forth with raising and lowering the prices of its vehicles, ostensibly trying to find a “sweet spot” between being able to stoke demand, while not destroying margins any further than it did last quarter. 

    We noted on Friday that Tesla is now increasing the prices of both versions of its Model S and X electric vehicles. The Model S Plaid and Model X Plaid now cost $107,490 from $104,990 earlier, Reuters wrote. They also said the regular Model X is at $97,940, which marks about a 2.6% rise, and the Model S is at $87,490, marking a rise of about 2.9%. 

    Shares of the EV maker plunged Thursday after reporting earnings that disappointed Wall Street on Wednesday after market. Among the topics of discussions were the company’s poor margins, occurring as a result of Tesla slashing prices consistently since the beginning of 2023. Total GAAP margin for the quarter was 19.3%, missing estimates of 21.2% and down 977 bps from 29.1% just one year ago. 

    Tesla closed its first quarter with record deliveries hitting over 423,000 units worldwide, but that’s still less than what the automaker produced. Tesla has used price cuts throughout the quarter, aiming to reach more of the mass market, and as Bloomberg calculated earlier this week, the latest price cut makes the Tesla Model Y nearly a third cheaper than it was at the start of the year, in part due to the introduction of a new lowest level trim.

    The most recent cuts to Model X and Model S prices came on March 6, a little more than a month ago, when the company reduced the starting prices for the S and X in the US by 5.3% and 9.1%, respectively, to $89,990 and $99,990. Additionally, the higher-performance Plaid version of the Model S and X had been lowered by 4.3% and 8.3%.

    Back in March, Musk claimed that demand for Teslas was nearly unlimited and would increase significantly as the company made its vehicles more affordable. The recent price reductions at the time implied that these vehicles may not have had experienced the same boost in demand as the rest of the lineup when the company reduced prices earlier this year. That appeared to be the case when the company reported deliveries at the beginning of April.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 20:00

  • "We Scrambled, And Spoke With Well Over 100 Banks. Not One Will Provide Financing"
    “We Scrambled, And Spoke With Well Over 100 Banks. Not One Will Provide Financing”

    By Eric Peters, CIO of One River Asset Management

    “Credit started tightening six to nine months ago,” said the developer, a close friend, entrepreneur, with large residential projects across the nation. “It started with the money center banks,” he continued. “This pushed us to regional banks for our latest projects, but then SVB happened.” The market froze.

    “The lender for our latest 30-story project in a tier-one city backed out, so we scrambled, and spoke with well over 100 banks. Not one will provide financing.” His firm is a leader in their market niche. A strong track record.

    “The Fed is going to have to inject liquidity and slash rates to break this financing freeze on new construction.” Not only have higher rates failed to push home prices down materially, but they are now reducing new supply.

    “And here’s something I’ve never seen. When we start a new project, we take out a construction loan. We rush to finish the project, start renting the apartments, repay the loan, and refinance at a lower rate.” The new loans typically have less risk and thus a lower rate than the original construction loans, which are structured with 3yr maturities plus an option to extend for 2yrs.

    “But now, we have legacy construction loans with a 4.0%-4.5% interest rate, and we’ll extend those out for the full five-year term even though the projects are complete. If we paid them back and refinanced with permanent debt, the rates would probably be 6.5% fixed with no pre-pay option or 8.5%-9.0% floating. There’s no way anyone is going to pay back those low-rate loans that were originated before the hiking cycle.”

    This is a new dynamic for banks. Their low-rate loans are being extended at the same time their deposit base is shrinking.

    “We developed properties right through the 2008 cycle. What’s unfolding now is something else, new construction is going to hit the wall. The dramatic pace of interest rate increases has flipped everyone upside down,” he said, well positioned. “Happy to sit on vacant lots. I can be patient.” 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 19:30

  • Florida LGBT Group Cancels Pride Parade After City Says No Kids Allowed
    Florida LGBT Group Cancels Pride Parade After City Says No Kids Allowed

    Well…this is awkward.  The city of Port St. Lucie in southeastern Florida was scheduled to host a gay pride parade organized by the “Pride Alliance of the Treasure Coast,” but there was just one caveat – No kids allowed.

    In accordance with legislation ready to be signed into law by Governor Ron DeSantis the city allowed the pride parade to take place but required all attendees to be 21 or older due the sexualized nature of the performances common during such events.  

    The Florida House has sent a bill to Desantis that is set to ban children from attending adult-oriented performances, including drag shows. The bill defines “adult live performances” as “any show, exhibition, or other presentation that is performed in front of a live audience and in whole or in part, depicts or simulates nudity, sexual conduct, sexual excitement, specific sexual activities, … lewd conduct, or the lewd exposure of prosthetic or imitation genitals or breasts.”

    These rules would make the majority of pride parades a no-go for children given they violate nearly every item on the list.

    Strangely, rather than following the new requirements and ensuring that only adults over 21 attend the event, the Treasure Coast organization took to Facebook to announce that they would cancel the parade entirely.  In other words, if they can’t have the kids, there’s no point to the parade.  Their statement notes:

    “The city has decided that with the likelihood that the Governor will sign the latest bill into effect this evening, that we will need to be on the side of caution and has required us to make this necessary change. We are obviously upset and dishearten[ed] that it has come to this. We also regret to announce that we will have to cancel our plans to bring back our beloved parade.”

    The group suggests it will return with a more “family friendly” event in the future, though the question remains – Why cancel the previous event?  Why not simply check IDs?

    Dozens of states across the country are moving to ban children from sexual displays as drag shows for kids become the primary activist strategy for the political left.  Trans activists claim the shows are about acclimating children to “acceptance and tolerance”, while opponents argue that the shows are about indoctrination with perhaps even darker underlying intentions.   

    It’s unfortunate that state governments need to legally intervene to protect children from these kinds of graphic demonstrations.  Generally, one would expect parents to have the good sense to keep their kids away.  But the existing ideological dynamic has made the sexaulization of children into a political tool, and so states like Florida are left with little choice. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 19:00

  • Taibbi: News Blackout In Effect
    Taibbi: News Blackout In Effect

    Authored by Matt Taibbi via Racket News,

    An all-time media blackout is in effect. We’re experiencing real-time Sovietization.

    Left, most recent search results for “Morell” in the New York Times. Right, Google News.

    It transpires that the infamous incident before the 2020 election in which 50 former intelligence officials signed an open letter declared a New York Post expose about Hunter Biden’s laptop to have the “classic earmarks of a Russian information operation” was instigated at the behest of the Joe Biden campaign. This at least is the allegation in a letter to Secretary of State Anthony Blinken released by Jim Jordan, chair of the House Judiciary Committee, and Subcommittee on the Weaponization of Government.

    In that letter, which is not easy to find, you’ll see three snippets of dialogue from questioning of Morell, who appears to have organized the open letter. In the first snippet, he explains that the idea originated with a call from Blinken, then of the Biden campaign, and that absent that call, Morell wouldn’t have done what he did:

    In the second snippet Morell bluntly explains that he did it because “I wanted him to win,” him being Joe Biden:

    By any marker, this is an enormous news story. If we go by the usual measuring stick of American scandal, the Watergate story, this potentially meets or exceeds that, on almost every level. Does it reach into the current White House? Check. Was it a craven attempt to subvert the electoral process? Check again. Did a presidential candidate engineer a massive public deception? Yes, resoundingly. Did it involve intelligence agencies? Yes, and these weren’t amateurs like Nixon’s plumbers. These were 50 of the most powerful people in the intelligence world — including five former heads or acting heads of the Agency in Morell, John Brennan, Leon Panetta, Michael Hayden, and John McLaughlin — conspiring to meddle in domestic politics on a grand scale.

    The seriousness of the actual laptop story, at least what’s been disclosed so far, is still not clear. I’ve long thought the suppression of it by Facebook and Twitter had clearer import, being a historic censorship first. However, if it can be proven that this “Russian Disinfo” whopper was laid on the public at the behest of the Biden campaign, with the aid of the intelligence community, that escalates things to a new level of scandal, far above the censorship issue.

    Temporarily, however, that may be obscured by the absolute corruption of American media. Outside of conservative outlets, who naturally are eating it up, there were exactly two serious stories done about this on the national level in an appropriate response time. One was in CNN and was at least relatively down-the-middle, though humorously it did quote a Democratic Party spokesperson from the Weaponization Committee saying, “Jim Jordan has released cherry-picked excerpts of a transcribed interview.” The same Democrats from the same Committee also called my testimony “cherry-picked,” and also called the testimony of three FBI whistleblowers “cherry-picked.” The inevitable end-of-year Matt Orfalea “cherry-picked” video will be epic.

    Subscribers to Racket can read the rest here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 18:30

  • Florida Instacart Drivers Shot At After Driving To Wrong Address
    Florida Instacart Drivers Shot At After Driving To Wrong Address

    A pair of Instacart drivers in Florida’s Broward County say someone shot at them after they ended up at the wrong address trying to deliver groceries.

    Waldes Thomas told NBC affiliate WTVJ that he and his girlfriend, Diamond D’arville were on the phone with the customer trying to find the delivery address, when they ended up at the wrong home. They say they saw a flashlight as they were about to drive off the property.

    He’s like, ‘Who are you?’ and we’re saying we’re with Instacart,” D’arville told the news station, adding that the man then got into his truck and pulled up behind them.

    “I had seen him pull out a gun and that’s when I said, ‘We got to go, we got to go,'” said D’arvile, adding “I was scared, I’m not going to lie.”

    D’arville said her car was hit several times. The couple said they decided to pull over about a block away from the home and called Davie police.

    “We were there for Instacart, we were trying to tell him, and he went about it the wrong way — instead of just calling police, saying ‘I have trespassers on my lawn,’ he decided to shoot,” Thomas said.

    Davie police told WTVJ that a gun did go off at a home on Southwest 178th Avenue but no injuries were reported. –WFLA

    “(A detective) asked if we wanted to prosecute and we agreed to do that, but he said since they didn’t break any laws or do anything unlawful, they couldn’t do anything because we were on their property,” said D’arville, who says he wants the man who shot to be held accountable.

    WTVJ

    “It’s just not right — even if you have a gun, I understand you’re trying to protect your family, but you don’t come outside shooting,” he said. “We’re telling you what we’re here, we’re trying to leave and you’re blocking us in, it could’ve just been on our way and they made it bigger than what it was.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 18:00

  • Gov. Ivey Replaces Alabama Education Director Over 'Woke' Training Book
    Gov. Ivey Replaces Alabama Education Director Over ‘Woke’ Training Book

    Authored by Mimi Nguyen Ly via The Epoch Times,

    Alabama Gov. Kay Ivey announced Friday she replaced the state’s director of early childhood education, due to the use of a teacher training book that Ivey said teaches “woke concepts.”

    “The education of Alabama’s children is my top priority as governor, and there is absolutely no room to distract or take away from this mission,” Ivey said in a statement.

    “Let me be crystal clear: Woke concepts that have zero to do with a proper education and that are divisive at the core have no place in Alabama classrooms at any age level, let alone with our youngest learners.”

    The book of concern is the 881-page Developmentally Appropriate Practice Book, 4th edition, developed by the National Association for the Education of Young Children (NAEYC).

    The book is a guide for early childhood educators but is not a curriculum taught to children.

    Ivey spokesperson Gina Maiola said she understands that the books have been removed from the state classrooms.

    According to a release from Ivey’s office, the governor directed Dr. Barbara Cooper, the secretary of the Alabama Department of Early Childhood Education (ADECE), to send a memo to disavow the book and discontinue its use after being alerted of concerning content in the book last week.

    Ivey also decided to change leadership at the department, and accepted Cooper’s resignation “immediately,” the release stated. Meanwhile, Dr. Jane Hume has been appointed the interim secretary of the ADECE, pending Ivey’s decision about who will be the new department head.

    Cooper was elected to the NAEYC’s national governing board in 2022. Her term ends in 2026.

    “Governor Ivey remains appreciative for her service to the state and passion for early childhood education. In addition to expanding service to the number of four-year-olds, Dr. Cooper has helped put an increased focus on students in lower-performing areas and has even been a champion for computer science education in the state,” according to the release from Ivey’s office.

    “However, Governor Ivey strongly believes that woke concepts have no place at any level of education in the state of Alabama and should not be taking away from the overall mission of improving educational outcomes for students.”

    ‘Woke Agenda’

    Ivey’s office said that the governor is concerned about a “woke agenda” because the book “invokes ideas for teachers that there are ‘larger systemic forces that perpetuate systems of White privilege.’” It also promotes the idea that “the United States is built on systemic and structural racism.”

    “Also included for four-year-olds to learn is that ‘LGBTQIA+ need to hear and see messages that promote equality, dignity, and worth,’” Ivey’s office stated.

    “The glossary includes equally disturbing concepts that the Ivey Administration and the people of Alabama in no way, shape or form believe should be used to influence school children, let alone four-year-olds.“

    Ivey’s office stated she “does not stand for these concepts.”

    “For as long as she is governor, Alabama will be focused on ensuring our students are receiving a quality education.”

    The NAEYC told multiple outlets that the book is a research-based resource for teachers.

    “While not a curriculum, it is a responsive, educator-developed, educator-informed, and research-based resource that has been honed over multiple generations to support teachers in helping all children thrive and reach their full potential,” the NAEYC statement said.

    According to a copy of the 881-page book obtained by The Associated Press, the book states: “Early childhood programs also serve and welcome families that represent many compositions. Children from all families (e.g., single parent, grandparent-led, foster, LGBTQIA+) need to hear and see messages that promote equality, dignity, and worth.”

    It further states: “systemic and structural racism … has permeated every institution and system through policies and practices that position people of color in oppressive, repressive, and menial positions. The early education system is not immune to these forces.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 17:30

  • 'Why Aren't Black Celebrities Talking About That?' – Bill Maher Asks Why Black People Are Killing Each Other In Cities Like Chicago
    ‘Why Aren’t Black Celebrities Talking About That?’ – Bill Maher Asks Why Black People Are Killing Each Other In Cities Like Chicago

    HBO host Bill Maher has done it again, asking the third rail questions and saying the quiet part out loud.

    The comedian and self-professed liberal said blasted Chicago Mayor-elect Brandon Johnson during his most recent show, saying that Johnson was “excusing horrific behavior” in a speech he delivered following several shootings in Chicagoland last week.

    Maher talked about crime with Brown University economist Glenn Loury and international relations scholar Daniel Bessner in the context of Chicago electing a soft-on-crime mayor and shoplifting in New York City.

    “Most of the shootings [in Chicago] are young black men killing other young black men. Is that not correct?” Maher asked.

    “Yeah that’s correct,” guest Glenn Loury responded.

    “Okay, much more than what the cops do. Why doesn’t anybody talk about that? Why aren’t there a hundred giant black celebrities who would have the respect of those people saying what are you doing to yourselves? Why are you killing each other?” Maher asked.

    Loury, a black Chicago native and longtime commentator on racial issues, advocated for tougher prosecution and enabling cops to do their jobs.

    “…it’s no way to live, this dishonors our community, come on, we’re better than this,” Loury said.

    Bessner disagreed and said material wealth redistribution would be needed to reduce incarceration rates without condoning individual criminal behavior.

    Maher responded to Bessner’s claims that giving people more money would reduce crime

    “One in three children in America can not read at a basic level of comprehension. 85% of black students lack proficiency in reading skills. We already spent a lot of money on schools. So are you going to keep telling me that more money will fix this because I feel like this is much more connected to the problems of people who can’t read. Yes, they’re going to have problems with gainful employment and it seems like, you know, a lot of times the solutions that come from the left seem symbolic. They don’t seem like we’re addressing what really needs to be done which is get kids learning, get them reading, get them to have a job,” Maher said.

    “It doesn’t seem like the money is getting to this problem if 85% of black students lack proficiency in reading skills,” he said.

    Watch the full discussion below:

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 17:00

  • Bovard: Spy Letter About Hunter Biden Shows How Dems Are Undermining Democracy
    Bovard: Spy Letter About Hunter Biden Shows How Dems Are Undermining Democracy

    Authored by James Bovard,

    In the closing address at last month’s Summit for Democracy, Secretary of State Antony Blinken piously proclaimed, “As President Biden has said, democracy doesn’t happen by accident… It requires constant effort.”

    Or in the case of the 2020 election, it required deceiving American voters.

    The House Judiciary Committee revealed that Blinken, then a top Biden adviser, orchestrated the letter from 51 top intelligence officials claiming that Hunter Biden’s laptop was nothing but a Russian disinformation campaign.

    Blinken contacted former acting CIA chief Mike Morell, who swayed scores of other former top officials — including three ex-CIA chiefs — to sign that letter to debunk the biggest threat to the Biden presidential campaign.

    In the final presidential debate on Oct. 22, Joe Biden invoked that letter from former intelligence officials to deflect Donald Trump’s attacks on Biden family corruption.

    Polls show that Biden would have lost the election if the media had accurately reported the contents of that laptop.

    Biden pretended that letter arose spontaneously from the patriotic sentiments of former officials.

    But the letter was “triggered” by Blinken’s call to Morell, who then contacted his former colleagues.

    Blinken’s ploy may have swayed Biden to appoint him secretary of state.

    The media are mostly ignoring or downplaying the revelations of Blinken’s machinations.

    If the roles were reversed, cable news and front-page headlines would be screaming about a villainous Trump operative pulling official strings to whitewash the Donald.

    MSNBC would be howling about the death of democracy, and CNN hosts would be sobbing hysterically about the dirty deal.

    But when Team Biden does it: nothing to see here, move along.

    How many presidential elections can Democrats seek to dishonestly rig without suffering any penalty flags from media scorekeepers?

    Shortly before the 2016 election, senior Hillary Clinton adviser Jake Sullivan peddled false claims linking the Trump Organization to Russia.

    The Federal Election Commission last month levied a $113,000 fine on the Democratic National Committee and Hillary Clinton’s 2016 campaign for their deceptive funding to cover up their role in the Steele dossier.

    The FBI, which was apparently willing to pay any price to defeat Trump, offered former British spy Christopher Steele $1 million in cash if he could prove the charges in that dossier before the 2016 election.

    There was no proof — but that didn’t stop the FBI from using the dossier to get warrants to spy on Trump campaign officials from the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Court.

    Jake Sullivan is now Biden’s national security adviser.

    Did he get that gig in part because of his willingness to lie for Democratic kingpins?

    Avril Haines is Biden’s director of national intelligence.

    Did signing the Hunter laptop letter help her snare that plum job?

    The letter Blinken finagled would not have been so influential if journalists were not shamelessly docile to federal job titles.

    Inside the Beltway, former intelligence kingpins are viewed like royalty or at least second-tier aristocracy.

    But the CIA has a long record of secretly intervening in dozens of foreign elections.

    In 2019, former CIA director Mike Pompeo summarized his agency’s motif: “We lied, we cheated, we stole. It was like we had entire training courses.”

    Former CIA chief James Woolsey insisted in 2018 that the CIA intervenes in elections “only for a very good cause in the interests of democracy.”

    Yet the letter from former spooks was instantly revered by journalists as if it were handed down from Mt. Sinai.

    For the Washington political elite, defeating Donald Trump was the ultimate good cause to save democracy.

    Biden talks as if his 2020 election victory was the result of practically a divine incarnation of the “will of the people.”

    Unfortunately, presidential elections are irrevocable regardless of how many voters were conned.

    How much official deceit can democracy survive?

    Any notion of “informed consent” by voters is a mirage if federal agencies and former officials have the power to endlessly distort the news.

    Shortly after he became secretary of state, Blinken boasted that the US government doesn’t sweep problems “under the rug. . . . We deal with them in the daylight, with full transparency.”

    That pledge apparently did not extend to Blinken’s own tampering with the 2020 election.

    What else is Blinken hiding, and when will the next shoe fall?

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 16:30

  • Watch: Ron DeSantis Releases Hilarious Commercial Trolling Trans Athletes
    Watch: Ron DeSantis Releases Hilarious Commercial Trolling Trans Athletes

    From mediocre to champions…

    Florida Governor Ron DeSantis displays a talent for trolling trans sports activists (specifically biological men claiming to be women) with a new commercial “congratulating” them on their impressive achievement of pushing women out of women’s sports.  

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Good work, guys!  Show those women athletes who’s boss.   

    Florida has banned biological men from women’s sports since 2021 at all publicly funded institutions.  At least 21 states have so far passed similar laws.  Arguments on the political left range from claims that there are no physical advantages for biological males over biological females, to claims that barring trans athletes from women’s competitions could “lead to suicides.”  So far, none of the assertions made by leftists or trans activists on the issue have proven legitimate.      

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 16:00

  • The Censorship Industrial Complex Is The Revolt Of The Elites
    The Censorship Industrial Complex Is The Revolt Of The Elites

    Authored by Leighton Woodhouse via ‘Public’ Substack,

    The political establishment has constructed a new apparatus of control…

    In 2002, the Bush administration, desperate to sell its planned invasion of Iraq to the American public, turned to the mainstream media. Every evening on Fox News, White House officials invoked Hitler allusions and implied fictitious ties between Osama bin Laden and Saddam Hussein.

    Fox, however, allowed them to preach only to the converted. To forge a working national consensus, they had to reach doves as well as hawks.

    So the Bush administration zeroed in on The New York Times. With reporter Judith Miller, they hit pay dirt. With breathless headlines such as “HUSSEIN INTENSIFIES QUEST FOR A-BOMB PARTS, Miller stamped the President’s mythmaking about aluminum tubes, mobile weapons labs, and Weapons of Mass Destruction with the imprimatur of her illustrious employer. So critical was her reporting to the spinning of American aggression as self-defense that it’s conceivable that the White House’s entire drive to war may have failed without it.

    By the time Miller’s stories were exposed as so much laundered propaganda, they had served their purpose: American soldiers were already occupying Iraq.

    The invasion of Iraq marked the last time the political elite would wield the power to mobilize an entire nation merely by manipulating a handful of journalistic elites. The era of mass media, during which just a dozen or so giant print and broadcast corporations enjoyed hegemonic control over the national public discourse, lasted about eighty years, beginning roughly a century ago, when modern television was born. The incestuous relationship between the government and the media during those decades was depicted in Steven Spielberg’s movie The Post, in which Defense Secretary Robert McNamara tries and fails to leverage his cozy relationship with Washington Post editor Katherine Graham to compel the media to fall in line with the government’s suppression of the Pentagon Papers. The story is heroic because it’s so unusual; Graham’s decision was the exception that proved the rule.

    That era ended two decades ago, when social media networks emerged. About a year after the invasion of Iraq, Facebook was founded. The year after that YouTube was born; the following year came Twitter. With the cheap, targeted advertising their technology enabled, the new tech platforms destroyed the business model of the mass media. Unable to compete for advertisers, the media mammoths of the twentieth century floundered. The entire industry was thrown into crisis, bleeding revenue and laying off staff.

    At the same time, social media began sorting news consumers into hyper-polarized digital silos, shattering the broad political center that the traditional media catered to and relied upon to sell advertisements to a mass audience. The New York Times, CNN, and even Fox News saw their broad national readerships and viewerships contract into smaller and evermore partisan echo chambers, even as ordinary people began to forge horizontal connections with one another online, exchanging information laterally. The public began generating their own, autonomous narratives about world events, typically cobbled together eclectically from reports by various news outlets, but beholden to none of them in particular. The power to shape the national narrative devolved downward, becoming increasingly fractured in the process.

    This anarchic new media ecosystem has defined the public discourse ever since. For both elected politicians and the administrative state, it has constituted a perennial crisis. Bureaucracies manage populations by striking bargains with leaders; you can’t negotiate with a mob, much less a thousand of them. From the perspective of the state, this new information landscape was essentially ungovernable. An entire regime of social control, helmed by the most powerful politicians in the country in partnership with the titans of the media industry, was felled. In the age of social media that the new platforms jump-started, the state’s ability to control world events by playing reporters like Judith Miller like pawns on a chess board withered away, as the influence of the media corporations they worked for dissipated.

    The political elite stumbled through this bedlam for two decades. But over that time, new gatekeepers emerged to replace those that had faded away with the decline of the mass media.

    The state created a new apparatus of control over the public discourse, one whose existence most Americans are still oblivious to.

    Today, we are witnessing the emergence of a new so-called emergency: the “disinformation pandemic.”

    Like Oceania’s distant war with Eurasia, it’s an emergency concocted expressly to justify its proposed remedy: the erection and expansion of the Censorship Industrial Complex.

    The defenders of the Censorship Industrial Complex regard themselves as ordained to rule.

    They take for granted their right to dictate to us what we read, watch and hear, as we can’t be trusted to decide for ourselves.

    To them, the public is a barbarian horde that, given an ounce too much freedom, will run amok, destroying all in its path.

    These are the delusions of a political nobility. In the spirit of a democratic nation, they must be stripped of their crowns and never be allowed to wield power again.

    *  *  *

    Subscribers can read the full note here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 15:30

  • Watch: Boeing 737 Engine Catches Fire Over Ohio After Bird Strike
    Watch: Boeing 737 Engine Catches Fire Over Ohio After Bird Strike

    On Sunday morning, an American Airlines Boeing 737 jet took off from an airport in Colombus, Ohio, only to be struck by a flock of birds, resulting in one of its engines spewing fireballs, reported The National Desk. A dramatic video of the incident was shared on Twitter. 

    American Airlines flight 1958 to Phoenix, Arizona, took off from John Glenn International Airport just after 0740 local time. After being airborne for several minutes, the plane struck a flock of birds. 

    “American Airlines flight 1958, with service from Columbus (CMH) to Phoenix (PHX), returned to CMH shortly after takeoff due to a mechanical issue.

     “The flight landed normally and taxied safely to the gate under its own power. The aircraft was taken out of service for maintenance and our team is working to get customers back on their way to PHX. Safety is our top priority and we thank our customers for their understanding,” American Airlines, who operated the plane and flight in question, wrote in a statement.

    Here’s the video of fireballs coming out of the 737’s right engine.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Flight tracking website Flightradar24 shows the plane made a giant loop around the Colombus metro area before safely returning to the airport.

    Emergency crews were dispatched to the American Airlines jet when it landed. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A person on the ground told Daily Mail the plane’s right engine sounded “as if it was about to give up.” 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/23/2023 – 15:00

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 23rd April 2023

  • Needed: A 'Made In The USA' Policy Plus Energy Independence To Counter Inflation & The Rising National Debt
    Needed: A ‘Made In The USA’ Policy Plus Energy Independence To Counter Inflation & The Rising National Debt

    Authored by Lawrence Kadish via The Gatestone Institute,

    Sad but true, history is now all but a forgotten subject in our schools.

    But economic history?

    With luck, you may find the topic in some esoteric book written by a professor and hidden on some dusty library shelf.

    Yet it is there, within those pages, that you will find the history of nations who harnessed the power of a balanced budget and assumed global dominance.

    Of equal importance will be the parallel lesson of those that failed to appreciate that the most sophisticated military in the world can win a war only to come home to a nation that will eventually fall because of a mismanaged economy.

    Without an appreciation of that history a nation’s leaders can easily pursue a disastrous course of pork spending that can destroy the promise of the future.

    Which is why Americans should be deeply concerned about this Administration and its reign of spending and resultant increased debt, that will be burdening us, and future citizens, far into the future.

    That kind of debt is a silent nation-killer.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 23:30

  • Banks Or Buddies – Where Do People Borrow Money From?
    Banks Or Buddies – Where Do People Borrow Money From?

    When making the decision to borrow money, do you turn to friends and family for financial help, or do you go to a financial institution like a bank or credit card company?

    On a country-to-country basis, this choice often depends on a mix of various factors, including the availability of financial services, financial literacy, and the cultural approach to the very concept of lending itself.

    In these graphics, Visual Capitalist’s Richie Lionell sheds some light on where people borrow money from, using the 2021 Global Findex Database published by the World Bank.

    Borrowing From Financial Institutions

    To compare borrowing practices across both location and income level, the dataset features survey results from respondents aged 15+ and groups countries by region except for high-income countries, which are grouped together.

    In 2021, most individuals in high income economies borrowed money from formal financial institutions.

    Country Region Borrowed from a financial institution
    Canada High income 81.01%
    Israel High income 79.52%
    Iceland High income 73.36%
    Hong Kong SAR, China High income 70.01%
    Korea, Rep. High income 68.64%
    Norway High income 66.82%
    United States High income 66.21%
    Taiwan, China High income 61.95%
    Switzerland High income 61.40%
    Japan High income 61.19%
    New Zealand High income 60.38%
    Australia High income 57.29%
    Austria High income 56.52%
    Italy High income 55.01%
    United Kingdom High income 54.98%
    Germany High income 54.68%
    Ireland High income 54.11%
    Denmark High income 53.16%
    Finland High income 52.98%
    Spain High income 51.92%
    Sweden High income 48.69%
    Belgium High income 47.98%
    France High income 44.37%
    Singapore High income 42.82%
    Slovenia High income 42.36%
    Uruguay High income 42.01%
    Brazil Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 40.75%
    China East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 39.19%
    Malta High income 38.95%
    Türkiye Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 37.84%
    Netherlands High income 34.45%
    Slovak Republic High income 34.41%
    Mongolia East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 34.39%
    Ukraine Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 34.13%
    Estonia High income 33.64%
    Croatia High income 33.03%
    Saudi Arabia High income 32.38%
    Poland High income 31.92%
    Czech Republic High income 31.33%
    Cyprus High income 31.25%
    Cambodia East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 30.89%
    Argentina Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 30.81%
    Portugal High income 30.44%
    Kazakhstan Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 29.76%
    Russian Federation Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 29.75%
    Thailand East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 28.26%
    Bulgaria Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 26.36%
    Armenia Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 26.17%
    Iran, Islamic Rep. Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 25.11%
    Chile High income 24.20%
    Georgia Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 23.89%
    Ecuador Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 23.23%
    Latvia High income 22.74%
    United Arab Emirates High income 22.46%
    Kenya Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 22.18%
    North Macedonia Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 22.10%
    Peru Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 21.95%
    Dominican Republic Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 21.65%
    Bosnia and Herzegovina Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 21.30%
    Sri Lanka South Asia 21.29%
    Namibia Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 20.97%
    Serbia Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 20.65%
    Greece High income 20.11%
    Mauritius Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 20.09%
    Bolivia Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 19.30%
    Romania Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 19.14%
    Hungary High income 18.93%
    Uganda Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 18.62%
    South Africa Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 18.22%
    Colombia Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 18.10%
    Kyrgyz Republic Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 17.73%
    Kosovo Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 17.61%
    Costa Rica Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 17.46%
    Philippines East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 17.45%
    Liberia Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 15.42%
    Bangladesh South Asia 14.22%
    Nepal South Asia 14.11%
    Malaysia East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 13.48%
    Albania Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 13.39%
    Moldova Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 13.18%
    Indonesia East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 12.86%
    Tajikistan Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 12.43%
    Paraguay Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 12.39%
    Nicaragua Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 12.19%
    Jamaica Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 12.04%
    Lithuania High income 11.95%
    India South Asia 11.79%
    Mali Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 10.99%
    El Salvador Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 10.56%
    Panama Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 10.39%
    Honduras Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 10.32%
    Mozambique Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 10.27%
    Senegal Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 9.98%
    Tunisia Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 9.89%
    Jordan Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 9.86%
    Lao PDR East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 9.15%
    Venezuela, RB Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 8.83%
    Benin Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 8.21%
    Malawi Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 7.99%
    Uzbekistan Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 7.50%
    Togo Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 7.42%
    Ghana Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 7.40%
    Egypt, Arab Rep. Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 7.30%
    Myanmar East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 7.06%
    Cameroon Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 6.99%
    Zambia Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 6.76%
    Burkina Faso Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 6.66%
    Nigeria Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 6.40%
    Congo, Rep. Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 6.19%
    Guinea Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 6.11%
    Gabon Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 5.48%
    Morocco Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 4.99%
    West Bank and Gaza Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 4.94%
    Tanzania Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 4.45%
    Sierra Leone Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 4.29%
    Cote d’Ivoire Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 4.10%
    Algeria Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 3.80%
    Iraq Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 3.64%
    Pakistan South Asia 3.51%
    Lebanon Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 3.31%
    Zimbabwe Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 2.89%
    South Sudan Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 2.48%
    Afghanistan South Asia 2.05%

    With 81% of respondents borrowing from financial institutions, Canada tops this list. Meanwhile, Israel (80%), Iceland (73%), Hong Kong (70%), and South Korea (69%) are not far behind.

    This is not surprising for richer nations, as financial services in these countries are more available and accessible. This, coupled with higher financial literacy, including a general understanding of interest rates and credit-building opportunities, contribute to the popularity of financial institutions.

    Also, it’s worth noting that some countries have cultural practices that factor in. For example, 61% of respondents in Japan used formal financial institutions, which are a more socially acceptable option than asking to borrow money from friends and family (just 6% of people in Japan).

    Borrowing from Friends and Family

    In contrast, more individuals in lower income economies approached family and friends in order to borrow money.

    Afghanistan tops this list with 60% of respondents relying on friends and family, compared to only 2% borrowing money from formal financial institutions.

    Country Region Borrowed from family or friends
    Afghanistan South Asia 60.18%
    Uganda Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 57.45%
    Kenya Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 54.40%
    Namibia Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 50.25%
    Morocco Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 48.73%
    Nigeria Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 44.71%
    South Africa Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 44.54%
    Iraq Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 44.10%
    Cameroon Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 43.49%
    Zambia Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 43.08%
    Zimbabwe Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 42.34%
    Guinea Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 42.04%
    Nepal South Asia 41.79%
    Jordan Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 41.76%
    Gabon Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 41.41%
    Liberia Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 41.37%
    Tunisia Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 41.05%
    Philippines East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 40.82%
    Türkiye Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 40.80%
    Iran, Islamic Rep. Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 39.80%
    Sierra Leone Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 39.02%
    Ghana Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 38.58%
    Egypt, Arab Rep. Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 37.75%
    Saudi Arabia High income 35.76%
    Bangladesh South Asia 35.49%
    Mali Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 35.15%
    Burkina Faso Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 35.14%
    Cambodia East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 34.85%
    Venezuela, RB Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 34.81%
    Togo Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 33.99%
    West Bank and Gaza Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 33.93%
    Thailand East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 32.83%
    Lao PDR East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 32.36%
    Moldova Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 32.18%
    Ukraine Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 32.17%
    Senegal Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 31.30%
    Armenia Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 31.29%
    India South Asia 31.02%
    Bolivia Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 30.69%
    Algeria Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 30.52%
    Cote d’Ivoire Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 30.20%
    Albania Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 30.00%
    Bulgaria Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 29.99%
    Benin Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 29.33%
    Mozambique Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 29.33%
    Tanzania Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 29.24%
    Colombia Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 29.08%
    Indonesia East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 28.85%
    South Sudan Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 28.84%
    Ecuador Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 28.79%
    Serbia Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 28.49%
    Russian Federation Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 28.40%
    Mongolia East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 27.01%
    Kyrgyz Republic Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 27.01%
    China East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 26.43%
    Honduras Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 26.07%
    Greece High income 25.94%
    Kosovo Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 25.86%
    Argentina Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 25.72%
    Kazakhstan Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 25.64%
    Romania Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 25.58%
    Malawi Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 25.24%
    North Macedonia Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 25.14%
    Dominican Republic Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 24.70%
    Brazil Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 24.66%
    Congo, Rep. Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 24.40%
    Lebanon Middle East & North Africa (excluding high income) 24.26%
    Nicaragua Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 23.75%
    Iceland High income 23.63%
    Peru Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 23.34%
    United Arab Emirates High income 23.04%
    Myanmar East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 23.03%
    Sri Lanka South Asia 22.53%
    Paraguay Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 22.20%
    Pakistan South Asia 21.87%
    Uzbekistan Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 21.53%
    Cyprus High income 20.95%
    Bosnia and Herzegovina Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 20.94%
    Chile High income 20.72%
    Georgia Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 20.61%
    Mauritius Sub-Saharan Africa (excluding high income) 20.48%
    Costa Rica Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 20.29%
    Jamaica Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 20.02%
    Tajikistan Europe & Central Asia (excluding high income) 19.86%
    Poland High income 19.34%
    Norway High income 19.29%
    United States High income 18.09%
    Uruguay High income 17.60%
    Panama Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 17.54%
    Denmark High income 17.51%
    Croatia High income 17.09%
    El Salvador Latin America & Caribbean (excluding high income) 16.78%
    Slovenia High income 16.77%
    Latvia High income 16.57%
    Australia High income 16.44%
    Estonia High income 15.74%
    Malaysia East Asia & Pacific (excluding high income) 15.44%
    Israel High income 15.43%
    New Zealand High income 15.19%
    Slovak Republic High income 15.02%
    Germany High income 15.01%
    Austria High income 14.41%
    Canada High income 14.00%
    Finland High income 13.43%
    Czech Republic High income 13.41%
    Korea, Rep. High income 13.16%
    Malta High income 12.99%
    Belgium High income 12.13%
    Sweden High income 11.79%
    Hungary High income 11.15%
    Lithuania High income 10.65%
    Spain High income 10.44%
    France High income 10.42%
    Netherlands High income 10.24%
    Ireland High income 9.84%
    Taiwan, China High income 9.70%
    Portugal High income 8.22%
    Hong Kong SAR, China High income 7.59%
    Japan High income 6.43%
    Switzerland High income 6.10%
    United Kingdom High income 5.24%
    Italy High income 5.06%
    Singapore High income 1.89%

    Many individuals in African countries including Uganda (57%), Kenya (54%), Namibia (50%), and Morocco (49%) also are choosing to borrow money from friends and family over financial institutions.

    These preferences can be attributed to various factors including a lack of trust in banking and financial institutions, lacking access to such services, or the lack of information about such services if they are available.

    And in some societies, borrowing from friends and family can be seen as a cultural norm, especially in places where mutual support and solidarity play a strong role.

    What’s Next?

    As viewed by the World Bank, financial inclusion is an important foundation of any nation’s development, and it’s also one of the UN’s Sustainable Development Goals. Increasing levels of financial inclusion helps give people access to services like savings plans, credit avenues, and online payments and transactions.

    And thanks to commitments from countries and financial systems, global ownership of banking accounts has increased significantly (and been further spurred by the COVID-19 pandemic). According to the Global Findex Database, bank account ownership has risen to 76% in 2021, up from just 51% a decade prior.

    However, access to these services is still rife with gaps when it comes to low income nations, low income individuals, and unequal access based on gender. The future of borrowing now relies on how nations deal with these challenges.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 23:00

  • Gun-Free Zones, Red Flag Laws Only Make Gun Crime Worse: Economist
    Gun-Free Zones, Red Flag Laws Only Make Gun Crime Worse: Economist

    Authored by Michael Clements via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Two of the most popular gun control proposals have little to no effect on gun crime and actually exacerbate the problem for the people they’re supposed to protect, according to economist, researcher, and author John Lott.

    “Those are the people who are harmed,” Lott told seminar participants at the National Rifle Association’s Annual Meetings and Exhibits in Indianapolis.

    Police tape at Geneva Presbyterian Church after a shooting left one dead and five injured in Laguna Woods, Calif., on May 15, 2022. (John Fredricks/The Epoch Times)

    Lott is considered an authority on guns and crime, having authored more than 100 peer-reviewed articles and 10 books on the subject. He led two seminars discussing the effectiveness of gun-free zones, red-flag laws, and other gun control measures.

    He said the story of Nikki Goeser encapsulates the shortcomings of these laws.

    Goeser is the author of “Stalked and Defenseless: How Gun Control Helped My Stalker Murder My Husband in Front of Me.” She’s also the executive director of the Crime Prevention Research Center (CPRC), of which Lott is the president.

    People walk past a “Gun Free Zone” sign posted on 40th Street and 7th Avenue in New York on Aug. 31, 2022. (Michael M. Santiago/Getty Images)

    Goeser was scheduled to speak at the event but couldn’t attend because of family obligations.

    Fourteen years ago, Goeser and her late husband, Ben, operated a karaoke business. A man the couple had met became infatuated with her and began stalking her.

    While Goeser had a license to carry a concealed pistol, at the time, it was illegal in her home state of Tennessee to carry a firearm in any business that served alcohol.

    One night, while running their karaoke business, Goeser’s stalker showed up and shot her husband seven times in front of her. Goeser’s situation was known to the police, but the stalker had been undeterred.

    Lott said Goeser has stated that she isn’t sure she could have stopped the crime if she had had her pistol. But she’s confident that complying with the law ensured that she couldn’t protect her husband or herself.

    “As the title of her book says, she was denied the chance,” he said.

    Buffalo supermarket shooting suspect Payton Gendron in a jail booking photograph. (Erie County District Attorney’s Office via AP)

    Lott told the gathering that Goeser’s story is a perfect example of the problems with gun-free zones.

    According to statistics from the CPRC, 94 percent of mass shootings since 1950 have occurred in gun-free zones.

    Lott said one well-known mass killer explained his reasoning in a manifesto written the year before he struck.

    The 19-year-old man who killed 10 people in a Buffalo, New York, grocery store on May 14, 2022, has been described as a right-wing racist, Lott said. But, while he was an avowed racist, Lott said the shooter described himself as an environmentalist and eco-terrorist.

    In his manifesto, the shooter claimed that minorities were damaging the environment by having too many children, and that’s why he decided to attack black people.

    “Attacking in a weapon-restricted area may decrease the chance of civilian backlash,” Lott quoted from the shooter’s writings. “… ‘areas where CCW [concealed weapons] are outlawed or prohibited may be good areas of attack,’ and ‘areas with strict gun laws are also great places of attack.’”

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 22:30

  • Japan Readies Missile Interceptors To Shoot Down North Korea Spy Satellite Debris
    Japan Readies Missile Interceptors To Shoot Down North Korea Spy Satellite Debris

    Japan is preparing its armed forces to shoot down potential North Korean satellite debris as Pyongyang prepares yet another provocative rocket launch, which could again bring Japan under threat.

    This time Kim Jong Un is saying the country will soon launch its first military spy satellite into orbit, at an unspecified date. On Tuesday Kim previewed that he will soon deploy an operational military reconnaissance satellite, necessary to effectively the DPRK’s nuclear-capable missiles.

    KCNA/AP file: North Korean leader Kim Jong Un visits the Sohae Satellite Launching Ground in Tongchang in March 2022.

    Kim said further that it is necessary in thwarting the serious security threats posed by “the most hostile rhetoric and explicit action” of the US and South Korea.

    In response Japan, which has already seen North Korean missiles recently fly over the island or into waters close to the country, is putting its missile interceptor units on high alert, in the scenario of spy satellite fragments from a possible failed launch or failed orbit falling down into Japanese territory.

    According to details in The Associated Press

    Defense Minister Yasukazu Hamada on Saturday instructed troops to ready PAC-3 surface-to-air missiles in southwestern Japan, including Okinawa and nearby islands, in an area believed to be under a flight path of a North Korean rocket that will carry the satellite.

    He also ordered the deployment of destroyers equipped with SM-3 ship-to-air missiles to coastal waters, according to a ministry statement.

    The ministry confirmed that “We are making the necessary preparation because of a possibility of issuing an order to destroy ballistic missiles and other objects.”

    North Korea says its latest spate of missile tests, which included the test-firing of a solid-fueled intercontinental ballistic missile for the first time last week, is in response to major joint US-South Korean drills which threaten the peace and stability of the region. 

    Given the current tensions, Japan is leaving nothing to chance, and preparing for more unpredictable rocket launches out of North Korea at any moment.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 22:00

  • US Tries To Blame Russia For Sudan "Deep State" War
    US Tries To Blame Russia For Sudan “Deep State” War

    Authored by Andrew Korybko via The Automatic Earth blog,

    Debunking The Latest Fake News Narrative

    CNN published an exclusive piece on Thursday alleging that “Evidence emerges of Russia’s Wagner arming militia leader battling Sudan’s army”. They claim that satellite imagery shows increased Russian military transport activity between Libya and Syria in the run-up to Sudan’s “deep state” war. According to CNN, this confirms rumors that General Haftar is supplying Rapid Support Forces’ (RSF) leader General Mohamed Hamdan Dagalo (“Hamedti”) with surface-to-air missiles (SAM) on behalf of Wagner.

    The Wall Street Journal (WSJ) published their own exclusive piece the day prior on Wednesday alleging that “Libyan Militia and Egypt’s Military Back Opposite Sides in Sudan Conflict”, so these two stories complement one another. Both Hamedti and Wagner have denied these claims, however. The Sudanese Ambassador to Russia also confirmed that “Russia is a friendly country to us so we have been in direct contact with [the] Russian Foreign Ministry since the very beginning of those events last Saturday.”

    That diplomat’s reaffirmation of Sudan’s close ties with Russia is especially important since he represents the government that’s internationally recognized as being led by Chief General Abdel Fattah Al-Burhan, who commands the Sudanese Armed Forces (SAF) and is one of the two figures vying for power. At present, Khartoum therefore doesn’t extend credence to the emerging US-led Western Mainstream Media (MSM) narrative that Russia is arming the RSF via Haftar-Wagner, but that could soon change.

    Preconditioning The Public For Another Proxy War

    Unless the present three-day Eid ceasefire holds and leads to the start of peace talks that ultimately end this “deep state” war, which is unlikely since both sides made clear their intent to completely destroy the other, then this conflict is expected to resume in the near future. Should the SAF fail to defeat the RSF and possibly even be placed on the backfoot, then Burhan might gamble that it’s in his best interests to parrot the MSM’s anti-Russian accusations in an attempt to receive direct Western military support.

    That scenario isn’t all that far-fetched either considering that the Associated Press and Politico both cited unnamed officials on Thursday to report that the US is assembling additional troops in nearby Djibouti to prepare for the possible evacuation of Americans from Sudan. This pretext could easily be exploited to arm the SAF and/or attack the RSF, especially if the Pentagon claims that the latter tried stopping its operation by building upon last week’s claim that its forces shot at an armored US diplomatic vehicle.

    In the event that Burhan repeats the MSM’s emerging anti-Russian narrative and promises to rubbish Sudan’s naval base deal with Moscow upon defeating the RSF, then the Biden Administration can “justify” its military intervention on the basis of “defending Sudanese democracy from a Kremlin coup”. The public would then be told that the latest conflict was sparked by Russia’s support for the “insurgent” RSF, which the MSM would attribute to its interests in defending Wagner’s mining operations there.

    American Meddling In Russian-Egyptian Relations

    This would predictably precede an unprecedented but preplanned information warfare campaign painting Russia as a “destabilizing” force in Africa, which would be aimed at counteracting its hitherto highly successful efforts at presenting itself as a force of stability in support of legitimate governments. The purpose of this aforesaid operation would be to erode Russia’s newfound “Democratic Security” appeal across the continent with a view towards reversing the decline of Western influence there.

    Furthermore, Burhan’s potentially opportunistic piggybacking on the earlier described emerging anti-Russian narrative could have serous implications for Moscow’s ties with Cairo due to the perception of them backing opposite sides in Sudan’s “deep state” war. Russian-Egyptian relations have recently been beset by scandal upon the latest Pentagon leaks alleging that Cairo abandoned its supposedly secret plan to supply rockets to Moscow under pressure from Washington and agreed to arm Kiev instead.

    Considering this context, the scenario of Egyptian-backed Burhan blaming Russia for sparking the latest conflict could therefore lead to the rapid deterioration of Russian-Egyptian ties, especially if Cairo decides to indirectly retaliate against Moscow by curtailing its investment rights in Port Said. Those two signed an additional agreement on this industrial zone last month, which was first approved in 2018 and is supposed to help Russia expand its economic engagement with the broader region.

    Punishing The Emirates For Its Close Relations With Russia

    That goal could be jeopardized if Egypt decides to punish Russia through these means in response to Burhan opportunistically piggybacking on the MSM narrative in an attempt to obtain direct Western military support against the RSF. Furthermore, the UAE’s ties with Egypt and the US could also become much more complicated in that event too since Abu Dhabi is accused of backing reportedly RSF-allied Haftar, being favorable disposed to that armed Sudanese group, and secretly allying with Russia.

    The last-mentioned accusation was brought to the public’s attentions as a result of the previously mentioned Pentagon leaks, which were denied by the UAE but coincided with the weakening of its ties with Washington that are partially over that Gulf country’s growing ones with Moscow. There are more factors at play than just the Russian-Emirati relationship, but the point is that the UAE’s problems with the US could be amplified by the MSM if Burhan accuses Russia of arming the RSF via Haftar-Wagner.

    It also deserves mentioning that America’s other ulterior interest in its incipient propaganda campaign against Russia in Sudan is to complicate its geopolitical opponent’s logistical connections with the Central African Republic (CAR), which owes its continued existence as a state to Moscow’s military support. The Kremlin largely relies on transit across Sudan in order to supply its forces and its ally’s there, but this could be cut off if Burhan jumps on the anti-Russian bandwagon and revokes Moscow’s privileges.

    The Chadian Connection

    Lastly, another strategic factor behind this latest information warfare offensive against Russia is that it could ruin that country’s surprisingly solid relations with regional military heavyweight Chad. As explained in this recent analysis here, N’Djamena ended up expelling the German Ambassador earlier this month for meddling instead of the Russian one despite the US telling its counterparts in late February that Moscow is using Wagner in the CAR and Libya to arm anti-government rebels against it.

    The Associated Press cited an African analyst from a Western risk assessment firm in their article on Thursday about 320 SAF troops fleeing to Chad to claim that this development could prompt N’Djamena into taking those forces’ side in Sudan’s “deep state” war. According to Benjamin Hunter, “N’Djamena is likely to oppose (Dagalo) due to fears that RSF dominance in Darfur could empower Chadian Arabs to unseat the (president’s) regime. Many within (Dagalo’s) Rizeigat tribe live across the border in Chad.”

    If Chad becomes embroiled in Sudan’s “deep state” war on Burhan’s side, then it might be susceptible to Western suggestions that jumping on the anti-Russian bandwagon like he would have already done in this scenario could lead to them suspending their regime change campaign against N’Djamena. Should that happen, then this regional military heavyweight might also support any potentially forthcoming rebel/terrorist offensive that its historical French partner could soon plot against Russia in the CAR.

    Concluding Thoughts

    Putting everything together, the US plans to achieve the following strategic objectives by introducing the narrative that Russia is arming the RSF:

    1. Entice Burhan to extend credence to these claims in exchange for US military support;

    2. Demand that he also rescinds Russia’s naval base rights and cuts off its overflight access to the CAR;

    3. Consider direct support to the SAF on the pretext of commencing an “evacuation operation” in Sudan;

    4. Discredit Russia and the UAE’s African engagement policies by framing both as “destabilizing forces”;

    5. Attempt to provoke a crisis in Russia’s relations with Sudan’s Chadian and Egyptian neighbors;

    6. Exploit the above scenario to assemble a regional coalition for pushing back against Russia in Africa;

    7. Encourage Chad to support a French-backed rebel/terrorist offensive in the Russian-allied CAR;

    8. Plot a copycat proxy war in Russian-allied Mali in order to crush the Kremlin’s influence in the Sahel;

    9. Perfect this new Hybrid War method prior to employing it all across the continent;

    10. And thus turn Africa into the top proxy war battleground of the New Cold War.

    The US therefore has many reasons to push this fake news campaign, though it’s unclear whether it’ll ultimately achieve any of its envisaged objectives or not.

    *  *  *

    Support the Automatic Earth on Patreon.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 21:30

  • "Entire Downtown Is Effectively Dead:" Baltimore City Descends Further Into Turmoil
    “Entire Downtown Is Effectively Dead:” Baltimore City Descends Further Into Turmoil

    Downtown Baltimore is plagued with shootings, carjackings, muggings, and out-of-control packs of teenagers wreaking havoc. Baltimore residents can thank five decades of Democrat politicians for mismanaging this once-thriving town. 

    Earlier this month, the Inner Harbor district was overrun by hundreds of teenagers that resembled an apocalyptic scene from a Hollywood or Netflix movie. The video below might provide some insight into why people are shunning the area, which caused a plunge in foot traffic, making it difficult for retail stores to survive.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This leaves us with local media outlet Baltimore Brew’s reporting about a mall situated on the waterfront, once popular with tourists and residents, had lots of activity, and is now nothing more than a ghost town. 

    “I knew this place had gone down. But I didn’t know it was this bad!” exclaimed Patel, a California software engineer who recalled eating at a restaurant in the waterfront mall about a decade ago. He said, “I remember it being pretty nice back then.”

    All that’s left of the mall is a Hooters restaurant. Baltimore Brew’s pictures show almost every other store has moved out.

    … and now, as the media outlet explains, what to do with this prized piece of commercial real estate? 

    That’s the question before Mayor Brandon Scott and other city leaders, who yesterday gave Harborplace’s new owner, MCB Real Estate, three years to figure out a plan.

    Among the other terms of the amended lease that the Board of Estimates approved were three years of rent abatement and up to $1 million for future planning and other costs.

    MCB co-founder P. David Bramble says he needs more time to devise a turnaround strategy. The board members who approved the deal did so without questions or comments. (Scott himself was absent from the meeting, attending an African American Mayors Association conference in Washington instead.)

    “The entire downtown area is effectively dead,” one person said who commented on Baltimore Brew’s article. They pointed out:

    “Who in their right mind would want to risk coming downtown when the news out of Baltimore is all about shootings, carjackings, mugging, and out-of-control packs of teenagers milling about on a semi-regular basis?”

    Democrats and progressive leadership in the city have done a wonderful job of taking something nice and destroying it with terrible policy. The consequence is an exodus of businesses, and it’s not just a Baltimore problem. Metro areas with progressive leadership, like Chicago, San Francisco, and Portland, are finding businesses are leaving in droves. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 21:00

  • First Smart Gun With Fingerprint Unlocking Hits The Market
    First Smart Gun With Fingerprint Unlocking Hits The Market

    Authored by Emily Miller via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The first so-called “smart gun” that uses biometrics to unlock for shooting will hit the market at the end of the year.

    Biofire Technologies announced this month that it is taking pre-orders for its home defense gun that is intended to prevent unwanted access to children and criminals. This is either a big step forward in gun safety or a gimmick with unreliable technology, depending on who you ask.

    A gun salesman holds a Walther PDP Pro 9mm handgun at Lawful Defense in Gainesville, Fla., on April 19, 2023. (Nanette Holt/The Epoch Times)

    Futuristic Gun

    Smart guns, otherwise known as personalized handguns, have been in development for many years. The CEO and Founder of Biofire Technologies, Kai Kloepfer, told The Epoch Times in an interview that this is the first “major innovation in how a handgun has been designed or manufactured in 50 years.”

    Kloepfer, 26, has been working on designing a smart gun since he was a teenager. “This is a new option for gun owners to give them peace of mind that their children or criminals won’t get their hands on it.”

    The Biofire Smart Gun is a handgun that can be stored with fingerprints and 3D facial recognition to unlock it to shoot. The company says unlocking works in the dark. The data is stored in the gun in encrypted form. The gun can have biometrics for up to five total authorized users.

    The Biofire gun has integrated infrared sensors in the grip to keep it armed while the user is holding it. As soon as the grip is released, the gun locks. It is powered by a rechargeable lithium-ion battery that Biofire says lasts several months with average use and can fire continuously for several hours. The firearm only comes in 9mm caliber, but buyers are given multiple choices for color and style and left- or right-handed.

    Kloepfer, who said he owns a lot of regular guns, said his product gives people an option for a “new and better choice.”

    Reliable Technology?

    Gun rights groups have been leery that biometrics can function perfectly in self-defense scenarios. The National Shootings Sports Foundation (NSSF) represents gun manufacturers. Biofire is a member.

    Firearms are tools that individuals rely upon to save their lives and the lives of their loved ones. That necessitates a firearm to work, as designed, each and every time,” Mark Oliva, NSSF’s director of public affairs, told The Epoch Times. “Additional points of failure, including authorized-user technology, are concerns for gun owners. If that technology fails, that could be catastrophic for an individual depending upon it to save his or her life.”

    The National Rifle Association (NRA) warns the stress of real life is different than product testing.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 20:30

  • Anti-CRT Measures Adopted By 28 US States
    Anti-CRT Measures Adopted By 28 US States

    More than half of U.S. states have passed measures against the teaching of critical race theory – for example in schools or government employee trainings. Another dozen have seen successful initiatives on a smaller scale, with single cities, counties or school districts (or both) establishing such laws and directives. This is according to a tracking project at the University of California Los Angeles law school.

    Infographic: Anti-CRT Measures Adopted by 28 U.S. States | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    Additionally, as Statista’s Katharina Buchholz reports, almost all states that haven’t yet passed any such measures have seen them proposed on the state level, the exceptions being California, Vermont and Delaware.

    In California, however, several school districts have already decided to prohibit or limit the teaching of critical race theory, including in Orange county and Paso Robles.

    A few states with no finalized laws or directives on any level remain: They are Illinois, Nevada, Vermont, Delaware, Maine, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New Jersey and Hawaii.

    The newly released report State of Black America by the National Urban League identifies 567 anti-CRT laws introduced in the U.S.

    In the opinion of the report, the limitation on CRT are limiting the civil rights of Americans, including Black Americans.

    Critical Race Theory is a framework that sees race not mainly as a biological factor, but as a social construct and sees racism not only as an individual’s biases but as embedded in society.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 20:00

  • Feds Have No Data On How Regulations Reduce Emissions: Audit Finds
    Feds Have No Data On How Regulations Reduce Emissions: Audit Finds

    Authored by Marnie Cashcart via The Epoch Times,

    The federal government does not know the extent that regulations are reducing greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, despite committing $200 billion towards the issue.

    Jerry DeMarco, commissioner of the Environment and Sustainable Development, holds a press conference in Ottawa on April 20, 2023. (The Canadian Press/Sean Kilpatrick)

    An April 20 report released by the Commissioner of the Environment and Sustainable Development, Jerry DeMarco, indicates that Environment and Climate Change Canada does not attribute emission results to specific regulations.

    The federal department does not measure, or report on, the contributions of each regulation toward meeting the set target for 2030. An audit by the commissioner concluded that Environment Canada “used modelling approaches to estimate greenhouse gas emission reductions.”

    The federal government does not know if regulations to limit methane emissions are achieving their target, said the report. The audit found that large sources of methane emissions were unaccounted for in inventories and not covered by any existing regulations.

    The audit considered five regulations with the stated intent to reduce emissions from vehicles on the road, power plants, and oil and gas production.

    DeMarco concluded, “Without comprehensive impact information, the federal government does not know whether it is using the right tools to sufficiently reduce emissions to meet its target.”

    The audit suggested some regulations, targeted at reducing emissions from power generation, achieved the targeted level, while regulations intended to reduce vehicle emissions failed to meet their target.

    “Although greenhouse gas emissions from passenger cars decreased, this was offset by even larger increases in emissions for light trucks and heavy-duty vehicles, such as school and transit buses and freight, delivery, garbage, and dump trucks,” said the report.

    The audit also said the government took “too long to develop regulations given the urgency of the climate crisis.” The report was critical that it took more than five years to develop the Clean Fuel Regulations, which was double the initial plan.

    The Liberals first promised to plant 2 billion trees by 2031 on the campaign trail in 2019, and said the country would cut emissions from 42 to 45 percent lower than 2005 levels. The country only cut 8.4 percent of emissions between 2005 and 2021, according to the most recent national greenhouse gas inventory report.

    The audit found the country isn’t on track to plant even one-tenth of the promised trees by the deadline, despite a $3.2 billion allocation in the 2020 fall economic statement.

    “There is no solution to climate change and terrestrial biodiversity loss that does not include forests,” DeMarco’s report said.

    “It is unlikely that the two billion trees program will meet its objectives unless significant changes are made.”

    On the emissions front, the audit indicates the federal government committed to eliminating 2 million tonnes of greenhouse-gas emissions yearly, by 2030. Now the Liberal government said it will not start reducing emissions until 2031, at the earliest.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 19:30

  • New York's Democrat Mayor Says Migrant Crisis Has 'Destroyed' The City, Biden Admin Has 'Turned Back'
    New York’s Democrat Mayor Says Migrant Crisis Has ‘Destroyed’ The City, Biden Admin Has ‘Turned Back’

    The Mayor of New York City says that the illegal immigration crisis has ‘destroyed’ his city, and noted that the Biden administration has done nothing to help deal with the problem they created.

    The city is being destroyed by the migrant crisis,” said Mayor Eric Adams (D) in a Friday panel discussion hosted by the African American Mayors Association in Washington D.C.

    Adams’ comments came one day after he signed an executive order which extended the state of emergency in NYC over the influx of illegal immigrants.

    “The City now faces an unprecedented humanitarian crisis that requires it to take extraordinary measures,” reads the order.

    According to city Comptroller Brad Lander in an April 7 report, the city has had to ramp up its provisions for shelter by over 75% due to the influx of more than 55,000 foreigners claiming to be seeking asylum over the past year.

    Meanwhile, the Mayor’s Office of Management and Budget says that the full cost of providing shelter and other services to refugees is around $1.4 billion this year, and will be $2.8 billion in 2024.

    “New York State and (to a lesser extent) the federal government have begun to offer some assistance, though less than their appropriate share. But even with federal and state support, the current approach is beyond what the City of New York can reasonably sustain,” wrote Lander.

    Adams on Wednesday slammed the Biden administration for leaving New York City high and dry when it comes to the influx of illegals.

    “The national government has turned its back on New York City,” Adams said during a City Hall press conference. “We’re here today telling the White House we have been extremely patient. We’ve allowed the coordination of all of our agencies to come together to deal with this response.”

    This is in the lap of the president of the United States.

    Adams also expressed concern over the Biden administration trying to get rid of Title 42, a Trump-era policy that allows the US to rapidly expel migrants who have entered the country illegally, warning that “52,000 [asylum seekers] could jump to 100,000 if we don’t get this under control.”

    Adams’ administration has proposed measures that include providing access to humanitarian parole for illegal immigrants, including expediting work authorization.

    New York officials have said that they’ve received around $8 million from state and federal sources, which pales in comparison to the over $4 billion in related expenses the city is expected to incur through 2024 due to the migrant influx. -Epoch Times

    In his April 20 executive order, Adams said that the thousands of illegals which have flooded New York City have created an “unprecedented humanitarian crisis.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 19:00

  • Bragg Drops Case Against Jordan, Allowing House GOP To Depose Ex-Manhattan Prosecutor
    Bragg Drops Case Against Jordan, Allowing House GOP To Depose Ex-Manhattan Prosecutor

    Authored by Gary Bai via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Manhattan District Attorney Alvin Bragg has dropped his effort to quash a congressional subpoena to a former prosecutor who worked in his office, a congressional aide told The Epoch Times in a statement on Friday.

    “This evening, the Manhattan District Attorney’s Office withdrew its appeal in Bragg v. Jordan. Mr. Pomerantz’s deposition will go forward on May 12, and we look forward to his appearance,” Russel Dye, spokesperson for Rep. Jim Jordan (R-Ohio), chair of the House Judiciary Committee, wrote to The Epoch Times in a statement.

    Bragg caved. Jim Jordan won,” the House Judiciary Committee wrote in a statement on Twitter Friday.

    L: Manhattan District Attorney Alvin Bragg outside the Manhattan Federal Court in New York, April 4, 2023. (Angela Weiss/AFP via Getty Images) R: Rep. Jim Jordan (R-Ohio) in Washington, on July 21, 2021. (Anna Moneymaker/Getty Images)

    The development wrapped up a legal clash between Bragg and House Judiciary Republicans, whereby Bragg had attempted to stop the lawmakers from requesting testimony from Mark Pomerantz, a former prosecutor who investigated former President Donald Trump’s finances. Pomerantz left Bragg’s office in February 2022 in protest of Bragg’s initial unwillingness to bring an indictment against Trump.

    A grand jury, encouraged by Bragg, brought an indictment against Trump in late March, prompting Jordan to initiate a probe into what he calls a “politically motivated” prosecution against a former president. Jordan subpoenaed Pomerantz to seek his testimony as a part of that probe. In response, Bragg sued the House Judiciary Committee and Pomerantz to prevent Pomerantz from testifying.

    That lawsuit led to a hearing on Wednesday in the Southern District Court of New York, and a subsequent decision by District Judge Mary Kay Vyskocil, a Trump appointee, ordered that the congressional panel has the authority to become involved in the investigation of Trump and declined Bragg’s request for a court injunction on the congressional subpoena.

    Bragg wrote in a court filing that he intended to appeal the lower court’s decision to the 2nd Circuit Court of Appeals on April 19. On the same day, the court issued a temporary administrative hold on the return date of the House Judiciary Committee’s congressional subpoena of Pomerantz. This administrative hold did not reflect the court’s opinion on the merit of Bragg’s case, the court indicated in an April 19 filing, but serves as a short pause as the court considers whether to extend the freeze on the subpoena as Bragg appeals the case.

    A three-judge panel was originally scheduled to decide early next week on this matter.

    Bragg on Friday dropped the appeal, wrapping up the legal contention between him and the House lawmakers.

    “Our successful stay of this subpoena blocked the immediate deposition and afforded us the time necessary to coordinate with the House Judiciary Committee on an agreement that protects the District Attorney’s privileges and interests. We are pleased with this resolution, which ensures any questioning of our former employee will take place in the presence of our General Counsel on a reasonable, agreed upon timeframe. We are gratified that the Second Circuit’s ruling provided us with the opportunity to successfully revolve this dispute,” Bragg’s office wrote in a statement on Friday on Twitter.

    Judge’s Comments

    During the district court hearing on Wednesday, the court affirmed the congressional lawmakers’ position that requesting Pomerantz’s testimony serves a valid legislative interest and that Pomerantz, due to his own conduct, is not protected by confidentiality privileges.

    In her order, Vyskocil agreed with the congressional lawmakers’ reasoning that testimony by Pomerantz can help inform current and pending legislation. This includes a bill that, if enacted into law, would bar the use of federal funds to investigate a sitting or former president (the Accountability for Lawless Violence In our Neighborhoods, or ALVIN, Act) and another that would allow Congress to remove an action or prosecution against a former president (H.R. 2553).

    It is not the role of the federal judiciary to dictate what legislation Congress may consider or how it should conduct its deliberations in that connection,” the judge wrote, adding that the U.S. Constitution protects lawmakers from litigation when their actions serve a valid legislative interest.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 18:30

  • A Pyrrhic End To 130 Years Of Vicious Bad Money And Banking Crises
    A Pyrrhic End To 130 Years Of Vicious Bad Money And Banking Crises

    Authored by Brendan Brown via The Mises Institute,

    The original vicious circle starts with inflationary interventions in an up-to-then well-anchored monetary regime.

    Consequent asset inflation spawns a banking crisis. That leads to the installation of anticrisis safety structures (one illustration is a novel or enhanced lender of last resort). Alongside a possible monetary regime shift, these damage the money’s anchoring system. A great asset inflation emerges and leads on to an eruption of another banking crisis, devastating in comparison with the first.

    An array of additional safety structures is put in place which makes the now-bad money worse than before. After a long and variable lag, a long and violent monetary storm means the safety structures fail, a banking crisis again erupts but this time milder than the previous.

    Then a further tinkering with the safety structures causes money to deteriorate even more in quality. Another shift in monetary regime coincidentally does much additional damage. Consequently, in time, a new crisis erupts much worse than the last one.

    The safety engineers do more work, causing yet more damage to the mechanisms essential to sound money. But now the safety structures are so pervasive and strong across the banking industry that there is widespread belief that bank crisis eruptions will be smaller or, more likely, totally repressed.

    Subsequent events demonstrate those beliefs to be hollow. There is a new round of safety structure elaboration leading to further monetary deterioration. Regime officials declare the end of bank crises.

    The cumulative economic cost of this vaunted triumph over bank crisis is an advance of monopoly capitalism and monetary statism that throttles the essential dynamism of free market capitalism. Malinvestment becomes cumulatively larger. Living standards in general suffer. The severely ailing money which subsists is beyond any cure except the most radical.

    Let’s fit the above abstract series of vicious bad money–bank crisis cycles to the most recent 130-year history of US money.

    At the start there were the inflationary interventions by US administrations in the two penultimate decades of the international gold standard, overpowering for sustained periods the “checks and balances” of that regime.

    Murray Rothbard highlights these interventions in his US monetary history book – the first intervention under the “Billion Dollar Congress” of 1889–91 and the second from 1902–7 under Secretary Leslie Shaw who aimed to create a virtual central bank within the Treasury by deploying the huge cash balances of the federal government. The results were the Panic of 1893 and then the epic crash of 1907 followed by a recession.

    These financial system convulsions and the related economic slumps were decisive events behind the creation of the Federal Reserve in 1913. Its advocates promised that an elastic currency, a state-run clearing house, and a monopoly of note issuance would mean the end of episodic banking crises.

    The true source of these crises, however, were the preceding episodes of monetary inflation, and the scope for this crisis just got a lot worse. The international gold standard disintegrated at the outbreak of World War One. Demand for monetary gold in the belligerent European countries collapsed as governments there sequestered the yellow metal to pay for imports.

    Beyond that wartime experience, the launch of the Fed destabilized the demand for monetary base. The novel provision of lenders of last-resort facilities and, more generally, discount window-access to member banks diluted the perceived special qualities of the monetary base (as means of payment and store of value) essential to its enjoying strong, broad, and stable demand despite its constituents bearing no interest. These “super money” qualities are crucial to monetary base’s role in the solid anchoring of money.

    In the wake of the immediate postwar depression in 1920, during which no banking crisis erupted, opinion was prevalent that the institution of the Federal Reserve meant no more systemic bank runs and panics. Correspondingly, individuals saw less reason to hold large amounts of cash or types of deposits that were backed by large amounts of cash, gold, or reserve deposits. Hence, though monetary base growth seemed low and stable through what Milton Friedman misleadingly describes as “the high tide of the Federal Reserve” in 1922–27, monetary conditions were, in fact, highly inflationary. This did not show up in average consumer prices in that the economic miracle of the second industrial revolution meant there was a powerful natural rhythm downward of costs in tune with rapid productivity growth.

    The result: a great asset inflation and then a subsequent bust, featuring three back-to-back recessions which together formed the so-called Great Depression; the last two of these were marked by convulsive waves of bank failures. This culminated in the New Deal shift of monetary regime, including exit from gold, deposit insurance, and swathes of new bank regulations. The bad money of the 1920s got a lot worse – amidst further dilution of its base’s qualities and a vast expansion of the US monetary base from 1934 to early 1936.

    The interlude of wartime inflation and subsequent economic miracle in the US, Europe, and Japan for long stages meant that the vicious bad money–bank crisis circle was in suspense until well on into the “greatest peacetime inflation” (from the mid-1960s to the start of the 1980s). Fast-forward to the eruption of the US banking crisis at the start of the 1980s as the bubble in lending to Latin America (a key symptom from the mid-1970s’ asset inflation) burst. The Fed’s and Treasury’s rescue of large US banks ended the brief US monetarist experiment of targeting the monetary base. Dollar devaluation fueled by Fed inflation following the Plaza Accord in 1985 spawned an asset inflation culminating in the savings and loan debacle and banking crisis in Japan, France, and Scandinavia.

    By the early- to mid-1990s, recent examples of the Fed and US government assisting banks in crisis had further diluted the perceived qualities of the monetary base. In consequence, sound money, which depends on a functional monetary base whose supply is highly restricted, had become even more remote. Coincidentally, a shift in US (and European) monetary regime was under way, to the so-called 2 percent inflation standard, with the Fed abandoning any remnants of money supply targeting.

    All this led on to a virulent episode of monetary inflation, featuring most directly asset inflation which became the source of the next great banking crisis in 2008–12. A swathe of new banking regulations followed. These came in combination with “monetary reforms”—crucially including interest paid on reserve and quantitative easing—which though ostensibly designed to fortify the banking system, in fact, caused already bad money to become even more unsound. Hence, the reforms laid the foundation for further banking crises which erupted in the aftermath of the great monetary inflation during the pandemic and the onset of the Russia-Ukraine war.

    The response to this most recent banking crisis: “too big to fail” extended to deposits of all banks, at least those deemed by highly politicized opinion to be of “systemic relevance”; speculation about vastly increased deposit insurance; and promised new regulations across medium and small banks. The net consequence: a further dilution of any remaining special qualities of reserve deposits.

    Reconstituting a functional monetary base as essential to a sound money system would now require radical reform. Money is set to deteriorate in quality yet again—more statist, more regulation, less competition amongst the institutions which produce it in its various forms for the public.

    Could state-administered safety structures in the banking system now become so omnipresent that the next asset inflation would not culminate in crisis?

    Essential flaws of regulation and the likely virulence of future asset inflations make that outcome unlikely.

    Meanwhile, expect official silence about the cumulative costs of the anticrisis “infrastructure” whether in the form of advancing monopoly capitalism, reducing economic dynamism, ever-worse malinvestment, bigger government, and ever-more pervasive crony capitalism.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 17:30

  • Airman's Leaks Started Just 48 Hours After Russia Invaded Ukraine
    Airman’s Leaks Started Just 48 Hours After Russia Invaded Ukraine

    The Pentagon’s humiliation just grew deeper, as it turns out National Guard Airman Jack Teixeira’s leaks of classified documents started far earlier than has previously been reported. 

    Tipped off about a second, 600-member Discord chat group where Teixeira also posted, the New York Times found the Massachusetts Air National Guard information technology specialist started sharing information about the war in Ukraine within 48 hours of Russia’s February 2022 invasion. In contrast to the previously reported chat group, this one was far larger and was publicly listed on a YouTube channel. 

    This development makes the intelligence community’s failure to discover the posts all the more embarrassing: The document used to criminally charge Teixeira says he started posting in December 2022, but it turns out his stream of leaks spanned 13 months

    The Times matched Teixeira to the account in the newly-publicized chat room by a variety of means, including the user name, photos he posted that match known photos of his family home’s interior, a reference to his birthday, and, not least, the user’s declaration that he worked in an Air Force intelligence unit. 

    Teixeria’s senior quote in the 2020 high school yearbook at Dighton-Rehoboth Regional High School in Massachusetts (Taunton Daily Gazette)

    The posts reviewed by the Times were detailed descriptions of classified documents, with the user believed to have also posted photos of documents that have since been deleted. 

    Teixeira jumped into leak mode just two days after the Russian invasion, posting, “Saw a pentagon report saying that ⅓rd of the force is being used to invade.” When others in the chat room questioned his information, he wrote, “I have a little more than open source info. Perks of being in a USAF intel unit.”

    In a March 27, 2022 post in which he said he was citing “an NSA site,” Teixeira told the group Russian forces were about to pull back from Kiev: “Some ‘big’ news. There may be a planned withdrawal of the troops west of Kiev, as in all of them.” Two days later, Russia announced it was doing just that. 

    “The job I have lets me get privilege’s above most intel guys,” he boasted with imperfect punctuation. When another chat participant cautioned him not to abuse those privileges, Teixeira fittingly replied, “Too late.” 

    Teixeira was arrested on April 13 at his mother’s North Dighton MA home

    Teixeira appears to have made some posts while on duty at the 102nd Intelligence Wing, the unit he was assigned to at Otis Air National Guard Base on Cape Cod. Once, he told the chat room he was about to enter a SCIF, or Sensitive Compartmented Information Facility. In the aftermath of the leaks’ discovery, the Air Force temporarily stripped the 102nd of its intelligence mission — (which is pretty bad when “intelligence” is in your unit’s name).  

    In the larger chat group that’s been previously reported, Teixeira announced the end of his information-sharing services on March 19: “I was very happy and willing and enthusiastic to have covered this event for the past year and share with all of you something that not many people get to see. I’ve decided to stop with the updates.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    While establishment newspapers are eagerly beating the government to the punch at every turn in this case, the next significant drop of government information could come at a pretrial detention hearing, which on Wednesday was postponed for two weeks to May 3, at defense counsel’s request.

    So far, Teixeira’s been charged with unlawful retention and transmission of national defense information and unauthorized removal and retention of classified documents. Two guilty verdicts could put him in prison for up to 15 years.  

    In what sounds like it might just be a comically absurd attempt to portray Teixeira as a Russian asset, prosecutors this filed new information with the court, noting that he once shot a vintage Soviet pistol.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 17:00

  • The Real Reason Behind China’s $10 Billion Offer To Taliban For Lithium
    The Real Reason Behind China’s $10 Billion Offer To Taliban For Lithium

    Authored by Venus Upadhayaya via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    A Chinese company has offered the Taliban $10 billion and a proposal to build key strategic infrastructure connecting north-south Afghanistan in exchange for access to the country’s lithium reserves. Some experts raised concerns that the offer would allow the Chinese regime to expand its influence in the region.

    Afghanistan’s acting first deputy prime minister Abdul Ghani Baradar (L) and China’s ambassador to Afghanistan Wang Yu in Kabul on Jan. 5, 2023. (Ahmad Sahel Arman/AFP via Getty Images)

    The proposal was discussed between a representative of Gochin and the acting minister of the Taliban’s Ministry of Mines and Petroleum, Sheikh Hadith Shahabuddin Delawar, in his office on April 13. The talks happened just a few months after the Taliban arrested two Chinese nationals trying to smuggle 1,000 metric tons of lithium-bearing rocks out of the country.

    Experts said it needs to be seen if the deal is feasible, but once signed, it will have diplomatic and political ramifications, and the proposed infrastructure development will likely have a long-term strategic impact.

    Geopolitically, this deal could give China a significant advantage and influence in the region, as it secures a supply of critical resources and strengthens its presence in Afghanistan,” Maher Saadat, an exiled activist and Afghan affairs analyst, told The Epoch Times in an email.

    Afghanistan’s lithium reserves potentially rival those of Bolivia, which has the world’s most significant amount of lithium resources. The Taliban’s Ministry of Mines and Petroleum said in a press release that the deal, once executed, will provide direct employment to 120,000 people and indirectly to 1 million.

    Abhishek Darbey, a research associate of the Chinese Research Program at the New Delhi-based Center for China Analysis and Strategy (CCAS), pointed out to The Epoch Times in an email that China is among the first countries that supported the Taliban to form a government in Kabul following the withdrawal of the United States from the country. He believes the Chinese regime wants to control the region.

    “In the case of Afghanistan, the country is important for China because the land domain of the Belt and Road Initiative will pass through this region, and a peaceful Afghanistan will create favorable conditions for the BRI to grow and progress,” he said.

    “Also, China considers itself to be a major power of the region and, therefore, it wants to be a participant in [the] decision-making of the region or wants to be a power with a capacity to influence the regional politics,” he added.

    Chinese Foreign Minister Wang Yi meets with Mullah Abdul Ghani Baradar, political chief of Afghanistan’s Taliban, in Tianjin, China, on July 28, 2021. (Li Ran/Xinhua via Reuters)

    Lithium for the Taliban

    Afghanistan’s lithium reserves are a quick source of money for the Taliban, but they don’t have a long-term strategic goal for it, according to the experts.

    “They may view it as an opportunity to generate immediate revenue to fund their activities and consolidate their power, given their history of relying on various sources of illicit financings, such as drug trafficking and extortion,” Saadat said.

    The Taliban’s focus on immediate financial gains—without considering the long-term implications and sustainable development of the lithium deposits—is likely to limit the potential benefits of the reserves for Afghanistan and its people, he said.

    “[It] will not contribute to the overall socio-economic development and stability of the country with certainty,” he said.

    The first lithium mine was discovered in Ghazni city in 2013. These rare mineral mines are located in five areas in Afghanistan: Herat, Shuryak Valley, Tagab District in Kapisa Province, Nawur District in Ghazni Province, and Badakhshan.

    Darbey said the Chinese interest in the region is not new—in 2021, two Chinese companies were sent to Ghazni to conduct technical research and inspect lithium and goldmines.

    While China’s lithium reserves are depleting, the Afghan deposits are unexploited. Five Chinese companies have set up their representative offices in Afghanistan, and around 20 Chinese companies have made inquiries about lithium projects, according to Darbey.

    Delawar said that the contract of the mines in Afghanistan would be given according to the Taliban’s law.

    Darbey pointed out that the Taliban government is already supporting Chinese investment in its wider mining sector, and China’s two largest lithium miners—Tianqi and Ganfeng—have already examined the lithium mines in Afghanistan.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 16:30

  • FBI Blocking Release Of Nashville Trans Shooter's Manifesto
    FBI Blocking Release Of Nashville Trans Shooter’s Manifesto

    If the Nashville shooter had been a straight constitutional conservative would the FBI be blocking the killer’s manifesto, or would it be scrutinized for months on every mainstream media platform from day one?

    The question is important because it illustrates the discomforting double standards in play whenever a mass murder is committed by a person on the political left (and there have been many lately).  If the manifesto outlines ideologically motivated intent then the actions of Audrey Hale, a biological woman identifying as male, could be labeled a terrorist act.  However, if the manifesto stays locked away from the public then there will always be suspicions but never any confirmation.  Certain political groups and activist groups benefit greatly from the suppression of Hale’s motives.

    Rep. Tim Burchett, (R-Tenn.) told The New York Post he knew the FBI was behind the delay of the manifesto’s release, saying the news was “disappointing.”     

    Twenty journals, five laptops, a suicide note and various other notes written by Hale were seized from the house she shared with her parents as well as two memoirs, five Covenant School yearbooks and seven cellphones, according to a search warrant.

    Metro Nashville Council Member Courtney Johnston states that the FBI has ruled out releasing the manifesto anytime soon.

    “What I was told is, her manifesto was a blueprint on total destruction, and it was so detailed at the level of what she had planned…that document in the wrong person’s hands would be astronomically dangerous…” 

    She added: “I personally don’t want to know the depths to which her psychosis reached…When I’m told by an MNPD high-ranking official that it keeps him up at night, I’m going to defer to that person in that agency that I don’t need to read that.”

    Tennessee Bureau of Investigation Director David Rausch described the writings he had seen during a meeting with the Tennessee Sheriffs’ Association, saying: “The documents that we have, and I have viewed those, you know, one is specifically a plan and the other is some journal-type rantings.”

    Was Audrey Hale a criminal mastermind?  It’s highly unlikely given she was taken down by police within moments of the officers arriving on scene.  It is more probable that the FBI is following orders from political leadership to hide any documents that might embarrass Democrats, who are now closely aligned with trans activist groups and social justice organizations.  Democrats have effectively shifted the debate on the Nashville shooting over to gun control and trans rights, and have avoided discussing the potential ideological causes of the attack.  

    Would such documents inspire further violence from the political left on a scale similar to what happened at Covenant School?  It’s hard to say, but it doesn’t seem as though activists need much encouragement these days.  The first and most obvious conclusion one can draw from the FBI’s refusal to make Hale’s writings public is that they are incredibly damaging to the trans movement, a class of people now protected by government officials and the corporate establishment.  

    In other words, a message is being sent by federal agencies, the White House and others that if you are a trans person and you commit mass murder, you will enjoy special treatment.  The consequences of such a message are obvious.     

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 16:00

  • Senator Demands Answers From Government On COVID-19 Vaccine Injury Compensation
    Senator Demands Answers From Government On COVID-19 Vaccine Injury Compensation

    Authored by Zachary Stieber via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    A U.S. senator is demanding answers from U.S. officials on compensation to people who were injured by COVID-19 vaccines.

    Sen. Ron Johnson (R-Wis.) in Washington on Feb. 9, 2021. (Ting Shen/Pool/AFP via Getty Images)

    Sen. Ron Johnson (R-Wis.), ranking member of the Senate’s Permanent Subcommittee on Investigations, asked for key details on the U.S. compensation scheme, including how much each person who has been compensated requested.

    The government recently paid three people who were injured by the vaccines, marking the first time payments were rendered for the COVID vaccines. But the highest payout was just $2,019.

    Johnson is also asking whether the government has advertised the Countermeasures Injury Compensation Program (CICP), the only venue for federal compensation; whether officials expect an increase in claims in light of how many injury reports have been logged with the Vaccine Adverse Event Reporting System, and how much money injured people are eligible for under the program.

    The Republican outlined the requested information in a letter to Xavier Becerra, the secretary of the Department of Health and Human Services (HHS), and Carole Johnson, the administrator of the Health and Resources Administration (HRSA).

    HHS and HRSA did not respond to requests for comment.

    “Although the government appears to be providing very limited compensation to individuals who have filed COVID-19 vaccine injury claims, the process by which HHS evaluates these claims or even advertises the existence of this compensation program remains opaque,” Johnson told The Epoch Times in an emailed statement.

    “HHS owes the American people a complete explanation of its administration of the compensation program for individuals who have suffered COVID-19 vaccine injuries,” he added.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 15:30

  • Biden Impeachment? Top Republican Says IRS Whistleblower, Chinese 'Collusion' And Hunter Laptop Letter Hoax "Tip Of The Iceberg"
    Biden Impeachment? Top Republican Says IRS Whistleblower, Chinese ‘Collusion’ And Hunter Laptop Letter Hoax “Tip Of The Iceberg”

    A Republican member of the House Oversight Committee thinks a flurry of recent corruption scandals could lead to the impeachment of President Joe Biden.

    Between the revelation that the ‘Hunter laptop letter hoax‘ signed by 51 current and former intelligence officials was created at the best of Antony Blinken during the 2020 US election, the obvious implications of CCP leverage over the Biden family, and information presented by an IRS whistleblower regarding the Hunter Biden probe, things may get interesting according to Rep. Tim Burchett (R-TN).

    When asked about China’s influence over the Biden family, Burchett told Fox News‘ Maria Bartiromo on Friday: “We know of at least eight Biden family members who have profited from dealings overseas,” adding “I think if you delve into it deep enough, there’s prostitution rings involved in this, human trafficking has been rumored to be part of some of this. These so-called companies that have allowed the Biden family to profit. It is gross, and it is disgusting.”

    If I was those 51 people, I’d be lawyering up right now because they’re going to be asked in public at some point what they knew and if they knew that all this other stuff was going on, because it is very damning Maria. This is just the very tip of the iceberg,” he continued.

    “This very brave IRS agent coming forward, I think, will just start it,” Burchett said, referring to the senior agent in charge of the Hunter Biden investigation who came forward earlier this week in a letter to lawmakers, accusing the DOJ of ‘mishandling’ the Hunter Biden case, and that his client had information that would contradict sworn testimony from a senior political appointee.

    When asked if that might lead to an impeachment, Burchett said: “If this coverup shows what’s going on, what we assume is going on, and that the 51 folks were basically lied to and showed false documentation, how can you not…

    The lawyer for the whistleblower joined “Special Report with Bret Baier” Thursday night claiming his client is “not a political person” and does not have a “political agenda,” but does have documents to support his allegations that he hopes to bring to both congressional Democrats and Republicans.

    If you delve into it deep enough, there’s prostitution rings involved in this. Human trafficking has been rumored to be a part of some of these so-called companies that have allowed the Biden family to profit. It is gross and it is disgusting about what has been allowed to go on,” Burchett said. –Fox News

    “I cannot imagine how the Justice Department allowed this to go on, if not for corruption at the highest level. And they are in some serious trouble right now. I think they know it,” Burchett continued.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    When it comes to China, Burchett said: [China has] so much invested in this White House now, that their cover-up upon cover-ups will continue. But I can assure you that the American people understand what’s going on,” adding “And I can assure you that [Oversight] Chairman Comer and Chairman Jordan are steering this in the right direction. As I stated before, this is complete collusion with the communist Chinese. They bought and sold this White House.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 15:00

  • Ukraine Planned Attacks On Russian Forces In Syria
    Ukraine Planned Attacks On Russian Forces In Syria

    Authored by Kyle Anzalone via AntiWar.com,

    Kiev’s military intelligence agency believed it could carry out attacks on Russian soldiers and Wagner Group forces in Syria, forcing Moscow to redeploy military assets from Ukraine. The story was reported by the Washington Post using documents released by Jack Teixeira.

    The Ukrainian defense officials believed they could use Kurdish forces to wage a proxy war against Russia in Syria. According to the Post, the plan never materialized as President Volodymyr Zelensky ordered an end to the planning in December.

    It appears that Ukrainian officials engaged in some discussions with the Syrian Democratic Forces, a Kurdish militia backed by the US. The documents said the Kurdish officials requested training on drones and air defenses. Additionally, the Kurds said they would not attack Russian positions in areas held by the SDF, and requested their role in the operations be kept secret.

    Ukraine declined to respond to questions about the document. A Kurdish official claimed the information was false.

    Russian forces have been in Syria since 2015. President Vladimir Putin ordered his soldiers to aid the Syrian government led by Bashar al-Assad. At the time of Russian intervention, both al-Qaeda in Syria and ISIS were threatening to topple Damascus. The Russian soldiers helped Syrian forces turn back the advance of the jihadist groups.

    While Moscow continues military operations in Syria, the Kremlin is attempting to end the conflict through diplomatic means. Putin is attempting to broker a deal to normalize relations between Syria and Saudi Arabia. Riyadh has been a primary backer of the anti-Assad militants in Syria and has received pressure from Washington to continue to isolate Damascus.

    The document says Zelensky could allow the operations to proceed, but would likely require assistance from the US and Turkey. Ankara may be unwilling to support the covert proxy warfare as it views the SDF as a terrorist organization, and has long protested Washington arming the Syrian Kurds.

    Additionally, the operations could inflame the war in Syria. The decade-long war has seen a dip in violence in recent years as Assad and his allies have consolidated control over most of Syria. The US and SDF occupy the eastern third of the country.

    Getty Images

    However, the SDF leadership has shown a willingness to work with Moscow. If Kurdish forces allow themselves to become a proxy force for Kiev, Moscow will likely aggressively target SDF positions in eastern Syria.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 14:30

  • Civil Rights Complaint Filed Against Anheuser-Busch For Racist And Sexist Hiring
    Civil Rights Complaint Filed Against Anheuser-Busch For Racist And Sexist Hiring

    Authored by Naveen Athrappully via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The makers of Bud Light, who are facing a nationwide public backlash over promoting trans-activism in the name of diversity, have found themselves amid a civil rights complaint for racist and sexist hiring practices.

    “The evidence is that Anheuser-Busch is knowingly, intentionally, and unlawfully discriminating based on race, color, national origin, and sex with respect to employment and job training opportunities,” said the April 17 complaint (pdf) filed by public charity America First Legal (AFL) with the U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) against beverage manufacturer Anheuser-Busch.

    Bud Light beer cans sit on a table at Camden Yards in Baltimore, Md., on Sept. 19, 2019. (Rob Carr/Getty Images)

    AFL pointed to the Missouri-based company’s 2023 Leadership Accelerator Program, which provides leadership-development programs for individuals who identify as historically underrepresented groups as they join the company in a full-time capacity.

    “We encourage candidates who identify as Black, Latinx, and Native American to apply, as well as those who identify with a historically underrepresented group,” according to the program’s job profile. The company insists that it is an “equal opportunity employer.”

    AFL slammed such tactics, pointing out that the Leadership Accelerator Program notably excludes white and Asian-American citizens.

    In a recent post, the nonprofit accuses the company of discriminating based on race, color, national origin, and sex in their employment practices under the cloak of equity.

    “It is a fast-track program to executive leadership positions at Anheuser-Busch, and it is limited to candidates based on race. The proforma Equal Opportunity Employer language at the end of the posting does mask the company’s discriminatory intent and purpose,” the letter states.

    In addition, Anheuser-Busch’s diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) strategy also boosted the presence of women in the company’s senior leadership team, the organization said.

    Exclusionary Practices?

    AFL points out that federal law forbids an employer from discriminating against an existing or potential employee due to the person’s race, color, national origin, sex, or religion. In addition, employers are also forbidden from limiting, segregating, or classifying employees or applicants in such a discriminatory manner that would affect the individual’s employment opportunities.

    A commissioner’s charge is particularly appropriate here because there is ample reason to believe that Anheuser-Busch has knowingly and intentionally violated federal law and will continue to do so,” the letter said.

    “The corporation has chosen to promote and use employment practices that are both patently illegal and deeply harmful.”

    Anheuser-Busch recently attracted criticism after it sent custom beer cans to trans-activist Dylan Mulvaney featuring the person’s face. Critics had slammed the move as pushing a transgender agenda. The can was created to celebrate Mulvaney’s apparently one year of transitioning into womanhood.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/22/2023 – 13:30

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 22nd April 2023

  • Court Filing Suggests Troubling CIA Links To Two 9/11 Hijackers
    Court Filing Suggests Troubling CIA Links To Two 9/11 Hijackers

    Authored by Kit Klarenberg via The Grayzone,

    A newly-released court filing raises grave questions about the relationship between Alec Station, a CIA unit set up to track Al Qaeda chief Osama bin Laden and his associates, and two 9/11 hijackers leading up to the attacks, which was subject to a coverup at the highest levels of the FBI.

    Obtained by SpyTalk, the filing is a 21-page declaration by Don Canestraro, a lead investigator for the Office of Military Commissions, the legal body overseeing the cases of 9/11 defendants. It summarizes classified government discovery disclosures, and private interviews he conducted with anonymous high-ranking CIA and FBI officials. Many agents who spoke to Canestraro headed up Operation Encore, the Bureau’s aborted, long-running probe into Saudi government connections to the 9/11 attack.

    Despite conducting multiple lengthy interviews with a range of witnesses, producing hundreds of pages of evidence, formally investigating several Saudi officials, and launching a grand jury to probe a Riyadh-run US-based support network for the hijackers, Encore was abruptly terminated in 2016. This was purportedly due to a byzantine intra-FBI bust-up over investigative methods.

    When originally released in 2021 on the Office’s public court docket, every part of the document was redacted except an “unclassified” marking. Given its explosive contents, it is not difficult to see why: as Canestraro’s investigation concluded, at least two 9/11 hijackers had been recruited either knowingly or unknowingly into a joint CIA-Saudi intelligence operation which may have gone awry. 

    ‘A 50/50 chance’ of Saudi involvement

    In 1996, Alec Station was created under the watch of the CIA. The initiative was supposed to comprise a joint investigative effort with the FBI. However, FBI operatives assigned to the unit soon found they were prohibited from passing any information to the Bureau’s head office without the CIA’s authorization, and faced harsh penalties for doing so. Efforts to share information with the FBI’s equivalent unit – the I-49 squad based in New York – were repeatedly blocked.  

    In late 1999, with “the system blinking red” about an imminent large-scale Al Qaeda terror attack inside the US, the CIA and NSA were closely monitoring an “operational cadre” within an Al Qaeda cell that included the Saudi nationals Nawaf al-Hazmi and Khalid al-Mihdhar. The pair would purportedly go on to hijack American Airlines Flight 77, which crashed into the Pentagon on 9/11.

    Al-Hazmi and al-Midhar had attended an Al Qaeda summit that took place between January 5th and 8th 2000, in Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia. The meeting was secretly photographed and videotaped by local authorities at Alec Station’s request although, apparently, no audio was captured. En route, Mihdhar transited through Dubai, where CIA operatives broke into his hotel room and photocopied his passport. It showed that he possessed a multi-entry visa to the US.

    A contemporaneous internal CIA cable stated this information was immediately passed to the FBI “for further investigation.” In reality, Alec Station not only failed to inform the Bureau of Mihdhar’s US visa, but also expressly forbade two FBI agents assigned to the unit from doing so.

    “[I said] ‘we’ve got to tell the Bureau about this. These guys clearly are bad…we’ve got to tell the FBI.’ And then [the CIA] said to me, ‘no, it’s not the FBI’s case, not the FBI’s jurisdiction’,” Mark Rossini, one of the FBI agents in question, has alleged. “If we had picked up the phone and called the Bureau, I would’ve been violating the law. I…would’ve been removed from the building that day. I would’ve had my clearances suspended, and I would be gone.”

    On January 15th, Hazmi and Mihdhar entered the US through Los Angeles International Airport, just weeks after the foiled Millennium plot. Omar al-Bayoumi, a Saudi government “ghost employee” immediately met them at an airport restaurant. After a brief conversation, Bayoumi helped them find an apartment near his own in San Diego, co-signed their lease, set them up bank accounts, and gifted $1,500 towards their rent. The three would have multiple contacts moving forward.

    In interviews with Operation Encore investigators years later, Bayoumi alleged his run-in with the two would-be hijackers was mere happenstance. His extraordinary practical and financial support was, he claimed, simply charitable, motivated by sympathy for the pair, who could barely speak English and were unfamiliar with Western culture. 

    The Bureau disagreed, concluding Bayoumi was a Saudi spy, who handled a number of Al Qaeda operatives in the US. They also considered there to be a “50/50 chance” he – and by extension Riyadh – had detailed advance knowledge of the 9/11 attacks.

    That remarkable finding wasn’t known publicly until two decades later, when a tranche of Operation Encore documents were declassified upon the Biden administration’s orders, and it was completely ignored by the mainstream media. Don Canestraro’s declaration now reveals FBI investigators went even further in their assessments.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A Bureau special agent, dubbed “CS-3” in the document, stated Bayoumi’s contact with the hijackers and support thereafter “was done at the behest of the CIA through the Saudi intelligence service.” Alec Station’s explicit purpose was to “recruit Al-Hazmi and Al-Mihdhar via a liaison relationship”, with the assistance of Riyadh’s General Intelligence Directorate.

    A most ‘unusual’ CIA unit

    Alec Station’s formal remit was to track bin Laden, “collect intelligence on him, run operations against him, disrupt his finances, and warn policymakers about his activities and intentions.” These activities would naturally entail enlisting informants within Al Qaeda. 

    Nonetheless, as several high level sources told Canestraro, it was extremely “unusual” for such an entity to be involved in gathering intelligence and recruiting assets. The US-based unit was run by CIA analysts, who do not typically manage human assets. Legally, that work is the exclusive preserve of case officers “trained in covert operations” and based overseas.

    “CS-10”, a CIA case officer within Alec Station, concurred with the proposition that Hazmi and Mihdhar enjoyed a relationship with the CIA through Bayoumi, and was baffled that the unit was tasked with attempting to penetrate Al Qaeda in the first place. They felt it “would be nearly impossible…to develop informants inside” the group, given the “virtual” station was based in a Langley basement, “several thousand miles from the countries where Al Qaeda was suspected of operating.”

    “CS-10” further testified that they “observed other unusual activities” at Alec Station. Analysts within the unit “would direct operations to case officers in the field by sending the officers cables instructing them to do a specific tasking,” which was “a violation of CIA procedures.” Analysts “normally lacked the authority to direct a case officer to do anything.”

    “CS-11”, a CIA operations specialist posted to Alec Station “sometime prior to the 9/11 attacks” said they likewise “observed activity that appeared to be outside normal CIA procedures.” Analysts within the unit “mostly stuck to themselves and did not interact frequently” with others. When communicating with one another through internal cables, they also used operational pseudonyms, which “CS-11” described as peculiar, as they were not working undercover, “and their employment with the CIA was not classified information.”

    The unit’s unusual operational culture may explain some of the stranger decisions made during this period vis a vis Al Qaeda informants. In early 1998, while on a CIA mission to penetrate London’s Islamist scene, a  joint FBI-CIA informant named Aukai Collins received a stunning offer: bin Laden himself wanted him to go to Afghanistan so they could meet. 

    Collins relayed the request to his superiors. While the FBI was in favor of infiltrating Al Qaeda’s base, his CIA handler nixed the idea, saying, “there was no way the US would approve an American operative going undercover into Bin Laden’s camps.”

    Similarly, in June 2001, CIA and FBI analysts from Alec Station met with senior Bureau officials, including representatives of its own Al Qaeda unit. The CIA shared three photos of individuals who attended the Kuala Lumpur meeting 18 months earlier, including Hazmi and Mihdhar. However, as an FBI counter-terror officer codenamed “CS-15” recalled, the dates of the photos and key details about the figures they depicted were not revealed. Instead, the analysts simply asked if the FBI “knew the identities of the individuals in the photos.” 

    Another FBI official present, “CS-12”, offers an even more damning account. The Alec Station analysts not only failed to offer biographical information, but falsely implied one of the individuals might be Fahd Al-Quso, a suspect in the bombing of the USS Cole. What’s more, they outright refused to answer any questions related to the photographs. Nonetheless, it was confirmed that no system was in place to alert the FBI if any of the three entered the US – a “standard investigative technique” for terror suspects.

    Given Hazmi and Mihdhar appeared to be simultaneously working for Alec Station in some capacity, the June 2001 meeting may well have been a dangle. No intelligence value could be extracted from inquiring whether the Bureau knew who their assets were, apart from ascertaining if the FBI’s counter-terror team was aware of their identities, physical appearances, and presence in the US.

    Quite some coverup

    Another of Canestraro’s sources, a former FBI agent who went by “CS-23,” testified that after 9/11, FBI headquarters and its San Diego field office quickly learned of “Bayoumi’s affiliation with Saudi intelligence and subsequently the existence of the CIA’s operation to recruit” Hazmi and Mihdhar.

    However, “senior FBI officials suppressed investigations” into these matters. “CS-23” alleged, furthermore, that Bureau agents testifying before the Joint Inquiry into 9/11 “were instructed not to reveal the full extent of Saudi involvement with Al-Qaeda.”

    The US intelligence community would have had every reason to shield Riyadh from scrutiny and consequences for its role in the 9/11 attacks, as it was then one of its closest allies. But the FBI’s eager complicity in Alec Station’s coverup may have been motivated by self-interest, as one of its own was intimately involved in the unit’s effort to recruit Hazmi and Mihdhar, and conceal their presence in the US from relevant authorities.

    “CS-12”, who attended the June 2001 meeting with Alec Station, told Canestraro that they “continued to press FBI Headquarters for further information regarding the subjects in the photographs” over that summer. On August 23rd, they stumbled upon an “electronic communication” from FBI headquarters, which identified Hazmi and Mihdhar, and noted they were in the US. 

    “CS-12” then contacted the FBI analyst within Alec Station who authored the communication. The conversation quickly became “heated”, with the analyst ordering them to delete the memo “immediately” as they were not authorized to view it. While unnamed in the declaration, the FBI analyst in question was Dina Corsi.

    The next day, on a conference call between “CS-12”, Corsi, and the FBI’s bin Laden unit chief, “officials at FBI headquarters” explicitly told “CS-12” to “stand down” and “cease looking” for Mihdhar, as the Bureau intended to open an “intelligence gathering investigation” on him. The next day, “CS-12” emailed Corsi, stating bluntly “someone is going to die” unless Mihdhar was pursued criminally.

    It was surely no coincidence that two days later, on August 26th, Alec Station finally informed the FBI that Hazmi and Mihdhar were in the US. By then, the pair had entered the final phase of preparations for the impending attacks. If a criminal probe had been opened, they could have been stopped in their tracks. Instead, as foreshadowed by the officials in contact with “CS-12,” an intelligence investigation was launched which hindered any search efforts.

    In the days immediately after the 9/11 attacks, “CS-12” and other New York-based FBI agents participated in another conference call with Bureau headquarters. During the conversation, they learned Hazmi and Mihdhar were named on Flight 77’s manifest. One analyst on the line ran the pair’s names through “commercial databases,” quickly finding them and their home address listed in San Diego’s local phone directory. It turned out they had been living with an FBI informant.

    “CS-12” soon contacted Corsi “regarding information on the hijackers.” She responded by providing a photograph from the same surveillance operation that produced the three pictures presented at the June 2001 meeting between Alec Station and FBI agents; they depicted Walid bin Attash, a lead suspect in Al Qaeda’s 1998 East Africa US Embassy bombings and its attack on the USS Cole. 

    Corsi was unable to explain why the photo was not shown to FBI agents earlier. If it had been, “CS-12” claims they would have “immediately linked” Hazmi and Mihdhar to bin Attash, which “would have shifted from an intelligence based investigation into a criminal investigation.” The FBI’s New York field office could have then devoted its “full resources” to finding the hijackers before the fateful day of September 11, 2001.

    Alec Station operatives fail upwards

    Alec Station’s tireless efforts to protect its Al Qaeda assets raises the obvious question of whether Hazmi and Mihdhar, and possibly other hijackers, were in effect working for the CIA on the day of 9/11.

    The real motives behind the CIA’s stonewalling may never be known. But it appears abundantly clear that Alec Station did not want the FBI to know about or interfere in its secret intelligence operation. If the unit’s recruitment of Hazmi and Mihdhar was purely dedicated to information gathering, rather than operational direction, it is incomprehensible that the FBI had not been apprised of it, and was instead actively misdirected.

    Several FBI sources consulted by Canestraro speculated that the CIA’s desperation to penetrate Al Qaeda prompted it to grant Alec Station the power to recruit assets, and pressured it to do so. But if this were truly the case, then why did Langley refuse the opportunity to send Aukai Collins – a proven deep cover asset who had infiltrated several Islamist gangs – to penetrate bin Laden’s network in Afghanistan?

    One alternative explanation is that Alec Station, a powerful rogue CIA team answerable and accountable to no one, sought to infiltrate the terror group for its own sinister purposes, without the authorization and oversight usually required by Langley in such circumstances. Given that Collins was a joint asset shared with the FBI, he could not be trusted to participate in such a sensitive black operation.  

    No member of Alec Station has been punished in any way for the supposed “intelligence failures” that allowed 9/11 to go ahead. In fact, they have been rewarded. Richard Blee, the unit’s chief at the time of the attacks, and his successor Alfreda Frances Bikowsky, both joined the CIA’s operations division, and became highly influential figures in the so-called war on terror. Corsi, for her part, was promoted at the FBI, eventually rising to the rank of Deputy Assistant Director for Intelligence.  

    In a perverse twist, the Senate Intelligence Committee’s report on the CIA’s torture program found that Bikowsky had been a key player in the agency’s black site machinations, and one of their chief public apologists. It is increasingly clear that the program was specifically concerned with eliciting false testimony from suspects in order to justify and expand the US war on terror. 

    The public’s understanding of the 9/11 attacks is heavily informed by testimonies delivered by CIA torture victims under the most extreme duress imaginable. And Bikowsky, a veteran of the Alec Station that ran cover for at least two would-be 9/11 hijackers, had been in charge of interrogating the alleged perpetrators of the attacks.

    The veteran FBI deep cover agent Aukai Collins concluded his memoir with a chilling reflection which was only reinforced by Don Canestraro’s bombshell declaration:

    “I was very mistrustful about the fact that bin Laden’s name was mentioned literally hours after the attack… I became very skeptical about anything anybody said about what happened, or who did it. I thought back to when I was still working for them and we had the opportunity to enter Bin Laden’s camp. Something just hadn’t smelled right…To this day I’m unsure who was behind September 11, nor can I even guess… Someday the truth will reveal itself, and I have a feeling that people won’t like what they hear.”

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 23:40

  • US Debt: Visualizing The $31.4 Trillion Owed In 2023
    US Debt: Visualizing The $31.4 Trillion Owed In 2023

    Can you picture what $31.4 trillion looks like?

    The enormity of U.S. government debt is hard for the average person to wrap their head around. For instance, compared to the median U.S. mortgage, the current level of federal debt is 230 million times larger.

    In this graphic, Visual Capitalist’s Julie Peasley shows how many one-dollar bills it would take to stack up to the total U.S. debt of $31.4 trillion.

    How Did U.S. Debt Get So High?

    U.S. national debt is how much money the federal government owes to creditors. When the government spends more than it earns, it has a budget deficit and must issue debt in the form of Treasury securities.

    The U.S. has run a deficit for the last 20 years, substantially increasing the national debt. In fact, according to the Department of the Treasury, the current debt is $31.4 trillion.

    Stacked up in one-dollar bills, the U.S. debt would be equivalent to almost eight of Chicago’s 110-story Willis Tower.

    Year Outstanding Debt Year-Over-Year Increase
    2023* $31.4T 2%
    2022 $30.9T 9%
    2021 $28.4T 6%
    2020 $26.9T 19%
    2019 $22.7T 6%
    2018 $21.5T 6%
    2017 $20.2T 3%
    2016 $19.6T 8%
    2015 $18.2T 2%
    2014 $17.8T 6%
    2013 $16.7T 4%
    2012 $16.1T 9%
    2011 $14.8T 9%
    2010 $13.6T 14%
    2009 $11.9T 19%
    2008 $10.0T 11%
    2007 $9.0T 6%
    2006 $8.5T 7%
    2005 $7.9T 8%
    2004 $7.4T 9%
    2003 $6.8T 9%
    2002 $6.2T 7%
    2001 $5.8T 2%
    2000 $5.7T 0%

    Source: Fiscal Data. Debt for 2023 is as of January, with the year-over-year increase reflecting the growth from October 2022 to January 2023. October is the start of the fiscal year for the U.S. government. Debt includes both debt held by the public and intragovernmental holdings.

    The last time the government had a surplus was in 2001, when debt rose only 2% due to interest costs. Since then, the largest jumps in U.S. debt have been during the Global Financial Crisis—which saw three straight years of double-digit growth rates—and in 2020 due to trillions of dollars of COVID-19 stimulus.

    U.S. federal debt rises during recessions because government revenue, primarily composed of taxes, decreases. At the same time, the government increases spending to help stimulate an economic recovery.

    And in today’s case, the U.S. is facing additional financial issues. As the country’s senior population grows and people live longer, this puts pressure on programs that serve older Americans such as Social Security. Healthcare is becoming more expensive and is the second-fastest growing part of the U.S. budget.

    The Pros and Cons of Debt

    U.S. debt helps fund critical programs for Americans, including retirement and disability benefits, healthcare, economic security, and national defense.

    As one example of the impact of these programs, income security nearly halved the percent of the population living below the poverty line in 2019 from 22.8% to 12.2%.

    Of course, U.S. debt also comes with challenges. A chief concern is the ability to pay the interest costs on U.S. debt, especially as interest rates rise.

    Before rate hikes began, interest costs amounted to 6% of the U.S. budget in the 2021 fiscal year. Fast forward to December 2022, and interest costs amounted to 15% of total government spending since the start of the fiscal year in October.

    Addressing the Problem

    In January 2023, the U.S. hit its debt ceiling, also known as its borrowing limit. While some countries tie their debt to GDP, the U.S. sets an exact limit in dollar terms.

    The government would run out of money to pay its debts this summer if the ceiling is not raised, though policymakers have historically agreed to debt ceiling increases in the past to avoid a default. In 2011, the U.S. narrowly avoided default due to a last-minute debt ceiling negotiation and the country’s credit rating was downgraded as a result.

    Tackling U.S. debt is simple in theory: raise taxes or the debt limit, reduce spending, or a combination of all three. However, it’s much more difficult in practice. Which taxes should be raised? Which programs should be cut? What happens the next time the debt limit is reached?

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 23:20

  • Why Colorado Is Topping The Charts In Violent Crime
    Why Colorado Is Topping The Charts In Violent Crime

    Authored by Katie Spence via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Rep. Gabe Evans isn’t a career politician. Before being elected to his first term as a Colorado State representative on Nov. 8, 2022, Evans served 12 years in the U.S. Army and Colorado Army National Guard, and 10 years as an Arvada, Colorado, police officer, sergeant, and lieutenant.

    As such, Evans has extensive experience in law enforcement and combating crime. When he was asked about a March report from the U.S. Department of Justice (DOJ) that found that among the 22 most populous states, Colorado was number one for violent crime and what’s led to the increase, Evans was quick to answer.

    In 2012, 2013, 2014, what we really started to see was this push to either reduce penalties or to completely decriminalize a whole bunch of different—and I’ll call them addictive substances because, to me, that’s the important part of this—but I’m talking drugs,” Evans told The Epoch Times.

    It’s the addiction power of drugs that I think kind of laid part of the foundation for where we’re at. There’s a lot of [legislation] we’ve [passed] to reduce penalties on meth, on cocaine, on heroin, on fentanyl. We just legalized, via a popular referendum, psilocybin this last election.

    And the unfortunate side effect of all that is there is still a massive international presence dedicated to the drug trade. You know, you’ve got huge cartels in Mexico that the Mexican government has trouble controlling.”

    Boxes carrying a total of more than 3,100 pounds of illicit drugs seized at the southwest border in San Diego, California, on Oct. 9, 2020. (US Customs and Border Protection)

    Evans said the push to reduce drug penalties encouraged cartels to “set up shop” in Colorado, as did the push to make it harder to enforce existing laws. “What happens is, inadvertently or not, [these policies] attract a huge criminal presence from the people who make a living distributing and trafficking this stuff,” Evans said.

    That, Evans added, led to an increase in other crimes, like vehicle theft and robberies, to fuel drug habits.

    Still, lax drug laws aren’t entirely responsible for Colorado’s escalating crime. The other factor, Evans explained, is what’s happening to officers.

    “You don’t usually see a lot of attrition in law enforcement in the 5-to-15-year range,” Evan said. “When Senate Bill 20-217 kicked in, most of the attrition occurred in that 5-to-15-year range.

    Among other provisions, SB 217 requires all local law enforcement to wear body-worn cameras—except in undercover, and certain situations—updating reporting requirements, and updated penalties for unlawful use of force. It also limits how officers can respond to a protest or demonstration, and allows for civil action suits against officers.

    “I mean, look at me. I was 10 years into my career. I was the youngest lieutenant in recent history at Arvada. I was making a solid six figures, and I walked away from that career, in which I was on a trajectory to be a chief or a sheriff in a few more years if I wanted to be competitive.

    “And I walked away from it. And there are, from my agency alone—my agency is less than 200 cops—from my agency alone, I can tell you dozens of similar stories of solid cops, solid detectives, solid sergeants with 5-to-15 years of experience that said, ‘I’m out. I cannot work in this toxic environment.’ That goes back to Senate Bill 217.”

    Escalating Crime

    The DOJ March report analyzed data from the National Crime Victimization Survey (NCVS) from 2017–2019 and found 45 “violent victimizations per 1,000 persons age 12 or older” in Colorado. Violent victimization includes sexual assault or rape, robbery, and aggravated and simple assault.

    The NCVS is considered the nation’s primary source for data on criminal victimization because it includes crimes reported and not reported to the police. The March report is the first time the Bureau of Justice Statistics (BJS) has released the NCVS’s victimization data.

    Moreover, while the report covers 2017–2019, the most recent data shows Colorado crimes have escalated. The Common Sense Institute reports that in 2022, crimes increased in seven major categories—arson, prostitution/pandering, robbery, motor vehicle theft, buying stolen property, vandalism, and drug possession/sales. In fact, for drug trafficking, the Colorado State Patrol reports that Colorado is in the middle of a 10-year drug trafficking record.

    A suitcase full of bags of fentanyl pills seized by DEA Los Angeles. (Courtesy of DEA Los Angeles)

    In the first five months of 2022, Colorado law enforcement seized more fentanyl than it did for all of 2021—enough to kill 93 million people.

    The report states, “Concurrent with Colorado’s rising crime rates, since the start of the pandemic, incarceration in Department of Corrections facilities dropped by 15.5 percent, the number of offenders on parole by 14.1 percent, and the number of offenders on probation by 14.4 percent. A rise in crime should catalyze a corresponding rise in arrests, convictions, and incarceration for the sake of public safety and justice for victims.”

    The reason escalating crime hasn’t resulted in a corresponding rise in law enforcement is because of changing laws.

    Legislation’s Impact

    “The vast majority of our general assembly is pushing bills that lower penalties for crimes and otherwise find ways of turning the criminals into victims in Colorado,” Colorado State Republican Rep. Ryan Armagost told The Epoch Times. Like Evans, Armagost served in the military and was in law enforcement for 10 years.

    The bills that [Republicans] push forward that would raise penalties for auto thefts and things like that are being killed before they even get to the floor,” Armagost said. “And then bills that are otherwise helping to find alternative means for those who offend—other than going through the correctional system—is kind of the means that the Democrats have been pushing. So, we’ve been seeing a lot more of the alternative sentencing and alternative means for detention.”

    Armagost noted that people are showing up to support the Democrat’s bills lowering penalties, while also showing up to protest the Republican’s bills looking to stiffen penalties. But he pointed out that there’s a distinct criminal thread.

    “The rallying and support for [the Democrats’ bills] have been [from] the people who have offended and the people who are going to have a criminal record. They are coming out and speaking in support of these bills that [Democrats are] pushing. It is the same group that comes out to oppose the bills that the Republican side is pushing to stiffen penalties and stiffen sensors and corrections, correctional facilities, and stuff like that,” he said.

    Evans, in agreement with Armagost, added, “You know, when certain narcotics are either legalized or penalties reduced, we see people come in—and when I say people, I’m talking cartels, organized crime, drug traffickers, things like that—they come in with the billions of dollars at their disposal and set up shop. That’s one of the things that drives our No. 1-in-the-nation auto theft rate. That’s one of the things that helps drive our violent crime rate up.

    Police investigate the scene after a shooting in Colorado Springs, Colo., on Oct. 31, 2015. (Christian Murdock/The Gazette via AP)

    “I remember a particular case that we had shortly after a particular drug was legalized, where there was a daytime burglary, and this mid-70s gentleman homeowner was assaulted and thrown down the stairs in his own home by somebody who had just gotten off of probation for drugs and assault in Texas that came to Colorado. He told me after I Mirandized him, he told me to my face, ‘The reason I came to Colorado is because I like your drug laws.’”

    Former Colorado State Rep. Dave Williams, who now serves as the Colorado GOP chair, concurred. “Colorado has certainly been at the forefront of legalizing drugs, and this all started back when Colorado legalized marijuana in 2012,” Williams told The Epoch Times.

    “We were one of the few states that actually legalized recreational marijuana. And that brought in a huge influx of folks wanting to partake in and get involved in marijuana. And that sort of kick-started it all.

    You had transients or homeless individuals, people with mental health conditions, that just came and started out panhandling. But then they started to engage in other types of crime, like burglary, armed robbery, or things of that nature to obtain resources to get marijuana. It’s only gotten worse from there as time has gone on.”

    Williams added, “Democrats are absolutely incentivizing crime. For whatever reason, they care more about criminals that mean us harm or harm to themselves. And they’re more interested in letting criminals run loose on the streets than enforcing the law and making sure that hardworking taxpayers can conduct their affairs safely in a safe environment.”

    Still, lax drug laws and laws that incentive crime are only part of the problem.

    Demonizing Police

    “Law enforcement in Colorado is facing a historic recruiting, retention, and morale crisis,” Evans said. “Nobody wants to be a cop. The cops that were cops are fleeing the profession in droves. And that’s the second prong of this kind of two-pronged issue that’s driving crime up in Colorado.” Specifically, according to Evans, one of the policies that “broke the back” of law enforcement was the passage of SB 217.

    Evans explained that after the police custody death of George Floyd on May 31, 2020, Denver experienced massive riots—the third most violent in the nation—and lawmakers, hoping to quell the fury, passed SB 217, the “Enhanced Law Enforcement Integrity” Act. It was signed into law on June 19, 2020, having passed through the general assembly and into law in 16 days.

    According to Evans, two parts of SB 217 are particularly demoralizing to law enforcement. The first was the requirement that every encounter be extensively documented, adding significant paperwork to an already demanding job, and the second was a body camera requirement.

    “The insidious part of how Senate Bill 217 implemented body cams was that it basically put a guilty-until-proven-innocent mandate in there which said that if something is not captured on law enforcement body camera—and whatever that was that was not captured is challenged in court—the courts are allowed to assume misconduct on the part of the officer, and it’s up to the cop to prove that they didn’t behave in an inappropriate manner,” Evans explained.

    Police officers walk through a cloud of tear gas as they try to disperse people protesting against the death of George Floyd in front of the Colorado State Capitol, in Denver, Colo., on May 30, 2020, amid nationwide protests and riots. (Michael Ciaglo/Getty Images)

    Evans said that when he was an officer, he loved his body cam, but added that there are numerous reasons why it might not capture footage. “If somebody makes an allegation against you, and the body cam didn’t capture it—the battery died, you forgot to turn it on, you know, whatever—there are 101 reasons why the good well-meaning cop who’s doing the right thing, the body cam might not be ready. … [Then] the courts are allowed to impugn and basically assume misconduct on behalf of the officer.

    “Now it’s on you to prove that misconduct did not occur. So, every time cops are putting on their body camera, it’s a visible reminder to them that, look, the state of Colorado thinks that you’re actually the bad guy and you’re the one that’s out here terrorizing and causing problems in the community.

    Armagost agreed with Evans, adding that most of the anti-law enforcement legislation originates in California, and is then adopted by the Colorado General Assembly.

    “Watching what’s going on nationally, pretty much you’ll notice that whatever is passing legislation in California, becomes a proposed bill the next year in Colorado,” said Armagost.

    “The anti-law enforcement sentiment is definitely one of those. They keep finding bills that are working in California and trying them here to further tie the hands of law enforcement and their ability to do their job.”

    A police vehicle is seen in front of the Boulder High School after police responded to an unconfirmed report of an active shooter in Boulder, Colo., on Feb. 22, 2023. (Kevin Mohatt/Reuters)

    Armagost added that in Denver, school resource officers were removed from almost all the schools, which he said “led to an uptick in incidences within our schools. We just had a shooting a couple of weeks ago in a Denver school.”

    Armagost said that currently, Republicans have one of the smallest Caucuses they’ve ever had in the General Assembly, and Democrats have used that to attack police officers.

    “[Democrats] made the law enforcement career the most toxic career to be in by basically giving everyone the right to be as belligerent and disrespectful to law enforcement as possible, and get away with it.

    You have law enforcement officers leaving early, not even finishing to retirement, at rates that we’ve never seen before. So, I mean, the retention in law enforcement agencies is very, very slim. It’s very disturbing. … Nobody wants to be a cop. Nobody really wants to be subjected to that kind of abuse on a daily basis anymore.”

    Reversing Rising Crime

    To reverse flagging retention and recruitment rates in law enforcement, and also reverse escalating violent crime in Colorado, Armagost said, “We need to evaluate, I think as a whole, and hopefully convince our democratic counterparts that we need to focus more on taking care of our protectors, not on taking care of criminals.”

    Evans concurred, “’I’m always up for criminal justice reform, but not if it’s making cops out to be the bad guys. We have to support law enforcement. And you know, I was a lieutenant. I’m very familiar with vicarious liability, all the bad stuff that happens when we got cops doing bad things, so I’m all for more training. I’m all for more education.

    “But we have to make it an environment in which people actually want to join this career and dedicate a significant chunk of their life to it. Because that’s the only option that we got. We have to be able to fix that recruiting and retention problem.”

    John Garrod, of Arvada, stands holding a blue line flag at the beginning of a line of about 30 police cars lined up for a procession in honor of the officer who was fatally shot in Arvada, Colo., on June 21, 2021. (Colleen Slevin/AP Photo)

    Specifically, to reduce rising violent crime, Evans added, “We need to have a nice balance of carrot and stick. If you harm your fellow human beings, you’re gonna be caught, you’re gonna be held accountable for it. That’s the stick.

    “But we also have to have the carrot, of look, we need to increase our mental health, behavioral health, substance abuse, we need to increase the focus on those programs to help those individuals that do want to be productive citizens actually have a productive life. … If you want a hand-up, we extend you an open hand of assistance. But if you continue to want to victimize your community, you will be met with a closed fist.”

    The Epoch Times’ requests for comment from Democratic lawmakers in Colorado were not returned by the time of publication.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 23:00

  • "Fairly Severe" Corporate Credit Crunch Is "Harbinger Of More Stress To Come"
    “Fairly Severe” Corporate Credit Crunch Is “Harbinger Of More Stress To Come”

    It has been over a month since signs of banking stress first appeared in regional banks, and we quickly identified the beginning of a credit crunch. 

    Days after the collapse of Silicon Valley Bank, we pointed out that the next “credit event” had arrived. Then cited a note from Jan Hatzius, Goldman Sachs chief economist, who pointed out small and medium-sized banks serve a critical function in the US economy:

    “Banks with less than $250bn in assets account for roughly 50% of US commercial and industrial lending, 60% of residential real estate lending, 80% of commercial real estate lending, and 45% of consumer lending.” 

    And throughout March into April, we outlined the macroeconomic impact of the regional bank blowups that would be a major catalyst in a pullback of lending: 

    Confirmation of the tightened lending standards and worsening credit crunch that might spark a hard economic landing in the second half was confirmed in the Federal Reserve’s latest Beige Book, which based on information collected before April 10, indicated:

    • Conditions in the broad finance sector deteriorated sharply coinciding with recent stress in the banking sector. Small to medium-sized banks in the District reported widespread declines in loan demand across all loan segments. Credit standards tightened noticeably for all loan types, and loan spreads continued to narrow. Deposit rates moved higher. Finally, delinquency rates edged up on residential and commercial mortgages.

    • Lending volumes and loan demand generally declined across consumer and business loan types.

    • Several Districts noted that banks tightened lending standards amid increased uncertainty and concerns about liquidity.

    It is becoming increasingly clear that credit availability in certain sectors of the economy is contracting at a highly alarming pace. And might only worsen through summer. 

    For more confirmation about the credit crunch is a note from Bloomberg that revealed several findings shedding light on the deteriorating economic outlook. 

    Small businesses say it hasn’t been this difficult to borrow in a decade; the amount of corporate debt trading at distressed levels has surged about 300% over the past year, effectively locking a growing swath of businesses out of financial markets; bond and loan defaults have ticked up; and the Federal Reserve says banks have tightened lending standards. Corporate bankruptcies are on the rise, too, particularly in the construction and retail industries. –Bloomberg

    As a result of the funding crunch, in combination with the Fed’s aggressive interest rate increase, the fastest in decades, Torsten Slok, chief economist at Apollo Global Management, warned:

    “If credit conditions continue to tighten because banks need time to be in a position where they can give loans and operate, that increases risk of a harder landing —even more so than what we thought before.”

    Slok was already discussing “a hard landing before SVB happened” with clients, but now it appears almost inevitable. 

    Meanwhile, Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen had her ‘old lady blinders on’ when she recently said there’s no evidence of lending contraction that would alter her economic outlook.

    Recall, Yellen, as Fed Chair in 2017, was quoted saying there would be no new financial crisis in ‘our lifetimes.’ 

    However, small businesses are finding it more challenging to borrow money. About 9% of owners who borrow frequently said March was a difficult time to find financing than it was three months earlier, according to a survey by the National Federation of Independent Business.

    As lending conditions tighten, Matthew Mish, head of credit strategy at UBS, noted bankruptcies of public and private companies are rising. He said, “We’re already seeing substantial failure rates.” 

    “The weakness we are seeing in smaller issuers is likely a harbinger of more stress to come,” Barclays Plc strategist Bradley Rogoff warned. 

    And with the US default rate noticeably rising, junk bond spreads are set to widen. 

    “The volume of US corporate debt trading at distressed levels — a risk premium of at least 10 percentage points over the benchmark for bonds, or a price of less than 80 cents on the dollar for loans — has surged some 28% since last month’s banking crisis to around $300 billion,” according to Bloomberg. 

    In a recent interview on Bloomberg Television, Jim Caron, co-chief investment officer at Morgan Stanley Global Balanced Funds, said, “There is going to be a credit crunch, not a credit crisis.” He pointed out the credit crunch would unfold over time. 

    PitchBook data shows about a quarter of the $1.4 trillion leveraged loan market carries a B- credit rating, just one notch below CCC grade. 

    Paul Marshall, of Marshall Wace, one of the world’s biggest hedge-fund firms, warned investors earlier this month that the credit crunch will be “fairly severe” and might spark a recession.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 22:40

  • Unvaccinated, Terminally-Ill Alberta Woman Denied Transplant Despite Proof Of COVID Natural Immunity
    Unvaccinated, Terminally-Ill Alberta Woman Denied Transplant Despite Proof Of COVID Natural Immunity

    Authored by Andrew Chen via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    A vial of Pfizer-BioNTech COVID-19 vaccine is pictured at an Alberta Health Services vaccination clinic in Didsbury, Alta., on June 29, 2021. (Jeff McIntosh/The Canadian Press)

    A terminally-ill Alberta woman who was removed from an organ transplant list because she was unvaccinated against COVID-19 continued to be denied access to the medical procedure even after obtaining an independent medical report showing that she has natural immunity, said the Justice Centre for Constitutional Freedoms (JCCF).

    Sheila Annette Lewis has been challenging the constitutionality of the vaccine requirement put in place by Alberta Health Services (AHS) for transplant candidates.

    On March 28, Lewis provided her doctors in the Alberta transplant program with a privately-funded medical report, which established that she has strong natural immunity to COVID-19 and had overcome previous COVID-19 infections, the JCCF said in a press release issued April 18. The report was provided by the Kinexus Bioinformatics Corporation on March 24.

    The Kinexus report said Lewis’s blood sample “clearly supports the presence of SARS-CoV-2 immunoreactivity.” It also noted that she was likely infected with the disease around mid-September 2021 and was reinfected again more recently, and thus has “extremely high levels of antibodies against SARS-CoV-2.”

    Lewis asked her physicians to test her blood for COVID-19 antibodies nearly a year ago to see if she was naturally immune, and they refused to do so, according to JCCF.

    Response

    After Lewis provided her Kinexus report, one of her transplant physicians informed her on April 3 that despite the test results, “nothing had changed in regards to healthcare policies pertaining to COVID-19 vaccination requirements” and that she would still need to receive the vaccines before the hospital would give her an organ transplant, the JCCF said in its press release.

    [The physician] told her that the Kinexus Report concluded that even with natural immunity, she would need a booster dose of the Covid-19 vaccine. However, the report does not say anything about Ms. Lewis needing a booster dose of the Covid-19 vaccine to maintain immunity to Covid-19,” JCCF said.

    The Epoch Times reached out to the AHS in regard to Lewis’s case, but didn’t hear back immediately.

    Alberta lifted all COVID-19-related mandatory public health restrictions on June 14, 2022.

    A guideline from the Alberta government, listing a number of “routine immunizations” that adult organ transplant candidates are required to receive prior to a transplant, says patients should have a “primary series” of three doses of COVID-19 vaccines, while booster shots are needed “at least 6 months after primary series or previous booster dose.” The guideline, published on March 20, is a revision of immunization principles for transplant recipients issued on June 1, 2022.

    JCCF said it has sent a demand letter to AHS, the Alberta hospital, and Lewis’s transplant physicians, “requesting that they accept her now established natural immunity to Covid-19 as an alternative to Covid-19 vaccination and reinstate her to the high-priority transplant waitlist by April 21, 2023.”

    The transplant program team, AHS, and the hospital ought to accept Ms. Lewis’s natural immunity to Covid-19 as an alternative to Covid-19 vaccination and reinstate her to the high priority transplant list immediately,” Allison Pejovic, Lewis’s legal counsel, said in the JCCF press release.

    “There is no principled medical or scientific reason to continue to deny Ms. Lewis a life-saving organ transplant.”

    Lewis previously took AHS, an Alberta hospital where she would receive her transplant, and six transplant program physicians to court, but was unsuccessful at both the Alberta Court of Queen’s Bench and the Alberta Court of Appeal in 2022, JCCF said. Both courts found that the Canadian Charter of Rights and Freedoms and the Alberta Bill of Rights do not apply to the COVID-19 vaccine policies developed by the AHS and other defendants.

    Lewis has filed an application with the Supreme Court of Canada, asking it to hear her appeal. The country’s highest court has not yet decided whether it will do so, JCCF said.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 22:20

  • LVMH Pivots From Hong Kong To Mainland China In Bid To Capture Soaring Lust For Luxury
    LVMH Pivots From Hong Kong To Mainland China In Bid To Capture Soaring Lust For Luxury

    LVMH Moët Hennessy Louis Vuitton – the world’s biggest purveyor of luxury goods – has shifted resources out of the luxury shopping mecca Hong Kong for mainland China.

    According to Bloomberg sources, LVMH has started the process of moving its regional headquarters from Hong Kong to Shanghai. It has also relocated some top executives to mainland China. 

    The top global luxury conglomerate will focus on Shanghai, Chengdu, Guangzhou, and Shenzhen markets as Hong Kong’s retail scene slumps. 

    Hong Kong suffered a series of missteps over the last several years, including anti-government protests in 2019 that kept visitors away, while China’s Covid zero policies limited cross-border activity. This has led to several retailers shuttering retail stores across the metro area.

    The pivot by LVMH, which owns brands including Tiffany & Co., Christian Dior, Fendi, and Louis Vuitton, is due to a surge in first-quarter sales as Chinese consumers on the mainland splurged on luxury items as the pace of the world’s second-largest economy gained momentum. 

    In a post-Covid era, LVMH anticipates that most Chinese luxury spending will be in mainland China rather than Hong Kong. Shopping centers located in duty-free zones like Hainan and the gambling districts of Macau are being swamped by these shoppers, leading to a decline in the importance of Hong Kong as a top luxury shopping hub. 

    LVMH is following the money.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 22:00

  • AI Will Eventually Be 'As Good A Tutor As Any Human': Bill Gates
    AI Will Eventually Be ‘As Good A Tutor As Any Human’: Bill Gates

    Authored by Samantha Flom via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Artificial intelligence (AI) may not be advanced enough to replace teachers now, but according to Bill Gates, that time is not far off.

    “The AIs will get to that ability to be as good a tutor as any human ever could,” the Microsoft co-founder said at the ASU+GSV Summit in San Diego on April 18.

    “We have enough sample sets of those things being done well that the training can be done,” he added. “So, I’d say that is a very worthwhile milestone, is to engage in a dialogue where you’re helping to understand what they’re missing. And we’re not that far.”

    Bill Gates speaks onstage at the TIME100 Summit 2022 in New York City on June 7, 2022. (Jemal Countess/Getty Images for TIME)

    Gates’ comments came within the context of a larger conversation about the future role of technology in education with Jessie Woolley-Wilson, CEO of DreamBox Learning.

    “AI has, ever since the focus became machine learning, it’s achieved some unbelievable milestones,” Gates told Woolley-Wilson. “You know, it can listen to speech and recognize speech better than humans. It can recognize images and videos better than humans. The area that it was essentially useless in was in reading and writing. You could not take, say, a biology textbook and read it and pass the AP exam.”

    However, Gates noted that, where previous iterations of AI were incapable of replicating human understanding, emerging systems, like Microsoft-backed OpenAI’s GPT-4, had begun to bridge the gap.

    “The breakthrough we have now, which is very recent, is more to do with reading and writing—this incredible fluency to say, ‘Write a letter … like Einstein or Shakespeare would have written this thing,’ and to be at least 80 percent of the time very stunned by it.”

    Threat to Humanity

    In truth, industry experts have not only been stunned but, in many cases, unnerved by recent advancements in the evolution of AI, fearing the ripple effects of such technology on society.

    “AI systems with human-competitive intelligence can pose profound risks to society and humanity, as shown by extensive research and acknowledged by top AI labs,” warns a March 22 letter that has more than 27,500 signatures, with dozens of AI experts among them.

    Accusing AI creators of engaging in an “out-of-control race” to develop “ever more powerful digital minds that no one—not even their creators—can understand, predict, or reliably control,” the letter’s signatories called for an immediate six-month pause in the training of more advanced AI systems as society grapples with how to ensure their safety.

    One of those signatories was Tesla CEO Elon Musk, another tech tycoon who has been outspoken about his concerns regarding the capabilities of AI.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 21:40

  • A $300,000 Salary Feels Like $100,000 In These U.S. Cities
    A $300,000 Salary Feels Like $100,000 In These U.S. Cities

    Today in “why, again, do we need inflation?” news, a brand new study by SmartAsset reveals that in several U.S. cities, earning as much as $300,000 per year only feels like $100,000 due to increases in cost of living. 

    The study “adjusted $100,000 for the local cost of living in 76 of the largest cities in the U.S. using data from the Council for Community and Economic Research” using an index that took into account the price of housing, groceries, utilities, transportation, and other necessary purchases for Q3 2022. 

    The study found that three major U.S. cities required take home pay of over $300,000 to be able to spend like you earn $100,000 per year. Among them, of course, is San Francisco: “Residents of Honolulu, New York City and San Francisco who earn this amount are taxed roughly 40.5% or higher and have a cost of living more than 82% above the national average.”

    The study also found that it is easiest to “make it” in Texas – which could explain the massive defection currently taking place, wherein California residents are hauling their belongings to, and putting up roots in, the lonestar state. 

    “Salaries in El Paso, Corpus Christi, Lubbock, Houston, San Antonio, Fort Worth and Arlington can be as low as $119,300 while feeling like a true $100,000. Texans at this income level hold onto an average of 5.7 percentage points more of their annual salaries compared to states that charge income taxes, while the cost of living across Texas is generally lower than the national average,” the study reads.

    Meanwhile, for the privilege of living in California, you require the highest gross income of any state. SmartAsset writes: “San Francisco, Oakland, Los Angeles, Long Beach and San Diego all require exceptionally high salaries to feel like $100,000. Those in the Bay Area, for example, require at least $147,000 in salary for middle-class comfort. These Golden State cities command particularly high tax rates and cost of living premiums.”

    And believe it or not, despite Miami’s high cost of living, the study found that due to its low taxes it is more affordable to live in than places like Chicago and Baltimore:

    In general, states with no state income taxes have an edge when it comes to overall purchasing power. States that don’t take a cut of residents’ income taxes include Alaska, Florida, Nevada, New Hampshire, South Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Washington and Wyoming.

    Are politicians, including Chicago’s newly elected Mayor, paying attention? 

    You can read the entire study here.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 21:20

  • Johnstone: Biden DOJ Indicts Four Americans For "Weaponized" Free Speech
    Johnstone: Biden DOJ Indicts Four Americans For “Weaponized” Free Speech

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone,

    The Biden administration’s Department of Justice has just charged four members of the African People’s Socialist Party (APSP) for conspiring to act as agents of Russia by using speech and political action in ways the DOJ says “weaponized” the First Amendment rights of Americans.

    The Washington Post reports:

    Federal authorities charged four Americans on Tuesday with roles in a malign campaign pushing pro-Kremlin propaganda in Florida and Missouri — expanding a previous case that charged a Russian operative with running illegal influence agents within the United States.

    The FBI signaled its interest in the alleged activities in a series of raids last summer, at which point authorities charged a Moscow man, Aleksandr Viktorovich Ionov, with working for years on behalf of Russian government officials to fund and direct fringe political groups in the United States. Among other things, Ionov allegedly advised the political campaigns of two unidentified candidates for public office in Florida.

    Ionov’s influence efforts were allegedly directed and supervised by officers of the FSB, a Russian government intelligence service.

    Now, authorities have added charges against four Americans who allegedly did Ionov’s bidding through groups including the African People’s Socialist Party and the Uhuru Movement in Florida, Black Hammer in Georgia, and an unidentified political group in California — part of an effort to influence American politics.

    AFP reports that the conspiracy charges carry a sentence of up to ten years, with three of the four APSP members additionally charged with acting as unregistered agents of Russia which carries another five years.

    “Russia’s foreign intelligence service allegedly weaponized our First Amendment rights – freedoms Russia denies its own citizens – to divide Americans and interfere in elections in the United States,” said Assistant Attorney General Matthew G. Olsen in the DOJ’s press release regarding the indictments, adding, “The department will not hesitate to expose and prosecute those who sow discord and corrupt U.S. elections in service of hostile foreign interests, regardless of whether the culprits are U.S. citizens or foreign individuals abroad.”

    Looks like the United States has decided to dispense with those freedoms as well.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The superseding indictment containing these charges consists of a lot of verbal gymnastics to obfuscate the fact that the DOJ is prosecuting US citizens for speech and political activities in the United States which happen not to align with the wishes of the US government. The grand jury alleges that the aforementioned Ionov “directed” these Americans to “publish pro-Russian propaganda” and “information designed to cause dissention in the United States,” which is about as vague and amorphous an allegation as you could possibly come up with.

    For the record Omali Yeshitela, the founder and chairman of the African People’s Socialist Party and one of the four Americans named in the indictment, has adamantly denied ever having worked for Russia. Earlier this month before charges were brought against him, the Tampa Bay Times quoted him as saying, “I ain’t ever worked for a Russian. Never ever ever ever. They know I have never worked for Russia. Their problem is, I’ve never worked for them.”

    But it’s important to note that this should not matter. Under the First Amendment the government is forbidden to abridge anyone’s freedom to speak however they want and associate with whomever they please, which necessarily includes being as vocally pro-Russia as they like and promoting whatever political agendas they see fit, whether that happens to advance the interests of the Russian government or not. The indictment alleges that the four Americans engaged in “agitprop” by “writing articles that contained Russian propaganda and disinformation,” but even if we pretend that’s both (A) a quantifiable claim and (B) a proven fact, propaganda and disinformation are both speech that the government is constitutionally forbidden from repressing.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It’s not reasonable for the government to just dismiss the First Amendment on the grounds that it is being “weaponized”. You can’t have your government dictating what speech is valid and what counts as “agitprop” and “disinformation”, because they’ll always define those terms in ways which benefit the government, thus giving more power to the powerful and taking power away from the people. You can’t have your government dictating what political groups are legitimate and which ones are tools of a foreign government, because you can always count on the powerful set such designations in ways which benefit themselves.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    There’s also the brazen hypocrisy of it all. The US government is constantly engaging in foreign influence operations with outfits like the National Endowment for Democracy, which was set up to help foment coups and color revolutions and advance US information interests overtly in ways the CIA used to do covertly.

    As commentator Brian Berletic noted on Twitter, “The US through the National Endowment for Democracy has created armies of organizations carrying out malign influence operations around the world including here in Thailand. When the Thai government attempts to stop this activity, the US embassy shouts ‘free speech.’ Thailand’s government and others around the world could easily cite this move by the US Justice Department to target and uproot US-funded organizations doing exactly this and worse.”

    So for the US government to now claim it’s legitimate to start throwing US citizens in prison for a decade because they published “propaganda” for another country is absurd, and more than a little scary. The most powerful government in the world needs more political dissent at home, not less, and here they are trying to turn it into a crime.

    When they claim the members of the APSP published “propaganda” and promoted “dissention”, what they really mean is that they engaged in speech and political activism that the US government does not like. The spinmeisters will try to spin it, the legal mumbo-jumbo will try to obfuscate it, but that’s what’s happening. Don’t let them conceal this from you. They’re not worried about Russian propaganda, they’re worried you’ll stop listening to US propaganda.

    *  *  *

    My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, throwing some money into my tip jar on PatreonPaypal, or Substack, buying an issue of my monthly zine, and following me on FacebookTwitterSoundcloud or YouTube. If you want to read more you can buy my books. The best way to make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for at my website or on Substack, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. All works co-authored with my husband Tim Foley.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2

    Liked it? Take a second to support Caitlin Johnstone on Patreon!

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 21:00

  • "Buy Now, Pay Later" Mania Sends Americans Deeper Into 'Black Hole' Of Debt
    “Buy Now, Pay Later” Mania Sends Americans Deeper Into ‘Black Hole’ Of Debt

    Americans are drowning in credit card debt as elevated inflation makes the cost of living unbearable. About 70% of consumers are financially stressed, which means ones who’ve maxed out credit cards and drained personal savings amid 24 months of negative real wages are now resorting to “buy now, pay later” (BNPL) apps for basic items like groceries. 

    Bloomberg spoke with Faith Smith, a 34yo administrative assistant that is financially stressed, who said she couldn’t resist when retailer Target Corp. pinged her email with the ability to BNPL.

    Smith said she spends upwards of $500 per month on groceries. She said she already uses BNPL apps to purchase clothing and school supplies for her young daughter, but when the option came up to use it for groceries — she said it was a no-brainer: 

    “It helps for a week or two, but then you’re stuck with a grocery bill for a couple of months.”

    In the last several years, consumers have been addicted to the BNPL apps such as Afterpay, Affirm, Klarna, and PayPal.

    Almost half of Americans have used BNPL apps, and of those, about 1 in 5 rely on such apps to buy groceries, according to a recent survey from LendingTree Inc. Some 27% of users use the loans as a bridge to their next paycheck. — Bloomberg

    According to Consumer Financial Protection Bureau, BNPL surged during the pandemic, with five of the main US lenders originating $24.2 billion in 2021, up from $2 billion in 2019. The payment method is an attractive alternative to credit cards, with elevated interest rates

    Source: Bloomberg 

    The popularity of BNPL will only soar from here as CNBC’s Financial Confidence Survey found most Americans are living paycheck to paycheck. Inflation, economic instability, and a lack of savings led to 70% of respondents indicating they were stressed about their personal finances. 

    However, the convenience of BNPL and spreading monthly payments out for a predetermined time, if it’s just a few months or several years, can lead to a financial disaster if consumers miss payments, as this would mean late fees would pile up and credit scores would drop. 

    “You are putting yourself into the cycle of debt that would be very difficult to get out of,” says Terri Bradford, a payments specialist at the Federal Reserve Bank of Kansas City.

    LendingTree showed nearly half of the consumers are using BNPL for clothing, shoes, and accessories. About 21% are using it for groceries. 

    Source: Bloomberg 

    We expect an increasing number of financially stressed consumers will be tapping BNPL for groceries and basic items as macroeconomic conditions continue to sour

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 20:40

  • Confidence In Childhood Vaccine Plunges By Up To 44% During COVID-19
    Confidence In Childhood Vaccine Plunges By Up To 44% During COVID-19

    Authored by Jessie Zhang via Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    A new report on immunisation suggests that confidence in childhood vaccines has fallen up to 44 percent in 52 countries coinciding with the largest sustained backslide in childhood immunization in 30 years, fuelled by the COVID-19 pandemic.

    Childhood vaccine confidence drops by over a third during the pandemic. (Narinder Nanu/AFP/Getty Images)

    The only three countries where vaccine confidence remained steady were China, India, and Mexico. The data from these countries indicates the perception of the importance of vaccines held firm or even improved.

    The report attributed this trend to several factors, including uncertainty about the response to the pandemic, growing access to a wider range of information, and political polarization.

    Catherine Russell, the executive director of UNICEF, said that this data is a worrying warning signal.

    At the height of the pandemic, scientists rapidly developed vaccines that saved countless lives. But despite this historic achievement, fear and disinformation about all types of vaccines circulated as widely as the virus itself,” Russell said in a press release.

    “We cannot allow confidence in routine immunizations to become another victim of the pandemic. Otherwise, the next wave of deaths could be of more children with measles, diphtheria or other preventable diseases.”

    72 doses of Vaccines from Birth to Eighteen Years

    Recently, vaccine critics have brought to light the large number of shots that are given to American children.

    According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC)’s immunization schedule, children are given up to 72 doses of 16 vaccines.

    Despite this, Robert F. Kennedy Jr., the founder and chief legal counsel of Children’s Health Defense and author of “The Real Anthony Fauci,” said that not a single vaccine on the schedule has been safety tested prior to being approved.

    “None of the 72 doses of vaccines that are currently mandated for children has ever been tested in a pre-licensing safety study against a true placebo,” Kennedy told the Epoch Times.

    It is a big problem, he says, because many of the injuries that come from vaccines, like all medicines, are long-term injuries.

    “You may say that the vaccine prevented the infection, but then you don’t count the cancers, the neurological disorders, the ADHD, and the autoimmune diseases that pop up five years from now. You need long-term studies,” he said.

    Many injuries that come from vaccines are long-term injuries but are often pushed out before these are discovered for expediency. (AP Photo/Sergei Chuzavkov)

    Kennedy said that DTP (Diphtheria, Tetanus, Pertussis) vaccine is the most popular vaccine in the world because of the efforts of those behind vaccines.

    “Incidentally [the US] withdrew the vaccine because it was killing so many children, it was causing brain damage according to a study that was done by UCLA,” Kennedy said.

    We ended it in the United States. We replaced it with a DTaP vaccine, an attenuated version, which is safer but less effective. They did the same thing in Europe.”

    Eventually, the Danish government did an extensive study of DTP with 30 years of vaccination records with leading pro-vaccination scientists, including Peter Aaby. They found that the vaccine was causing anemia, dysentery, and pneumonia and were killing more people than diphtheria, tetanus, and pertussis did prior to the introduction of the vaccine.

    That’s the danger. You could have a vaccine for 30 or 40 years, and nobody actually notices that the kids who are taking it are worse off from a health perspective because you have never done the placebo-controlled trials,” he said.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 20:20

  • Sons Of El Chapo Fed Enemies To Pet Tigers, DoJ Says
    Sons Of El Chapo Fed Enemies To Pet Tigers, DoJ Says

    The Justice Department revealed in new court documents that the sons of notorious drug lord Joaquin “El Chapo” Guzman were absolute savages.

    The four sons — Ivan Guzman Salazar, 40, Alfredo Guzman Salazar, 37, Joaquin Guzman Lopez, 36, and Ovidio Guzman Lopez, 33 — known as the Chapitos, or little Chapos — were among 28 Sinaloa cartel members charged by the DoJ last week with fentanyl-trafficking.

    DoJ accused the cartel members of running “the largest, most violent and most prolific fentanyl trafficking operation in the world,” it also listed the torture methods and types of executions used by the cartel. 

    As per the indictment, the Chapitos owned multiple ranches where they would interrogate rival cartel members, public officials, law enforcement officers, and anyone who got in their way. 

    “Once information was obtained by these captives, typically through torture, these individuals were killed — either by or at the direction of the Chapitos themselves — and the bodies disposed of throughout the area. While many of these victims were shot, others were fed dead or alive to tigers” belonging to Alfredo and Ivan, the indictment read. 

    Court documents said one of the Sinaloa cartel’s hitmen, known as “Ninis,” ripped out the muscles of a person they were interrogating and fed the flesh to one of the Chapitos’ pet tigers. 

    El Chapo’s sons also used waterboarding and electrocution against rival cartel members. The DoJ said the Ninis would test the potency of the fentanyl on prisoners. 

    Among the three Chapitos charged, only Ovidio Guzmán López has been detained by police. El Chapo, their father and Sinaloa cartel’s founder, is in a maximum security prison in Colorado and serving a life sentence for drug trafficking and money laundering.  

    Full DoJ Indictment

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 20:00

  • IRS Pays $23 Billion Less In Tax Refunds For 2023 Filing Season, Worrying Americans
    IRS Pays $23 Billion Less In Tax Refunds For 2023 Filing Season, Worrying Americans

    Authored by Naveen Athrappully via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) is paying $23 billion less in tax refunds for the 2023 filing season—with the average refund amount found to be lower by nearly $300.

    The IRS building is seen in Washington on Sept. 28, 2020. (Erin Scott/Reuters)

    The IRS has issued over 69 million refunds collectively worth $198.868 billion for the week ending April 7, 2023, according to the agency’s filing statistics. Compared to the $222.344 billion in refunds handed out in the 2022 season, the 2023 filing season’s refund is $23.476 billion smaller or about 10.6 percent lower.

    The average refund amount between the filing seasons has dropped from $3,175 to $2,878, a decline of 9.3 percent or $297. In fiscal 2022, the IRS collected $2.9 trillion in individual income taxes.

    Back in January, the IRS had suggested that refund amounts could be smaller this time around. “Due to tax law changes such as the elimination of the Advance Child Tax Credit and no Recovery Rebate Credit this year to claim pandemic-related stimulus payments, many taxpayers may find their refunds somewhat lower this year,” the IRS had said in a Jan. 23 news release.

    The U.S. government handed out three rounds of stimulus checks to Americans during the pandemic period. People could claim the missed first and second rounds of stimulus checks on the 2020 tax return. Any missed third-round stimulus checks were claimed in the 2021 return which was filed in the 2022 season.

    The federal government had also expanded the Child Tax Credit (CTC) program during the pandemic, boosting benefits per child from $2,000 to $3,600 for children under the age of 6, and to $3,000 for children between the ages of 6 and 17.

    The benefits of stimulus payments and CTC have now ended, thereby contributing to a lower refund amount during the 2023 filing season.

    Americans Concerned Over Smaller Tax Refunds

    Smaller tax refunds pose a major issue for Americans, according to the results of a Bankrate survey published last month. When asked how important the tax refund is to their overall financial situation, 43 percent said that the refunds are “very important” while 32 percent said it was “somewhat important.”

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 19:40

  • California Meets 100% Of Water Requests For First Time Since 2006
    California Meets 100% Of Water Requests For First Time Since 2006

    Due to a wet winter and record mountain snowpack, California will provide 100% of the water requested by cities and farms, marking the first time in nearly two decades. 

    The office of California Governor Gavin Newsom released a statement Thursday that said, “State water contractors to 100% of requested supplies for 29 public water agencies that serve 27 million Californians.” 

    This is the highest water allocation since 2006, as state water officials rush to replenish groundwater and aquifers after years of drought. 

    “California is taking action to maximize the capture and storage of water from recent storms and snowpack, increasing water deliveries to 100% for the first time in nearly two decades.

    “California is moving and storing as much water as possible to meet the state’s needs, reduce the risk of flooding, and protect our communities, agriculture, and the environment,” said Governor Newsom.

    Since December, the deluge of atmospheric rivers dumped 78 trillion gallons of water in California, effectively ending a severe multi-year drought

    Many once-depleted reservoirs are filling up with over 80% full – and groundwater reserves have received a significant boost…

    Many regions received record snowpacks

    And the abundance of water has created a rare super bloom in the state’s southern region across hillsides. 

    However, the Department of Water Resources still urges people to limit water usage because one extremely wet year could be followed by more drought.  

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 19:20

  • House GOP Offers Border Crisis Solutions – Will Sound Policies Prevail?
    House GOP Offers Border Crisis Solutions – Will Sound Policies Prevail?

    Authored by Chad Wolf via RealClear Wire,

    To seemingly every American except Biden administration officials, there is an ongoing humanitarian and security crisis at the southern border. In just 26 months, the Biden administration has allowed approximately 4 million illegal aliens into American communities – a number larger than the population of the city of Los Angeles. When confronted with these realities, administration officials have continuously downplayed the situation and offered numerous excuses, including blaming the previous administration and falsely claiming they need new laws to solve the problem.

    However, the truth is that ample authority already exists to implement robust policies that discourage human traffickers from bringing illegal immigrants across the border and impose meaningful consequences on anybody who disregards the rule of law. This is exactly what we accomplished in the Trump administration. Unfortunately, Department of Homeland Security (DHS) Secretary Alejandro Mayorkas refuses to use his discretionary authority to secure the border, so House Republicans are calling the Biden administration’s bluff by introducing the Border Security and Enforcement Act, legislation designed to secure the border, end human trafficking, and defeat the cartels.

    The Biden administration would have the American people believe that border security simply means hiring more personnel to process migrants faster. But I believe border security requires a combination of building the physical border wall system, enforcing current immigration law, and reforming our broken asylum system. If you believe that the heavily exploited asylum system works just fine, then you accept the status quo and will likely oppose this border security package. However, if you think changes are needed, as I do, you should welcome this effort to end asylum fraud and the exploitation of vulnerable migrants.

    Here’s what’s in the bill and why I believe it’s a good first step.

    This seminal legislation curbs abuse of the asylum system by raising the standard for establishing credible fear. And for those who do pass the standard, it mandates detention or resumption of the highly successful Remain in Mexico policy. Currently, the asylum system is easily exploited by economic migrants and trafficking networks because the initial screening process for illegal aliens apprehended at the border – known as the credible fear interview – is easily passed, even with the most dubious of asylum claims. Under Biden administration policies, those who establish credible fear – around 80% of migrants – are released into American communities even though fewer than 15% will ultimately qualify for asylum. This incentivizes asylum fraud as the easiest ticket into the U.S. while delaying the ability to grant humanitarian relief to those persecuted migrants who are entitled to it under the law. The result of these provisions will be fewer bogus claims clogging up the immigration court system and a higher percentage – but lower total number – of aliens who are granted asylum after passing the credible fear test. It will also reduce the time between when an alien is apprehended at the border and when they receive humanitarian relief.

    The House Judiciary Committee is also seeking to end the cruel Biden administration policies that have incentivized the exploitation of the most vulnerable migrants. Various legal loopholes make it difficult to promptly return unaccompanied alien children unless they are Mexican or Canadian. The Biden administration has recklessly implemented policies to quickly hand these migrant kids over to sponsors without vetting them to the degree you saw during the Trump presidency. This has created the horrific yet preventable scenario of exploited children being handed off by the federal government to another trafficker who subjects these minors to a dark life of sex slavery and debt bondage. The border bill also closes this loophole that has traumatized untold hundreds of thousands of migrant children over the years. Another loophole has minimized the enforcement consequences against migrant families apprehended at the border. What results is a nefarious cottage industry where bad actors “recycle” migrant children to create fraudulent families to take advantage of being allowed into American communities. The border legislation ends this heinous practice.

    Additionally, the committee’s bill reins in the parole authority that DHS Secretary Mayorkas is exploiting to hide the extent of the border crisis. Parole is supposed to be a narrow authority that allows the DHS secretary to allow a visa-less or inadmissible alien into the U.S., but only on a case-by-case basis for either urgent humanitarian reasons or significant public benefit. Instead, Secretary Mayorkas is abusing this authority by creating unlawful nationality-based parole programs that redirect illegal aliens from the border to ports of entry with the benefit to the administration of no longer showing up in the monthly border apprehension numbers. The Border Security and Enforcement Act will put an end to this illegal use of the parole authority and prevent future administrations from circumventing the eligibility requirements established by Congress for legal immigration visa categories.

    The Judiciary Committee is offering workable solutions to solve the crisis created by the Biden administration’s failed border strategy. Will the administration pivot and embrace this legislation or continue to place politics over the sound policies the American people deserve?

    Chad Wolf is the former acting secretary of the Department of Homeland Security and executive director and chair of the Center for Homeland Security and Immigration at the America First Policy Institute.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 19:00

  • Oracle Drops UK-Based Disinfo Nannies After Conservative Blacklisting Cited In Lawsuit
    Oracle Drops UK-Based Disinfo Nannies After Conservative Blacklisting Cited In Lawsuit

    Gabe Kaminsky of the Washington Examiner is out with another report on the Global Disinformation Index (GDI), a UK-based group which targets and blacklists conservative websites in order to drain them of revenue and support by working with “advertisers and the ad tech industry in assessing the reputational and brand risk when advertising with online media outlets and to help them avoid financially supporting disinformation online.”

    As Kaminsky reports, software giant Oracle announced on Wednesday that it will no longer collaborate with GDI, which has received just under $666,000 from the US State Department between 2020 and 2021. The news comes one day after GDI was cited in a lawsuit against the Biden administration which claims the government has colluded with big tech to censor free speech.

    This same British entity, which has two affiliated United States nonprofit groups that have come under fire for shielding information from their 2021 tax forms, was cited in a Tuesday friend-of-the-court brief filed by Alliance Defending Freedom in State of Louisiana v. Biden — a lawsuit filed in May 2022 that claims the government has colluded with Big Tech to stifle discourse online. -Washington Examiner

    “All signs point to a growing government influence over social media,” reads the brief. “The Biden Administration admitted as early as 2021 that it was flagging and reporting posts on Facebook, YouTube, and other platforms as COVID-19-related ‘misinformation.’ A recent report found that the U.S. State Department sent $330 million [sic] to The Global Disinformation Index, a British organization that is attempting to discredit and blacklist many conservative news outlets for peddling ‘disinformation.'”

    Kaminsky notes that the brief mistakenly attributes $330 million sent to the National Endowment for Democracy to the GDI, when in reality the NED has granted money to GDI out of the $330 million. Following the Examiner‘s reporting on the grants, the NED announced in late February that they were cutting off funding to GDI.

    Louisiana v. Biden was brought forth by Republican attorneys general Jeff Landry of Louisiana and then-Missouri’s Eric Schmitt, now a senator for The Show-Me State. The lawsuit alleges that the Biden administration infringed on the public’s First Amendment Rights through its efforts working with Big Tech employees to engage in content moderation related to election integrity, COVID-19, Hunter Biden’s infamous abandoned laptop, and more.

    For instance, Landry released a document in January showing that the White House urged a Facebook employee in April 2021 to restrict posts about Fox News host Tucker Carlson claiming that there have been efficacy issues with “vaccines.” The White House also told Facebook in May 2021 that “slowing down” posts appearing to be “anti-vax” would be “reasonable,” and also urged Twitter to remove a post by anti-vaccine critic Robert Kennedy, Jr., who recently announced his Democratic bid for White House in 2024, documents show. -Washington Examiner

    “Government should be freedom’s strongest defender, not its greatest threat,” said senior counsel for Alliance Defending Freedom, Travis Barham, in a Wednesday statement. “Americans don’t look to the White House or Silicon Valley to discover and express the truth. That’s not the role of government, and it certainly isn’t the role of Big Tech.”

    Oracle, meanwhile, told the Examiner that it would no longer maintain a relationship with GDI, which they had previously announced a 2021 collaboration with in order to engage in “brand safety.”

    “After conducting a review, we agree with others in the advertising industry that the services we provide marketers must be in full support of free speech, which is why we are ending our relationship with GDI,” said Michael Egbert, vice president for corporate communications at Oracle.

    Microsoft has similarly launched an internal investigation into its partnership with GDI after ad industry whistleblowers revealed how conservative sites were being blacklisted by the Microsoft-owned Xandr as “false/misleading” , “reprehensible/offensive” , or “hate speech.”

    Meanwhile, GDI’s co-founder and CEO Clare Melford was sent a letter on Tuesday by Rep. Ken Buck (R-CO), who demanded its two affiliated nonprofit groups in the U.S. release a “complete and unredacted list of donors.The letter came days after a Washington Examiner investigation revealed that the private AN Foundation, also known as the Disinformation Index Foundation, and its affiliated public charity, Disinformation Index Inc., are shielding items like board members, officers, and donors from tax forms, while claiming to be “harassed” under a little-known federal exemption law. -Washington Examiner

    “This is outrageous,” said Paul Kamenar, counsel to the National Legal and Policy Center, a conservative watchdog that plans to file an IRS complaint against both GDI groups, in a statement last week.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 18:40

  • Controversial mRNA Technology Now Targeting Livestock
    Controversial mRNA Technology Now Targeting Livestock

    Authored by Allan Stein via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    At least five states have introduced bills restricting the use of controversial mRNA technology or gene therapies in livestock or demand full disclosure to consumers on product packaging.

    The states considering legislation include North Dakota, Tennessee, Arizona, Idaho, and Missouri.

    Idaho House Bill 154 would make it a misdemeanor offense for anyone who provides or administers a vaccine using mRNA technology “for use in an individual or any other mammal in this state.”

    Arizona House Bill 2762 requires conspicuous labeling of all aquatic, livestock, or poultry products that received mRNA vaccines, and prohibits these products from being labeled as organic.

    Tennessee House Bill 0099 amends an existing law to prohibit the manufacture or sale of livestock or meat that contains mRNA “vaccine of vaccines materials” without a conspicuous label that there are such ingredients in the product.

    In North Dakota, state lawmakers filed SB2384, which seeks to ban the use of mRNA vaccines in humans and to introduce a penalty for anyone breaking the prohibition.

    Missouri State Rep. Holly Jones, a Republican, is the lead sponsor of a bill requiring product labeling of all livestock meat containing “potential gene therapy products.

    We label everything around the world. We label non-GMO. We label GMO. We label grass-fed. We label no antibiotics used. We label manufactured in a plant that has nuts,” Jones said.

    “We should label anything that has not been proven safe and effective. As we’ve seen with the COVID vaccines, they’re neither safe nor effective. Even the CDC has come out with that.”

    While HB1169 does not mention mRNA by name, the proposed ban would include all “potential gene therapy products.”

    The House Emerging Issues subcommittee will review an amended bill on April 19. Jones is a member of that committee.

    The bill would require labeling of any product created to act as a potential gene therapy, or that could “otherwise possibly impact, alter, or introduce genetic material or a genetic change into the user of the product.”

    Cattle in Lismore, New South Wales state, in Australia on March 1, 2022. (SAEED KHAN/AFP via Getty Images)

    It would include anyone exposed to the product or people “exposed to others who have used the product.”

    With the passage of HB1169, the law would require livestock farmers and producers in Missouri to fully display on product packaging mRNA technology used in cows, pigs, and other livestock under the rule of informed consent.

    Already In Development

    “They would have to tell us if they begin using those things. As it is currently, almost all states do not,” Jones said.

    Jones said she confirmed through multiple agricultural sources that mRNA programs for U.S. livestock are “in the works.”

    It is in the pipeline. Australia is already doing that.”

    According to a statement from the Queensland government in Australia, scientists are working to develop an mRNA-related vaccine to combat the threat of Lumpy Skin Disease (LSD) in beef cattle with $1.5 million invested.

    “A new mRNA vaccine would be a game changer as the live virus vaccines currently available overseas cannot be used in Australia,” said Mark Furner—the Minister for Agricultural Industry Development and Fisheries and Minister for Rural Communities—in the statement.

    “Using existing vaccines here would result in us losing our disease-free status,” Furner added.

    A screenshot of the Queensland government announcing the creation of an mRNA vaccine for cattle, on April 19, 2023. (Screenshot by The Epoch Times)

    With mRNA technology, as in COVID-19 vaccines, the injections introduce a virus fragment into cells, teaching them how to produce a specific antibody against the disease.

    The Veterinary Microbiology and Preventive Medicine Department at Iowa State University is developing an mRNA-based cattle vaccine for the bovine respiratory syncytial virus (RSV).

    Untreated, RSV can lead to pneumonia in cows.

    The federal grant program aims to develop a “novel mRNA system” that provides immune protection against RSV.

    “We hypothesize that a [mRNA injection] delivered continuously by vaccine implant will lead to prolonged and robust cellular and antibody immunity,” according to a program summary in the U.S. Department of Agriculture’s Research, Education, and Economics Information System (REEIS).

    “Here, we will optimize our vaccine further and then test for potential correlates of protection to examine for in eventually challenged cows.”

    No Labeling of Foreign Meat

    In 2016, the U.S. Congress removed a labeling law requiring the country of origin on meat products.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 18:20

  • Lyft Will Lay Off At Least 1,200 Employees To Slash Costs
    Lyft Will Lay Off At Least 1,200 Employees To Slash Costs

    With a new CEO at the helm, rideshare platform Lyft will cut at least 1,200 jobs as the firm strives to compete with larger rival Uber, The Wall Street Journal reported on Friday. 

    That’s a huge cut for a company with close to 4,000 employees, and comes on top of a 700-person layoff in November. A source familiar with Lyft’s workforce plans said the cuts could hit more than 30% of the staff — and help Lyft achieve a 50% cut in ongoing costs.  

    Lyft stock, which traded at $80 after its 2019 IPO, closed Friday at just $10.44. While that was a 6% gain from Thursday, the shares are down about 10% on the year, while Uber is up 21%.  

    Lyft stock is down about 88% since its IPO

    In March, Lyft announced that board member David Risher would take over, with co-founders John Zimmer and Logan Green backing away from their daily management roles. This is Risher’s first week in charge. 

    After the Journal broke the story of the major pending layoff, Risher sent a note to employees, saying “we need to bring our costs down to deliver affordable rides, compelling earnings for drivers, and profitable growth.”

    “Departing employees will receive at least 10 weeks of pay, with additional weeks for team members with 4+ years with Lyft,” wrote Risher, along with “accelerated equity vesting for the May 20 vesting date.” Health coverage will extend to Halloween.

    He didn’t outline the scope of the layoffs, but said more information would come next week. Ominously, all Lyft offices will be closed on Thursday April 27. The company will notify fired employees that day via emails sent at 8:30am Pacific time. “I own this decision, and understand that it comes at an enormous cost,” said Risher.   

    Uber’s diversification into food and beverage deliver paid off big when the Covid-19 pandemic hit. As rideshare volumes fell precipitously, Uber cashed in on delivering to homebound victims of the lockdown regime. 

    That’s enabled Uber to squeeze Lyft on price. “On a per-mile basis, Lyft fares are about 31% higher compared with 2019 while Uber’s are 20% higher,” reports Bloomberg, citing YipitData. Lyft has a 25% US market share, compared to 75% for Uber. 

    “I think being a strong number two is a good place to be,” said Risher after his move to the CEO slot was announced. “I like where we are, but we’ve got real work to do to fight it out a little bit.” 

    Also in March, Risher declared Lyft is not for sale — promptly sinking the stock by 7%

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 18:00

  • WV’s Morrisey Takes On The Woke And The Swamp
    WV’s Morrisey Takes On The Woke And The Swamp

    Authored by Benjamin Weingarten via RealClear Wire,

    As attorney general of West Virginia, Patrick Morrisey has been a scourge of the administrative state, combatting what he perceives to be federal government overreach into the life and commerce of the Mountaineer State.

    On April 4, Morrisey announced that he is joining a crowded field seeking the Republican nomination in West Virginia’s 2024 gubernatorial race.

    During that speech, Morrisey emphasized his aims, should he be elected governor: to increase economic opportunity, expand school choice, and fight the “swamps” from Washington D.C. to Charleston.

    The attorney general also touched on his opposition to the COVID-19 vaccine mandates, his pro-life, and pro-Second Amendment stances, and his devotion to fighting the fentanyl epidemic that has ravaged the state. In a sign of the times, Morrisey elicited perhaps one of his biggest cheers from supporters when he asserted that “Men are biologically different from women. And I’m not afraid to say that.”

    This Q&A, conducted by Ben Weingarten, is a follow-up to an interview conducted with the attorney general last December. Morrisey was asked about his motivations for seeking out the governorship, national implications to his race, his view of the indictment of President Donald Trump – which occurred on the day of the interview – and more.

    What follows is a lightly edited transcript of the interview, conducted by phone:

    Ben Weingarten: What is your motivation for pursuing the governorship?

    AG Patrick Morrisey: I think there’s an opportunity to really help West Virginia reach full potential. And looking at this opportunity, I’m the only proven conservative in the race, with a deep record of fighting and winning against the elites, defending our values, accomplishing big things. If people like the work that I do as attorney general, they’re really gonna love me as governor because we’re gonna bring the whole force of the executive branch of West Virginia to bear on the most difficult challenges faced in West Virginia and our country …We [would] have the additional tools of governor that we’re gonna utilize to defend our values and to help improve the standard of living in our state, supercharge economic workforce growth, to grow our population, and to really be the foil against the woke left and the elites who’re coming against us.

    BW: What do you see as the key pillars of your agenda?

    PM: Well, right now, West Virginians are being ravaged by inflation, and we need to protect our jobs. We need to fight to put more money in people’s pockets. I mean, the value of money has declined because of this terrible inflation, and so it has to be a focus that West Virginians have a state government that’s looking out for them. And I think that means lowering taxes even more, reducing regulatory burdens. But then we [also] really have to focus on advancing education excellence.

    So, I want to dramatically expand our school choice programs, because I think that that provides a huge opportunity for kids. Our kids are our future. And so education is to be a big part of it.

    And then we have to get to work on workforce growth and growing our population. West Virginia right now is the lowest workforce participation rate in the nation. That has to change, and it has to change fast. One of the things that I’m eager to do is to convert a lot of the 65,000 job openings that are in place right now and get people employed in those jobs quickly. That’ll supercharge our economy, and then we could use those additional revenues to put more money back in people’s pockets, the folks that are struggling paycheck to paycheck.

    BW: What do you see as the national implications, if any, to this gubernatorial race?

    PM: I think running for governor, folks across the country and in West Virginia are going to know that there’s gonna be no one stronger to build these critical state coalitions that are gonna take on federal overreach and the woke ideas. West Virginia will have someone who can honestly say and demonstrate that woke ideas stop at the border. So I’m going to provide an example for the rest of the country about how to run the railroad, how to make sure that you can succeed and flourish in a state that values freedom and lower taxes and is very welcoming. This is what West Virginia is all about. And we need to message that. We also are going to make it clear that we’re not going to be listening to the political elites, we’re going to put the people first, and that means speaking out on issues. So West Virginia is going to have a very loud voice, we won’t shy away from the tough issues, we won’t go quietly into the night.

    BW: We’re talking the day of the first of maybe several indictments to come against former President Trump, and there’s widely seen by millions of Americans to be a two-tier justice system in this country where if you hold the wrong views, you pay to the nth degree, and if you hold the right views, you’re protected. What ought red states do to confront it?

    PM: Look… what’s going on right now in New York is a major travesty of the judicial system. It makes New York look like a banana republic. That’s utterly unacceptable, it’s a political prosecution. We know that the other side worries about winning debates, and they may not be able to win at the polling booth, so they’re going to resort to the political prosecutions of a lot of people on our side who are running for office. We have to make clear that that’s completely unacceptable, and that should be a position that unifies not only all Republicans, but Independents, and many Democrats as well. This is an abuse of power, and we need to say so, but I think the American public will be behind us.

    BW: There’s been something of a censorship industrial complex that’s been imposed via federal authorities working hand-in-hand with Big Tech companies, academics, researchers, and the like. There also seems to be a similar burgeoning movement at the state level. Would you let any sort efforts like those stand in West Virginia, or will you combat them?

    PM: Look, I think that we need to be very clear that this is an us-against-them scenario – that you have some people who are advancing woke ideas and they’ll stop at nothing to indoctrinate our children and to force their values upon us. We have to stand up and fight back against that, and when I see Big Tech, when I see people trying to tilt the playing field in favor of these woke ideas, people are gonna know that the West Virginia governor is standing up against that, and saying “No.” And so, I would be looking for any way to make sure that free speech is going to operate in West Virginia, but when people try to abuse the system, they’re gonna be called out for it.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 04/21/2023 – 17:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 21st April 2023

  • Speak Your Truth: Don't Let The Government Criminalize Free Speech
    Speak Your Truth: Don’t Let The Government Criminalize Free Speech

    Authored by John & Nisha Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “If freedom of speech is taken away, then dumb and silent we may be led, like sheep to the slaughter.”

    – George Washington

    What the police state wants is a silent, compliant, oblivious citizenry.

    What the First Amendment affirms is an engaged citizenry that speaks truth to power using whatever peaceful means are available to us.

    Speaking one’s truth doesn’t have to be the same for each person, and that truth doesn’t have to be palatable or pleasant or even factual.

    We can be loud.

    We can be obnoxious.

    We can be politically incorrect.

    We can be conspiratorial or mean or offensive.

    We can be all these things because the First Amendment takes a broad, classically liberal approach to the free speech rights of the citizenry: in a nutshell, the government may not encroach or limit the citizenry’s right to freedom of religion, speech, press, assembly and protest.

    This is why the First Amendment is so critical.

    It gives the citizenry the right to speak freely, protest peacefully, expose government wrongdoing, and criticize the government without fear of retaliation, arrest or incarceration.

    Nowhere in the First Amendment does it permit the government to limit speech in order to avoid causing offense, hurting someone’s feelings, safeguarding government secrets, protecting government officials, discouraging bullying, penalizing hateful ideas and actions, eliminating terrorism, combatting prejudice and intolerance, and the like.

    When expressive activity crosses the line into violence, free speech protections end.

    However, barring actual violence or true threats of violence, there is a vast difference between speech that is socially unpopular and speech that is illegal, and it’s an important distinction that depends on our commitment to safeguarding a robust First Amendment.

    Increasingly, however, the courts and the government are doing away with that critical distinction, adopting the mindset that speech is only permissible if it does not offend, irritate, annoy, threaten someone’s peace of mind, or challenge the government’s stranglehold on power.

    Take the case of Counterman v. Colorado which is before the U.S. Supreme Court.

    Under the pretext of clamping down on online stalking, Colorado wants the power to be able to treat expressive activities on social media as threats without having to prove that the messages are both reasonably understood as threatening an illegal act and intended by the speaker as a threat.

    While protecting people from stalking is certainly a valid concern and may be warranted in this particular case, the law does not require speech to be a “true threat” in order to be criminally punished. The Supreme Court has defined a “true threat” as “statements where the speaker means to communicate a serious expression of an intent to commit an act of unlawful violence to a particular individual or group of individuals.”

    Indeed, Colorado’s stalking law is so broad that a person can be charged with stalking for repeatedly contacting, surveilling or communicating with an individual in such a way that a reasonable person would feel serious emotional distress.

    In the absence of any substantive guidelines on what constitutes a true threat on social media, such laws could empower the government to misinterpret any speaker’s intent and meaning in order to criminalize legitimate political speech that is critical of government officials and representatives.

    Case in point: in Oklahoma, a street preacher who expressed his moral outrage over public drag queen performances that occur in front of children and churches that endorse same-sex marriage was given a five-year restraining order and threatened with arrest after citing Bible verses on social media about God’s judgment of sin.

    The Rutherford Institute has taken on the case, warning that the ramifications of it going unchallenged could render anyone who quotes the Bible a criminal if it makes a listener feel unsafe or threatened or judged.

    This is what it means to criminalize free speech: it turns those who exercise their free speech rights into criminals.

    This criminalization of free speech, which is exactly what the government’s prosecution of those who say the “wrong” thing using an electronic medium amounts to, was at the heart of Elonis v. United States, a case that wrestled with where the government can draw the line when it comes to expressive speech that is protected and permissible versus speech that could be interpreted as connoting a criminal intent.

    The case arose after Anthony Elonis, an aspiring rap artist, used personal material from his life as source material and inspiration for rap lyrics which he then shared on Facebook.

    For instance, shortly after Elonis’ wife left him and he was fired from his job, his lyrics included references to killing his ex-wife, shooting a classroom of kindergarten children, and blowing up an FBI agent who had opened an investigation into his postings.

    Despite the fact that Elonis routinely accompanied his Facebook posts with disclaimers that his lyrics were fictitious, and that he was using such writings as an outlet for his frustrations, he was charged with making unlawful threats (although it was never proven that he intended to threaten anyone) and sentenced to 44 months in jail.

    The question the U.S. Supreme Court was asked to decide in Elonis was whether his activity, in the absence of any overt intention of committing a crime, rose to the level of a “true threat” or whether it was protected First Amendment activity.

    In an 8-1 decision that concerned itself more with “criminal-law principles concerning intent rather than the First Amendment’s protection of free speech,” the Court ruled that prosecutors had not proven that Elonis intended to harm anyone beyond the words he used and context.

    That was back in 2015.

    Despite the Supreme Court’s ruling in Elonis, Corporate America has taken the lead in policing expressive activity online, with social media giants such as Facebook, Twitter and YouTube using their formidable dominance in the field to censor, penalize and regulate speech and behavior online by suspending and/or banning users whose content violated the companies’ so-called community standards for obscenity, violence, hate speech, discrimination, conspiracy theories, etc.

    The fallout is as one would expect.

    The internet has become a forum for the government—and its corporate partners—to monitor, control and punish the populace for speech that may be controversial but is far from criminal.

    Everything is now fair game for censorship if it can be construed as hateful, hurtful, bigoted or offensive provided that it runs counter to the established viewpoint.

    In this way, the most controversial issues of our day—race, religion, sex, sexuality, politics, science, health, government corruption, police brutality, etc.—have become battlegrounds for those who claim to believe in freedom (of religion, speech, assembly, press, redress, privacy, bodily integrity, etc.) but only when it favors the views and positions they support.

    In more and more cases, the government is declaring war on what should be protected political speech whenever it challenges the government’s power, reveals the government’s corruption, exposes the government’s lies, and encourages the citizenry to push back against the government’s many injustices.

    Indeed, there is a long and growing list of the kinds of speech that the government considers dangerous enough to red flag and subject to censorship, surveillance, investigation and prosecution: hate speech, conspiratorial speech, treasonous speech, threatening speech, inflammatory speech, radical speech, anti-government speech, extremist speech, etc.

    In recent years, the government has used the phrase “domestic terrorist” interchangeably with “anti-government,” “extremist” and “terrorist” to describe anyone who might fall somewhere on a very broad spectrum of viewpoints that could be considered “dangerous.”

    As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People and in its fictional counterpart The Erik Blair Diaries, the ramifications are so far-reaching as to render almost every American an extremist in word, deed, thought or by association.

    You see, the government doesn’t care if you or someone you know has a legitimate grievance. It doesn’t care if your criticisms are well-founded. And it certainly doesn’t care if you have a First Amendment right to speak truth to power.

    It just wants you to shut up.

    Yet no matter what one’s political persuasion might be, the right to disagree with and speak out against the government is the quintessential freedom. When exercised regularly and defended vigorously, these First Amendment rights serve as a bulwark against tyranny.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 23:40

  • The Timeline Of Cannabis Legislation In The US
    The Timeline Of Cannabis Legislation In The US

    On this 4/20, we take a moment to reflect on the fact that at the federal level, cannabis is still considered an illegal substance.

    However, as Visual Capitalist’s Avery Koop notes, individual states do have the right to determine their own laws around cannabis sales and usage.

    This visual from New Frontier Data looks at the status of cannabis in every state and the timeline of when medical and/or recreational use became legal.

    Cannabis Through the Years

    In the U.S., the oldest legalese concerning cannabis dates back to the 1600s—the colony of Virginia required every farm to grow and produce hemp. Since then, cannabis use was fairly wide open until the 1930s when the Marihuana Tax Act was enforced, prohibiting marijuana federally but still technically allowing medical use.

    Jumping ahead, the Controlled Substances Act was passed in 1970, classifying cannabis as Schedule I drug—the same category as heroin. This prohibited any use of the substance.

    However, the 1970s also saw a counter movement, wherein many states made the move towards decriminalization. Decriminalization means that although possessing cannabis remained illegal, a person would not be subject to jail time or prosecution for possessing certain amounts.

    By the 1990s, some of the first states passed laws to allow the medical usage of cannabis, and by 2012 two states in the U.S.—Washington and Colorado—legalized the recreational use of cannabis.

    Cannabis Legislation Today and Beyond

    The MORE Act (the Marijuana Opportunity Reinvestment and Expungement Act) was passed in the House early 2022, and if made law, it would decriminalize marijuana federally.

    “This bill decriminalizes marijuana. Specifically, it removes marijuana from the list of scheduled substances under the Controlled Substances Act and eliminates criminal penalties for an individual who manufactures, distributes, or possesses marijuana.”– U.S. CONGRESS

    Cannabis still remains illegal at the federal level, but at the state levels, cannabis is now fully legal (both for medicinal and recreational purposes) in a total of 22 states.

    Over 246 million Americans have legal access to some form of marijuana products with high THC levels. Looking to the future, many new cannabis markets are expected to open up in the next few years:

    The earliest states expected to open up next for recreational cannabis sales are Minnesota and Oklahoma. There is always a lag between legalization and actual sales, wherein local regulatory bodies and governments set standards. States like Kentucky, on the other hand, aren’t likely to even legalize medicinal cannabis until 2028.

    It’s estimated that by 2030, there will be 69 million cannabis consumers in the country, up 33% from 2022.

    Overall, the U.S. cannabis market is likely an important one to watch as legal sales hit $30 billion in 2022. By the end of the decade, that number is expected to be anywhere from $58 billion to as much as $72 billion.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 23:20

  • The Discord Leaks: Justification To Quash Encrypted Messaging?
    The Discord Leaks: Justification To Quash Encrypted Messaging?

    Authored by Marie Hawthorne via The Organic Prepper blog,

    On April 13, the FBI took 21-year-old Air National Guardsman Jake Teixiera into custody for posting top secret military documents on a private Discord chat group. A large amount of classified information has been exposed, and people want answers. Why is this young man getting arrested when other people leak to the press all the time? Who gives a 21-year-old top-secret clearance? Are there some other, less-obvious motives at work here?

    First, let’s look at the leaks.

    Let’s look first at the leaks themselves. In early March, classified documents started popping up on a public Discord channel. They had originally been posted in a private, invitation-only chat group on Discord with a few dozen members in December 2022 or January 2023. At some point, one of the private group members started posting the classified documents to a public group. And once on the public group, the classified documents rapidly made their way around the internet. (source)

    • This series of leaks provided evidence that American intelligence had been spying on allies in Israel and South Korea. (source)

    • We had also been collecting intelligence on United Nations Secretary-General Antonio Guterres (source)

    • There was a discussion of Egypt producing weapons for Russia, despite receiving over $1 billion per year from the Americans. (source) Egyptian and American officials both denied this vehemently.

    • Some of the leaked documents included information about a spring offensive in Ukraine. They also indicated that American leaders are not confident in Ukraine’s ability to successfully launch an offensive this spring, due to a lack of trained personnel. (source)

    • Nonetheless, despite a grim outlook for a Ukrainian spring offensive, no one is anticipating peace talks between Kyiv and the Kremlin in 2023. (source) The powers that be are prepared for 2023 to consist of a long, slow grind for Ukrainian and Russian troops.

    • Leaked information also includes the fact that American Special Forces groups have been in Ukraine for some time. (source) contrary to repeated statements about how no American boots were ever going to be on the ground. (source)

    • Information about a spring offensive could, in theory, jeopardize troops on the ground, though the Russians don’t seem to be taking the leaked information particularly seriously. Speculation within the pro-Russian channels seems to be that this is some kind of decoy. (source)

    The rest of the leaked information provides a window into how the government actually works. Spying on allies and a fantastic disregard for taxpayer dollars—it sounds bad, but is it really surprising? And lying about American troops being on the ground? It’s less shocking, and more evidence of things many of us had suspected anyway.

    What will happen to Jake Teixeira?

    Either way, it looks like young Jake Teixeira is headed to jail, probably for at least ten years

    If you grew up in a family full of soldiers and government employees, you might think, “Good, he’s a traitor.” But keep in mind information from the government gets leaked to the press all the time. New York Times reporter David Philipps admitted on Twitter that “The NYT worked feverishly to find the identity of the guy leaking TS docs on Discord. Ironically, if the same guy had leaked to the NYT, we’d be working feverishly to conceal it.”

    Mr. Philipps removed his tweet after a short time, but independent journalist Glenn Greenwald took a screenshot of it and you can still see it on his Twitter feed here.

    Honest, independent journalists are an essential part of what a free country is supposed to represent. In a free nation, the citizens hold the government accountable for their actions; how on earth is that supposed to happen if no one has any idea what the government is actually up to?

    And even fifteen years ago, mainstream sources still seemed to see it this way. Back in 2011, the New York Times published information from Julian Assange’s Wikileaks, which contained information at least as volatile as the recently released information.

    In this case, however, the Washington Post and New York Times actively helped federal law enforcement track down the leaker.  Whistleblower, Inc. immediately distanced itself from Teixeira, saying he doesn’t really count as a whistleblower/

    So, why the about-face? A free press relies upon and has to support its sources of information. How did mainstream American press go from champions of free speech to actively hunting down leakers?

    Let’s just look at the history of leaking over the past fifteen years.

    Did you know that Obama’s administration prosecuted intelligence leaks more aggressively than any other administration in history? As of 2014, his administration had secured 526 months of prison time for various leakers. That compares to a total of 24 months of jail time issued by every other administration since the Revolutionary War. (source) The crackdown on intelligence leaks during his 8 years was completely unprecedented.

    What about Trump’s presidency? Were leakers of sensitive information so relentlessly prosecuted?

    Not if they published anything that made Trump look bad. General Michael Flynn, who was arguably just doing his job when he contacted the Russian government after he was appointed Trump’s national security advisor, had his conversations with the Russian ambassador recorded and then leaked to the press.

    Releasing contents of phone calls between foreign ambassadors and the government is officials is far more damaging than anything released by Teixeira. Just for starters, it shows foreign governments around the world that Americans cannot exercise discretion. In his “System Update #70” on Rumble, Glenn Greenwald did a thorough analysis of why Gen. Flynn’s leaked transcript was so potentially damaging and, under other circumstances, could have led to jail time both for the leaker as well as the journalists publishing that information.

    So, was that leaker mercilessly hunted down and prosecuted? Did any journalists look at jail time?

    No. Mainstream media positively celebrated it; Brian Stelter’s self-congratulatory platitudes about the “free press” are totally nauseating.

    MSNBC’s Joe Scarborough referred to the leaker of Flynn’s conversation as “a patriot.”

    The New Yorker’s Evan Osnos tweeted, “. . .principled public servants who got the story out are hidden heroes.”

    So, is Jake Teixeira being treated as a patriot or a principled public servant? Not quite. National Security Council spokesperson John Kirby stated that “This is information that has no business in the public domain. It is not intended for public consumption, and it should not be out there.” But if this leak of information is so catastrophic, why are those same media outlets that helped find Teixeira reporting the material in the leaks? Given the number of articles generated by the Times, the Post, the BBC, and other major outlets, the leaks obviously contained a great deal of newsworthy information. Does anyone else smell hypocrisy here?

    Who is Jake Teixeira, and how did he get top-secret clearance?

    Maybe more significantly, if this leak of documents was so severe that a young Air National Guardsman is looking at more than a decade of jail time, why are no higher-ups getting prosecuted? Who gives top security clearance to a 21-year-old, anyway?

    I spent time dating a 21-year-old National Guardsman when I was young. This is a demographic putting bags of dog poop on porches and lighting them on fire. Do many of them grow up to be mature, responsible adults? Oh, absolutely. But 21-year-olds are barely adults. Right now, mainstream sites like NPR are focusing on Teixeira’s apparent fondness for racist memes. if someone is not mature enough to understand that online jokes follow you for the rest of your life, why would they be mature enough to handle truly sensitive information?

    And how does this not come up during the clearance process? Okay, so Teixeira had a bad sense of humor; who cleared him? I have heard absolutely nothing about any higher-ups facing consequences over this, and I guess that shouldn’t be surprising.

    How will this affect encrypted messaging? And is that the point?

    This may all be beside the point. Let’s talk about the method of release itself. These leaks have been referred to as the “Discord Leaks.” Discord is a messaging app. It doesn’t use end-to-end encryption, just the standard HTTPS encryption that allows people to communicate privately.

    Federal law enforcement agencies have had private messaging apps in their crosshairs for some time now, as we discussed a few months ago. The EARN IT Act, which is still in the Senate, would essentially ban end-to-end encryption and make private messages easier for law enforcement to access.

    There have been a couple of versions of EARN IT in the works since 2020; they haven’t passed. Too many Americans are still concerned about privacy.

    However, is it possible that someone let these leaks percolate through Discord in hopes of giving the government an ironclad reason to force messaging apps to divulge information about private conversations? Because of national security?

    What do you think is really going on here?

    I don’t know if this is the case; I’m just speculating. But ask yourself what is believable.

    Would access to such supposedly sensitive information be given to a young man with an irresponsible online history? Are more senior personnel capable of taking advantage of this situation to advance an agenda they’ve publicly had for some time now?

    What do you think about all this? Should Teixeira be harshly prosecuted, or should he be protected as a whistle-blower? Is there another agenda at play here?

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 23:00

  • ATF Director Unable To Define "Assault Weapon" Despite Biden's Call For Ban
    ATF Director Unable To Define “Assault Weapon” Despite Biden’s Call For Ban

    At a House Appropriations subcommittee hearing, Rep. Jake Ellzey (R-Texas) asked Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, and Firearms (ATF) Director Steve Dettelbach a simple question: “In 15 seconds, would you define an ‘assault weapon’ for me?”

    Dettelbach, who is supposed to be an expert in all things firearms and explosives, appeared before the subcommittee hearing on Tuesday. He responded to Ellzey by admitting he could not answer the question because he isn’t a “firearms expert.” 

    “I’ll go shorter than that, because honestly, if Congress wishes to take that up, I think Congress would have to do the work, but we would be there to provide technical assistance. I, unlike you, am not a firearms expert to the same extent as you maybe, but we have people at ATF who can talk about velocity of firearms, what damage different kinds of firearms cause, so that whatever determination you chose to make would be an informed one.” Dettelbach answered.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Despite years of advocating for assault weapon bans, the head of the ATF has never provided a clear definition of what qualifies as an assault weapon.

    Firearms blog Bearing Arms had this to say about Dettelbach’s response:

    We’re supposed to believe that the director of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms, and Explosives has no earthly idea how to define “assault weapons”, despite the fact that his boss calls for them to be banned on a weekly basis and Democrats in states like Michigan, Colorado, and Washington are currently trying to prohibit their sale or possession? Gimme a break.

    Dettelbach’s response wasn’t ignorant, it was political. The truth is that “assault weapon” has no real definition other than “gun someone wants to ban.” What’s considered an “assault weapon” in New York may not be an “assault weapon” in Ilinois, while California lawmakers have gone back and redefined “assault weapon” on multiple occasions since enacting its first ban back in 1989.

    But Dettelbach can’t go on the record as admitting that, especially with Biden making his own vague and vacuous demands for an “assault weapons” ban any time a shooting generates national headlines (even when the killer used a handgun). Instead he tried to punt the issue back to Congress, but in doing so he implicitly acknowledged what he couldn’t say out loud; an “assault weapon” is whatever anti-gun lawmakers say it is, and whatever convoluted definition they do come up with will most certainly impact millions of law-abiding Americans and some of the most popular and commonly-owned firearms sold today.

    … and Rep. Troy Nehls (R-Texas) tweeted:

    “Joe Biden’s ATF Director just testified in a Congressional hearing that he’s not a firearms expert. Wow. Maybe the ATF shouldn’t be regulating your firearms then.”

    Supporters of the Second Amendment can appreciate the ATF head’s honesty, at the very least.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 22:40

  • House China Committee To War-Game A Chinese Invasion Of Taiwan
    House China Committee To War-Game A Chinese Invasion Of Taiwan

    Authored by Dave DeCamp via AntiWar.com,

    The House’s new panel on China will be war gaming a Chinese invasion of Taiwan to explore ways the US can respond in the latest example of the US government preparing for a future conflict with Beijing.

    Axios reported that on Wednesday evening, members of the China committee, which is led by Rep. Mike Gallagher (R-WI), will take the role of US officials in the war game that will be conducted by a Center for a New American Security (CNAS).

    Image: Google Earth/CNN

    CNAS is a hawkish think-tank that receives funding from US arms makers and the Taiwanese government through the Taipei Economic and Cultural Representative Office, Taiwan’s de facto embassy.

    Several members of the Biden administration came from CNAS, including Kurt Campbell, a co-founder of the think tank who now serves as President Biden’s top Asia official on the National Security Council.

    China hawks in Congress argue that the US must continue ramping up support for Taiwan to deter a Chinese invasion.

    “We need to be moving heaven and earth to enhance our deterrence and denial posture so that Xi Jinping concludes that he just can’t do it,” Gallagher told AP.

    But China’s recent rhetoric and actions have demonstrated that more US support for Taiwan puts the island under greater Chinese military pressure.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Beijing just concluded massive live-fire drills around Taiwan that were launched in response to Taiwanese President Tsai Ing-wen’s meeting with House Speaker Kevin McCarthy (R-CA) in California.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 22:20

  • US Prepping Military-Led Evacuation Of Embassy Staff From Sudan
    US Prepping Military-Led Evacuation Of Embassy Staff From Sudan

    The recent breakout of civil war for control of the Sudanese capital city of Khartoum led by rival generals has prompted the US government to ready contingency plans to evacuate American embassy personnel who are currently sheltering in place

    US Africa Command (AFRICOM) said in a Thursday statement that it “is monitoring the situation in Sudan and conducting prudent planning for various contingencies” – after a midweek ceasefire attempt failed to hold on.

    Image: AFP/Getty

    “As part of this, we are deploying additional capabilities nearby in the region for contingency purposes related to securing and potentially facilitating the departure of U.S. Embassy personnel from Sudan, if circumstances require it,” according to Pentagon spokesperson Lt. Col. Phil Ventura.

    Additionally, National Security Council spokesman John Kirby confirmed Thursday that the US knows the whereabouts of all diplomats still hunkered-down and that the State Department is trying to get “them all co-located together for their own safety.”

    According to Politico, the Pentagon is moving troops into place ahead of a potential evacuation:

    Wendy Sherman, the deputy secretary of State, privately told lawmakers Wednesday that troops would be moving to Djibouti, home to Camp Lemmonier, to provide the administration an option to launch an evacuation operation, according to one of the people familiar with the situation. The person, along with others POLITICO spoke to for this story, was granted anonymity to discuss sensitive military planning and internal deliberations. Sherman stressed that the mission would whisk only embassy staff to safety and that there won’t be a military-led general evacuation of American citizens, the lawmaker added.

    Streets in the city have been transformed into war zones, and the UN estimates at least 185 people have been killed and more than 1,800 wounded. The fighting broke out Saturday, and the battles pit the Sudanese Armed Forces (SAF) led by General Abdel Fattah al-Burhan against the Rapid Support Forces (RSF) of General Mohamed Hamdan Dagalo – who’s also known as Hemedti and has served as Burhan’s deputy head of state.

    What began as a peaceful protests and limited clashes over Sudan’s political future is now a war for control of Africa’s third-largest country. There remains significant dangers for Americans and foreign embassy staff, given it was only on Tuesday that US diplomatic convoy came under intense gunfire in the capital.

    The State Department called the attack, which included at least 100 rounds fired on the US embassy convoy according to international reports, a “reckless” and “irresponsible” attack and called on both sides of the raging conflict to uphold the safety and security of American diplomatic personnel. 

    All Americans and embassy staff were then ordered to shelter in place until help arrives, or calm returns. The Biden administration now is preparing for a worst case emergency evacuation scenario, given Sudan’s embattled government is not expected to help.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 22:00

  • Tax Armageddon Day Is Coming
    Tax Armageddon Day Is Coming

    Authored by Jerry Rogers via RealClear Wire,

    Benjamin Franklin famously wrote in 1789 that “our new Constitution is now established and has an appearance that promises permanency; but in this world nothing can be said to be certain, except death and taxes.” Death and taxes are fated. However, are enormous tax hikes also a fait accompli? Is it a certainty – ‘an accomplished fact’ – that the White House and Congress will repeal tax reforms that worked? Tax breaks that helped small business owners and families.    

    For the past several days Americans have been scrambling to make the deadline to complete their 2022 tax returns. Most taxpayers will be relieved once the ordeal is done. However, here’s an unfortunate reality: if Washington fails to act, the federal tax code is headed for major changes in just a couple of years, including massive tax hikes on families and small businesses.

    In December 2017, Congress passed, and Donald Trump signed an historic, comprehensive tax reform package.

    The Tax Cuts and Jobs Act slashed taxes for almost all Americans, substantially reduced corporate and small business taxes, and increased the standard deduction for individuals and couples.

    The reforms are set to expire – and certain provisions have already expired – in 2025. Unless the Congress moves to make the 2017 tax reforms permanent, Americans will suffer colossal tax increases crushing small businesses and family budgets. 

    The 2017 tax cuts delivered results for the American people, despite fierce opposition and false predictions of economic ruin. Opposition to the tax cut plan was intense. It was constant and well organized. At the time, many pundits – both on the right and left – predicted that the Republicans in Congress would cower and (former) President Trump would be forced to fold. It didn’t happen.

    The Job Creators Network (JCN) – a nonpartisan group founded by entrepreneurs – stood their post. Building coalitions, offering intellectual ammunition, and countering hysteria with facts, JCN informed the public discourse. In a public debate marked by false narratives and misinformation, JCN did something quaint – it told the truth and made its case based on the facts and evidence.    

    The JCN reminded Congress:

    Small business is the backbone of the economy with two-thirds of new jobs being created by small businesses. There are 29 million small businesses in America employing 56 million people — that’s 85 million Americans depending on the success of small business.”

    In 2017 in the midst of a political frenzy, the Job Creators Network advanced the economic science. JCN followed the evidence that tax reform would benefit all Americans and stimulate the economy. No easy task – remember the piercing opposition from Congressional Democrats and the media? We were bombarded with the worst demagoguery that Washington had to offer –  that the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act was designed to help the wealthiest few Americans, while leaving the rest of us stuck with the bill. It turns out – as the JCN argued – tax reform was a boon to the economy and a saving grace for America’s small businesses.

    Here’s what we know happened in the five years since the tax reforms took effect. Stephen Moore (an architect of the tax plan) recently wrote in the Washington Examiner:

    “We now have incontrovertible evidence that after five years since they took effect, the Trump tax rate cuts of 2017 raised revenues over this time period. The latest Congressional Budget Office report released earlier [in January] calculated that the federal government collected $4.9 trillion of federal revenue last year. This was up — ready for this? — almost $1.5 trillion since 2017, the year before the tax cuts became law. In other words, revenues were up 40% in five years. The evidence through the first three years of the tax cut finds that the share of taxes paid by the wealthiest 1% rose as well. So much for this being a tax giveaway for the rich.”

    Even with the Covid crisis and the pandemic lockdowns, the American economy experienced a ‘giant Laffer Curve’ effect from the 2017 tax cuts. In other words, Moore explains “we got higher growth and higher tax payments with lower tax rates.” The 2017 Tax Cuts and Jobs Act delivered good results for the American people.

    Moore’s work on the tax reform package is why the Job Creators Network awarded him with its Defender of Small Business Award.

    In 2018, JCN president and CEO Alfredo Ortiz called the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act “One of the greatest legislative achievements of the decade.” He went on to say that “Steve Moore was not only a major mover and shaker that made passage possible, but he was a strong partner alongside the Job Creators Network in ensuring that small businesses were among the beneficiaries of the legislation.”

    What was the economic outlook prior to the 2017 reforms?

    The labor force participation rate was in an alarming downward trend –  that is to say, the unemployed just stopped looking for work. Wage growth was stalled, and productivity growth was stuck at scarcely 1 percent. And new business investments in infrastructure had slowed to a meager 2.5 percent. America had entered  – what the political class told us was – a ‘New Normal’ of measly economic growth and wage stagnation. However, the Job Creators Network argued that easing the tax burden on small businesses (and all Americans) would allow them to expand, hire, and reinvigorate ‘Main Street’.

    What do we know today about the 2017 reforms? Another architect of the plan, Kevin A. Hassett, wrote in 2021 (four years into the tax reforms):

    “Data released over the past four years have met or even exceeded our predictions. In 2019 alone, real median household income in the U.S. rose by $4,400 — a bigger increase in one year than in the entire 16 years through the end of 2016 combined. From December 2017 through the end of 2019, real wages for the bottom 10 percent of the wage distribution rose 8.4 percent, while real wages for the top 10 percent rose 5.2 percent. Real wealth for the bottom 50 percent rose a staggering 28.4 percent, while that of the top 1 percent rose 8.9 percent.”

    Without Congressional action, the tax rates and reform tax structure (for 2026) will revert back to what Americans were subjected to before the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act took effect.

    Alfredo Ortiz said in a February oped:

    “Fortunately, the facts have finally caught up with the tax cuts’ detractors while supporters have been vindicated. A new report from the Congressional Budget Office (CBO) proves that, on top of the tax cuts contributing to one of the strongest economies in half a century pre-pandemic, the package didn’t compromise the federal budget.

    Recently in RealClearPolicy Ortiz wrote, the only way out of our current economic difficulties “is to empower small businesses through pro-growth policies like those in Job Creators Network’s American Small Business Prosperity Plan.” The first plank of the JCN’s plan is to make the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act permanent:

    “The 2017 Tax Cuts and Jobs Act unleashed a tsunami of small business expansion—leading to one of the strongest economies in half a century. But now, the legislation is set to incrementally expire and effectively hike taxes on America’s small business community. Congress should make small business tax relief permanent.”

    The Job Creators Network was right in 2017. The JCN was the bulwark that forced Congress to stay the course. Even as taxpayers have rushed to submit their returns and beat the IRS’s tax deadline, another deadline looms in our near future.

    Without legislative action, the tax cuts are set to expire at the end of 2025 and by 2026 tax rates and tax brackets will be higher for most households and small businesses.

    This year everyone (who pays taxes) knows that Tuesday April 18, 2023 is Tax Day. What we need to know is that December 31, 2025, will be a devastating day for most taxpayers – Tax Armageddon Day.

    As Franklin warned, “nothing can be said to be certain, except death and taxes.”

    However, December 31, 2025 doesn’t have to be a fait accompli, not if Congress acts and the American people go to the polls in 2024 knowing that tax hikes are coming in 2026.

    Massive tax hikes don’t have to be a certainty. You get to decide. 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 21:40

  • CDC Director Admits Vaccines Do Not Prevent COVID Transmission, Blames "Evolution Of Science"
    CDC Director Admits Vaccines Do Not Prevent COVID Transmission, Blames “Evolution Of Science”

    CDC Director Rochelle Walensky admitted during Congressional inquiry that existing covid mRNA vaccinations do not prevent the transmission of the current virus subvariants.  However, using typical establishment spin, Walensky also suggested that the vaccines did prevent transmission of the original variants despite the fact that there was no concrete data to support this notion.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Her explanation for the confusion?  It was “evolution of science” and the virus that changed the conditions, rather than the CDC being wrong (or lying) about the science and the conditions. 

    In the video below, Pfizer executive Janine Small is cornered by a member of the European Parliament and openly admits that the company’s covid vaccines were never tested for blocking transmission.  This was after Pfizer had consistently claimed the vaccine prevented the spread of the virus.  Media damage control argued that even though the mRNA products were not tested for transmission prevention by Pfizer, they are still considered useful for disrupting spread.  Data so far suggests that this was a lie:

    In 2021, data from the Public Health England and the NHS shows that the vaccinated and unvaccinated had almost identical rates of infectiousness. In other words, a vaccinated person was almost as likely to give you covid as an unvaccinated person.

    In the case of the original “wild virus” variant from 2020 to 2021, infections and fatality rates actually plummeted well before the vaccines were widely introduced.  This means that natural immunity was the most likely factor in the slowdown of the spread.  Transmission was stopped by the human immune system, not the vaccines.

    During the same congressional hearing, Walensky asserted that the CDC will continue to recommend masks in schools in communities where COVID-19 levels are high, despite the fact that multiple studies show zero positive results for masks in stopping covid.  The CDC continues to ignore these studies in favor of pro-masking policies.

    There is a logic behind the CDC’s otherwise bizarre behavior – They have to persist in dismissing the science because their original policies were not based in science, they were based in ideology and malicious intent.  The purpose of government pandemic mandates was control, not public safety.  Officials saw an opportunity to use covid fear as leverage to steal individual rights while promoting a fake sense of security.  And, the strategy almost worked, too.

    If it had not been for the incredibly low official Infection Fatality Rate (IFR) of the virus (only 0.23%), if covid had been just slightly more deadly and if conservative states did not have the courage to block Joe Biden’s vaccine passport efforts, then America and much of the western world would look very different today.  Just take a look at the draconian laws many Democrats wanted to put in place to punish those who would not submit to the vaccines.  

    The ongoing insistence of organizations like the CDC in promoting false covid information is proof that oppressive mandates and lockdowns would still be an issue in 2023 if elements of the public had not stood their ground.  We dodged a bullet, but just barely.     

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 21:20

  • US 'National Divorce' Appears To Already Be Happening
    US ‘National Divorce’ Appears To Already Be Happening

    Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The so-called “national divorce” that was promoted earlier this year by some Republicans appears to be occurring organically, according to a new analysis of U.S. population trends.

    A U-Haul moving van on Elm Street in Montpelier, Vt., on Aug. 12, 2017. (Artaxerxes via Wikimedia Commons/CC BY-SA 4.0)

    Since 2020, some 2.6 million people have moved out of U.S. counties that were won by President Joe Biden and into those that former President Donald Trump prevailed in, the analysis found. It cited recent Census Bureau data.

    More than 61 percent of the counties that voted for Biden in 2020 lost population, while 65 percent of Trump-supporting counties gained population,” the Issues and Insights analysis said. The data showed that some 2,562,937 people moved from Democrat-leaning counties to Republican-leaning counties since Biden was elected in the divisive November 2020 election.

    The two counties that lost the most population from net internal migration were Los Angeles County and Cook County, Illinois, which both overwhelmingly voted in favor of Biden. Cook, which includes Chicago, was down about 200,718, while Los Angeles lost about 363,000 people since the election.

    California, which has a Democrat governor and legislature, experienced “a massive net outflow” of people—871,127—in the past two years. New Jersey, which has a Democrat-controlled legislature and a Democrat governor, lost 107,000 people in the same time period, although the analysis noted that red counties in the Garden State gained 22,507.

    “While many of the blue counties that lost population were urbanized,” it said, “the exodus was widespread and nationwide, including many far more sparsely populated liberal areas.”

    Rep. Marjorie Taylor Greene (R-Ga.) speaks outside Manhattan Criminal Courthouse on the day of former President Donald Trump’s planned court appearance on April 4, 2023. (Reuters/Caitlin Ochs)

    Meanwhile, the largest loss suffered by any red county or equivalent was Jefferson Parish, Louisiana, which was down by 18,470, the analysis found.

    “On the other hand, blue counties lost population in states that saw overall gains,” the analysis noted. “For example, Florida had a net gain of 622,476 over the past two years. But counties that backed Biden nevertheless lost 3,374. Georgia had a large gain of 128,089, but blue counties still had a net loss of 28,178. Tennessee saw an increase of 146,403 people, but counties that voted for Biden saw a decline of 37,306.”

    Earlier Calls

    Earlier this year, Rep. Marjorie Taylor Greene (R-Ga.) posted on social media about the prospects of a “national divorce” occurring within the country, noting that the differences between Republican and Democratic voters are simply too great on a range of issues.

    “We need a national divorce. We need to separate by red states and blue states and shrink the federal government,” Greene wrote in February during Presidents’ Day. “Everyone I talk to says this. From the sick and disgusting woke culture issues shoved down our throats to the Democrat’s traitorous America Last policies, we are done.”

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 21:00

  • Millennials Are Slowest Generation To Hit 50% Homeownership; Rest Of Generation Fears Forever Renters
    Millennials Are Slowest Generation To Hit 50% Homeownership; Rest Of Generation Fears Forever Renters

    The millennial generation has finally reached a critical milestone of more than half owning their homes, according to a new report by the real estate site Apartment List, citing the latest data from the Census Bureau. Compared with other generations, millennials have reached the 50% mark slower than previous generations. 

    “For a generation whose identity has been shaped by a tumultuous relationship with the housing market, homeownership has been a lofty goal, growing exceedingly expensive and competitive compared to when their parents were coming of age,” Apartment List said. The current millennial homeownership rate is 51.5%, while all other generations are between 69% and 78%. 

    At the age of 30, 42% of millennials owned their homes, while Gen X had 48%, baby boomers had 51%, and silents had nearly 60%. This gap persists for even the oldest millennials in their early 40s. 

    Apartment List explained some of the reasons why millennial homeownership was suppressed in the last decade. 

    A handful of economic and cultural factors explain these generational gaps. The most significant was the Great Recession, which suppressed homeownership across all generations but was particularly damaging to millennials, whose early career trajectories were shaped by a historically unstable economy. During the economic recovery that followed, many millennials were drawn to centrally-located jobs in cities where starter homes became increasingly scarce and expensive. While many millennials purchased homes during these years, others spent more time living at home or in rentals, delaying major life events like homeownership, marriage, and childbearing when compared to earlier generations.

    During Covid, millennials were panic buying homes with ultra-low mortgage rates. 

    In 2020, the COVID-19 pandemic drove an even deeper wedge between millennial homeowners and millennial renters. On the one hand, millennials purchased an outsized share of homes during the first two years of the pandemic, when mortgage rates fell below 3 percent. On the other hand, housing inventory dropped to all-time lows and for-sale prices skyrocketed more than 40 percent. For millennial renters who could not afford to buy a home in the earliest stages of the pandemic, homeownership opportunities waned dramatically in the years that followed. Mortgage rates spiked, bringing modest relief to list prices but pushing monthly ownership costs even higher.

    We are surprised millennials have even reached the 50% mark. Perhaps their baby boomer parents have cosigned their mortgages or gifted them down payments as this heavily indebted generation struggles. 

    As for the other half of millennials, an increasing number are giving up on homeownership due to the housing affordability crisis

    Affordability continues to be the main factor of more and more millennials believing that they will be forever renters. 

    Not surprising at all.

    Apartment List concludes by saying homeownership challenges might be even worse for the next generation, Z. 

    Currently, ages 25 and younger, the majority of gen Z renters have never known a healthy housing market, and in our renter survey already 20 percent describe themselves as “forever renters.”

    Homeownership will be a Luxury… 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 20:40

  • Bringing Dead US Uranium Enrichment Industry Back To Life Will Be 'A Heavy Lift' But Needed: Industry Leader
    Bringing Dead US Uranium Enrichment Industry Back To Life Will Be ‘A Heavy Lift’ But Needed: Industry Leader

    Authored by Jon Haughey via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Uranium mining in the United States hasn’t been profitable since the Russians flooded the global market with predatorily priced ore and processed fuel a decade ago.

    The Diablo Canyon Nuclear Power Plant, in Avila Beach, Calif., is among the nation’s 55 operating nuclear power plants. (Joe Johnston/The Tribune (of San Luis Obispo) via AP)

    Long before, the nation’s atrophied uranium enrichment industry, episodically idled by market paralyses and perpetually frozen in costly multi-jurisdictional regulatory entanglements, had ossified into obsolesce.

    In 1980, the United States produced and processed 90 percent of the uranium used by 251 nuclear power plants that generated 11 percent of the country’s electricity.

    In 2021, only 5 percent of the uranium used by the 55 nuclear power plants operating in the United States—which now generate 20 percent of the nation’s electricity—was produced domestically.

    After years of Russian market manipulation stymied profitable domestic production, Congress has responded since 2020 with a series of bills that could, if approved, collectively spend up to $5 billion by 2035 in an attempt to seed a domestic commercial uranium market back to life.

    Despite slow-rolling allocations and delays in launching programs, which some attribute to resistance within the Biden administration to nuclear power, mines across five states—mostly in Texas and Wyoming currently permitted to excavate uranium—will soon begin doing so.

    Others elsewhere are also expected to participate in the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) uranium consortium and subsidized market incubator.

    Texas has the most uranium mining operations, but Wyoming has the most uranium, Wyoming Mining Association Executive (WMA) Director Travis Deti said.

    “For all purposes,” he declared, “the state of Wyoming is the American uranium industry.”

    There are four permitted uranium mines in the Cowboy State and at least three other prospective operations in regulatory review, Deti told The Epoch Times.

    They’re ready to start digging this spring. “We can mine all the uranium we need in the U.S. right here in Wyoming,” he said.

    Taillights trace the path of a motor vehicle at the Naughton Power Plant in Kemmerer, Wyo., where Bill Gates’ company, TerraPower, will build a sodium-cooled nuclear reactor in the former coal-fired power plant. (AP Photo/Natalie Behring, File)

    US Enrichment Capacity: One Mine

    But unfortunately, there’s nowhere in the United States for Wyoming mines to send ore for enrichment. Nationwide, only one plant in New Mexico has the capacity to enrich uranium for use in commercial nuclear reactors.

    Even if we were mining it now, we’re shipping it somewhere else [overseas] to get it enriched and refined,” Deti said. “When it comes to conversion and enrichment, we have no capacity to do that” in the United States.

    Deti told The Epoch Times he has a solution for private industry: build enrichment plants in Wyoming near the mines, where there is a knowledgeable workforce and “friendly” state regulatory policies geared to spearhead the mine-to-market uranium recovery.

    Deti also offers a solution for the Biden administration: to decarbonize energy and ensure a secure domestic energy supply, stop “paying lip service” to nuclear power as pivotal and de-zombify the nation’s uranium production industry by accelerating and streamlining permitting for ore excavation and processing.

    “Right now, Russia has a hold on conversion,” or processing uranium for commercial use, he said. Russia produces more than 50 percent of fuel used for nuclear power across the world and nearly a quarter used in the United States.

    Getting everybody to recognize the problem” is a significant achievement, Deti said. But he’s concerned addressing the supply-chain gap won’t get the funding and regulatory relief it needs from the Biden administration, despite mounting bipartisan Congressional support for accelerating long-term remedies.

    “I’m skeptical but hopeful,” he said. “We’re starting to turn in the right direction. It is possible that we can do it, but it is a heavy lift.”

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 20:20

  • De-Dollarization: Countries Seeking Alternatives To The US Dollar
    De-Dollarization: Countries Seeking Alternatives To The US Dollar

    The U.S. dollar has dominated global trade and capital flows over many decades.

    However, as Visual Capitalist’s Bruo Venditti details below, many nations are looking for alternatives to the greenback to reduce their dependence on the United States.

    This graphic catalogs the rise of the U.S. dollar as the dominant international reserve currency, and the recent efforts by various nations to de-dollarize and reduce their dependence on the U.S. financial system.

    The Dollar Dominance

    The United States became, almost overnight, the leading financial power after World War I. The country entered the war only in 1917 and emerged far stronger than its European counterparts.

    As a result, the dollar began to displace the pound sterling as the international reserve currency and the U.S. also became a significant recipient of wartime gold inflows.

    The dollar then gained a greater role in 1944, when 44 countries signed the Bretton Woods Agreement, creating a collective international currency exchange regime pegged to the U.S. dollar which was, in turn, pegged to the price of gold.

    By the late 1960s, European and Japanese exports became more competitive with U.S. exports. There was a large supply of dollars around the world, making it difficult to back dollars with gold. President Nixon ceased the direct convertibility of U.S. dollars to gold in 1971. This ended both the gold standard and the limit on the amount of currency that could be printed.

    Although it has remained the international reserve currency, the U.S. dollar has increasingly lost its purchasing power since then.

    Russia and China’s Steps Towards De-Dollarization

    Concerned about America’s dominance over the global financial system and the country’s ability to ‘weaponize’ it, other nations have been testing alternatives to reduce the dollar’s hegemony.

    As the United States and other Western nations imposed economic sanctions against Russia in response to its invasion of Ukraine, Moscow and the Chinese government have been teaming up to reduce reliance on the dollar and to establish cooperation between their financial systems.

    Since the invasion in 2022, the ruble-yuan trade has increased eighty-fold. Russia and Iran are also working together to launch a cryptocurrency backed by gold, according to Russian news agency Vedmosti.

    In addition, central banks (especially Russia’s and China’s) have bought gold at the fastest pace since 1967 as countries move to diversify their reserves away from the dollar.

    How Other Countries are Reducing Dollar Dependence

    De-dollarization it’s a theme in other parts of the world:

    • In recent months, Brazil and Argentina have discussed the creation of a common currency for the two largest economies in South America.

    • In a conference in Singapore in January, multiple former Southeast Asian officials spoke about de-dollarization efforts underway.

    • The UAE and India are in talks to use rupees to trade non-oil commodities in a shift away from the dollar, according to Reuters.

    • For the first time in 48 years, Saudi Arabia said that the oil-rich nation is open to trading in currencies besides the U.S. dollar.

    Despite these movements, few expect to see the end of the dollar’s global sovereign status anytime soon. Currently, central banks still hold about 60% of their foreign exchange reserves in dollars.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 20:00

  • Doug Casey On Rising Crime, Legalized Shoplifting, And Other Disturbing Trends In US Cities
    Doug Casey On Rising Crime, Legalized Shoplifting, And Other Disturbing Trends In US Cities

    Authored by Doug Casey via InternationalMan.com,

    International Man: In parts of California and other states, shoplifting under $950 has been de-facto decriminalized.

    The practical reality is that thieves can now walk into a store and steal whatever they can without fear of police intervening—as long as it’s under $950.

    The trend of de-facto legalization of shoplifting is spreading across the country.

    What is your take?

    Doug Casey: The rise in crime in general and the veritable legalization of shoplifting, in particular, are really just symptoms.

    The real problem is that the moral fabric of the US and many other Western countries are torn. There’s not much of a moral compass left. It’s no longer clear to the average American what is right and what is wrong. Right and wrong is now viewed as arbitrary social constructs. Property rights are barely even seen as rights, which is perverse since the very concept of rights is based on property—starting with your own body, which is the most basic form of property.

    This degeneration is understandable in a world where black is white and wrong is right. It’s become unclear in many people’s minds what a man is, what a woman is, and what the difference is. If there’s no recognition of something as basic and obvious as that, the meaning of words, and any logic in thought, becomes meaningless. So, of course, they have trouble understanding concepts like right and wrong. But it goes beyond that.

    For instance, many people think that reparations are due to black people simply because they’re black, and many blacks were slaves over 160 years ago. Incidentally, I don’t capitalize that word, something which has become a widespread affectation. It only serves to draw attention to race, which is part of the problem.

    Let’s pursue the absurd matter of racial reparations for a moment since some miscreants have said all blacks in California are due $5 million. But are reparations due to American blacks, by any stretch of fact or logic? The average income of blacks in the US is many, many times that of blacks who are still in Africa. Should blacks in the US, therefore, pay whites something out of gratitude? The answer, just in case anybody is wondering: Of course not.

    When people think they’re due reparations, the next step is for them to think—or rather feel, since there’s no logical thought involved—that they have a moral right to steal to take the reparations they imagine they’re owed. Does that have any relation to the fact that, although blacks are only 13% of the population, they commit 50% of the crime?

    Anyway, the nonobservance of shoplifting laws is just one more symptom of a corrupt culture and a collapsing civilization.

    International Man: Videos of “smash and grab” robberies—where large groups rush into a large store like Walmart or a very expensive one like Louis Vuitton and grab as much merchandise as they can carry—are circulating online.

    In places like Portland, Walmart has decided to permanently close all of its stores because of the rise in theft.

    For similar reasons, Target has closed stores in downtown Chicago, Minneapolis, and Washington, DC.

    How is rising crime affecting businesses, and what are the implications?

    Doug Casey: From a criminal’s point of view, in the kind of societal environment we’re in right now, flash mobs make a lot of sense.

    If you call together your posse to raid a store, and a hundred people overwhelm it to steal all they can, there’s nothing the employees can do about it. In fact, there’s likely nothing that the police can do about it, if only because it happens so quickly.

    It’s a clever tactic. But this type of thing happens not because they’re poor, black, or there aren’t enough police but because people no longer have a sense of right or wrong. The police are loath to stop them for fear of being called racists.

    Increasingly, business itself makes no sense, with the amount of taxes and regulations an entrepreneur has to deal with added to the lack of defense from common criminals.

    I expect this trend to continue. If it does, not just ghettos but central business districts will be devoid of retail stores. Many large office buildings will be empty. Others will opt to become self-contained fortresses.

    International Man: Many cities which have decided to “defund the police” have seen a surge in violent crime generally and carjackings, armed robbery, and murder.

    What do you make of the trend of rising crime?

    Doug Casey: Once again, it’s an indicator of the general degradation of civilization itself.

    If you’re wondering where the US is going, you can look at Venezuela, where the standard of living has collapsed since being totally taken over by socialist values in the last 20 years. And Argentina, which has been on a shallower glide path for the last 80 years. Latins seem to have learned absolutely nothing, however, since every country in South America, with the exception of Uruguay, is run by a doctrinaire socialist.

    Look at South Africa, which is still the most advanced country on the continent. Americans rarely hear about it, but power is only available half the day. The blacks have practically declared open season on whites in parts of the country. That’s the direction we’re going in the US.

    All over the West, criminals and welfare recipients are rewarded while producers are punished. China has some huge problems, but this is one area where they’re doing much better than the rest of the world.

    Common criminality is not tolerated in China—or anywhere in the Orient. Welfare barely exists. That’s one reason why China has risen relative to the US in recent years. The social and moral underpinnings of China are shockingly better than they are in the “woke” US. In fact, the US seems to be undergoing its own version of the Great Cultural Revolution that nearly destroyed China in the 60’s.

    International Man: Amid rising crime, the police are failing miserably to protect life and property.

    Could the free market provide these services better than the government? How would that work?

    Doug CaseyFirst of all, it’s essential to turn around the moral climate. That’s possible, but a whole different question.

    From a shorter term practical viewpoint, the police, the courts, and the prisons should all be privatized. Rather than being State employees enforcing arbitrary and often ridiculous laws, the US should revert to its founding principles.

    I’ve explained how this shocking proposal would work in much more detail elsewhere.

    Private police would be compensated based on their effectiveness. More like Mike Hammer or Mannix than the praetorian operative who puts away the tools at the end of a shift. Arbitration agencies whose profitability would depend on the speed, fairness, and low cost of their decisions would be a huge improvement over today’s highly political courts. Sentences would be assessed as dollar amounts to compensate victims, not costly sentences of incarceration. The first order of business should be to make the victim whole, not punish the perpetrator.

    If somebody steals a thousand dollars, the criminal must first pay back the victim—which rarely happens today—plus the costs of his capture and the arbitration costs. This takes the profit out of crime.

    If a person is murdered, a value assigned to his life would be paid to his estate. If the perpetrator is unable or unwilling to pay, his body parts should be sold.

    There’s much more to be said on the subject, examining solutions that haven’t crossed many minds.

    International Man: US cities are degenerating into expensive, unsafe, crime-ridden dumps that rival—or are even worse than—their Third World counterparts.

    Yet, the public continues to elect politicians that enact the policies that create these conditions in the first place.

    What do you make of this trend? Is there any hope? What can the average person do?

    Doug Casey: The real problem started with the government’s involvement in the economy. It started small, then took a quantum leap with the creation of the income tax and the Fed in 1913, which allowed it to finance WW1 starting in 1917. The process is now completely out of control.

    Notwithstanding what I just said about the police, the courts, and the prisons, the only involvement government should have in society is to protect people from force, which means that those things, plus a purely defensive military, are the only things government should be involved in. Perversely, these things are too important for the functioning of a civil society to allow the State a monopoly.

    What the State mostly does today is interfere in the economy and enrich the politically well-connected. It does not reliably protect the average person from crime and violence.

    At the founding of this country, the State represented only a tiny proportion of the economy. Now it’s 50%, and people expect its involvement everywhere. People have come to treat it as a cornucopia, not the dangerous predator it is.

    Welfare is available everywhere, from corporations to individuals. Food, shelter, medical care, education, and even jobs are expected to be the province of the government. These things should have nothing to do with the government.

    All the news that we hear about every day is what the government’s doing. We should be a lot more like Switzerland. Nobody knows, and nobody cares who the president of Switzerland is, which is one reason why Switzerland is a stable and prosperous country, and the US is becoming less that way daily.

    The bottom line is that we can expect crime to continue rising. And the State is now more the cause than the cure of the problem.

    *  *  *

    It’s clear there are some ominous social, political, cultural, and economic trends playing out right now. Many of which seem to point to an unfortunate decline of the West. That’s precisely why legendary speculator Doug Casey and his team just released this free report, which shows you exactly what’s happening and what you can do about it. Click here to download it now.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 19:40

  • Email Reveals Woke "Day Of Dialogue" At Elite Private School In Baltimore
    Email Reveals Woke “Day Of Dialogue” At Elite Private School In Baltimore

    An elite K-12 private school in Baltimore, Maryland, has adopted a radical “Day of Dialogue” where teachers will devote part of their class “to share a connection between the LGBTQ community and their particular subject,” according to an email sent to parents. 

    Gilman School, an all-boys private school, is ranked among the top 100 K-12 schools in the US and is recognized as one of the leading schools in Maryland. Parents spend more than $35,000 per year to have their children educated were shocked on Wednesday when Armond T. Lawson, head of the middle school, sent this email about the upcoming “Day of Dialogue”: 

    Dear Gilman Middle School Families,

    I am writing to inform you that Friday, April 21, the Middle School will conduct its first Day of Dialogue. Throughout the day, space will be created to learn about LGBTQ connections in our curriculum. Each teacher is prepared to devote 5-10 minutes of class time to share a connection between the LGBTQ community and their particular subject area. Examples include discussions related to the role gender plays in learning a new language, sharing information about the impact of LGBTQ figures in various disciplines, and informing students of some of the societal challenges encountered by LGBTQ people.

    Day of Dialogue in the Middle School was inspired by a similar initiative in the Upper School. Week of Dialogue – conceived of in 2018 at Gilman by two students – was created in response to the Day of Silence, which is a nationally honored day where LGBTQ students and allies take a vow of silence to protest the harmful effects of harassment and discrimination of LGBTQ people in schools. Previous presidents of Gilman’s Gender and Sexuality Alliance (GSA), Grey Johnson ’18 and Ben Levinson ’18 decided that instead of staying silent, Gilman should facilitate an open and educational conversation about LGBTQ topics within our community.

    We know this will be an enriching experience for our students and help to promote an increased understanding of and appreciation for all of the people in our school community and the world around us. Please feel free to reach out if you have any additional questions.

    The woke administration and teachers at Gilman seem oblivious to the fact that the parents ultimately fund their salaries. We obtained the email from one parent who requested anonymity and wanted to sound the alarm on the direction of education. A former student told us, “Why can’t the school just teach critical subjects instead of all this confusing gender nonsense.” 

    Another elite private school in Baltimore called Oldfields School is shutting its doors after 150 years. Even though the school has had financial issues for more than a decade, the school went super woke. 

    … and you guessed it. Now broke. 

    Nationwide, parents are yanking their kids from left-wing public schools at an increasing rate. At elite private schools, it’s a very dangerous game for administration and teachers to push unpopular, confusing woke curricula to young children because parents can easily cause a run on the school by withdrawing their kids and sparking a cash crunch. 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 19:20

  • ICE Deputy Director Proposes 'Virtual' Arrests As Immigration Backlog Balloons
    ICE Deputy Director Proposes ‘Virtual’ Arrests As Immigration Backlog Balloons

    Authored by Joseph Lord via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    An exterior view of U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) agency headquarters is seen July 6, 2018 in Washington. ( Alex Wong/Getty Images)

    U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) is considering “virtual” arrests to address a growing backlog of unprocessed illegal immigrants.

    Deputy Director of ICE Tae Johnson told the House Appropriations Committee on April 18 that his agency has been overloaded with work due to the unprecedented influx of illegal immigrants along the U.S. border with Mexico over the past two years.

    One result of this has been that many illegal aliens captured by ICE and Border Patrol have been released into the interior without legal papers ordering them to appear in court.

    It’s standard procedure to issue “Notices to Appear” (NTAs) to illegal aliens being released from flooded ICE detention facilities along the border. NTAs constitute the first step in beginning the legal deportation process.

    But ICE and Border Patrol have been so inundated by illegal aliens that many have been released without being issued an NTA.

    Tae Johnson, acting director of Immigration and Customs Enforcement, at a press conference in Washington, on Oct. 26, 2021. (Roberto Schmidt/AFP via Getty Images)

    Johnson asked Congress to authorize ICE to make “virtual” arrests by issuing NTAs online in order to begin the process of deporting the millions of illegal aliens currently in the country.

    Backlogs Until 2033

    Johnson made the request during an exchange with Ranking Member Henry Cuellar (D-Texas), one of the most conservative Democrats in the House.

    During the exchange, Cuellar expressed “concerns” about the immigration backlog built up in some American cities. In New York City and San Antonio, it is projected to take until 2033 for illegal immigrants to even appear before ICE. After that, it can take another two to three years before they get a day in court.

    It’s a little concerning that some of them have to wait until 2033 just to appear before you, then they get another 2-3 years before they even go to an immigration judge,” Cuellar said. 

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 19:00

  • Illinois Lawmaker Calls Weekend Chaos A 'Mass Protest'
    Illinois Lawmaker Calls Weekend Chaos A ‘Mass Protest’

    After a flash mob of more than 500 youths trashed downtown Chicago last weekend, smashing and setting fire to cars, terrorizing tourists, smashing windows and fighting in a riot that left two teenage boys hospitalized with gunshot wounds (albeit a common occurrence), one Democratic leader is making excuses.

    Via the Daily Mail

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Since I’m a glutton for punishment and I’m sure I’m gonna get the most unhinged, crime weirdo replies but: I would look at the behavior of young people as a political act and statement,” said state Senator Robert Peters.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In total, just 15 people were arrested.

    Others expressed concern, carefully – so as not to offend anyone.

    “We’ve had more than our share of downtown mass arrest incidents going back over a decade. This is not new,” said 2nd Ward Alderman Brian Hopkins, PJ Media reports. “What is new is to have it happen three days in a row.”

    “There should be all sorts of contingency plans in place for when these incidents occur,” Hopkins continued. “Instead, we had an absolute meltdown of command and control. Nobody knew who was in charge.”

    According to Hopkins, interim police SUpt. Eric Carter and Chief of Patrol Brian McDermott got into a shouting match Saturday night, and a disagreement ensued between “Chicago police leadership and CTA management about who was in charge.”

    Chicago Sun-Times:

    On Monday afternoon, the police department issued a statement saying more security measures would be in place going forward, such as checking bags at beach entry points. The curfew for Millennium Park will also be in place.

    Police officials are working closely with youth and outreach workers for when the gatherings occur, according to the statement. Parents were encouraged to accompany their kids or have them remain under adult supervision.

    It’s unclear why the police department was caught off guard, as it closely tracks social media for postings about these types of events.

    More via PJ Media’s Rick Moran;

    Maybe because no cop wants to end up in a viral video protecting himself or trying to restore order. The first order of business in any riot today is not to disrupt the destruction of the city. Laying hands on a rioter is a sure path to lawsuits and court appearances.

    In case you were wondering, the kids are planning another outing this coming weekend.

    The kids who are going to show up at these riots know that no one will touch them. No one wants to touch them because no one wants to deal with what they represent: the failure of city leaders to accept the responsibility to maintain a civil society.

    What’s truly amazing is that you could draw a direct line from the 2020 George Floyd protests to last weekend’s mayhem and not deviate an inch. Actions have consequences and inaction also has consequences. These are the consequences of inaction and what’s truly scary is that when authorities try to regain control and establish order, people are going to die.

    That’s the price Chicago is going to pay for stupidity and political gamesmanship.

     

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 18:40

  • The Woke Revolution Is Erasing The Past
    The Woke Revolution Is Erasing The Past

    Authored by J. Peder Zane via RealClear Wire,

    Students of English and history are going the way of the dodo bird.

    During just the last decade, their numbers at colleges and universities have dropped by a third – and humanities enrollment is down by 17%, Nathan Heller reports in his recent New Yorker article, “The End of the English Major.”

    Data collected by the American Academy of Arts and Sciences’ Humanities Indicators project show that “from 2012 to 2020 the number of graduated humanities majors at Ohio State’s main campus fell by forty-six per cent. Tufts lost nearly fifty per cent of its humanities majors, and Boston University lost forty-two. Notre Dame ended up with half as many as it started with, while SUNY-Albany lost almost three-quarters. Vassar and Bates â?? standard-bearing liberal-arts colleges â?? saw their numbers of humanities majors fall by nearly half.”

    Conservatives who have long lamented the politicization of the humanities, highlighted by the rise of women’s studies, queer studies, ethnic studies as well as the transformation of English and history into tools for the left’s vision of social justice, might be tempted to cheer this development. They might also applaud a main driver Heller and others cite for this trend: the determination of students spooked by the 2008 economic meltdown to choose majors that can help them land decent paying jobs. Reading “Middlemarch” may be uplifting but a marketing degree pays dividends.

    Unfortunately, something nefarious may be going on. It’s hard to believe that schools run by leftwing professors and administrators aggressively intent on telling students what they should think are passively responding to market forces. It is also not farfetched to suspect that they might be allowing the humanities to wither because it is a roadblock to the woke revolution they are advancing.

    English and history have always had an inherent conservative streak: They are, almost by definition, backward-looking disciplines. They have sought to conserve and thereby connect students with what the Victorian writer Matthew Arnold called “the best that has been thought and known.” Studying the history of ancient Greece and Rome and the art of the Renaissance, reading Shakespeare, Tolstoy, Austen, Ellison, and, of course, the Bible, show us how our ancestors’ decisions shaped our world while providing wisdom as we confront the great question: How can I lead a good life?

    At bottom, it is a recognition that history is ever the story, as Faulkner put it, “of the human heart in conflict with itself,” and that as we search for answers to eternal questions we can find solace by turning to the giants upon whose shoulders we stand.

    This mindset is problematic for the woke revolution. It holds that there is no abiding human nature or human condition; people are blank slates upon which society stamps ideas, like pieces of factory tin. It does not see us as biological creatures with innate instincts and concerns but a collection of social constructs that can be changed like hats. Utopia is possible if everyone can be made to wear the correct ideas. This forward-looking ideology has little use for the past; it was no accident that a seminal model for our woke movement, the French Revolution, abolished our Gregorian calendar and imposed its own, declaring September 1792 to be the start of Year One.

    Amnesia is the crucial psychological state for the woke revolution. In order to control thought, language, and reality itself, the left must strip people of the ability to evaluate the future plans it is peddling through reference to past experience. Those who do not remember what happened last week, last year, or a century ago are much easier to manipulate.

    Hence the longstanding effort to delegitimize the past by portraying it as a parade of horribles: History is the story of shocking cruelty; classic books are instruments to oppress marginalized groups.

    If you have never even been exposed to the idea that capitalism is the most liberating force in human history, the prime vehicle through which common people were able to gain wealth and power and replace authoritarian aristocracies with democratic forms of governance, then it is easy to be convinced it is simply a “tool of oppression.”

    If you do not know that the American revolution was fought for human freedom, then you might accept the risible claim of the New York Times’ 1619 Project, that its goal was the preservation of slavery.

    If literature and history are just cautionary tales of humanity’s wretchedness, if they are not sources of truth and beauty, but expressions of power and will, then why bother studying them?

    Let’s not forget that the economic meltdown was not the only thing that happened in 2008, when students started fleeing the humanities. That was also when the woke revolution began emerging as a transformational force through the election of Barack Obama. It was around then that support for humanities from nonprofits and the government started drying up.

    Circling the date 2007 on a piece of paper, James Shapiro, the renowned Shakespeare scholar at Columbia University, told the New Yorker’s Heller it was then that “funding goes down. The financial support for the humanities is gone on a national level, on a state level, at the university level.” A 2022 survey, for example, found that only 7% of Harvard freshmen planned to major in the humanities, down from 20% a decade earlier.

    History does not provide many bright lines. It is far easier to identify correlation than causation in its movements. But as we consider the plummeting interest in the study of English and history, we should note how helpful this is to the forces of the left, who control our college and universities. The less we know about the past, the more they can shape the future.

    J. Peder Zane is a RealClearInvestigations editor and columnist. He previously worked as a book review editor and book columnist for the News & Observer (Raleigh), where his writing won several national honors. Zane has also worked at the New York Times and taught writing at Duke University and Saint Augustine’s University.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 18:20

  • 50 Million Americans Under Severe Weather Threat Into Weekend
    50 Million Americans Under Severe Weather Threat Into Weekend

    Tens of millions of Americans are at risk of severe thunderstorms for the next several days. Accuweather forecasters say residents in the central Plains and the Gulf Coast to the Appalachians and mid-Atlantic could experience wicked weather, including heavy rains, high winds, hail, flooding, and even isolated tornados. 

    On Wednesday evening, severe storms erupted across the Plains. Multiple tornados were reported, with the worst damage across the southern part of the Oklahoma City metro area. At least two deaths were confirmed.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Accuweather meteorologists expect severe storms from northeastern Texas to southern Wisconsin today, including in Chicago, St. Louis, and Little Rock, Arkansas metro areas. They noted more intense storms are expected from southern Missouri to central Texas. The timing of thunderstorms will be later this evening. 

    Flash flood threats are posted through Friday for eastern Texas and Louisiana to western Kentucky and southern Indiana. 

    Another storm emerges Friday and is expected traverse parts of the Gulf Coast to portions of the Appalachians, eastern Great Lakes, and even the Atlantic coast into the weekend. 

    “There is some question as to whether the energy and moisture will be released primarily in the form of a period of heavy rain or a round of severe thunderstorms as the system travels northeastward from the Gulf coast this weekend,” AccuWeather Senior Meteorologist Dan Pydynowski said.
    On Saturday, upwards of 30 million people could be at risk of heavy rains and thunderstorms along the Atlantic Seaboard. 

    Rain is welcomed for the mid-Alantic area, where a moderate drought has developed. 

    … 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 18:00

  • "Lawsuit Time": Elon Musk Threatens To Sue Microsoft Over 'Illegal Use' Of Twitter Data
    “Lawsuit Time”: Elon Musk Threatens To Sue Microsoft Over ‘Illegal Use’ Of Twitter Data

    Authored by Katabella Roberts via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Twitter CEO Elon Musk has threatened to sue Microsoft after accusing the tech giant of illegally using the social media platform’s data for training.

    Elon Musk speaks at the 2020 Satellite Conference and Exhibition in Washington, D.C., on March 9, 2020. (Win McNamee/Getty Images)

    They trained illegally using Twitter data. Lawsuit time,” Musk wrote on Twitter on April 19, without providing further details regarding the allegations.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    His tweet came shortly after Microsoft announced it is removing Twitter from one of its advertising platforms. According to Microsoft’s official website, starting on April 25, Smart Campaigns with Multi-platform will no longer support Twitter.

    As of April 25, 2023, advertising clients will no longer be able to, “access your Twitter account through our social management tool, create and manage drafts or Tweets, view past Tweets and engagement, schedule Tweets,” the website states.

    The company stopped short of providing further details as to why it has dropped Twitter from its advertising platform but noted that other social media channels such as Facebook, Instagram, and LinkedIn will continue to be available to clients.

    However, multiple media publications report that Twitter’s Application Programming Interfaces (API) fees may have been at the center of the decision.

    Changes to API

    Twitter’s API provides third-party companies, developers, and users with programmatic access to Twitter data and features, allowing them to create automatic tweets, search for specific hashtags and receive Twitter engagement data and regulate retweets or responses.

    At a high level, APIs are the way computer programs ‘talk’ to each other so that they can request and deliver information,” Twitter states. Put simply, API provides solutions to companies or developers, allowing them to respond to customer feedback on Twitter, analyze conversations taking place on the platform and send out updates.

    The software intermediary is also a valuable source for academics, according to Wired, which reports that there have been more than 17,500 academic papers based on the platform’s data since 2020.

    Prior to Musk’s takeover of the company, Twitter had offered the program for free. However, in March, the official Twitter Developer account announced that the free version of the program will now only allow developers to write 1,500 tweets per month and they will no longer be able to access tweets, only create them.

    Instead, a brand new set of API plans for developers was rolled out with greater access to various functions, with the highest tiers costing $210,000 a month, according to Mashable.

    Musk ‘Open to Ideas’ for API

    Responding to Musk’s tweet on Wednesday, journalist Brian Krassenstein asked if the businessman has a “long-term plan” regarding the API.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 04/20/2023 – 17:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 20th April 2023

  • Beijing's Antarctic Land Grab: CCP Builds 5th Base Near South Pole
    Beijing’s Antarctic Land Grab: CCP Builds 5th Base Near South Pole

    Authored by Daniel Teng via The Epoch Times,

    Beijing is embarking on the “most significant” expansion of its footprint in Antarctica after new satellite images revealed the communist regime has resumed construction on a fifth polar station.

    A satellite view with overlays shows areas to be developed at the new Chinese station under construction, on Inexpressible Island, Antarctica, January 2, 2023. Center for Strategic and International Studies (CSIS)/Hidden Reach/Maxar Technologies 2023/Handout via REUTERS

    The new station, located on Inexpressible Island near the Ross Sea, could double as a spying operation, a Washington-based think tank suggests.

    “While essential for tracking and communicating with China’s growing array of scientific satellites, ground stations can support intelligence collection,” the report from the Center for Strategic and International Studies says.

    “Importantly, the station’s position may enable it to collect signals intelligence from U.S.-allied Australia and New Zealand and could collect telemetry data on rockets launching from newly established space facilities in both countries.”

    The CSIS says China has faced more challenges in establishing a footprint in the northern Arctic and, instead, has a “freer hand” to explore the South Pole.

    While the United States still maintains the largest presence on the continent, Beijing’s presence is expanding rapidly. It currently has four stations (all to be expanded), including the Great Wall, Taishan, Kunlun, and Zhongshan stations.

    A map shows the locations of existing Chinese Antarctic stations and the Inexpressible Island site of a new station in this handout image. (Center for Strategic and International Studies (CSIS)/Hidden Reach)

    “The Zhongshan Station’s assets could be leveraged to collect intelligence on foreign militaries in the Indian Ocean, including on the joint U.S.-UK Naval Support Facility Diego Garcia. It could also play a support role in monitoring India’s developing naval forces operating in the region.”

    The Chinese Communist Party (CCP) has maintained that its frequent expeditions to Antarctica are for research purposes only.

    However, the U.S. Department of Defense has said the CCP’s strategy is to develop “dual-use technologies, facilities, and scientific research,” all aimed at improving the capabilities of the Chinese People’s Liberation Army.

    These research stations could also be reference positions for Beijing’s answer to the U.S.-run global positioning system, the BeiDou satellite network.

    “There’s absolutely no reason why Antarctica would be immune from this doctrine,” Anthony Bergin, senior fellow at the Australian Strategic Policy Institute, previously told The Epoch Times.

    “Particular technologies, particular pieces of scientific research, could be morphed into part of a bigger system. It’s not so much we would expect a direct military threat from Antarctica.”

    Antarctic Treaties Under Threat

    The Antarctic Treaty System, established in 1961, is a key agreement governing international relations on the continent. The treaty is considered one of the most “successful sets of international agreements” because it has relied on goodwill and peaceful cooperation between nations.

    Since the CCP ratified the treaty in 1983, it has been steadily expanding its footprint, fishing fleets, and research expeditions to the continent.

    Beijing’s role in Antarctica’s affairs also has been contentious on other fronts.

    In 2022, Russia and China again blocked a proposal to establish a new conservation zone in the area during a Conservation of Antarctic Marine Living Resources (CCAMLR) meeting. This was the sixth consecutive year that such a proposal had been blocked by either party.

    “It’s this weird politicization of science,” Tony Press, a former CCAMLR commissioner, said in an interview with Scientific American.

    “Frankly, it is now holding back progress,” the U.S. delegation to the CCAMLR meeting said in an opening statement. “Countries that have prioritized their individual needs have weakened our ability to meet the shared conservation objectives on which this body was founded.”

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 23:40

  • Silver Vs Stocks: Comparing Performance During Recessions
    Silver Vs Stocks: Comparing Performance During Recessions

    Historically, silver has been an alternative to traditional investments like stocks and bonds.

    Amid the recent wave of bank failures and rising interest rates, many investors sought the metal, making prices jump.

    But has silver helped investors weather recessionary storms in the past?

    The infographic below, via Visual Capitalist’s Bruno Venditti, uses data from Macrotrends to highlight silver’s price movements during recessions and compares it to changes in the S&P 500.

    Silver Price During Recessions

    Like gold, silver’s value comes from its scarcity as a precious metal. Silver, however, has a higher industrial use, from electronics and medical applications to batteries and solar panels.

    Additionally, the silver market is much smaller than the gold market, making it a much more volatile asset.

    The metal saw its biggest price drop in 1980 when it tumbled over 56% after the Hunt brothers, who controlled over half of the world’s privately owned silver, failed in an attempt to corner the market and were forced to sell after a rise in margin requirements.

    Silver prices plummeted again during the 1990s recession before a steady recovery that culminated in an all-time high reached in 2011, three years after the 2007-2008 Financial Crisis.

    Over the last five decades, silver has only outperformed the S&P 500 in three of eight recessions: 1973, 1981 and 2007.

    As of March 2023, the silver nominal price was down 6.1% while the S&P500 was down 3.3%.

    Silver Price in 2023

    Over the next months, silver demand is expected to rise, supporting the price. Silver’s industrial market could be lifted from further gains in vehicle electrification and governments’ expanding commitment to green infrastructure, according to the Silver Institute.

    However, if the economic scenario worsens and industrial users of silver reduce their output, the metal may face some headwinds.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 23:20

  • Republicans Rally Behind Donald Trump – The List Is Growing
    Republicans Rally Behind Donald Trump – The List Is Growing

    Authored by Caden Pearson via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Rep. Lance Gooden (R-Texas) on Tuesday joined the growing list of Republicans endorsing former President Donald Trump for the 2024 presidential election after a positive meeting with Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis.

    Rep. Lance Gooden (R-Texas) at the Protect Children’s Innocence press event outside the U.S. Capitol in Washington on Sept. 20, 2022. (Terri Wu/The Epoch Times)

    In a statement issued on Tuesday, the House Republican from Texas emphasized his belief that Trump’s proven track record and commitment to putting America first make him the best candidate for the GOP nomination.

    “I met with Governor DeSantis, and while he has done commendable work in Florida, there is no doubt in my mind that President Trump is the only leader who can save America from the leftist onslaught we are currently facing,” Gooden said.

    Gooden portrayed the former president as a “tireless” and persistent fighter who supports American jobs and the economy, and stands up against illegal immigration. Gooden also highlighted Trump’s support for the military and veterans, as well as his opposition to the “dangerous socialist agenda” promoted by the radical left.

    “I wholeheartedly endorse President Donald J. Trump for the 2024 presidential election and vow to fight alongside him to reclaim our country from the leftist forces that threaten to destroy it,” Gooden said. “Together, we will ensure a prosperous and secure future for our great nation.”

    Florida Republicans Endorsing Trump

    Gooden joins a growing list of House Republicans backing the former president for the Republican nomination, including seven members from Florida who’ve backed Trump over DeSantis.

    This week, Republican Reps. Greg Stuebe, John Rutherford, and Brian Mast joined Cory Mills, Anna Paulina Luna, Byron Donalds, and Matt Gaetz, who already endorsed Trump.

    Steube told Newsmax on April 17 that Trump is “the only person that can reverse on day one all these disastrous policies of the Biden administration.”

    “We need to right all the wrongs that have happened under this administration, fix the things that happen in Afghanistan, support our military and our veterans, and do the things that the America First agenda stands for, and that is one person, Donald Trump,” Steube said.

    “I’m honored to add my endorsement to the long list of endorsements for President Trump,” he added.

    Donalds, who publicly endorsed Trump earlier this month, declared him the only leader who can get America “back on track” and provide the strength and resolve to “make America great again.”

    Other Endorsements

    Trump has received more than 39 endorsements from House Republicans, the most of any declared candidates, according to Ballotpedia.

    He also gained the support of seven senators and one governor, Henry McMaster of South Carolina.

    On April 13, Trump picked up his seventh Senate endorsement from Sen. Ted Budd (R-N.C.). Budd said America was stronger and safer under Trump but, in contrast, had become “a nation in decline” under President Joe Biden. This echoed Trump’s remarks in November when he announced his candidacy.

    “That’s why I endorse Donald J. Trump for President,” Budd said. “Hardworking, everyday families need a return of the America First agenda to restore prosperity and peace.

    The six other GOP senators who have endorsed Trump’s presidential bid are Sens. Cindy Hyde-Smith (R-Miss.), Lindsey Graham (R-S.C.), Tommy Tuberville (R-Ala.), Markwayne Mullin (R-Okla.), Eric Schmitt (R-Mo.), and J.D. Vance (R-Ohio).

    Trump has garnered a diverse array of endorsements from House Republicans spread across 16 states, with the largest number of endorsements coming from Texas, which had 12 as of April 13, according to Ballotpedia, which updates its statistics weekly.

    South Carolina has four endorsements for Trump, while Arizona has three; the remaining states have one to three endorsements each: Alabama, two; Colorado, one; Georgia, one; Illinois, two; Indiana, one; Louisiana, one; New Jersey, one; New York, two; Ohio, three; Tennessee, one; West Virginia, one; and Wyoming, one.

    Meanwhile, DeSantis, who has not announced his candidacy but has been spending time in early primary states, has so far received two House GOP endorsements from Reps. Chip Roy (R-Texas) and Thomas Massie (R-Ky.).

    While DeSantis has support among Republican voters, recent polls have consistently placed him second behind Trump in a possible 2024 Republican primary matchup.

    The latest endorsements of Trump come shortly after the former president pleaded not guilty to 34 counts of falsifying business records as part of Manhattan District Attorney Alvin Bragg’s investigation into hush-money payments to adult entertainment actress Stormy Daniels during his 2016 campaign.

    Trump, who has maintained his innocence, has stated that Bragg has “no case” against him.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 23:00

  • Black Incarceration Rates Are Dropping In The US
    Black Incarceration Rates Are Dropping In The US

    The incarceration rate of Black men in the U.S. has been dropping after reaching a high in 2001.

    Infographic: Black Incarceration Rates Are Dropping in the U.S. | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    Yet, as Statista’s Katharina Buchholz reports, the rate at which Black U.S. men are imprisoned is still many times that of the white and more than double that of the Hispanic male population.

    According to the Bureau of Justice Statistics, 1,807 Black men per 100,000 were held in state or federal prisons in the U.S. during 2021 after being sentenced (that’s roughly one in 55). This number doesn’t include people in county jails or in pre-trial confinement.

    All in all, the Sentencing Project estimated at the height of the incarceration crisis in 2001 that the likelihood of a Black men spending time behind bars in their lifetime was 1 in 3, while it was 1 in 17 for all U.S. men.

    Imprisonment rates for women are much lower across the board in the U.S., and the rate of Hispanic and Black women being imprisoned has equally dropped since the late 1990s. The group with the lowest overall incarceration rate, white women, are unique in the sense that their imprisonment rate was growing quite steadily since 1980 and only started dropping since 2015.

    Different theories exist why Black incarceration rates have been declining. For one, crime and arrests have been decreasing in the U.S. overall. Also, the war on drugs has shifted its focus onto meth and opioids, which are drugs associated to a larger extent with the white population. Finally, criminal justice reform might have had some positive effects too, according to the Marshall Project.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 22:40

  • Luongo On The 'Straight From ShitLib Central-Casting Gun-Enthusiast' Pentagon-Leaker
    Luongo On The ‘Straight From ShitLib Central-Casting Gun-Enthusiast’ Pentagon-Leaker

    Authored by Tom Luongo via Gold, Goats, ‘n’ Guns blog,

    The “Pentagon Papers’ is making the rounds as the big new event of the past couple of weeks. The controversy is over the ‘leaks’ of strategic briefing documents detailing US future plans for the war in Ukraine. I’ve watched this story unfold with a weather eye but wanted to wait to see how it would progress before commenting.

    I know, not going for the click-bait at the height of the anxiety-pimping is a rare thing these days.

    This morning Kit Knightly at Off Guardian put out a strong post on the disinformation process that I believe is worth your time. Even though I disagree with his conclusion, or more precisely leave myself open to a different conclusion, his Disinfo Radar isn’t far off from the calibration zero-point.

    This leak has all the hallmarks of being a fake, by Kit’s 5 point heuristic, a heuristic I think has value, just not singular value. This ‘leak’ doesn’t fit this model because of other responses to it. Because in order to sweep it into the corner, it burned the media as information gatekeeper in ways that those with power never do. More on that later.

    Black is the new Red

    For now let’s focus on the black-pilled, those that live in a perpetual state of cynicism. For them it is easy to just dismiss this event the way Kit does, as something to shift the Overton Window in such a way as to reinforce the narrative they want you engaged in –in this case maneuvering us into supporting another war for globalism.

    It’s all content designed, in the parlance of social media, to boost engagement. Because the system has adapted, they don’t manufacture consent anymore – they farm participation. Angry refutation and warm praise record the same in the algorithm. They don’t want your agreement, they want your attention. And when they feel the story is losing the audience, well, here’s some super secret facts you aren’t supposed to know.

    This is an excellent point that I agree with, in theory. Yes, they use multiple approaches to move public opinion. Yes, they like to hand out red pills to the normies to give them the cheap dopamine hit of ‘figuring stuff out.’

    But, here’s the thing about this type of insight, it’s its own form of psy-op.

    Formally identifying this gives the disinformation brokers the flexibility to use both of these techniques (and other techniques) to keep people like Kit and fellow travelers like Whitney Webb and others focused on trying to figure out which one it is.

    I hate to single Whitney out here because I genuinely like her and believe she’s an honest broker, but I have to because of her current obsession, Jamie Dimon, which I’ve been asked about by so many people (again, more on that later),

    The thing to observe is when they figure it out, they will write, talk and text about it.

    It drives traffic, gives positive feedback, and has all the appearance of both real journalism and sincerity (which, by the way, I’m not doubting) but is it for the right reason?

    It looks to me like chum for smart people to feel clever and one step ahead of the bad guys. The positive feedback drives subscriber and revenue growth reinforcing the idea of work well done.

    But is it really? Or are they just rats chasing the trail laid for them by the cheese mongers?

    I say this as someone acutely aware of their own personal tendency to doing just that. It’s not hard to fall down the wrong rabbit hole, obsessed with facts but not what they mean…

    This is why all heuristics in an information space as polluted as this one need constant error checking.

    Conversing With Tyrants

    Uncovering the techniques of control are just uncovering the mechanics. In this case, however, it looks like it is uncovering the agenda, but I don’t think that’s the case here.

    Ultimately, it brings to mind Gene Hackman’s ultimate fate in Coppola’s classic movie The Conversation, playing his saxophone in the ruin of his apartment secure he’s satisfied his paranoia.

    For all of his skills and brilliance, rather than be an asset, he’s been taken off the board chasing shadows.

    That’s the trap of focusing on the what (the corruption) and the how (the mechanisms) but not the why.

    This is a serious issue going forward.

    Distrusting those with power goes without saying. We’re all operating in this space with this basic drive. No doubt, there. It’s our duty to uncover truths, but it’s also important to question our own frameworks, lest we become reflexive repeaters of the very disinformation we believe we are uncovering.

    So, in this case to dismiss the Pentagon Papers as just another control technique may feel right but be completely wrong because it assumes the basic fallacy of this period of history, that there is only one big club vying for control over the West.

    The Division Hell

    I’ve produced a lot of content making the case for counter revolution within the US power hierarchy. The basic premise is that as groups approach existential threats to their power and/or position they will react in predictable ways to maintain their power.

    It isn’t complicated. But it does mean that corrupt people may act in ways counter to how they reacted previously, forsaking old relationships. I’ve never believed group identity is eternal because I don’t believe cartels are anything other than meta-stable based on mutual coincidence of wants.

    Because of that we have to remain open for people to surprise us with moves that seem out of character.

    Only the most ideologically nihilistic would pursue Davos’ path. Only those with a hatred of humanity born of a deep wellspring of love for all things Malthusian would bring us to this point. [inviting open war between nuclear-armed powers]. And to deny that there’s anyone in a position to oppose this from our side of the new Berlin Wall is just surrender masquerading a cynicism. [emphasis mine]

    To understand how fragile Davos really is I put it to you like this: For the price of a few hundred basis points, the Fed forced a coup in the UK, the ECB into a tightening cycle with more yield curve control, likely blew up FTX and its burgeoning offshore crypto-dollar Ponzi Scheme, and forced the Swiss National Bank to intervene against the bank run on Credit Suisse.

    And this brings me back to the Pentagon Papers. It is the height of lunacy to believe there aren’t people out there honestly trying to stop this train before it stops at World War III. To dismiss the leak as just another brick in the imperial wall while not seriously considering the idea that it was done by patriots in the Pentagon is honestly irresponsible.

    Because you can construct that argument very easily, especially given how over-the-top the response was by the “Biden” administration. Do you think John Kirby is really that good at misdirection and misinformation?

    I don’t.

    In fact, his exchange with the media is a major tell that this was not something on the administration’s whiteboard. When the media openly asks how they can help (seemingly supporting Kit’s point #1) we have crossed into new territory. Why?

    Because it’s never been that way before. Yes, we knew the media were court stenographers, people like myself and Kit have known this for more than a decade. But to openly torch what’s left of their credibility to support disinformation to keep the administration’s secrets is something very very new.

    This wasn’t some double-secret 12-D chess maneuver by hyper-competent game players. This was far more what it looked like on the surface, a sphincter-clenching moment of raw panic from people whose lies were outed in pure damage control mode.

    Here’s a better question that’s been going around for days now, How can the FBI find the leaker so quickly when they can’t find their ass with a map and both hands when it’s something they want to keep secret?

    Is your worldview so black that you can’t even consider that this straight from shitlib Central Casting 21-year-old “gun enthusiast” (like that’s even a pejorative) wasn’t fed to them as chum to make their response look as insane as it was?

    That doesn’t look like panic to you?

    Seriously, if this kid was as much of a misguided patriot as he was portrayed you don’t think he wouldn’t lean in and take one for the team for a commanding officer he respects trying to stop the US military from being railroaded into another war it couldn’t win?

    I’m not saying it’s true. What I’m saying is you can’t discount that possibility to zero, or even not consider it as highly likely just because your cynicism is your defense mechanism against disappointment.

    You see in my world the MIC is terrified of everyone finding out that their weapons don’t work. The Dept. of Defense is equally terrified of us finding out they’ve spent trillions on imperial welfare and not very much on actual military preparedness, or that Obama and company have purposefully left it a shell.

    What should scare you more is why that was allowed to happen and for whom was that a strategic goal?

    Talk about a question no one in D.C. wants to face!

    Even if you believe the whole thing is just a massive grift to keep fleecing the Muppets for annual appropriations, it doesn’t track then that they leaked these plans to sell more weapons.

    Because it would be a one and done deal. Sell weapons for a few quarters into a sovereign debt and currency crisis to lose a war (or two) which culminates in the complete humiliation of the US military.

    No way would patriots within the Pentagon and the MIC grifters go for this strategy. The incentives do not line up.

    Talk to the Unseen Hand

    In the same way, as I’ve argued for nearly two years, the incentives for Wall St. and the Fed do not line up either. Which brings me back to Whitney Webb and JP Morgan Chase CEO Jamie Dimon. Whitney is making the rounds with her latest expose on the connections between Dimon and Jeffrey Epstein.

    I’m not commenting on the quality of Whitney’s work or her motives behind it.

    The timing on this is, of course, coincident with Dimon’s legal troubles over the same issue, which we know is a highly politicized issue. Now, if there is one person who has the pull and the power to support the Fed’s moves to regain control over its monetary policy it is Jamie Dimon.

    As such, Dimon then represents one of the biggest threats to Davos’ desired outcomes of a future dominated by full surveillance over all financial activity via CBDCs. Make no mistake, I don’t trust Dimon as far as I could throw him, but I also know that he is a fulcrum on which a lot of future plans rest.

    So, to me, his new legal troubles are a counter-move against him, in a classic ‘nuts and sluts’ campaign to pressure him out of his position. If you think JPM is a monolith then you have a simplistic view of organizations. It isn’t. There are plenty of people at JPM who would sell Dimon down the river for a whole lot less than thirty pieces of silver.

    If Davos can’t get rid of Jerome Powell at the Fed then Dimon is the next best target.

    This isn’t to say that Whitney shouldn’t inform us of Jamie Dimon’s connections, his past, etc. But proving Dimon is dirty is like proving the sun rises in the East. His recent comments in JPM’s annual report about using eminent domain to procure stable energy for the future is easily explained.

    Wall St. loves a one-sided trade and setting monetary policy. There is a healthy probability that Powell may lose the political fight on Capitol Hill and JPM will need to support moronic Climate policies or face extinction, so throwing a bone to the Davos crazies makes sense. But his position that oil needs significant investment is also simultaneously genuine.

    Everyone focused on the solar farms and windmills but Dimon’s statement also included the only thing you would actually use eminent domain for… pipeline. And pipelines are a big Davos no-no.

    The real job of the journalist/analyst is to ask why is it that all of a sudden we know of Dimon’s past associations with Epstein?

    Who’s seeding that into the zeitgeist? If you’re going to take the bait and ‘expose the real Jamie Dimon’ then shouldn’t you also ask why someone is putting that idea in your head?

    If you’re really interested in the truth then you would always keep your radar for such stuff in good working order.

    But if Dimon really is a WEF/Davos stooge then why is he being pursued in a kangaroo court similar to what Donald Trump is currently going through (also an Enemy of Davos) and what was done to Matteo Salvini in Italy over his migrant policy.

    No one is out there defending Jamie Dimon as the victim of a Soros-backed smear campaign because he’s the epitome of what is hated in the world right now: a rich, white guy, CEO of the most powerful bank in the world.

    Ask yourself who benefits from taking him down?

    If Dimon was a Davos stooge as Whitney suggests then why aren’t his legal troubles going away rather than seemingly multiplying?

    This is the core of one of my basic heuristics in trying to parse real information from the fake, what are they trying to make me believe about what’s in front of me? Do I believe that?

    Why is it being amplified through the response engines of social media?

    This is especially relevant knowing full well that the reason Dimon is on the hot seat in the first place is because he’s openly defied Davos’ Climate Change orthodoxy by echoing Powell’s ‘higher for longer’ rhetoric, his firm being at the forefront of the transition from a Eurodollar system backed by LIBOR to a new US-focused system built on SOFR, and his going to Davos 2023 this year and proclaiming that oil will be with us for the next fifty years.

    In the end the conversation we should be having isn’t over who did what before the game reached its terminal phase but who they will become when theirs is the head on the chopping block and why?

    And that’s the real heuristic needed to parse where things are headed and who’s on which side of the ledger.

    *  *  *

    Join my Patreon if you hate recursion

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 22:20

  • NHL Former PK Subban On Pride Jerseys: "We Cannot Push Everyone To Be An Activist"
    NHL Former PK Subban On Pride Jerseys: “We Cannot Push Everyone To Be An Activist”

    NHL veteran and legendary defenseman PK Subban is speaking out against the league trying to mandate Pride Night jerseys onto its players after numerous well known players have declined to wear them during games. 

    He called the move a “push” to make everyone an “activist”, according to Fox News. He said that he does not believe that a player “needs to be activist” and he said that “there are other ways to show support without having to wear a hat, a T-shirt or a jersey,” the report said.

    He raised the issue that while many people support the LGBTQ community, they don’t need to be mandatorily and involuntarily deputized into speaking out about social issues just because they play sports. 

    Subban commented: “We cannot push everyone to be an activist, we need to be very careful. I feel people pick and choose what they want to talk about and I don’t like it when we put the onus on athletes to be activists.”

    “They don’t need to be activists. I’m not saying it is right or wrong to wear the (Pride) jersey, we have just got to be very careful how we push players to do things,” he continued. 

    “You can support the LGBTQ community without having to wear a hat, a T-shirt or a jersey,” he added.

    Among other players who have cited potential reprisal from Russia as reasons not to wear pride jerseys, the report notes that Flyers defenseman Ivan Provorov, San Jose Sharks goalie James Reimer and NHL veterans Eric and Marc Staal have all declined to wear the jerseys, citing religious reasons. 

    “This is the first time we’ve experienced that, and I think it’s something that we’re going to have to evaluate in the offseason,” commented Commissioner Gary Bettman.

    Coach Rick Tocchet of the Canucks said recently about one of his players opting out due to fears of Russia repercussions: “I’m not going to get into it because we don’t know the deals that happen over there. So I respect his decision.”

    Subban concluded: “The people that write the articles, the people that push certain narratives in the media, they have to be held accountable. We have to be very, very careful about the way we perceive a moment.”

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 22:00

  • FBI Nixed Raid On Tennessee Religious Compound After Waco Massacre
    FBI Nixed Raid On Tennessee Religious Compound After Waco Massacre

    Authored by Ken Silva via Headline USA (emphasis ours),

    Exactly 30 years ago, the FBI was planning to raid a purported religious compound in Benton, Tennessee—but bureau officials aborted the plan after agents killed 76 people during the disastrous April 19, 1993, raid in Waco, Texas, according to a previously unpublicized document reviewed by Headline USA.

    The U.S. government murdered 82 civilians at Waco, Texas 30 years ago. PHOTO: Public domain

    The FBI’s planned raid on the Tennessee-based “Order of St. John of Jerusalem” was part of a sweeping 1990s-era undercover operation called Patriot Conspiracy, or PATCON, which entailed undercover agents and informants infiltrating the right-wing militia movement.

    Extremism researcher J.M. Berger has extensively covered PATCON, including the planned Tennessee raid. In an April 2012 article for Foreign Policy, Berger wrote that the FBI closed its investigation into The Order of St. John in July 1993 because officials were worried that agents were “only obtaining intelligence and not moving forward with the criminal investigation.”

    But that’s not the whole story. Neither Berger’s research nor publicly available FBI documents indicate that agents had, in fact, planned a similar Waco-style raid in Tennessee.

    This is only revealed in a March 2013 email written by former FBI informant John Matthews, who participated in PATCON. Matthews wrote the email to Jesse Trentadue—an attorney currently embroiled in litigation against the FBI over PATCON—who recently provided the record to Headline USA. The email has not received media attention until now.

    Matthews’ email matches much of what’s written in publicly available FBI PATCON records.

    Those records describe The Order of St. John as an extremist religious group led by a medical doctor named John Grady, who was calling for violence against the federal government. An April 1992 FBI memo said Grady, who also headed the American Rifle and Pistol Association, owned some 340 acres of land that he used to locate a sprawling compound.

    Survival and firearms training has been conducted on the OSJ and APRA property and men have been seen wearing camouflage units and carrying firearms,” the FBI memo said.

    Matthews’ email described how he helped the FBI plan its raid. In the email, Matthews wrote that Grady “had bunkers all over his land.”

    “I took pictures of them inside and out,” he said.

    According to Matthews, the FBI had him bring another undercover government agent—”I believe he was from the Army (Delta Force),” he said—to conduct reconnaissance on the Tennessee property. Grady and his wife were gone for the night, Matthews said, giving him and his Delta Force partner the run of the place.

    “Dr. Grady did not know I brought this guy in at night … He took notes on how wide the bunker walls were and how the doors were made … I already knew that a team was building up to hit Doc Grady’s place next. They had to know everything about the place in case of a standoff with his followers inside the compound,” Matthews wrote.

    Matthews further said that “within hours of Waco” agents were already headed to Tennessee to plan the next raid.

    But top officials apparently had second thoughts, as the Tennessee raid was called off amidst the negative attention federal agencies were receiving after the Waco massacre.

    “Doc Grady was saved by Waco,” Matthews wrote. “Seeing Waco did not go over so well in the eyes of a lot of folks, they did not raid Doc Grady’s, for it would have opened a bigger can of worms and a war may have started from the groups across the country.”

    Headline USA was unable to contact people who can corroborate Matthews’ story. The FBI has declined to comment on PATCON, while Grady died in 2018. The Order of St. John’s website is still active, but the group did not respond to an email seeking an interview or comment.

    Grady reportedly denied all allegations of illegal activity when interviewed by extremism researcher Berger in 2012.

    Every statement that you’ve shown me is false,” Grady reportedly told Berger, disputing the contention in FBI documents that his religious and gun-rights groups were white supremacist in nature. To Grady’s point, the fact that the FBI called off its raid after receiving public backlash from Waco indicates that agents found no hard evidence of criminality at his compound.

    Berger has also been quiet about PATCON in recent years. Whereas his early work exposed FBI malfeasance, journalist Matt Taibbi recently revealed in his Twitter Files reporting that Berger later became a contractor for the State Department’s “Global Engagement Center.” Berger created a tool that’s now being used by the GEC to push censorship on the internet, according to Taibbi.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Matthews, for his part, is unavailable because he has been off the grid since around 2014, when he was going to testify as a witness for Trentadue in his lawsuit against the U.S. government. Matthews changed his mind about testifying the night before he was supposed to take the stand, leading to Trentadue alleging that the FBI engaged in witness tampering and threatened Matthews.

    Trentadue’s allegations have been subject of a court-appointed investigation for the last nearly eight years. The investigation has been conducted behind closed doors, with gag orders on all parties.

    Trentadue told Headline USA he believes Matthews’ story to be highly credible, as the former PATCON informant has provided accurate information about numerous other secret FBI operations.

    The FBI also finds Matthews to be highly credible.

    As Newsweek noted in a 2011 article about the informant-turned-whistleblower, the bureau honored Matthews for his service after serving as an informant throughout the ‘90s, giving him a plaque that says the following: “John W. Matthews: In appreciation and recognition for your outstanding efforts in assisting the FBI to combat domestic terrorism throughout the United States: March 28, 1991–May 30, 1998.”

    Ken Silva is a staff writer at Headline USA. Follow him at twitter.com/jd_cashless.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 21:40

  • REI To Close Portland Store, Citing 'Safety Of Our Employees' And 'Out-Of-Control' Thefts
    REI To Close Portland Store, Citing ‘Safety Of Our Employees’ And ‘Out-Of-Control’ Thefts

    Add outdoor retail giant REI to the growing list of companies planning to close stores in Portland, Oregon, because of rampant lawlessness in the Democrat-controlled city. 

    Oregon Live said REI notified customers on Monday about plans to close its store in Portland’s Pearl District early next year. The retailer said its store in Portland “had its highest number of break-ins and thefts in two decades, despite actions to provide extra security.”

    “While we do not believe a downtown Portland location will be possible in the near term, our stores in Tualatin, Hillsboro, and Clackamas remain open and ready to outfit you with the gear and advice you need to enjoy life outside,” REI told customers.

    REI spokesperson Megan Behrbaum told the local media outlet that REI had made numerous investments in theft prevention, including hiring private security, surveillance technology, and security glass. She said despite all of this, the break-ins and shoplifting continued. 

    “The extra security measures required to keep customers and employees safe are not financially sustainable.

    “We will continue to invest in these areas through the remainder of our lease, but cannot justify continuing this expense through a lease extension beyond early 2024,” Behrbaum said. 

    REI has been added to the list of major retailers shuttering stores in Portland. Walmart and Cracker Barrel called it quits last month. Nike also closed a store to public access, telling city officials that shoplifting was the cause.

    According to the Portland Police Bureau, burglaries, robberies, vehicle thefts, and vandalism have surged over the last several years. The jump in violent crime comes just after the city elected a progressive district attorney in 2019 that implemented social justice reforms that have largely backfired. 

    Portland was once known as the ‘crown jewel of the West Coast’ for its trendy art and food shops but is now transforming into a liberal hellhole of lawlessness as businesses have no choice but to exit to protect margins.  

    More broadly, Portland isn’t the only liberal metro area experiencing business flight. Out-of-touch city leaders in Chicago were furious last week with Walmart’s plan to close stores.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 21:20

  • The House GOP Effort To Defund – Not Police, But Wokeness
    The House GOP Effort To Defund – Not Police, But Wokeness

    Authored by Ben Weingarten via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Through executive orders and budget requests, the Biden administration has sought to embed “diversity, equity, and inclusion” principles across the entirety of the federal government – and in turn to touch the lives of every American. Now members of  the Republican House majority, who see this whole-of-government effort as a woke assault on America and its core values, are working to combat it using the power of the purse. 

    In a series of letters to House appropriations leaders, Rep. Jim Banks and like-minded colleagues have identified and called for the defunding of all “‘woke’ programs and initiatives that are rooted in discrimination and promote far-left ideology in the federal government” in 2024 spending bills. 

    The letters, obtained exclusively by RealClearInvestigations, are a product of Banks’ Anti-Woke Caucus, a 26-member group of House Republicans launched by the former chair of the Republican Study Committee earlier this year, and notably counting among its members Rep. Elise Stefanik, chair of the House Republican Conference, members of the House Freedom Caucus, and others. 

    Banks and caucus members delivered the letters to the chairmen and ranking members of each of the 12 House Appropriations Committee subcommittees in late March following the release of President Biden’s $6.8 trillion 2024 budget request.  

    Each letter flags examples of “woke” offices or policies to which Congress allocated funding in relevant 2023 spending bills, and the associated dollars, and calls for those “and all programs that discriminate based on race, gender, and sexual orientation or seek to disparage our nation’s core ideals and history [to] be decreased to $0” in the 2024 versions of the bills. 

    A narrow reading of the line items characterized as woke in the letters – which represent only a partial accounting of such programs and initiatives – shows that such programs totaled over $900 million in 2023. 

    Some of the 2023 programs the Republican members seek to zero out in 2024 include: 

    • The Commerce, Justice, Science, and Related Agencies Appropriations Act’s more than $200 million in spending on programs aimed at increasing race-based hiring and recruitment in STEM. 

    • The State, Foreign Operations, and Related Programs Appropriations Act’s $200 million for the Gender Equity and Equality Action Fund. 

    • The Interior, Environment, and Related Agencies Appropriations Act’s $108 million for “environmental justice” activities. 

    The $900 million outlay excludes broader items highlighted in the letters, like the $3.5 billion earmarked for energy efficiency and renewable energy in the 2023 Energy and Water Development, and Related Agencies Appropriations Act. Given that the letters represent only a partial accounting of such programs, the vagueness of budget language, and the discretion with which federal agencies can act, tax dollars advancing such efforts may well substantially dwarf these figures. 

    The letters also target language in the 2023 versions of: 

    • The Commerce, Justice, Science, and Related Agencies Appropriations Act, claiming that “white supremacists and violent anti-government domestic extremists” are “infiltrating security and law-enforcement agencies.” 

    • The Department of Homeland Security Appropriations Act, directing Immigrations and Customs Enforcement to detain transgender illegal aliens at facilities only with staff who have received “LGBTI Sensitivity and Awareness Training,” and medical personnel with experience delivering hormone therapies. 

    • The Energy and Water Development, and Related Agencies Appropriations Act, requesting that the Department of Energy consider social equity and environmental and energy justice in state and community energy programs. 

    “We believe that the House Republican majority has a responsibility to use its spending powers to ensure that we do not contribute further funding to anti-American and divisive initiatives,” the signatories to each letter wrote. 

    Tough Odds

    They face tough odds given Democratic control of the Presidency and Senate and the persistence of budgetary gridlock in Congress. Though the House has primary power under the Constitution to tax and spend, only three times in the last 47 years has Congress completed a budget in advance of the subsequent fiscal year, which begins October 1 — often relying instead on continuing resolutions that temporarily fund the government at existing levels. This year spending disagreements extend to negotiations to avert a U.S. debt default by relaxing the limit on federal borrowing, a ceiling some expect the government to reach this summer; in those talks, the Biden administration has refused to contemplate any cuts at all.

    Should Congress pass and President Biden ultimately compromise on a budget that does not wholly comport with his progressive priorities, his administration could be expected to circumvent the anti-woke constraints. In a recent precedent, President Trump declared a national emergency to justify redirecting funding to build a southern border wall that Congress had not so allocated. The courts ultimately blessed that effort. But in his first day in office, President Biden froze it.  

    When asked about chances of GOP success in the present effort, Rep. Banks told RCI that:  

    This needs to be the Republican majority that says enough is enough. Speaker Pelosi famously said “show me your budget and I’ll tell you your values.” This appropriations cycle, Republicans need to show that we value liberty, patriotism and legal equality and that we reject dividing Americans based on race, anti-Americanism, radical gender ideology and climate hysteria. 

    Even if the defunding effort fails, the Banks-led coalition may see a political benefit to pursuing it: pushing Democrats in the 2024 election cycle to stake out positions on more deeply ideological – and presumably less broadly popular – programs.

    RCI asked ranking Democrats on several of the appropriations subcommittees for comment on the Banks letters, and had not received any responses at the time of publication. 

    The House Anti-Woke Caucus members’ budget requests represent its most extensive legislative effort to date. 

    In March, the caucus reportedly held its inaugural dinner and endorsed its first piece of legislation, the Fairness, Anti-Discrimination and Individual Rights (FAIR) Act. Sponsored by Anti-Woke Caucus member Tom Tiffany, a Republican from Wisconsin, the bill would bar any federal agency, contractor, state, or private entity that receives federal funding from discriminating against or granting preferential treatment on the basis of race, color, or national origin. 

    Banks announced he would be establishing the Anti-Woke Caucus in January, pledging to “fight institutionalized wokeness” – an announcement that came just days before he would declare his candidacy for an open U.S. Senate seat in Indiana in 2024.  

    In an interview for RealClearPolitics in February, the Indiana congressman indicated that the caucus had three missions – the first two to which the appropriations subcommittee letters seem to aim: To “Identify Wokeism, defund it and uproot it, and then hold those accountable for it.” 

    Banks added that wokeism is “a cancer that’s going to eat our country inside out and kill us if we don’t do something about it.” 

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 21:00

  • Post-Pandemic Burnout: 20% Of Nurses May Quit In Next Four Years, Says Survey
    Post-Pandemic Burnout: 20% Of Nurses May Quit In Next Four Years, Says Survey

    The total American nursing workforce has fallen 3.3% over the past two years, but experts expect the trend is about to rapidly accelerate — to the point that one in five nurses could call it quits by 2027.  

    “High workloads and unprecedented levels of burnout during the COVID‑19 pandemic have stressed the U.S. nursing workforce, particularly younger, less experienced RNs,” write the authors of a survey-study published on Thursday in the Journal of Nursing Regulation

    We pause to ask…was any of that burnout due to practicing choreographed dance routines for TikTok? 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    More than 100,000 left nursing during the pandemic, and researchers say another 800,000 could bail in the next few years. The paper was the focus of a panel discussion at the National Press Club hosted by the National Council of State Boards of Nursing (NCSBN), reports MedPage Today.   

    Such an exodus would have powerful ripple effects throughout healthcare, said Brendan Martin, NCSBN’s director of nursing regulation. 

    The survey included more than 54,000 respondents, with 92.5% of them being women. Key findings: 

    • 50.8% feel emotionally drained
    • 56.4% feel used up
    • 49.7% feel fatigued
    • 45.1% feel burned out or “at the end of their rope”

    In an ominous sign for what’s to come, quitting nurses skew young: 41% of the post-pandemic flameouts had an average age of 36 and fewer than 10 years on the job. Age and workload are key factors, say the study’s authors: 

    “The most pronounced differences emerged when comparing early career nurses with higher workloads to their more experienced peers with normal workloads. In this comparison, early career respondents with high workloads were more than three to four times more likely to report higher frequencies of feeling emotionally drained, used up, fatigued, burned out, or at the end of their rope.”  

    At the height of the pandemic, this Russian nurse opted to wear just a bra and panties under see-through PPE. Despite patients having “no complaints,” she was disciplined. (New York Post)

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 20:40

  • Transgender Athlete Barred from Australian Women’s Basketball League
    Transgender Athlete Barred from Australian Women’s Basketball League

    Authored by Daniel Y. Teng via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Transgender athlete Lexi Rodgers has been barred from playing in the NBL1 South women’s basketball league in the Australian state of Victoria.

    The decision was handed down by an expert panel after former NBA star Andrew Bogut broke the news of Rodgers’ involvement.

    In a statement on April 18, Basketball Australia said former AFL Chief Medical Officer Dr. Peter Harcourt, Olympian Suzy Batkovic, and Associate Prof. Diana Robinson concluded that Rodgers was ineligible to play for the Kilsyth Cobras.

    “Firstly, on behalf of Basketball Australia, I’d like to acknowledge and sincerely thank Lexi for her cooperation, understanding, and patience throughout this process—it’s a complex space that continues to evolve,” said Batkovic.

    “While Lexi is understandably disappointed with the outcome, I know she’ll continue to support her NBL1 South team throughout the season and be an active member of the basketball community.”

    NBL1 sits just below the country’s top-flight basketball competition, the National Basketball League.

    Reaction to the Decision

    Basketball Australia maintained that it would assess transgender applications on a “case-by-case” basis and consider a “balancing range of factors.”

    Rodgers and the Kilsyth Cobras team have been informed of the decision.

    In response, Rodgers wrote on Instagram that she had participated in good faith in the process, saying it was not the end of her journey.

    “I am sad about the potential message this decision sends to trans and gender-diverse people everywhere. I hope that one-day basketball’s governing body can replicate the inclusion and acceptance I have found on the court with my teammates,” she wrote.

    However, Bogut said it was the right decision.

    “It is beyond alarming we live in a time where an ‘expert panel’ is needed to make these decisions,” he wrote on Twitter. “Don’t let the activists try and overcomplicate what is simple: Women’s sports are for Women.”

    Bogut had earlier accused administrators of a lack of transparency around Rodger’s participation.

    Members of that club don’t know. Other teams in that league don’t know,” Bogut said on Instagram. “I’m not afraid to speak about it. I think it needs to be discussed.”

    “This athlete in question has already played the game. From what I understand, a friendly game against a team that had no idea it was going forward. They asked some questions, apparently before the game [and] the game still went ahead—kind of like, ‘Too bad, deal with it.’”

    The head of Christian Voice Australia, Greg Bondar, said transgenderism was a growing trend that was impacting more and more younger people.

    “The Williams Institute at the UCLA Law School reports that the number of young people identifying as transgender has doubled in just the last few years and that one out of five people who identify as transgender are 13 to 17 years of age,” he said in a statement.

    Transgender Players in Sport a Contentious Issue

    Meanwhile, the inclusion of transgender athletes in sports has received much public scrutiny.

    In early April, criticism was aimed at transgender golfer Breanna Gill who won the Australian Women’s Classic at Bonville Golf Resort in New South Wales.

    Thoughts on having a transgender-specific league? Or transgender-specific sports?” wrote Hailey Rae Ostrom, a U.S. professional golfer, on Twitter.

    While global swimming administrator FINA voted on June 2022 to regulate transgender athletes more stringently, only allowing biological males into women’s competitions if they had not experienced puberty yet.

    Athletes must maintain testosterone levels below 2.5 nmol/L. Around 71 percent of FINA’s 152 members voted in favour of the new rule.

    Additionally, The World Athletics Council has banned biological males from competing in elite female competitions and tightened testosterone restrictions for other athletes, stating that its top priority is to maintain the integrity of the female category in athletics.

    The Council said in a statement that it has agreed to exclude male-to-female transgender athletes who have been through male puberty from the female World Rankings competition, effective from March 31, 2023.

    Meanwhile, U.S. beverage giant Bud Light saw its sales plummet following the release of an advertising campaign featuring transgender activist Dylan Mulvaney.

    Restaurant owner Jeff Fitter, owner of Case and Bucks, reported sales of the brand’s bottled products dropping 30 percent over the past week, and draught beer plummetting 50 percent.

    In Bud Light’s effort to be inclusive, they excluded almost everybody else, including their traditional audience,” he told Fox Business.

    CEO of the parent company, Anheuser-Busch, was forced to apologise for the ad.

    “We never intended to be part of a discussion that divides people. We are in the business of bringing people together over a beer,” said Brendan Whitworth, in a statement.

    Bud Light’s customer base is comprised largely of sports fans and middle Americans.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 20:20

  • Trump's Palm Beach Mansion Next To Mar-A-Lago Hits Rental Market
    Trump’s Palm Beach Mansion Next To Mar-A-Lago Hits Rental Market

    Mansion Global reports a Trump family-owned oceanfront beach house in Palm Beach, Florida, down the street from Mar-a-Lago, has returned to the rental market after a failed sale despite a red-hot South Florida housing market.

    “A one-of-a-kind direct oceanfront estate boasting 10,455 total square feet of living space and unobstructed views of the Atlantic, 1125 S Ocean features 8 bedrooms, 8 full and 3 half bathrooms,” the description of the beach house reads on Zillow. 

    It further said, “This iconic, trophy property is rarely available for lease and includes over 200 feet of water frontage … and for approved occupants, residency at the beach house comes with coveted access to the exclusive Mar-a-Lago Beach Club next door.” 

    Margit Brandt of Premier Estate Properties has the rental listing and is asking $195,000 per month or about $2.3 million per year. 

    “In Palm Beach, we’ve seen so much movement from all different parts of the country and the world.

     “It’s the perfect house for someone who wants to try out Palm Beach,” Premier Estate Properties’ Margit Brandt, who listed the rental, told Bloomberg.

    Between 2021-22, the property’s asking price increased from $49 million to $59 million. Despite the booming South Florida real estate market, no buyer was found. 

    Bloomberg pointed out the beach house was previously in a trust in the name of Trump’s sister, Maryanne Trump Barry, which sold for $18.5 million in 2018. The current owner is a limited liability company that lists Eric Trump and Donald Trump Jr. as officers. 

    For those seeking entry to the Mar-a-Lago Beach Club, renting Trump’s beach house might be the golden ticket inside. 

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 20:00

  • As Soros-Backed Prosecutor Fights Attempt To Oust Her, Judge Sets Separate Contempt Hearing
    As Soros-Backed Prosecutor Fights Attempt To Oust Her, Judge Sets Separate Contempt Hearing

    Authored by Janice Hisle via The Epoch Times,

    Accusations of mismanagement and chaos are piling up against St. Louis Circuit Attorney Kim Gardner.

    St. Louis Circuit Attorney Kim Gardner speaks in St. Louis, Mo., on Jan. 13, 2020. (Jim Salter/AP Photo)

    Gardner appeared in court on April 18, the first hearing in Attorney General Andrew Bailey’s attempt to remove her from office. Gardner’s lawyers are seeking dismissal of that case.

    Bailey asserts she neglected her duties by failing to properly staff her office and allowing thousands of criminal cases to languish. Gardner’s lawyers counter that Bailey never even alleges she committed any “intentional” acts that would justify her ouster.

    Lawyers from Bailey’s office argued that Gardner should be disqualified from holding office because of her alleged pattern of “inaction” and “willful neglect” of her duties.

    A day before the hearing, a judge ordered Gardner to “show cause” why she shouldn’t be held in contempt of court for failing to ensure that prosecutors from her office show up for a murder trial on April 17. A hearing in that matter is set for April 24, the St. Louis Post-Dispatch reported.

    The contempt action comes after a judge sanctioned Gardner for failing to turn over evidence in a double murder case earlier this month.

    Missouri Attorney General Andrew Bailey speaks to his staff in March 2023. (Courtesy of the Missouri Attorney General’s Office)

    During the hearing in Bailey’s case against Gardner, a representative of judges in St. Louis’ 22nd Circuit Court said: “The circuit attorney’s office is now in a state of near total collapse.” The man, whose name was unclear during a live broadcast of the Gardner hearing, told Visiting Judge John Torbitzky: “An expedited resolution of this matter is very important.”

    Torbitzky is expected to decide within a couple of weeks whether to throw out Bailey’s petition against Gardner. He ordered attorneys to file written arguments about the motion to dismiss within a week; Torbitzky said he would decide whether to dismiss the case promptly after that.

    If it proceeds, a trial likely would be held in September, based on a scheduling discussion during the hearing.

    In his original court filing (pdf) against Gardner, Bailey wrote: “She has sacrificed the safety of the city of St. Louis. She has squandered the goodwill of the courts through misdirection and incompetence. She has turned away grieving families while murderers walk free.”

    Action Follows Outcry

    But an attorney representing Gardner, Jonathan Sternberg, said Bailey doesn’t have the goods on Gardner.

    “This is an attack on the democratic process by someone who was never elected,” Sternberg said, taking a dig at Bailey, who was appointed to his position in January after the former attorney general, Eric Schmitt, became a member of the U.S. Senate. Bailey and Schmitt are Republicans; Gardner is a Democrat.

    “Mr. Bailey doesn’t like the job Miss Gardner is doing,” Sternberg said. So the appropriate remedy would be for Bailey to support an opposition candidate in the next election rather than trying to throw her out of office via a court proceeding, Sternberg said.

    Such drastic action should be reserved for cases involving intentional acts and corruption, which aren’t alleged in this case, Sternberg said.

    Janae Edmondson Case

    Bailey filed the action against Gardner last month following a public outcry over the tragic case of Janae Edmondson. That visiting teen athlete, who is from Tennessee, lost both of her legs in a pedestrian-vehicle crash. The driver accused of causing the crash that hurt Janae, is an armed robbery suspect who remained free despite violating his house arrest order dozens of times.

    Janae Edmondson, a Tennessee teen athlete, lost both of her legs after a speeding vehicle caused a crash as she walked with her parents in St. Louis, Mo., on Feb. 18, 2023. (Rhonda Ross/GoFundMe)

    Gardner is one of 75 prosecutors nationwide who benefited from billionaire George Soros’ efforts to get “progressives” elected, according to author Matt Palumbo, who wrote a book about Soros.

    Gardner’s battle to keep her job is occurring in the context of a national debate over the alleged “soft-on-crime” policies of some Democrat prosecutors in big cities, particularly those who received backing from funds from Soros. According to The Missouri Times, Gardner’s campaign benefited from Soros’s largesse.

    Although embattled, Gardner has announced she is seeking re-election in 2024 to the position she has held since 2017.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 19:40

  • Taylor Swift Rejected $100 Million FTX Sponsorship Over 'Unregistered Securities' Question
    Taylor Swift Rejected $100 Million FTX Sponsorship Over ‘Unregistered Securities’ Question

    While Tom Brady, Shaquille O’Neal, Giselle Bündchen, Larry David and other celebrity promoters are currently being sued over their endorsement of failed cryptocurrency exchange FTX, Taylor Swift isn’t among them – because she was the only celebrity to ask whether NFTs were unregistered securities, according to the lawyer handling a class-action lawsuit against the other celebs.

    During an appearance on “The Scoop” podcast, attorney Adam Moskowitz said the plaintiffs are seeking more than $5 billion from the celebrity endorsers, who he says didn’t do their due diligence to determine whether the crypto exchange was breaking the law.

    “The one person I found that did that was Taylor Swift,” said Moskowitz, who added that FTX wanted Swift to sell concert tickets as NFTs – which Swift questioned.

    “In our discovery, Taylor Swift actually asked them: ‘Can you tell me that these are not unregistered securities?'” said Moskowitz.

    Swift’s father notably used to work for Merrill Lynch.

    According to the Financial Times, Swift began discussing the $100 million sponsorship in the fall of 2021. FTX would implode one year later, after concerns over commingling customer funds led to a stampede of withdrawals.

    The class-actioon lawsuit accuses celebrities of promoting an unregistered security – which, when sold in the United States, must be registered with the SEC. In a December complaint, the SEC said that the company’s cryptocurrency, FTT, was classified as a security because it was sold as an investment contract, yet was not appropriately registered.

    “In order to induce confidence and to drive consumers to invest in what was ultimately a Ponzi scheme,” the defendants “made numerous misrepresentations and omissions,” according to the lawsuit.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 19:20

  • The Bullet Train Epitomizes Golden State Corruption
    The Bullet Train Epitomizes Golden State Corruption

    Authored by Edward Ring via AmGreatness.com,

    California’s failing rail project is a metaphor for a state that has turned its back on the ordinary, hardworking people who live there…

    It sounded too good to be true, and it was. Travel from downtown San Francisco to downtown Los Angeles in two hours via high-speed rail. California voters in 2008 approved Proposition 1A, authorizing $9.95 billion in general obligation bonds to build this so-called “bullet train.” They were told not only that the total cost would only be $33 billion but also that the entire 500-mile system would be running by 2030.

    Fat chance.

    In March of this year, the California High-Speed Rail Authority released its latest progress report. The project is now projected to cost $127 billion, and there is no longer a projected completion date. The initial stretch of track, a 171-mile segment across the sparsely populated, pancake-flat San Joaquin Valley, is projected to be done by 2030 at a cost of $35 billion.

    These are staggering numbers, a testament to a staggering waste of financial and material resources. For this first segment of track, Californians are going to pay $206 million per mile, and that’s if there aren’t any more overruns. The financing alone—based on preposterously optimistic ridership projections for this segment of 6.6 million riders per year, and a 30-year-term at 5 percent annual interest—would work out to a cost of $348 per ticket. Not exactly an easily affordable means of travel.

    California’s high-speed rail project, in short, is a disaster. Everything about it fails any rational cost-benefit analysis. It will be a permanent financial drain on Californians, because in order for anyone to be able to afford to use the train for a daily commute, ticket revenue won’t even pay operating costs, much less pay back the construction costs.

    From an environmental perspective, the California High-Speed Rail Authority boasts that the initial segment will reduce total vehicle miles traveled in California by 183 million miles. That sounds like a lot until you take into account that Californians logged 340 billion vehicle miles traveled in 2022. High-speed rail by 2030 expects to reduce that total by 1/20th of one percent.

    But the opportunity cost of blowing $127 billion, and counting, on a train that will not significantly alleviate either traffic congestion or “greenhouse gases” is perhaps the bitterest joke of all. For $127 billion, Californians could build infrastructure that would improve their quality of life for generations.

    Even in absurdly expensive California, $127 billion goes a long way. That much money could pay to raise the height of the Shasta Dam, build the proposed Sites Reservoir to its original 2 million acre-feet storage capacity, restore every aqueduct in the state, build new systems to harvest and store storm runoff, upgrade every major treatment plant in the state to recycle and reuse wastewater, refurbish the Diablo Canyon nuclear power plant to last till 2050 or longer, build two additional nuclear power plants of the same size, and resurface and add lanes to every major interstate freeway.

    For $127 billion, even at ridiculously inflated California prices for public works, Californians could have abundant, affordable water and power, they could have a freeway system upgraded for the 21st century, and they would still have tens of billions left.

    Corruption and Waste as a Way of Life

    The problem with spending money on rational, practical solutions that lower the cost of living and improve the quality of life for millions of Californians is that this goal is inconvenient for the special interests that run California. On the other hand, pouring every spare bit of money, materials, and labor into a make-work megaproject serves several hidden agendas.

    The rationale for high-speed rail is to help save the environment, as if adding a 500-mile scar to the landscape, consuming millions of tons of steel and concrete in the process, is somehow preferable to simply upgrading the capacity of existing road and rail assets in the state.

    But the true motivation to fund useless megaprojects is a desire to neglect California’s essential water, power, and transportation infrastructure, because by creating scarcity and high prices for these resources, public utilities and private energy producers reap larger profits. This plays out across several economic sectors.

    For example, public utilities collect regulated profits, fixed at a percent of revenue. If renewable electricity costs several times more than conventionally generated power—and it does and always will if you do honest cost accounting and factor out the punitive permitting costs—then utilities make more profit. Ten percent of $0.40 per kilowatt-hour of renewable electricity at peak is a much bigger number than 10 percent of $0.04 per kilowatt-hour for clean natural gas-generated electricity.

    With water, the higher the price goes, the easier it is for big agricultural corporations to outlast and buy out small family farms, consolidating the industry. It’s also more lucrative for hedge funds that are buying land in California just for the water rights. The higher the price of water, the more valuable their investments.

    One would think California’s powerful unions would recognize the benefit that practical infrastructure investments would have for all working families in California, but they don’t. As long as their construction workers have lucrative jobs on the high-speed rail project, there is no upside to them taking on the environmentalist lobby or the corporate and financial players that profit from scarcity and high prices. Nonetheless, California’s construction unions could be a political wild card. If they want to demand projects that would generate positive economic benefits and help all working families, they have the political power to make it happen.

    The Ripple Effects of Scarcity Policies

    Affordable and abundant water and energy form the foundation for broad-based prosperity. They make home ownership more affordable, because the supply of homes cannot be significantly increased unless there is adequate water. They make electricity and gasoline affordable, which benefits households and businesses. And scarcity of water and energy are not the only essential resources that California denies its citizens.

    Building materials, lumber in particular, need to be imported from other states and nations since California’s state legislature has regulated in-state timber harvesting to less than 25 percent of what it was as recently as the 1990s. But rather than thin the forests with responsible revitalized logging, every year the firefighting industrial complex gears up to collect additional billions fighting cataclysmic fires in overgrown, mismanaged forests, and silences criticism with two words, “climate change.”

    California’s overregulation of everything has led to its so-called housing crisis because it is now impossible for private developers to make a profit building homes that working families can afford. Instead, a host of special interests, collecting countless billions in money from taxpayers, have created a massively subsidized industry in low-income housing and “permanent supportive housing” for the homeless.

    These projects waste stupefying amounts of money, but if regulations were loosened up to allow private development of homes people could afford, or if homeless people were humanely moved off the streets into supervised encampments where they could recover their sobriety and their dignity, the scams would come to a screeching halt.

    Spending $200 million per track mile on high-speed rail and over $500,000 per unit of “permanent supportive housing” has nothing to do with saving the planet or helping the disadvantaged homeless. These insanely overpriced projects endure because spending that money wisely would create a competitive economic environment, threatening the margins and the market share of the special interests that run California.

    Wasting billions on projects that will never yield the public benefits they promise but will nonetheless ensure permanent sources of profit and power for California’s public sector bureaucrats, its environmentalist pressure groups, its public utilities, its hedge funds and pension funds, its corporations, and its subsidized land developers is the business of California’s elite now. All of them are determined to keep things just the way they are. Because for all of them, ongoing public failure is ongoing special interest success.

    California’s High-Speed Rail project is a failure. It is also a metaphor for a state that has turned its back on the ordinary, hardworking people who live there. The larger problem is that California is exporting this mentality into the rest of America, along with its propaganda, and its corrupt, punitive economic model.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 19:00

  • Home Foreclosures And Missed Credit Card Payments Surge As Consumers Buckle
    Home Foreclosures And Missed Credit Card Payments Surge As Consumers Buckle

    In the first quarter of this year, home foreclosures surged, as reported by property data firm Attom. Following a two-year lull, pandemic-related housing assistance programs are winding down. Homeowners who chose not to make mortgage payments are now either negotiating new terms with lenders, selling their properties, or, as current trends suggest, facing foreclosure. This troubling rise coincides with consumers falling behind on their credit card payments.  

    While still below pre-pandemic levels, foreclosure filings during the first quarter of 2023 totaled 95,712 properties, up 6% from the previous quarter and 22% from a year ago. This was the 23rd consecutive month with a year-over-year increase in foreclosure activity. 

    “Despite efforts made by government agencies and policymakers to try and reduce foreclosure rates, we are seeing an upward trend in foreclosure activity,” Rob Barber, CEO at ATTOM, said in a statement. He continued:

    “This unfortunate trend can be attributed to a variety of factors, such as rising unemployment rates, foreclosure filings making their way through the pipeline after two years of government intervention, and other ongoing economic challenges. However, with many homeowners still having significant home equity, that may help in keeping increased levels of foreclosure activity at bay.”

    Much of Attom’s data was recorded before Silicon Valley Bank’s demise. A credit crunch followed and sparked further busting of the tech bubble that added capital destruction in private equity and venture capital firms. Now real estate investments, primarily commercial real estate, are being significantly reevaluated as more financial stress is boiling up. 

    Making matters worse is 24 months of negative real wage growth for consumers who’ve maxed out credit cards and drained personal savings. Lower-tier consumers are coming under pressure as big banks are beginning to notice a startling uptrend in credit card and loan payment delinquencies. 

    “We’ve seen some consumer financial health trends gradually weakening from a year ago,” Wells Fargo Chief Financial Officer Mike Santomassimo said on an earnings call last Friday.

    Banks have tightened their lending standards ahead of expected turmoil among consumers. 

    Wells Fargo set aside $1.2 billion in the first quarter to cover potential loan losses.

    Bank of America provisioned $931 million for credit losses in the quarter, much higher than the $30 million a year prior but below the fourth quarter $1.1 billion provision.

    JPMorgan more than doubled the amount it set aside for credit losses in the first quarter from a year earlier to $2.3 billion, reflecting net charge-offs of $1.1 billion. –Epoch Times

    UBS analysts led by Erika Najarian believes mounting macroeconomic headwinds would lead to “credit deterioration throughout 2023 and 2024 with losses eventually surpassing pre-pandemic levels given an oncoming recession.” 

    Najarian said loan defaults are forecast to stay “below the peaks experienced in prior downturns.” 

    However, we’re noticing that consumers are buckling under financial pressure—an ominous sign of trouble ahead

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 18:40

  • Chinese Lab Developed COVID-19 Virus, Senate Report Claims
    Chinese Lab Developed COVID-19 Virus, Senate Report Claims

    Authored by Zachary Steiber via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The COVID-19 virus originated in a Chinese laboratory and was leaked unintentionally, a new U.S. Senate report concludes.

    The virus, SARS-CoV-2, leaked from the Wuhan Institute of Virology (WIV), which tests bat coronaviruses, twice in 2019, researchers conducting the report say.

    The preponderance of information supports the plausibility of an unintentional research-related incident that likely resulted from failures of biosafety containment during SARS-CoV-2 vaccine-related research,” the 301-page report, released on April 17, states.

    Sen. Roger Marshall (R-Ky.), a member of the Senate Health Committee, released the report, which was produced by a team that included Dr. Robert Kadlec, a longtime former government health official who played a key role in developing the COVID-19 vaccines, and staffers on the U.S. Senate Committee on Health, Education, Labor, and Pensions, where Marshall chairs the Subcommittee on Primary Health and Retirement Security. The final report updates an interim report released in the fall of 2022.

    Researchers started with two hypotheses, Marshall told reporters in a briefing. One was that the virus started in animals before spilling over to humans, known as a natural origin. The other was a leak from the Wuhan lab, located in the same city where the first COVID-19 cases were detected in late 2019.

    They exhausted every piece of evidence that they could find, every resource witness that they could talk to, to come up with conclusions,” Marshall said.

    Kadlec’s team of consultants spent approximately 18 months probing the COVID-19 origins and concluded that the available evidence supports a lab leak.

    More specifically, there was likely an aerosol leak that caused an infection of lab personnel or the virus may have been released to the outside environment due to biocontainment failures. One theory revolves around cleaning agents causing corrosion of welded seams in the lab, a possibility mentioned in multiple 2019 documents on upgrading the lab.

    “Patents addressed biocontainment faults with animal transfer cabinets, biosafety autoclaves, leaky airtight doors, and excessive corrosive disinfectants affecting stainless steel laboratory equipment and biocontainment structures,” the report states.

    Sen. Roger Marshall gives a briefing in Washington on April 16, 2023. (Zachary Stieber/The Epoch Times)

    Both domestic and foreign bodies have for years raised concerns about biosafety at the WIV. A 2018 U.S. State Department cable, for instance, (pdf) reported that the then-newly opened biosafety level four lab at the facility had a “serious shortage” of trained technicians to safely operate the lab.

    Researchers at the lab, before the pandemic, reported experimenting on mice, bats, and palm civets to find coronaviruses that were more capable of infecting humans, and sometimes experimented at sub-biosafety level four conditions. A more recent summary showed scientists conducted experiments that increased the function of a bat coronavirus. WIV’s refusal to reveal the full results of their experiments resulted in U.S. officials ending a subgrant after the pandemic started.

    Research-related lab biosafety issues can unfold in a number of ways, while most infections acquired in laboratories due to lapses are never conclusively determined, researchers have said previously.

    Chinese reports, communications, and notices were offered as support for the lab leak theory, including an attempt in November 2019 to procure an air incinerator at the lab. That suggested “some concern about the risk of an infectious aerosol escape,” researchers say in the new report. They also noted that WIV staffers underwent a remedial biosafety training course that same month.

    Characteristics of SARS-CoV-2 suggest the virus was manmade, including the presence of a furin cleavage site at the same location that was proposed in a grant proposal by EcoHealth Alliance, the report concludes. EcoHealth funneled U.S. taxpayer money to scientists in Wuhan.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 18:20

  • Biden Admin 'Mishandling' Hunter Biden Investigation Says IRS 'Criminal Supervisory Agent' In Charge Of Probe
    Biden Admin ‘Mishandling’ Hunter Biden Investigation Says IRS ‘Criminal Supervisory Agent’ In Charge Of Probe

    In what should come as a surprise to absolutely no one, an IRS supervisor has stepped forward to blow the whistle on the Biden administration for improperly handling the criminal investigation into the President’s son, Hunter Biden.

    In a Tuesday letter sent to Congress by a “career Internal Revenue Service criminal supervisory special agent,’ the whistleblower claims to have information that would contradict sworn testimony by a “senior political appointee,” as well as a “failure to mitigate clear conflicts of interest in the ultimate disposition of the case,” according to the Wall Street Journal, citing the letter.

    What’s more, the supervisor says he has evidence showing “preferential treatment and politics improperly infecting decisions and protocols that would normally be followed by career law enforcement professionals in similar circumstances if the subject were not politically connected.”

    According to the report, the supervisor has been overseeing an “ongoing and sensitive investigation of a high-profile, controversial subject since early 2020,” which insiders say is Hunter Biden.

    Hunter Biden is facing a criminal investigation related to his taxes and whether he made a false statement in connection with a gun purchase. When he said in December 2020 that his tax matters were under investigation, Hunter Biden said he was “confident that a professional and objective review of these matters will demonstrate that I handled my affairs legally and appropriately.”

    Investigators have believed for months they had enough evidence to indict the younger Mr. Biden, the Journal and other news outlets have reported. Prosecutors have also weighed whether Hunter Biden’s well-documented drug addiction would present a defense against a potential criminal tax case, the Journal previously reported. He hasn’t been charged with any wrongdoing. -WSJ

    Mark Lytle, a lawyer for the IRS agent, said in the Tuesday letter addressed to both Republican and Democratic leaders on the Senate and House Judiciary Committees, that his client is seeking whistleblower protections in exchange for his information.

    “Despite serious risks of retaliation, my client is offering to provide you with information necessary to exercise your constitutional oversight function and wishes to make the disclosures in a nonpartisan manner to the leadership of the relevant committees on both sides of the political aisle,” reads the letter, signed by Lytle, who claims that the employee previously disclosed the information internally at the IRS and to the DOJ inspector general.

    US Attorney David Weiss, the top federal prosecutor in Delaware under the Biden administration, has been leading the DOJ’s investigation of Hunter. According to AG Merrick Garland, Weiss has broad authority to pursue charges.

    “He has been advised he is not to be denied anything he needs,” Garland told the Senate Judiciary Committee on March 1. “I have not heard anything from that office to suggest that they are not able to do everything the U.S. attorney wants to do.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 18:00

  • White House Slams Brazil After Lula Accuses US Of 'Encouraging' War In Ukraine
    White House Slams Brazil After Lula Accuses US Of ‘Encouraging’ War In Ukraine

    Authored by Kyle Anzalone via The Libertarian Institute, 

    The White House has accused Brazilian President Luiz Inacio Lula da Silva of repeating Russian and Chinese propaganda. While visiting China, Lula said that the US should stop “encouraging” the war in Ukraine and seek peace instead.

    Speaking with reporters on Tuesday, the White House’s National Security Council’s Spokesperson, John Kirby, lashed out at Lula. “Brazil has substantively and rhetorically approached this issue by suggesting that the United States and Europe are somehow not interested in peace or that we share responsibility for the war,” Kirby said. “In this case, Brazil is parroting Russian and Chinese propaganda without at all looking at the facts.”

    Via Reuters

    The spokesman went on to call Lula’s statement “simply misguided” and “deeply problematic.”

    Kirby’s statement comes as the Brazilian president scrutinized NATO’s role in the Ukraine war and sought to bring Moscow and Kiev to the negotiating table. “The United States needs to stop encouraging war and start talking about peace,” he said Saturday. “The European Union needs to start talking about peace so that we can convince Putin and Zelensky that peace is in the interest of everyone and that war is only interesting, for now, to the two of them.”

    On Sunday, Lula further disputed the Western narrative about the war in Ukraine by arguing Kiev and Moscow both bear responsibility for the conflict. Both Russia and Ukraine “had decided to go to war,” he remarked. 

    While visiting China last week, Lula proposed forming a coalition to pursue an end to the conflict in Ukraine. “I have a theory that I have already defended with Macron, with Olaf Scholz of Germany, and with Biden, and yesterday, we discussed at length with Xi Jinping.” He continued, “It is necessary to constitute a group of countries willing to find a way to make peace.”

    The Brazilian Foreign Minister Mauro Vieira met with his Russian counterpart, Sergey Lavrov, on Monday. Vieira called for an immediate ceasefire in Ukraine and criticized Western sanctions for harming the global economy. 

    Lavrov explained the Kremlin was happy with the role Brazil was willing to play in resolving the conflict. “As for the process in Ukraine, we are grateful to our Brazilian friends for their excellent understanding of this situation’s genesis.” He said, “We are grateful (to them) for striving to contribute to finding ways to settle it.”

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 17:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 19th April 2023

  • Leaks Spell The End For Ukraine (And Expose Western Disinformation)
    Leaks Spell The End For Ukraine (And Expose Western Disinformation)

    Authored by Joe Lauria via ConsortiumNews,com,

    Leaked U.S. intelligence documents have exposed Western disinformation  about Ukraine winning the war. Now the heavy fighting moves to Washington…

    Aerial view of the Washington battleground. (Mario Roberto Durán Ortiz/Wikimedia Commons)

    Washington Post headline last week was a bombshell for someone who has only been reading about the Ukraine war in The Washington Post and other Western media: “U.S. doubts Ukraine counteroffensive will yield big gains, leaked document says.”

    The story admits that Western media audiences have been misled about the course of the war, that essentially what mainstream media has been reporting about Ukraine has been a pack of lies: namely that Ukraine is winning the war and is poised to launch an offensive that will lead to a final victory. 

    Instead, the second paragraph of the piece makes clear the leaked documents show the long-planned Ukrainian offensive will fail miserably — “a marked departure from the Biden administration’s public statements about the vitality of Ukraine’s military.”  

    In other words, U.S. officials have been lying about the state of the war to the public and to reporters who have faithfully reported their every word without a hint of skepticism.

    The Post said, as if it’s a bad thing, that the leaks will likely “embolden critics who feel the United States and NATO should do more to push for a negotiated settlement to the conflict.”

    That has begun to happen. Writing in the uber-Establishment Foreign Affairs, former State Department official Richard Haass and Charles Kupchan, a senior fellow at the Council on Foreign Relations, write that “it is difficult to feel sanguine about where the war is headed.”

    In “The West Needs a New Strategy in Ukraine: A Plan for Getting From the Battlefield to the Negotiating Table,” they say:

    “The best path forward is a sequenced two-pronged strategy aimed at first bolstering Ukraine’s military capability and then, when the fighting season winds down late this year, ushering Moscow and Kyiv from the battlefield to the negotiating table.”  

    The article does not mention the leaks, though it was published after the disclosures made clear that the Ukrainian offensive, intended to  break through Russia’s land bridge to Crimea, would fail.

    Filled with the usual talk about Ukraine having better “operational skill” than Russia, and that the war will end in a “stalemate,” the piece represents an emerging strategy in the West: namely that before negotiating, Ukraine needs to launch its offensive to gain back some territory, “imposing heavy losses on Russia, foreclosing Moscow’s military options, and increasing its willingness to contemplate a diplomatic settlement.”

    But that is a tall order. Moscow would be unlikely to negotiate at the end of the Ukrainian offensive, particularly as the article admits the “Russian military’s numerical superiority” and that Ukraine is “facing growing constraints on both its own manpower and help from abroad.” 

    Moscow was ready to cut a deal with Kiev one month after Russia’s intervention but the West, with its strategy of lengthening the war to weaken Russia, quashed it. Why would Moscow accept a deal now when Ukraine is at its weakest and Russia is poised to make significant gains on the battlefield?

    The Foreign Affairs piece admits, “This diplomatic gambit may well fail. Even if Russia and Ukraine continue to take significant losses, one or both of them may prefer to keep fighting.”

    “Come the end of this fighting season,” the article says, “the United States and Europe will also have good reason to abandon their stated policy of supporting Ukraine for ‘as long as it takes,’ as U.S. President Joe Biden has put it.”

    And what comes next? “NATO allies would start a strategic dialogue with Russia on arms control and the broader European security architecture.”  

    Incredibly this is what Russia was asking for before its February 2022 intervention and it was rebuffed by NATO and the U.S.  Now a Foreign Affairs article is recommending it.

    Is there no better sign that Ukraine has lost this war?

    Going Ahead With the Offensive Anyway

    The strategy of Ukraine going ahead with an offensive it knows will achieve little is Kiev’s last gasp — unless delusional neocons continue to outmaneuver the realists in Washington.

    Most importantly for the West, the failure of this last-gasp attempt would serve as a way for it to escape the disaster it has created for itself: namely, the backfiring of the economic war on Russia; the failure of the information war in the non-West and ultimately defeat on the battlefield in its proxy war.   

    Already in February, French President Emmanuel Macron, who is also pushing this strategy, and German Chancellor Olaf Scholz, told Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenksy that the game was up.  This news was brought to us by the establishment Wall Street Journal. 

    And then ten days later U.S. intelligence provided a story to The New York Times that a pro-Ukraine “group,” and possibly the Ukrainian government itself, was behind the destruction of the Nord Stream pipelines, a way of distancing the U.S. from Kiev as the exit ramp looms into sight. 

    Why Did the MSM Publish the Leaks?

    Why did the Times, the Post and other establishment outlets publish stories about these leaks if they severely undermined their own credibility? There are three possibilities.   

    The first is simply competition.  The Times or the Post may have gotten word that their rival had their hands on the leaks and did not want to be beat. There is almost nothing worse for an editor or reporter (in the petty world of journalism) then having to “match” a competitors’ story.

    The second reason has to do with keeping up appearances. These leaks were eventually to come out somewhere and may not have been easily ignored. What would it have looked like if the big papers didn’t have it first?

    More importantly, corporate journalism needs to keep up the pretense that it is actually doing journalism, i.e. that it will publish material from time to time that makes their governments look bad, and in this case, even themselves. They have to convince the public that they haven’t entirely given up on adversarial journalism if they are to survive.  

    It was the same when corporate outlets partnered with WikiLeaks in 2010 to publish leaks that exposed U.S. war crimes. But eventually the media turned on Assange and WikiLeaks, and fell into line with the state. 

    Why the Media Went After the Leaker

    And that it is indeed what has happened here. After splashy stories about the leaks, the Times and the Post, teaming with Western intelligence-backed Bellingcat, turned their attention to finding the leaker, in what Elizabeth Vos in an article today on Consortium News argues makes corporate media the anti-WikiLeaks.

    Rather than protecting the source of leaks, vital to the public, they hunted down the alleged leaker, 21-year old Air National Guardsman Jack Texiera, who was arrested by military-clad F.B.I. agents outside his Massachusetts home. 

    So what is the third reason why the major media published the leaks?

    Very likely for the same reason they published the stories about Macron and Scholz telling Zelensky he’s lost the war, and that the Ukrainian government may have been responsible for the Nord Stream sabotage:  to lay the ground work for the U.S. and its allies to pull the plug on their Ukrainian adventure by finally admitting Ukraine is losing.

    Towards that end, there is speculation that Texiera did not act alone with the motive of impressing his teenage followers on the Discord chat forum, as the press has reported. 

    Former C.I.A. analyst Larry Johnson believes Texiera was set up, possibly by a senior officer.  Johnson thinks this because among the documents Texiera allegedly leaked was one from the Central Intelligence Agency Operations Center, where Johnson used to work.

    “CIA Operations Center produces two daily reports — one in the morning and one in the afternoon. It is not a ‘Community’ product, i.e., it is not distributed to the other intelligence agencies. It is an internal CIA document (of course, it is available to the Director of National Intelligence), ” Johnson wrote on his website Son of the New American Revolution.

    Texiera was not in the C.I.A. so there is no way he’d have access to an Operations Center document, Johnson wrote. So how did he get his hands on it?

    The implication is that Texiera may have been a patsy for someone within the realist wing of the U.S. military or intelligence establishment who opposes the neocons’ obsession with continuing the war at all costs.  

    The neocons are not going down without a fight. John Bolton, the former U.S. national security advisor and chief neocon, wrote a desperate piece in The Wall Street Journal last week, titled, “A New American Grand Strategy to Counter Russia and China.”  

    Bolton gets it that the world is changing, and not in America’s favor. So his response is not to reverse failed U.S. policy, for the U.S. to become part of the rest of the world rather than trying to dominate it, but to double down like a riverboat gambler.  His solution: raise military spending to Reagan-era levels; resume underground nuclear bomb testing and taking “the North Atlantic Treaty Organization global, inviting Japan, Australia, Israel and others committed to NATO defense-spending targets to join.”

    Bolton laughingly says the U.S. must “exclude” Moscow and Beijing from the Middle East, where both capitals are orchestrating the most dramatic diplomatic transformation in decades.

    But Boltons saves his best laugh for Ukraine:

    “After Ukraine wins its war with Russia, we must aim to split the Russia-China axis. Moscow’s defeat could unseat Mr. Putin’s regime. What comes next is a government of unknowable composition. New Russian leaders may or may not look to the West rather than Beijing, and might be so weak that the Russian Federation’s fragmentation, especially east of the Urals, isn’t inconceivable.”

    Even if the ludicrous Bolton is dismissed, there’s still a major obstacle in the realists’ way: Biden’s re-election campaign. He says he’s going to announce soon. He’s already thrown his lot in with the neocons.

    Is there any conceivable way that he could accept Ukraine losing this war, after all the blue and yellow flag-waving, without also losing the election? 

    The Biden team’s aim was to bleed Russia. But it is Ukraine that is hemorrhaging. Will reality at last overcome delusion in Washington?

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 02:00

  • Accountability For Biden's Botched Afghan Withdrawal?
    Accountability For Biden’s Botched Afghan Withdrawal?

    Authored by Rep. Mark Green via RealClear Wire,

    Nineteen months ago, the last U.S. soldier was lifted out of Afghanistan, but hundreds of Americans were left behind in a country overrun by the Taliban and abandoned by President Biden. Yet in a recent press conference, Pentagon Spokesperson John Kirby had the audacity to state that he was proud of the withdrawal from Afghanistan. This followed the release of a report from the Biden administration that lays the blame for this withdrawal at the feet of President Trump, taking little to no responsibility. This is a sign of failed leadership. 

    President Biden seems to forget that a year and a half ago millions of Americans, our allies, and our adversaries saw the botched Afghanistan withdrawal with their own eyes. Plastered across our television sets were tragic images of Afghans giving up their infants to complete strangers in hopes of saving them from the tyrannical rule of the Taliban. Others were so desperate for freedom that they tried climbing onto American aircraft during take-off, eventually plummeting to their deaths. One Afghan was even found crushed within the wheel well of an outbound aircraft. 

    Despite the desperation of Afghan citizens to escape Taliban rule, even to the point of death, this president saw fit to leave hundreds of his own countrymen behind. This botched withdrawal won’t just be a stain on this administration for all-time, but Kabul will be remembered with Saigon as one of the worst military evacuations in American history. In turn, our adversaries from China and Russia to Iran and North Korea are emboldened. This is extremely dangerous.

    There must be accountability. Unfortunately, President Biden has been seeking to avoid accountability for himself and for this administration. In fact, in his press conference on the report, Kirby stated, “For all this talk of chaos, I just didn’t see it, not from my perch.” I wonder if Mr. Kirby would be comfortable saying that to the families of the 13 servicemembers murdered by a suicide bomber during the evacuation. 

    How do we know this report is about the Biden administration making excuses instead of taking responsibility for its failures? The 12-page summary fails to mention the abandonment of Bagram Air Base. Instead of keeping this pivotal airbase, U.S. forces deserted it in the middle of the night. This decision emboldened the Taliban, demoralized the Afghan government and military, made it harder for U.S. allies to evacuate after the fall of Kabul, and allowed the Taliban to free thousands of prisoners being held there, including senior al Qaeda operatives. 

    It is far past time to hold this administration accountable ourselves, because clearly it isn’t going to take responsibility for its own decisions. Many may wonder why this accountability hasn’t happened yet. The answer is simple; when Democrats controlled the House of Representatives, they refused. This was a dereliction of duty. Keeping the executive branch in check is one of Congress’ most important responsibilities. It shouldn’t matter if the president in office is Republican or Democrat—we should always be willing to fulfill our oversight duty as the people’s representatives. Despite this Constitutional obligation, Democrats refused to call this administration to account, even after finding out that President Biden left behind at least $7 billion in military equipment that is now turning up in various conflict zones.

    This is why Republicans made a promise to the American people when we took control of the House: we will have “a government that’s accountable.” And that’s what the Foreign Affairs Committee sought to do in its hearing titled: “During and After the Fall of Kabul: Examining the Administration’s Emergency Evacuation from Afghanistan.” The American people deserve answers, and we are working overtime to get them.

    When the last helicopters left the rooftops of Kabul, President Biden told the American people that only one-hundred American citizens remained in the country. The reality was much worse. Thanks to volunteer veteran groups who risked their lives to save their fellow countrymen, we now know that the Biden administration left over 1,000 Americans behind in Afghanistan. 

    The thought of leaving Americans behind goes against every fiber of my being. The Ranger Creed states, “I will never leave a fallen comrade to fall into the hands of the enemy and under no circumstance will I ever embarrass my country.” Because of President Biden’s failed leadership, our country did not live up to this creed, and we are still red in the face because of it.

    It is unconscionable that President Biden would leave American citizens behind and abandon our Afghan allies that had helped us through the war. For two decades, these Afghans guided our troops through dangerous territories, gave us vital intel, and aided our soldiers. For the Taliban, they are primary targets. In total, this administration abandoned tens of thousands of Afghan military personnel and interpreters that we promised to give sanctuary. What does it say to our allies around the world that we abandoned our Afghan allies to the Taliban? With the rise of nations with larger and more powerful militaries, we need our allies to trust that we will keep our word.

    There are also 13 American families who will never see their loved ones again because of this president’s ineptitude. 13 U.S. servicemembers were killed and 45 were wounded after a member of ISIS, released by the Taliban from Bagram prison, detonated a suicide bomb at the Kabul airport. Among the servicemembers killed was U.S. Army Staff Sgt. Ryan C. Knauss, a native of Corryton, Tennessee. He was just 23 years old. Tennesseans now, and forever, will keep his memory with us and honor his service to our nation. And when we fight for accountability in Washington, his face will be in front of our eyes. 

    What’s more disturbing is that this tragedy could have been prevented. Marine Sgt. Tyler Vargas-Andrews testified before the House Foreign Affairs Committee that U.S. intelligence had a description of the two terrorists planning the suicide attack.

    While on duty, Sgt. Vargas-Andrews saw the couple matching the description of the suspected bombers from his sniper tower. With a clear opportunity for engagement, he requested permission to engage. The message he got back is chilling: “Do not engage.”

    Eventually the suspect disappeared, and later that day 13 of our servicemembers and 170 Afghans were killed in a suicide bombing. Forty-five more soldiers, including Sgt. Vargas-Andrews, were maimed. This was negligence of the highest order. But John Kirby had the arrogance to stand before the American people and claim the mission a success. Maybe he should stand before the families and loved ones of the 58 American casualties and tell them how proud he is of this botched withdrawal. 

    Someone must answer for the decisions that cost a nation its freedom and 13 American servicemembers their lives—and that person is our Commander-in-Chief.  

    Despite the failures of this administration during our withdrawal from Afghanistan, I want veterans of the War on Terror to know that your service to our country was not in vain. We kept America safe for 20 years, and Americans are alive today because of your sacrifices. Thank you for everything you did for our country and God bless you.

    Mark Green is a U.S. representative for Tennessee and a former physician, business owner, and combat veteran of Afghanistan and Iraq, where he served three tours of duty. He is chairman of the House Homeland Security Committee and serves on the House Foreign Affairs Committee.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 04/19/2023 – 00:05

  • Money = Happiness?
    Money = Happiness?

    The question of whether money makes people happy has probably been on mankind’s mind for as long as this means of payment has existed.

    In the infographic below, Statista’s Martin Armstrong tries to get closer to an answer.

    The underlying figures are, on the one side, the points achieved by the countries in the World Happiness Index (X-axis of the chart) and on the other, their respective gross domestic product per capita (Y-axis).

    Infographic: Money = Happy? | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    As indicated by the distribution of countries based on the green dots and the corresponding red trend line, there is a correlation between the variables: The higher a country’s GDP per capita, the more points it tends to score on the World Happiness Index.

    The correlation comes to a value of 0.69 – representing a strong association.

    There are however deviations and outliers. For example, Hong Kong’s (HK) GDP per capita of $49,700 is relatively high, but its Happiness Index score of 5.31 is relatively low – many countries with similar Happiness Index scores have GDP per capita below $10,000.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 23:45

  • The Great COVID-19 Vaccine Bribe
    The Great COVID-19 Vaccine Bribe

    Authored by John Leake and Dr. Peter A. McCullough, MD via Courageous Discourse (emphasis ours),

    Many readers of this Substack have doubtless wondered why their “health care providers”—i.e., doctors, repeatedly exhorted them to get the COVID-19 vaccines and boosters. In my extended social circle, I heard many reports of doctors being downright pushy about it—as though getting the COVID-19 vaccine was the single most pressing matter of medicine and health.

    (Steve Heap/Shutterstock)

    Even patients who’d recently recovered from COVID-19 were urged by their doctors to get the shots, as were patients who had bad reactions to the first injection.

    For a long time, Dr. McCullough and I wondered if these doctors really were that brainwashed, or was there some other explanation for their zeal?

    A few days ago, fellow Substack author, Tessa Lena (Tessa Fights Robots) published this document that was apparently circulated to doctors with patients insured by Anthem Blue Cross and Blue Shield Medicaid in the state of Kentucky.

    The document raises a number of intriguing questions. I wonder: How many members might be registered in a given practice—that is, how many of those $125 bonuses per vaccinated member could a busy and efficient doctor with a good support staff receive?

    Secondly, how many of these “COVID-19 Vaccine Provider Incentive Programs” were operating in the United States during 2021?

    As we awakened souls try to figure out what’s going on in our bizarre world, it’s always useful to follow the money. It almost always leads to the explanation for any strange state of affairs that puzzles us.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 23:25

  • Taiwan To Buy 400 US Anti-Ship Missiles, Announced As China Conducts "Major" Military Drills
    Taiwan To Buy 400 US Anti-Ship Missiles, Announced As China Conducts “Major” Military Drills

    Taiwan is set to purchase up to 400 land-launched Harpoon missiles in order to repel a future Chinese invasion, according to the president of the US-Taiwan Business Council Rupert Hammond-Chambers, speaking to Bloomberg.

    While Harpoons have previously been purchased by Taiwan for deployment on warships, this marks a first time acquisition of the mobile, land-launched version.

    Via Naval News: Land-based Harpoon missile launched from a truck trailer. 

    Per Bloomberg, “The Pentagon announced the $1.7 billion contract with Boeing on April 7 but made no mention of Taiwan as the purchaser” at a moment of tense US-China relations due to ratcheting Chinese military drills around the self-ruled island. 

    As the Monday report additionally reviews

    The Harpoon contract has been cited by members of Congress including Representative Michael McCaul, chairman of the House Foreign Affairs Committee, as part of as much $19 billion in “backlogged US sales to Taiwan that they say need to accelerated. In addition to the Harpoon, the list includes the F-16 Block 70 fighter, the MK-48 torpedo, the M109A6 Paladin self-propelled howitzer and the Stinger missile.

    Additionally the US-Taiwan Business Council has now confirmed the Harpoon is to be transferred. 

    Meanwhile China’s military announced on the same day it is conducting “major military activity” in the Yellow Sea in waters off the coast of Shandong province.

    While these drills were only scheduled for a few hours, they follow a series of major days-long encircling drills threatening Taiwan, which have been going off-and-on since earlier this month Taiwan’s President Tsai Ing-wen met with US House Speaker Kevin McCarthy at the Ronald Reagan Presidential Library in California’s Simi Valley, a meeting which Beijing warned strongly against.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 23:05

  • NRA Official Says Concealed Carry License Holders Must Plan For Police Interactions
    NRA Official Says Concealed Carry License Holders Must Plan For Police Interactions

    Authored by Michael Clements via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The time for a holder of a concealed carry firearm permit to determine how to interact with the police during a traffic stop or other situation is before law enforcement ever becomes involved, according to an official with the National Rifle Association.

    “You’ve got to think ahead; you’ve got to prepare,” Glen Hoyer told seminar attendees during the NRA’s Annual Meetings and Exhibits in Indianapolis on April 16.

    Glen Hoyer, director of the National Rifle Associations Law Enforcement Division presents the “Armed Citizen: How to Interact with Law Enforcement” seminar at the NRA’s 2023 Annual Meetings and Exhibits in Indianapolis, Ind. (Michael Clements/The Epoch Times)

    At the NRA’s annual meeting, he leads the seminar, “Armed Citizen: How to Interact with Law Enforcement.” The seminar aims to provide law-abiding firearms owners with information they need to make the process run as smoothly as possible.

    He said the first step is for the gun owner to understand the mind of the police officer—who has one goal in mind.

    “The officer’s No. 1 job, at the end of the day, is to go home to his family,” Hoyer said.

    A Riverside County Sheriff’s deputy wipes his eye as he stands in Jurupa Valley, Calif. on Dec. 29, 2022. Authorities say a Southern California sheriff’s deputy has been shot during a traffic stop. (Will Lester/The Orange County Register via AP)

    With that in mind, the officer will arrive ready to do what he or she needs to preserve everyone’s safety. It’s also important to realize that upon arrival, the officer will have limited information. So, he will do what he is trained to secure the scene, preserve evidence, and gather information, he said.

    When firearms are involved in a possible crime, Hoyer said, people will be searched, handcuffed, and placed in a police car. This means the officer will use whatever force is necessary and legal.

    There is nothing personal; they are simply trying to secure the scene,” Hoyer said. “It’s a whole lot easier to apologize later.”

    At the same time, it’s essential to know your rights and responsibilities under the law. Some states require a concealed carry license holder to immediately notify a police officer that they have a gun. Some only require answering truthfully if the officer asks, and some states don’t require notification.

    “Know the law in your area,” Hoyer said.

    Drugs, firearms, and ammunition recovered during recent search warrants. (Courtesy of Middletown Police Department)

    In addition, he said it is essential to know your legal rights and to exercise those rights properly.

    For example, under the Fourth Amendment of the U.S. Constitution, a citizen can refuse to allow a law enforcement officer with no warrant to search their person or property. However, arguing, taunting, or belittling an officer will only heighten tension. Politely declining could have long-term benefits.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 22:45

  • US Navy Tests Iron Man-Like Jetpacks
    US Navy Tests Iron Man-Like Jetpacks

    Gravity Industries showcased their Iron Man-like jetpacks at a field training exercise earlier this month in Virginia Beach, Virginia.

    Gravity worked with the Joint Prototyping and Experimentation Maritime program at Naval Surface Warfare Center to conduct multiple mock exercises with the jetpacks, including rapid transit from shore-to-sea and sea-to-shore missions. 

    Each jetpack is powered by five micro jet turbines that generate about 1,000 horsepower.

    In the video, two pilots maneuvered from ship to shore and shore to ship to demonstrate the impressive capabilities the jetpacks can one day give Tier 1 operators. 

    The suit can run on jet fuel, diesel, or kerosene. Users can travel as fast as 80 mph and reach an altitude of 12,000 feet. However, both pilots in the video performed maneuvers at lower heights for safety purposes.  

    In the near future, jetpacks will likely be deployed with special forces units on the modern battlefield. The Brits are already flying theirs around

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 22:25

  • California's 'Dream For All' Home Down Payment Program Ran Out Of Money In 12 Days
    California’s ‘Dream For All’ Home Down Payment Program Ran Out Of Money In 12 Days

    Authored by Travis Gillmore via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Demand for California’s new downpayment assistance program overwhelmed the system and depleted its $300 million budget in less than 12 days, with applications put on pause effective April 7, according to the housing finance agency.

    An ‘open house’ flag is displayed outside a single family home in Los Angeles on Sept. 22, 2022. (Allison Dinner/Getty Images)

    The legislator responsible for proposing the program responded optimistically to the news.

    It is incredible and inspiring to see that the launch of the California Dream for All program has already been so successful,” Senate President Pro Tempore Toni Atkins (D-San Diego) said in a statement April 14. “The fact that it has helped more than 2,400 first-time homebuyers with their down payments in its first two weeks is terrific.

    Designed to provide up to 20 percent of funding for low-income first-time home buyers, the “Dream for All” program was initiated with the passage of Assembly Bill 140 in 2021.

    Resources are provided through the Dream for All Shared Appreciation Loan, in which the state provides a portion of the down payment in exchange for a share in the property.

    The loan, in addition to a portion of the appreciated value of the home, will be repaid when the property is resold, according to the legislation.

    A sign is posted in front of new homes for sale at Hamilton Cottages in Novato, Calif., on Sept. 24, 2020. (Justin Sullivan/Getty Images)

    The lowest eligible income for the program is $159,000 for several counties throughout the state, with San Franciscans and Silicon Valley residents in Santa Clara and San Mateo residents eligible if they make $300,000, the highest. Los Angeles’s limit is $180,000, and Orange County has the highest income limit in Southern California, at $230,000.

    The original text written in 2021 proposed funding the project with $1 billion annually for 10 years. The proposal suggested the $10 billion invested would assist more than 150,000 Californians.

    After legislative wrangling, the proposed amount later dropped to $500 million in 2022 and with the state facing a $25 billion budget deficit for the next fiscal year starting in July, Newsom decreased the allocation to $300 million for its introduction in 2023.

    The funding gap leaves the program stalled awaiting further resources, according to legislators.

    “While we are off to a strong start, we can’t truly make a difference in opening the doors to building generational wealth for Californians—especially those who historically have faced systemic barriers to homeownership—without sustained funding for the program,” Atkins said in the statement.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 22:05

  • DoD Could Derail Biden's Offshore Wind Farm Dreams
    DoD Could Derail Biden’s Offshore Wind Farm Dreams

    Bloomberg report reveals that the Defense Department is increasingly worried about President Biden’s proposals to build massive wind farms across the mid-Atlantic region, as some of these areas are considered “highly problematic” for potential interference with military operations. 

    The DoD shared the map with energy industry stakeholders and lawmakers late last year. It outlines four large sections of water off the coasts of North Carolina, Virginia, Maryland, and Delaware, earmarked for potential wind farms. Areas in red are labeled “highly problematic.” Areas in yellow indicate that military officials need to conduct more research. 

    “The initial assessment performed by DoD found compatibility challenges with wind turbines near Navy and Air Force training,” DoD spokesperson Kelly Flynn said in an emailed statement to Gizmodo. About 25% of the total planned offshore wind farms are impacted by the department’s graphic. 

    “This assessment is the first step in the process and DoD will continue to refine the analysis and collaborate with the other stakeholders in order to promote compatible development in this location,” Flynn added.

    The DoD’s opposition to the green project comes as the Biden administration wants to build 30 gigawatts of offshore wind power this decade — equivalent to 30 nuclear reactors.

    Surprisingly, it appears the Biden administration didn’t consult with the military during the planning stage of these wind farms. 

     

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 21:45

  • Budweiser's New Pro-America Advertisement Sets Social Media Ablaze Amid Mulvaney Controversy
    Budweiser’s New Pro-America Advertisement Sets Social Media Ablaze Amid Mulvaney Controversy

    Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    In what appears to be an attempt to win back the audience that was angered over Bud Light after its endorsement deal with transgender activist Dylan Mulvaney, Anheuser-Busch launched a new patriotic advertisement with its most iconic image.

    Bottles of Budweiser beer are at the Stag Brewery in London on Jan. 27, 2009. (Kirsty Wigglesworth/AP Photo)

    The advertisement, released Friday on social media, shows a Clydesdale horse—used for decades by Anheuser-Busch and Budweiser—walking past the Grand Canyon, New York City, and other landmarks. The clip didn’t make mention of Mulvaney or issue an apology.

    This is a story bigger than beer,” the narrator in the video says. “This is the story of the American spirit.”

    The advertisement also shows an American flag being raised. And one of the flag-raisers is seen putting a hand over her heart as the narrator says the beer is “brewed for those who found opportunity in challenge and hope in tomorrow.”

    AB InBev, which owns Anheuser-Busch, is the world’s largest brewer and owns Budweiser, Bud Light, Michelob, Stella Artois, Beck’s, and a number of other brands. It owns about 630 beer brands in 150 countries.

    In the midst of the controversy, country music singer John Rich, singer Travis Tritt, rocker Kid Rock, and others called for boycotts against Bud Light. A number of analysts and industry experts also questioned why Bud Light chose Mulvaney as a partner, saying the move would be repellent to the beer’s consumer base.

    Some Bud Light and Anheuser-Busch distributors around the country have expressed alarm over the deal, with one report saying that a number of bars have refused to serve Bud Light. Country singer and Nashville bar owner John Rich, meanwhile, told Fox News earlier this week that his bar won’t sell the beer.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 21:25

  • Subprime Used Car Dealership With Dozens Of Locations 'Temporarily Closes'
    Subprime Used Car Dealership With Dozens Of Locations ‘Temporarily Closes’

    “We have temporarily closed our dealerships and are working on a solution to re-open them as soon as possible. But don’t worry. We aren’t going anywhere! US Auto’s affiliated loan servicing company (USASF Servicing LLC) is still open to accept your payments and assist in servicing your account. Please continue to make your payments as scheduled and reach out to us with any account questions,” a statement posted on the homepage of subprime car dealership US Auto Sales. 

    The Georgia-based dealership with more than two dozen locations in the Southeastern US is working to re-open operations. 

    US Auto Sales boasts on its website “no credit” is needed to obtain a vehicle. 

    Vehicle financing has become the most challenging in more than a decade. According to Bankrate data, the average rate for a used car has reached 7.39%, the highest level since 2009. High borrowing costs and sky-high used car prices have sparked an affordability crisis. 

    “US Auto Sales has regularly turned to bond markets to raise money from investors, packaging subprime auto loans into bonds known as securitizations for sale to institutional investors. It most recently sold a $233 million bond in June of last year,” Bloomberg said. 

    Meanwhile, Capital One Financial Corp. recently exited its lending business for car dealerships due to mounting macroeconomic headwinds. 

    Troubles for US Auto Sales come as the subprime auto loan market is sliding into turmoil as delinquencies hit a 13-year high. 

    Several months ago, we told readers a “perfect storm” was brewing in the auto market, outlining “More Americans Can’t Afford Their Car Payments Than During The Peak Of Financial Crisis“… 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 21:05

  • "This Is Industrial Suicide": Biden’s EV Plan Could Be Key To China’s Global Economic Dominance
    “This Is Industrial Suicide”: Biden’s EV Plan Could Be Key To China’s Global Economic Dominance

    Authored by Nathan Worcester via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) “strongest-ever” vehicle emissions standards designed to drive mass adoption of electric cars within a decade will increase the United States’ dependence on China, experts warn.

    “It benefits the Chinese Communist Party because they control the critical minerals supply chain that is going to be necessary to build out the batteries for those electric vehicles,” said Mandy Gunasekara, director of the Center for Energy and Conservation at Independent Women’s Forum, a conservative think tank, in an April 17 interview with The Epoch Times.

    Gunasekara served as chief of staff in the EPA under former President Donald Trump. She argued that the Trump administration did a better job of integrating environmental, economic, and strategic considerations than the Biden team, including when it came to the critical minerals used in electric vehicles (EVs) and other technologies.

    There was a concerted effort to ensure we weren’t setting regulations that shut down industrial activity here in the United States, knowing good and well that productivity doesn’t go away—it just materializes somewhere else, and typically a place like China,” she said.

    The agency anticipates that with the new standards, two-thirds of new light-body vehicles will be electric by the model year 2032, up from less than six percent today.

    The proposed rules, which would go into effect with cars from model year 2027 onward, target tailpipe emissions from light-, medium-, and heavy-body vehicles.

    The EPA claims the standards would “significantly reduce climate and other harmful air pollution, unlocking significant benefits for public health, especially in communities that have borne the greatest burden of poor air quality.”

    A rare-earth refinery near the inner Mongolian city of Baotou on the edge of the Gobi Desert. Most of China’s rare earths come from mineral-rich Baotou. (Ed Jones/AFP via Getty Images)

    ‘Industrial Suicide’

    This is industrial suicide,” said James Kennedy, a U.S. mine owner and rare earths expert, in an April 17 interview with The Epoch Times.

    “By design, their goal is to wipe out, to destroy, to effectively terminate the massive economic investment that the auto companies have made in the internal combustion engine,” he said.

    He outlined China’s long-range, strategic plan to dominate the mining and refining of rare earths, as well as the production of downstream technologies.

    “No one in the West will accept the reality that China has total domain control at every level,” he added.

    The rare earth metals terbium, holmium, and dysprosium are one key choke point for Chinese control over EV production.

    Kennedy explained that the elements enable neodymium magnets to function at the high temperatures found in the motors of electric cars.

    China is the only country in the world, period, exclamation point, that can separate those materials,” he said.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 20:45

  • Pentagon Seeks To Justify Syria Occupation Through More Raids On ISIS
    Pentagon Seeks To Justify Syria Occupation Through More Raids On ISIS

    US Central Command announced Monday that US commandos conducted a successful early morning helicopter raid on an ISIS hideout in northern Syria, resulting in the death of a suspected senior Syrian ISIS leader.

    CENTCOM said the target, Abd-al-Hadi Mahmud al-Haji Ali, has been confirmed killed, in an operation that was launched based on intelligence saying ISIS was plotting to kidnap officials abroad. But US officials didn’t name any target countries where such plots might be executed.

    Illustrative: US Army image

    “We know ISIS retains the desire to strike beyond the Middle East,” CENTCOM spokesman Col. Joe Buccino asserted in a statement. “This raid deals a significant blow to ISIS operations in the region but does not eliminate ISIS’ capability to conduct operations.”

    “Two other armed individuals were killed on the target,” the statement continued, and claimed that no civilians were killed or injured in the raid. Additionally, CENTCOM Commander Gen. Erik Kurilla described: “Though degraded, ISIS remains able to conduct operations within the region with a desire to strike beyond the Middle East,” and vowed to “continue the relentless campaign against ISIS.”

    Lately there have been bipartisan efforts to force President Biden to pull all American troops out of Syria. So far these Congressional moves have failed, but it has increased the pressure on the administration and the Pentagon to seek to justify the years-long occupation. 

    The “answer” has been to attempt to show the American public that ISIS remains a threat that “requires” the Pentagon’s ongoing presence. But the reality is that the US is occupying the country’s oil and gas producing region, effectively blocking the Assad government and population from accessing its own vital resources, also at a moment of Washington’s far-reaching sanctions which has increased the suffering of common people. 

    But it’s also true that ISIS continues to strike, as international reports highlighted over the weekend:

    A truffle hunter was killed Sunday by a suspected ISIS fighter in the Syrian desert.

    The civilian was in the Hama province, east of the city of Hama when an unknown gunman shot and killed him, the Syrian Observatory for Human Rights reports. The killing is the latest example of the dangers of hunting for the edible underground desert fungus.

    Twelve more civilians were also attacked in the area. They were said to be members of the Al-Bosraya tribe, according to SOHR. Four escaped while the other eight have not been unaccounted for. Hunters were also fired upon, again by suspected ISIS members, on Saturday.

    Truffle trapping is a common practice in Syria where truffles command a high price on the market. They can be sold for up to $35 per kilogram, The New York Times reports. Hunters may earn more than $400 per day by selling what they find.

    There have been other reports of a spate of killings related to impoverished Syrians collecting truffles, likely by ISIS:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Syrian Army and its Russian and Iranian partner forces have also been directly waging war on remnant ISIS terrorists. All three countries have actually at various times accused the US of allowing ISIS and other Islamist terrorists cells to fester, in order to falsely justify the ongoing occupation of a sovereign country.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 20:25

  • Gun-Free Zones, Red Flag Laws Only Make Gun Crime Worse: Economist
    Gun-Free Zones, Red Flag Laws Only Make Gun Crime Worse: Economist

    Authored by Michael Clements via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Two of the most popular gun control proposals have little to no effect on gun crime and actually exacerbate the problem for the people they’re supposed to protect, according to economist, researcher, and author John Lott.

    “Those are the people who are harmed,” Lott told seminar participants at the National Rifle Association’s Annual Meetings and Exhibits in Indianapolis.

    Police tape at Geneva Presbyterian Church after a shooting left one dead and five injured in Laguna Woods, Calif., on May 15, 2022. (John Fredricks/The Epoch Times)

    Lott is considered an authority on guns and crime, having authored more than 100 peer-reviewed articles and 10 books on the subject. He led two seminars discussing the effectiveness of gun-free zones, red-flag laws, and other gun control measures.

    He said the story of Nikki Goeser encapsulates the shortcomings of these laws.

    Goeser is the author of “Stalked and Defenseless: How Gun Control Helped My Stalker Murder My Husband in Front of Me.” She’s also the executive director of the Crime Prevention Research Center (CPRC), of which Lott is the president.

    People walk past a “Gun Free Zone” sign posted on 40th Street and 7th Avenue in New York on Aug. 31, 2022. (Michael M. Santiago/Getty Images)

    Goeser was scheduled to speak at the event but couldn’t attend because of family obligations.

    Fourteen years ago, Goeser and her late husband, Ben, operated a karaoke business. A man the couple had met became infatuated with her and began stalking her.

    While Goeser had a license to carry a concealed pistol, at the time, it was illegal in her home state of Tennessee to carry a firearm in any business that served alcohol.

    One night, while running their karaoke business, Goeser’s stalker showed up and shot her husband seven times in front of her. Goeser’s situation was known to the police, but the stalker had been undeterred.

    Lott said Goeser has stated that she isn’t sure she could have stopped the crime if she had had her pistol. But she’s confident that complying with the law ensured that she couldn’t protect her husband or herself.

    As the title of her book says, she was denied the chance,” he said.

    Buffalo supermarket shooting suspect Payton Gendron in a jail booking photograph. (Erie County District Attorney’s Office via AP)

    Lott told the gathering that Goeser’s story is a perfect example of the problems with gun-free zones.

    According to statistics from the CPRC, 94 percent of mass shootings since 1950 have occurred in gun-free zones.

    Lott said one well-known mass killer explained his reasoning in a manifesto written the year before he struck.

    The 19-year-old man who killed 10 people in a Buffalo, New York, grocery store on May 14, 2022, has been described as a right-wing racist, Lott said. But, while he was an avowed racist, Lott said the shooter described himself as an environmentalist and eco-terrorist.

    In his manifesto, the shooter claimed that minorities were damaging the environment by having too many children, and that’s why he decided to attack black people.

    “Attacking in a weapon-restricted area may decrease the chance of civilian backlash,” Lott quoted from the shooter’s writings. “… ‘areas where CCW [concealed weapons] are outlawed or prohibited may be good areas of attack,’ and ‘areas with strict gun laws are also great places of attack.’”

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 20:05

  • Manhattan Parking Garage Collapses, Kills One
    Manhattan Parking Garage Collapses, Kills One

    Late Tuesday afternoon, shortly after markets closed, a parking garage in Lower Manhattan collapsed, resulting in the death of one person and five others injured, reported FDNY. 

    Footage posted on Twitter shows the twisted wreckage of steel and concrete resulting from the collapse of the second floor of the four-story parking garage at 57 Ann Street. Although the building remains standing, the entire structure is at risk of crumbling.

    There is video footage from inside the building during the collapse.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to the FDNY, six workers were in the building during the collapse, and all have been located. Of the six, one individual was killed, four were hospitalized and are in stable condition, and the other worker refused medical attention. 

     FDNY’s robo-dog surveyed the incident area. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The cause of the building collapse was not yet known. 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 19:45

  • Why "Net Zero" Is Not A Rational U.S. Energy Policy
    Why “Net Zero” Is Not A Rational U.S. Energy Policy

    Authored by Jonathan Lesser via RealClear Wire,

    Despite Germany’s last-ditch attempt at realism, the European Union recently approved a 2035 ban on gas-powered cars, moving ahead with its “net zero” emissions agenda. In the U.S., the cost of achieving net-zero carbon emissions would be staggering – $50 trillion if the goal is reached by 2050 – as would the demand for raw materials, which in most cases would exceed current annual worldwide production. 

    The impact on world climate, however, would be negligible. Emissions in developing countries will continue to increase as those countries’ focus is economic growth for their citizens, not permanent economic misery to “save” the climate. Although a recent Washington Post article suggests that wealth be viewed in terms of “joy, beauty, friendship, community, [and] closeness to flourishing nature,” impoverished individuals who cook with animal dung – such as 80% of the population in the African nation of Burkina-Fasso – aren’t likely to find much joy and beauty in economic misery. Granted, having to cook with animal dung ensures “closeness to nature,” although probably not the one the article’s author envisions.

    Rather than approaching energy policy clearly, the U.S. (and most of the western world) is pursuing so-called “net zero” energy policies aiming to fully electrify western economies, while relying almost entirely on wind and solar power. The additional required electricity – after all, the wind doesn’t always blow, and the sun sets nightly – would supposedly be supplied by energy storage batteries or hydrogen-powered generators. Two factors drive these policies. 

    First, there is climate hysteria, which promotes claims that have either proven to be false (the “end of snow” in Great Britain, the disappearance of glaciers in Glacier National Park) or posit extreme scenarios (complete agricultural collapse, massive sea level increases, more frequent hurricanes). The actual evidence is to the contrary, including increased agricultural yields, minimal sea level rise, and no increases in observed hurricane frequency. 

    Second, these policies are driven by old-fashioned greed. Green energy subsidies, which were already large, have been hugely expanded under the Biden Administration’s Inflation Reduction Act (IRA). The IRA is a virtual smorgasbord of green energy subsidies for offshore wind, solar power, electric vehicles, and charging infrastructure. The green energy pork, which relies on climate alarmism for its justification, is increasing electricity costs and reducing standards of living, such as in Europe, where deindustrialization is taking place because of unaffordable energy costs. Even progressive California admits its zero-emissions goals primarily will benefit the wealthy at the expense of the poor.

    Although the author of the Washington Post article may think differently, modern society requires ample supplies of reliable and affordable energy. A modern society that runs solely on electricity must have a foundation built upon three key pillars.  First, it must provide lots of electricity, far more than is generated today, because U.S. electricity consumption accounts for only about one-fifth of total energy consumption. Second, all of that electricity must be available 24-7. Third, it must be affordable. Those pillars cannot be supported by reliance on intermittent wind and solar power and huge banks of batteries to store electricity when the wind doesn’t blow and the sun doesn’t shine. Nor will those pillars be based on technologies that don’t even exist, such as generators that run on pure hydrogen. 

    Even if one believes that addressing climate change is crucial and that low- or zero-emissions technology will yield worldwide benefits, the current approach is the most expensive way to achieve it. 

    Despite the hyperventilation of some politicians, such as Senator Sheldon Whitehouse’s predictions of doom, climate change need not entail economic suicide. A far better approach is adaptation to and mitigation of potential future damages that may be caused by a changing climate, such as gradual sea level rise and slightly warmer temperatures.

    It is doubtful the U.S. will adopt this approach in the near future, because political expediency nearly always beats rational economics. But as economist Herb Stein said long ago, something that cannot go on forever, won’t. The unrealistic energy policies in place today eventually will collapse under their own weight. The resulting costs to U.S. consumers and businesses will be staggering.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 19:25

  • Q1 Earnings Season Starts Off With A Bang… And The Best Beat Rate In Over 10 Years
    Q1 Earnings Season Starts Off With A Bang… And The Best Beat Rate In Over 10 Years

    Week after week, starting in December 2022 Morgan Stanley’s Mike Wilson was swearing up and down to anyone who listened that only he sees just how bad this earnings season will be, and only he has a clue how unprepared investors are for the coming carnage. Eventually, his fire and brimstone sermon became so grating and contagious that other banks – such as Goldman – jumped on the bearish board, and eventually consensus S&P expectations did in fact drop, if nowhere near low enough to catch down to Mike Wilson’s expectations. But the bottom line from a growing number of analysts and experts was clear: earnings would be terrible and possibly worse.

    And then something remarkable happened: earnings in the first quarter, the quarter when according to Mike Wilson would see everything crash down (actually he said that about Q4 22 but when it didn’t happen he just pushed forward his forecast one quarter up), are coming in much stronger than the morose consensus expects.

    As Bank of America’s Savita Subramanian writes in her first weekly Earnings Tracker for Q1 (available to pro subs in the usual place), following Week 1 in which 30 S&P 500 companies (including early reporters) comprising 10% of earnings reported…

    … results have been blowout: 90% of companies beat on EPS, 73% on sales, and 67% on both, well above last quarter’s 54%/83%/46% post-Week 1 and historical average of 67%/64%/48%. Fueled by big bank beats, Q1 EPS is tracking a 30bp surprise.

    Putting this in context, according to Savita this is the “best beat rate after Week 1 since at least 2012(at least for now).

    To be sure, there is a reason for this blowout start to Q1 earnings season, and it has to do with the big banks, which as we said have emerged as massive beneficiaries from the bank run that crippled that small and regional banking sector in March. Here is Savita:

    Big banks’ solid results (JPM, C, WFC beat on revenue and EPS) despite March’s bank scare helped performance. JPM saw increased deposits vs. peers declining 3% in 1Q23 but warned on outflows from here. Other non-banks benefited from March’s regional outflows – e.g. mega-cap Blackrock saw $40B+ inflows into cash-management products. Banks may be tightening credit standards, but larger ones are operating with excess capital vs. prior crises. JPM/WFC bought back stock in 1Q and expect to continue in 2023, an increasingly scarce positive amid potentially slowing buybacks in general.

    Still, despite reporting on what may end up being the best earnings season relative to dramatically slashed expectations in over a decade, Bank of America – which like Mike Wilson – is very bearish on the outlook, suggests that – what else – the earnings drop may not have started but it will come… eventually… the same argument Mike Wilson trots out every Monday when he has to explain to his client how he kept them out of the 3800 to 4200 rally in the past 5 months.

    A massive, systemic financial confidence shock appears to have been averted, but tighter credit is manifesting in the real economy: Fastenal, an industrial bellwether, cited softer March sales especially in manufacturing, and consumption slowed in March across income cohorts. Capex, usually hit hard by a credit cycle, has remained robust and could buck trend given multiple secular tailwinds.

    Tech capex and stock buybacks may be more at risk, where Tech, Communication Services, and Health Care have been the biggest beneficiaries.

    That said, Bank of America is ready to capitulate on its bearish outlook should the strength in earnings persists, and as Subramanian writes, “our 2023 EPS forecast ($200 vs. $220 consensus) could be too low if March’s events prove to be idiosyncratic and temporary.” Furthermore, the recent decline in rates has catalyzed some early cycle leadership like housing, where demand is recovering. But even if 1Q YoY growth flat-lined through year-end, 2023 EPS would be just ~$203.” Or as Savita rhetorically asks, “Does 2023 matter if 2024 EPS recovers quickly to 2022 levels, as history would suggest?

    Longer-term, BofA notes that automation capex bodes well for productivity (earnings positive) and mega-caps’ newfound discipline around supply, cash return and capacity rationalization argue for more earnings stability (market multiple positive).

    Still, remaining true to its bearish view for now (as it has no choice for now), the bank predicts that earnings are likely to outpace the economy in 2024, as the earnings downturn began earlier than the economic downturn this cycle. Earnings also recover stronger than they fall…

    … as downturns usually remove excess capacity, resulting in leaner cost structure and improved margin profiles. “But consensus 2024 EPS of $247 (+12% YoY) looks ambitious to us, especially if full-year GDP remains largely flat YoY (BofA house view).”

    Ironically, earnings don’t even have to be all that strong going forward: as long as they are consistently higher than consensus expectations, and as long as there is a near-record short and bearish sentiment overhang, the meltup will continue.

    More in the full BofA note available to pro users in the usual place.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 19:05

  • Then There Were Nine: Comer Alleges A Wider Range Of Potential Biden Beneficiaries from Possible Influence Peddling
    Then There Were Nine: Comer Alleges A Wider Range Of Potential Biden Beneficiaries from Possible Influence Peddling

    Authored by Jonathan Turley via jonathanturley.org,

    House Oversight Committee Chairman James Comer  has revealed that there are not three but nine members of the Biden family that may have benefitted from suspected influence peddling efforts. For those of us who have long criticized the corrupt practices of the Biden family, the identity of these other family members is intriguing after the Committee secured new bank and financial records. Democratic members again insisted that there is no need to investigate such influence peddling.

    The new information on the Biden family is due largely to the takeover of the House by the GOP. Previously, Democrats blocked efforts to investigate influence peddling by the Biden family for years.

    After assuming control of the Committee. Comer sought suspicious activity reports sent by banks to the Treasury Department alerting of potential criminal activity in transactions involving President Biden’s family.

    He stated on Monday that “We’ve identified six additional members of Joe Biden’s family who may have benefited from the Biden family’s businesses that we are investigating, bringing the total number of those involved or benefiting to nine.” Those are six names beyond the previously discovered payments to linked to at least three Biden family members and two associates from China in 2017.  That $3 million was wired Biden family associate Rob Walker in March 2017, who then allegedly divided and distributed the funds later.

    There remains an “Unknown Biden” who received four payments in 2017 totaling $70,000.

    The investigation into the Bidens has made many in the Beltway uncomfortable. Influence peddling has long been the favored form of corruption in this city, but few families seemed to have cashed into the extent of the Bidens.

    I frankly do not understand the willingness of so many Democrats to cover for the Bidens. Democratic members have gone all in with censorship, but this is an effort to scuttle investigations into corruption that may have resulted in millions of dollars going to Biden family members.

    The Biden family has long been associated with influence peddling to the degree that they could add an access key to their family crest. Influence peddling has long been a cottage industry in Washington. For decades, I have written about this loophole in bribery laws. It is illegal to give a member of Congress or a president even $100 to gain influence. However, you can literally give millions to their spouses or children in the forms of windfall contracts or cozy jobs.

    James Biden has been remarkably (even refreshingly) open about marketing his access to his brother. Former Americore executive Tom Pritchard and others allege the Biden openly referenced his access to his brother and his family name in his pitch for clients. James has faced a wide array of litigation over allegedly fraudulent activities as well as a personal loan acquired through Americore before it went into bankruptcy.

    Hunter worked with his uncle but also branched off on his own in the family business. While his father recently emphasized that his son was a hopeless addict, that defense stands in glaring contradiction to the fact that he maintained a multimillion-dollar influence-peddling scheme. The question is why foreign figures (including some associated with foreign intelligence) rushed to him international money transfers and complex deals worth millions from Moscow to Kyiv to Beijing.

    However, the Biden most concerned may be the president himself. Joe Biden has repeatedly denied knowledge of Hunter Biden’s business entanglements despite numerous emails and pictures showing him meeting with Hunter associates. That includes at least 19 visits to the White House by Hunter’s partner, Eric Schwerin, alone between 2009 and 2015.

    While emails on Hunter Biden’s laptop make repeated reference to his father as a possible recipient of funds derived from influence peddling. Indeed, in one email, Tony Bobulinski, then a business partner of Hunter, was instructed by Biden associate James Gilliar that the Bidens wanted to avoid such references: “Don’t mention Joe being involved, it’s only when u [sic] are face to face, I know u [sic] know that but they are paranoid.”

    In discussing these deals, Joe Biden is referenced with code names such as “Celtic” or “the big guy.” In one, “the big guy” is discussed as possibly receiving a 10% cut on a deal with a Chinese energy firm. There are also references to Hunter paying off the bills of his father from shared accounts. From his board memberships to venture deals to legal fees to his art deals, Hunter Biden is a tour de force of alleged corrupt practices used in Washington.

    Many Democrats and legal experts have objected that influence peddling is not a crime. However, it is corrupt and squarely within the oversight authority of Congress. Indeed, if it is not a matter for criminal charges, such congressional action may be the only way to force accountability for corrupt efforts to sell influence and access.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 18:45

  • Saudi Foreign Minister Lands In Syria, Meets Assad, In 1st Since War's Start In 2011
    Saudi Foreign Minister Lands In Syria, Meets Assad, In 1st Since War’s Start In 2011

    This is the visit that Washington policymakers and establishment Middle East “experts” have been dreading, and signals that the West’s proxy war to oust Assad is definitively over – at least in terms of the end of hawks and neocons’ longtime hope of seeing Assad overthrown

    Saudi Foreign Minister Prince Faisal bin Farhan landed in Damascus on Tuesday for the first time since the start of the war in 2011.

    Image: Saudi Foreign Ministry

    It’s also an image that many thought would never happen, and paves the way for a possible future visit of Assad to Saudi Arabia, where he could eventually meet directly with King Salman or crown prince Mohammed bin Salman.

    The high-level visit comes just following last week’s “surprise” trip by Syrian Foreign Minister Faisal Mekdad to the kingdom. Clearly, relations are fast being restored and rumors are that the next move is for Assad to be invited back into the Arab League.

    According to a summary of Tuesday’s visit in regional news source Al-Monitor

    Farhan was received by Syrian President Bashar al-Assad. The two discussed efforts towards finding a “political solution” to the Syria conflict that would “preserve Syria’s unity, security, stability, Arab identity, and territorial integrity.”

    They also talked about the “return of Syria to its Arab fold and the resumption of its natural role in the Arab world,” according to a statement from the Saudi Ministry of Foreign Affairs.

    Already the United Arab Emirates (UA) had resumed relations with Syria in 2018. Other regional countries now seem to be lining up to restore normal relations.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    For example, Tunisia and Syria agreed to fully restore relations last week, after a three-day visit of Syrian FM Mekdad to Tunis.

    This wave of thawed relations between Assad and Arab states was without doubt helped to a large degree by the China-brokered peace deal between Saudi Arabia and Iran. Syria is Iran’s closest ally in the Levant, and is also a hub of support to Lebanese Hezbollah. It’s likely to complicate the US-brokered Abraham Accords, and may hinder recognition between Saudi Arabia and Israel. 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 18:25

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 18th April 2023

  • Brits Aren't Impressed With Their Politicians Right Now
    Brits Aren’t Impressed With Their Politicians Right Now

    Conservative UK Prime Minister Rishi Sunak and Labour leader Keir Starmer received the highest levels of support from the public out of the 20 politicians Statista polled, with just 18 percent of UK adults saying they thought the leaders were doing a good job.

    Infographic: Brits Aren't Impressed With Their Politicians Right Now | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    Former Prime Minister Boris Johnson came just behind, with 15 percent of support. Trailing further behind still came Dominic Raab, the Deputy Prime Minister, and Jacob Rees-Mogg, the Conservative MP for North East Somerset, who received just 6 percent each.

    But, as Statista’s Anna Fleck notes, when looking at the share of support in terms of voting patterns, things look a little more hopeful for the party leaders. Then, 38 percent of Labour voters said Keir Starmer was doing a job and 45 percent of Conservative voters said the same for Rishi Sunak.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 02:45

  • EU Slams Poland & Hungary's Ban On Ukrainian Food Imports As Other Countries Threaten To Join Blockade
    EU Slams Poland & Hungary’s Ban On Ukrainian Food Imports As Other Countries Threaten To Join Blockade

    Authored by Gergorz Adamczyk via Remix News,

    The European Commission has slammed Poland and Hungary’s ban on Ukrainian food imports, saying member states cannot make such decisions regarding trade policy.

    The leader of the ruling conservative Law and Justice party (PiS), Jarosław Kaczyński, announced over the weekend that a range of agricultural products such as grain, fruits, dairy, vegetables and poultry meat would be stopped from entering Poland from Ukraine. The decision has come as a result of the glut of grain from Ukraine and the flood of Ukrainian products onto the Polish market. In addition, Hungary and Slovakia have enacted similar measures, and there are reports that Romania and Bulgaria may also close their border to certain Ukrainian food imports.

    “Bulgarian interests must be protected. Moreover, now that two countries have already acted in this way, if we do not react, the accumulations on Bulgarian territory could become even bigger,” Bulgaria’s acting Agriculture Minister Yavor Gechev said.

    If Hungary, Slovakia, Romania, and Poland all block Ukrainian food product transit, it would effectively result in a geographical blockade in Europe, as the four countries border Ukraine.

    Despite the growing crisis affecting Central and Eastern European countries, the European Commission argues that trade policy is the exclusive competence of the European Union and that “unilateral actions are unacceptable.” It also asserted that in difficult times, it was important to maintain coordination and unity in EU actions.

    According to commercial television station Polsat News, the matter has already been the subject of calls between European Commission President Ursula von der Leyen, Polish Prime Minister Mateusz Morawiecki and Ukrainian PM Denys Shmyhal.

    Hungarian Minister of Agriculture István Nagy announced on Saturday that Hungary will also temporarily ban the import of grain and oilseeds from Ukraine, as well as several other agricultural products, after Poland announced its ban.

    According to the ministry’s statement, the continuation of the current market trends would cause such serious damage to Hungarian agriculture that extraordinary measures must be taken to prevent them. He added that Ukrainian agriculture uses production practices no longer allowed in the European Union resulting in extremely low production costs. Ukraine was also given duty-free access to the European market, with free trade opportunities for grain and oilseeds, as well as large quantities of poultry, eggs and honey, making it impossible for Hungarian and Central European farmers to compete.

    Nagy stressed that the restriction on imports into Hungary is temporary and will last until June 30, 2023, which may be enough time to take meaningful and lasting EU measures for a lasting solution.

    According to the statement, the agricultural sector expects the EU to ensure fair market conditions for European agriculture. The Hungarian government will always stand by Hungarian farmers and will protect Hungarian agriculture, the minister said.

    Despite several affected member states’ demands for a Union-level solution, the EU has so far done nothing to rectify the situation.

    The Ukrainian Ministry of Agriculture has expressed disappointment at Poland’s decision and stated that the decision was contrary to the agreement between the two countries. The statement went on to acknowledge that Polish farmers were in a difficult situation, but that “the situation of Ukrainian farmers was the most acute of all.”

    A statutory instrument banning the import of chosen products from Ukraine was introduced by the Polish minister of development and technology, Waldemar Buda. He tweeted that “in answer to questions that are arising, the ban is of a comprehensive nature including the transit of such goods through Poland.”

    The transit will be a subject of discussion with Ukraine regarding tightening the system to establish “guarantees that these products will not remain in Poland.” The goods that have been banned include grain, sugar, fruits and vegetables, wines, meat, dairy products and poultry. 

    Last year, the Russian naval blockade of Ukrainian grain shipments caused global wheat prices to rise by 60 percent in three months. The food crisis was mainly a concern for poorer countries in Africa and Asia, so Western countries have used every means possible to get supplies out of Ukraine. However, many of those supplies have remained in Europe, leading to drastic reductions in wheat prices.

    Countries neighboring Ukraine set up solidarity corridors to transport grain to EU ports by boosting rail transport capacity. At the same time, the European Union abolished import tariffs against Kyiv so that the crops were freely flooding into Europe at depressed prices.

    Ukraine’s imports of grain to the EU were 287,000 tons in 2021, rising to nearly 2.9 million tons in 2022.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 04/18/2023 – 02:00

  • Russia Flexes Naval Might With Pacific Snap Drills Involving Over 25,000 Servicemen
    Russia Flexes Naval Might With Pacific Snap Drills Involving Over 25,000 Servicemen

    Russia’s defense ministry has revealed details of ongoing snap live-fire military exercises which kicked off April 14. President Putin also hailed the drills as a success at a moment most forces are concentrated in Ukraine. Defense Minister Sergey Shoigu said Monday that the surprise combat readiness check of Russia’s Pacific Fleet has involved over 25,000 servicemen being placed on high alert.

    “They’re engaged in fire drills and tactical exercises, while also working on improving interactions between different branches of the military,” Shoigu said. He also revealed that in total 167 ships, 12 submarines, and 89 planes and helicopters are taking part in the large-scale exercises.

    Image source: Russian Defense Ministry

    Shoigu specified that during the drills Russia’s nuclear-capable long-range strategic bombers will “fly over the central part of the Pacific Ocean to imitate strikes against groups of enemy ships.”

    These drills which are far away from the frontlines of the Ukraine war are likely an attempt to demonstrate to the West that Russia still has immense military capability in different theatres. The Associated Press detailed the expanse of the drills as follows:

    The Defense Ministry has declared that sectors in the southern part of the Sea of Okhotsk, the Peter the Great Bay of the Sea of Japan and the Avacha Bay on the southeastern coast of the Kamchatka Peninsula would be closed to sea and air traffic for the duration of practice torpedo and missile launches and artillery exercises.

    The ministry said that the drills were intended to “test the Pacific Fleet’s readiness to repel aggression.” The ministry described the briefing as a show of Russia’s “voluntary transparency.”

    Shoigu said at a moment that the Ukraine ground and air war still rages that “nobody has aborted the task of developing the navy” and declared that the “final stage” of the drills will kick off Tuesday. He previously noted that the combat readiness checks are all about “boosting the ability of the armed forces to execute the tasks of repelling aggression by a potential enemy from maritime directions.”

    On Monday President Putin praise the “high level” performance of the Russian navy and armed forces in the exercise, saying that more such drills will be held.

    Interestingly, multi-national drills are also kicking off in Sweden this week, per a description in Russian state media

    The Aurora-23 international military exercise – the largest over the past 25 years – began in Sweden on Monday. It will last until May 11, with the United States, Britain, Finland, Poland, Norway, Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Ukraine, Denmark, Austria, Germany and France taking part, the Swedish Defense Ministry said.

    The purpose of the exercise is to “improve the combat readiness of the armed forces” in the event of a hypothetical armed attack on Sweden.

    “The exercise is one of the main tools of enhancing, testing and demonstrating combat readiness,” the Defense Ministry said. “Together with military units from our partner countries, we strengthen security while enhancing Sweden’s operational capabilities.”

    The exercise will take place in the air, on land and at sea. Some 26,000 troops from all military units, mainly in the south of Sweden and also on the island of Gotland will take part.

    With this, it looks like the West is using the opportunity to flex its military might in these annual drills as well, at a moment the Ukraine conflict shows no signs of abating.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 23:30

  • Rise of the Petroyuan: The End Of The Petrodollar’s Reign And The Impact On Global Markets
    Rise of the Petroyuan: The End Of The Petrodollar’s Reign And The Impact On Global Markets

    Authored by Nick Giambruno via Doug Casey’s International Man,

    Did you know that central banks bought more gold last year than any year in the past 55 years—since 1967?

    Though most don’t realize it, 1967 was a significant year in financial history, mainly due to the events at the London Gold Pool.

    The London Gold Pool was an agreement among central banks of the United States and Western European countries to stabilize the price of gold. The goal was to maintain the price of gold at $35 per ounce by collectively buying or selling gold as needed.

    However, in 1967 the London Gold Pool collapsed due to a shortage of gold and increased demand for the metal. That’s because European central banks bought massive amounts of gold as they began to doubt the US government’s promise to back the dollar to gold at $35/ounce. The buying depleted the London Gold Pool’s reserves and pushed the price of gold higher.

    In short, 1967 was the beginning of the end of the Bretton Woods international monetary system that had been in place since the end of World War 2. It ultimately led to severing the US dollar’s last link to gold in 1971. The dollar has been unbacked fiat confetti ever since—though the petrodollar system and coercion have propped it up.

    The point is large global gold flows can be a sign that a paradigm shift in the international monetary system is imminent.

    Central banks are the biggest players in the gold market. And now that we have just experienced the largest year for central bank gold purchases since 1967, it’s clear to me something big is coming soon.

    And those are just the official numbers that governments report. The actual gold purchases could be much higher because governments are often opaque about their gold holdings, which they consider a crucial part of their economic security.

    Today, I think we are on the cusp of a radical change in the international monetary system with profound implications. Yet, few are aware of what is happening and its enormous significance.

    I suspect most people will be taken by surprise—and it won’t be a pleasant one. They’ll be the ones holding the bag for a failing monetary system.

    But it doesn’t have to be a disaster for everyone…

    Those who get positioned properly ahead of this paradigm shift could make fortunes.

    The Real Reason for China’s Massive Gold Stash

    According to the Financial Times, the big buyers of gold in 2022 were China and Middle East oil producers. That’s not a coincidence, as these countries will be at the center of the changes to the international monetary system.

    It’s no secret that China has been stashing away as much gold as possible for many years.

    China is the world’s largest producer and buyer of gold. Most of that gold finds its way into the Chinese government’s treasury.

    Nobody knows the exact amount of gold China has, but most observers believe it is many multiples of what the government declares.

    Today it’s clear why China has had an insatiable demand for gold.

    Beijing has been waiting for the right moment to pull the rug from beneath the US dollar. And now is that moment…

    The key to understanding it all is Chinese President Xi’s recent historic visit to Saudi Arabia and other Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC) states to launch, in his words, “a new paradigm of all-dimensional energy cooperation.”

    The GCC includes Saudi Arabia, Kuwait, Qatar, Bahrain, Oman, and the United Arab Emirates. These countries account for more than 25% of the world’s oil exports, with Saudi Arabia alone contributing around 17%. In addition, more than 25% of China’s oil imports come from Saudi Arabia.

    China is the GCC’s largest trading partner.

    The meetings reflect a natural—and growing—trade relationship between China, the world’s largest oil importer, and the GCC, the world’s largest oil exporters.

    During Xi’s visit, he made the following crucial remarks (emphasis mine):

    “China will continue to import large quantities of crude oil from GCC countries, expand imports of liquefied natural gas, strengthen cooperation in upstream oil and gas development, engineering services, storage, transportation and refining, and make full use of the Shanghai Petroleum and National Gas Exchange as a platform to carry out yuan settlement of oil and gas trade.”

    After years of preparation, the Shanghai International Energy Exchange (INE) launched a crude oil futures contract denominated in Chinese yuan in March 2018. It’s the first oil futures contract to be traded in China. The contract is based on Brent crude oil, the global benchmark for oil prices, and is settled in cash.

    Since then, any oil producer can sell its oil for something besides US dollars… in this case, the Chinese yuan.

    The INE yuan oil futures contract provides a new pricing benchmark for the global oil market, which the US dollar has traditionally dominated. By trading in yuan, the contract is expected to increase the use of the Chinese currency in global trade and reduce the reliance on the US dollar.

    Its significance lies in its potential to shift the balance of power in the oil market away from the US and towards China and to increase the use of the Chinese yuan in global trade.

    There’s one big issue, though. Most oil producers don’t want to accumulate a large yuan reserve, and China knows this.

    That’s why China has explicitly linked the crude futures contract with the ability to convert yuan into physical gold—without touching China’s official reserves—through gold exchanges in Shanghai (the world’s largest physical gold market) and Hong Kong.

    PetroChina and Sinopec, two Chinese oil companies, provide liquidity to the yuan crude futures by being big buyers. So, if any oil producer wants to sell their oil in yuan (and gold indirectly), there will always be a bid.

    After years of growth and working out the kinks, the INE yuan oil future contract is now ready for prime time. Xi wouldn’t promise the GCC large and consistent oil purchases if it wasn’t ready.

    Why is China purchasing oil and gas from the GCC in yuan important?

    Because it undercuts the petrodollar system, which has been the bedrock of the US and international financial system since the Bretton Woods system broke down in 1971.

    The Saudis Acquiesce and What Happens Next

    For nearly 50 years, the Saudis had always insisted anyone wanting their oil would need to pay with US dollars, upholding their end of the petrodollar system.

    But that all changed recently.

    After Xi’s historic visit and bombshell announcement, the Saudi government isn’t hiding its intention to sell oil in yuan. According to a recent Bloomberg report:

    “Saudi Arabia is open to discussions about trade in currencies other than the US dollar, according to the kingdom’s finance minister.”

    In short, the Saudis don’t think the US is holding up its end of the petrodollar deal. So they don’t feel like they should hold up their part.

    The Saudis are angry at the US for not supporting it enough in its war against Yemen. They were further dismayed by the US withdrawal from Afghanistan and the nuclear negotiations with Iran.

    In this context, China swooped in and, after many years, finally compelled the Saudis to accept yuan as payment.

    It was bound to happen.

    China is already the world’s largest oil importer. Moreover, the amount of oil it imports continues to grow as it fuels an economy of over 1.4 billion people (more than 4x larger than the US).

    The sheer size of the Chinese market made it impossible for Saudi Arabia—and other oil exporters—to ignore China’s demands to pay in yuan indefinitely. The Shanghai International Energy Exchange further sweetens the deal for oil exporters.

    Here’s the bottom line.

    Saudi Arabia—the linchpin of the petrodollar system—is openly agreeing not to sell its oil exclusively in US dollars.

    It signals an imminent and enormous change for anyone holding US dollars. It would be incredibly foolish to ignore this giant red warning sign.

    Even the WSJ admits such a move would be disastrous for the US dollar.

    “The Saudi move could chip away at the supremacy of the US dollar in the international financial system, which Washington has relied on for decades to print Treasury bills it uses to finance its budget deficit.”

    Ron Paul is an American politician and physician who has been a vocal critic of the current international monetary system for decades. Nixon’s move to end the dollar’s link to gold in 1971 initially motivated him to get into politics. He is known for his views on monetary policy, central banking, and the Federal Reserve. Ron Paul has written several books on these topics and advocated for a return to sound money and a gold-backed monetary system.

    In short, Ron Paul knows more about the international monetary system than almost anyone alive.

    He once gave a speech called “The End of Dollar Hegemony,” where he pointed out the one thing that would precipitate the US dollar’s collapse.

    Here’s the relevant part:

    “The economic law that honest exchange demands only things of real value as currency cannot be repealed.

    The chaos that one day will ensue from our experiment with worldwide fiat money will require a return to money of real value.

    We will know that day is approaching when oil-producing countries demand gold, or its equivalent, for their oil rather than dollars or euros.

    The sooner the better.”

    Here’s the bottom line.

    The end of the petrodollar system is imminent.

    For over 50 years, this arrangement has allowed the US government and many Americans to live way beyond their means.

    The US takes this unique position for granted. But it will soon disappear.

    There will be a lot of extra dollars floating around suddenly looking for a home now that they are not needed to purchase oil.

    As a result, a lot of oil money—hundreds of billions of dollars and perhaps trillions—that would typically flow through banks in New York in US dollars into US Treasuries will instead flow through Shanghai into yuan and gold.

    The end of the petrodollar system is bad news for Americans. Unfortunately, there’s little any individual can practically do to change the course of these trends in motion.

    The best you can and should do is to stay informed so that you can protect yourself in the best way possible, and even profit from the situation.

    That’s precisely why I just released an urgent report on where this is all headed and what you can do about it… including three strategies everyone needs today.

    Click here to download the PDF now.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 23:00

  • David's Bridal Files For Second Bankruptcy In 5 Years, To Lay Off 9,200 Workers
    David’s Bridal Files For Second Bankruptcy In 5 Years, To Lay Off 9,200 Workers

    Bridal retailer David’s Bridal is going to be laying off more than 9,200 workers nationwide but plans on staying open after filing for bankruptcy for the second time in just five years. 

    As the chain gets ready to deal with a busy prom and wedding season, a notification of the layoffs was filed with the Department of Labor in Pennsylvania, according to NJ.com

    Layoffs started in Pennsylvania on Friday and its unclear when additional, out of state layoffs would take place, the report notes. The company currently has 300 stores across the United States. 

    “David’s Bridal has commenced a financial restructuring process to facilitate a potential sale of our company,” the company said in a statement. It is reportedly trying to sell itself, but stores should continue to take orders. 

    Nationwide, the Conshokocken, Pennsylvania-based chain has over 11,000 employees. Previously, it filed for bankruptcy in 2018 and also operated normally through the process. 

    Recall, days ago we noted that small businesses were filing for bankruptcy at a record pace, even surpassing the Covid crash:

    The note from UBS Evidence Lab shows private bankruptcy filings in 2023 have exceeded the highest point recorded during the early stages of the COVID pandemic by a considerable amount. The four-week moving average for private filings in late February was 73 percent higher than in June 2020.

    “[We] believe one of the more underappreciated signs of distress in U.S. corporate credit is already emanating from the small- and mid-size enterprises sector,” Matthew Mish, head of credit strategy at UBS, wrote in a recently published research note. “[The] smallest of firms [are] facing the most severe pressure from rising rates, persistent inflation and slowing growth.”

    Industries hit hardest by the wave of bankruptcies include real estate, health care, chemicals, and retail outlets, according to the Swiss Bank’s report.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 22:30

  • Washington State House Approves Bill Authorizing Hiding Of Children Seeking Transgender Medical Intervention From Parents
    Washington State House Approves Bill Authorizing Hiding Of Children Seeking Transgender Medical Intervention From Parents

    Authored by Matt McGregor via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The Washington state House approved a bill that would authorize state agencies to hide children seeking transgender medical intervention from parents.

    Washington state Rep. Alicia Rule in 2023 (Courtesy of TVW)

    On April 12, House lawmakers debated Senate Bill 5599 (pdf), which creates an exemption for the state that grants it the right to not be required to notify parents of minors who have left their homes because their parents wouldn’t let them pursue gender transition medical procedures.

    In a video statement after the vote, Republican state Rep. Chris Corry said the bill “erodes parental rights in the state of Washington.”

    “Essentially what the bill would do would be if a child left a parents’ home for certain medical care and went to a shelter or host family, that shelter or host family would not be required to notify the parents of their child’s whereabouts,” Corry said. “This is obviously a fundamental violation of parental rights and something that’s deeply concerning for parents across Washington state.”

    State Rep. Peter Abbarno, a Republican, said the crux of the debate over the bill was whether the state be permitted to “essentially hide where the child is.”

    Most parents, Corry said, would “go to the ends of the earth to find their child” if they disappeared after an argument.

    “And the fact that we have a bill that may become law that would say, ‘we’re not going to tell you,’ was really just a bridge too far for us,” Corry said.

    Corry told The Epoch Times that, under the bill, a disagreement between a child and parents over the child’s desire for a medical transition constitutes “abuse and neglect,” only because the parent hasn’t “properly affirmed what the child wants.”

    Corry said there are already laws that protect children from abuse and neglect in the state that require “solid and compelling reasons” why children would need to be removed from their homes.

    “What’s frustrating is even in those cases, the parents still have a right to know where their kids are after they’ve been removed,” Corry said. “In this case, parents would have no idea.”

    House Debate

    Republican state Rep. Travis Couture spoke on the House floor in a debate over amendments to the bill, stating that the U.S. Constitution, based on the precedent set by previous Supreme Court rulings, permits the state to interfere with the right of parents only to prevent harm to a child “and any legislation that goes further fails that standard.”

    The Constitution doesn’t tell us what we can do; it tells us what we can’t do to people,” Couture said. “And multiple times our U.S. Supreme Court has ruled in favor of parental rights.”

    The Due Process clause of the Fourteenth Amendment “gives parents the right to parent” through the educating and rearing “as they see fit.”

    “I think it’s important as we embark on this bill tonight to recognize the very important and critical role parents have not only in our society, and not only with their families and their children but in our law as well,” Couture said.

    State Rep. Julio Cortes, a Democrat, said though having a supportive family environment is critical, it doesn’t always determine the best outcome for the success of a child’s well-being.

    “But family dynamics as I’m sure a lot of us can agree at times be let’s say complicated,” Cortes said. “Positive mental health outcomes are possible even when a family dynamic is negative, and on the other side negative outcomes are possible even when a family is supportive. This bill is about providing housing security for our trans youth.”

    While not addressing parental consent, Cortes shared an anecdotal story about a trans child he said he helped while working with homeless youth.

    The child, he said, ran away to protect his family who was being attacked by community members over the child’s decision.

    “I had the privilege of working with this youth and through case management and our prevention program we were able to get that youth back home, but we got him back home with the skills and the tools that they needed and that their family needed to make sure that they could be safer,” he said. “Supporting our trans youth is a collective effort, Mr. Speaker, and while families play a critical role, they are not the only support system that these youth need. It takes, as they say, a village.”

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 22:00

  • FBI Arrest Two In Manhattan For 'Conspiring' To Act As CCP Spies, Operating Illegal Police Station
    FBI Arrest Two In Manhattan For ‘Conspiring’ To Act As CCP Spies, Operating Illegal Police Station

    The FBI arrested two New York residents with conspiring to act as agents of China’s government, by operating an illegal police station, and acting as spies.

    The America ChangLe Association in New York on Oct. 6, 2022. An overseas Chinese police outpost in New York, called the Fuzhou Police Overseas Service Station, is located inside the association building. (Samira Bouaou/The Epoch Times)

    In a Monday press release, the Department of Justice announced the arrests of Lu Jianwang, 61, and Chen Jinping, 59, in connection with the undeclared police station in Manhattan’s Chinatown neighborhood. They will be prosecuted in the Eastern District of New York, and are expected to appear in federal court in Brooklyn.

    The two admitted to the FBI that they deleted their communications with a CCP official after discovering they were under investigation.

    It is simply outrageous that China’s Ministry of Public Security thinks it can get away with establishing a secret, illegal police station on U.S. soil to aid its efforts to export repression and subvert our rule of law,” said Acting Assistant Director Kurt Ronnow of the FBI Counterintelligence Division. “This case serves as a powerful reminder that the People’s Republic of China will stop at nothing to bend people to their will and silence messages they don’t want anyone to hear. The FBI is dedicated to protecting everyone in the United States against efforts to undermine our democratic freedoms, and we’ll hold any state actors – and those who help them – accountable for breaking our laws.”

    According to the DOJ;

    Before helping to open the police station in early 2022, Lu had a longstanding relationship of trust with PRC law enforcement, including the MPS. Since 2015, and through the operation of the secret police station, Lu was tasked with carrying out various activities, including to assist the PRC government’s repressive activities on U.S. soil:

    • In 2015, during PRC President Xi Jinping’s visit to the United States, Lu participated in counterprotests in Washington, D.C,. against members of a religion that is forbidden under PRC law. A deputy director of the MPS awarded Lu a plaque for the work he performed on behalf of the PRC government.
    • In 2018, Lu was enlisted in efforts to cause a purported PRC fugitive to return to the PRC. The victim reported being repeatedly harassed to return to the PRC, including through threats of violence made to the victim and the victim’s family in the United States and in the PRC.
    • In 2022, the MPS Official sought Lu’s assistance in locating an individual living in California who is a pro-democracy activist. In turn, Lu enlisted the help of another coconspirator. Later, when confronted by the FBI about these conversations, Lu denied that they occurred.

    In October 2022, the FBI conducted a judicially authorized search of the illegal police station. In connection with the search, FBI agents interviewed both Lu and Chen and seized their phones. In reviewing the contents of these phones, FBI agents observed that communications between Lu and Chen, on the one hand, and the MPS Official, on the other, appeared to have been deleted. In subsequent consensual interviews, Lu and Chen admitted to the FBI that they had deleted their communications with the MPS Official after learning about the ongoing FBI investigation, thus preventing the FBI from learning the full extent of the MPS’s directions for the overseas police station.

    Each defendant faces a maximum of five years in prison if convicted for conspiring to act as agents of the PRC, and up to 20 years in prison on the obstruction of justice charge.

    In a second complaint, 24 Chinese police officers were charged over belonging to a “special project working group” task force that “commits crimes, targeting Chinese democracy activists and dissidents located outside of the PRC, including right here in New York City, according to Eastern District of New York Attorney Breon Peace, who added that “This task force operates as an internet troll farm, creating thousands of fake online personas which they use in a coordinated plot to harass, disparage and threaten dissidents and activists throughout the world.”

    In February, we noted that the FBI closed the illegal Chinatown police station following a raid of the building last fall. As the Epoch Times noted at the time;

    The closure of the facility in New York’s Chinatown comes just weeks after The New York Times reported that FBI agents raided and searched the building at an undisclosed time last fall.

    The facility and more than 100 others like it form a network of covert facilities from which experts believe that the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) is conducting a campaign of transnational repression.

    According to two reports published in October 2022 and December 2022 by Safeguard Defenders, a nonprofit organization, the overseas police outposts are used to collect intelligence and even forcibly repatriate Chinese dissidents to the mainland to be imprisoned.

    “We are aware of reports regarding alleged PRC ‘overseas police stations,’” the State Department spokesperson said.

    We take this issue very seriously. Establishing so-called overseas police stations without the invitation or approval of the country in which they are operating raises serious issues of respect for the sovereignty of that country.”

    The spokesperson referred The Epoch Times to the FBI and Justice Department for further information. The Justice Department didn’t respond to a request for comment by press time, and the FBI declined to comment on the matter.

    China’s Communist Regime ‘Violates Sovereignty’

    Chinese authorities maintain that the facilities, which operate in 53 nations, assist Chinese immigrants in foreign nations with tasks that would normally be handled by a consulate, such as renewing driver’s licenses and visas.

    However, the stations have been linked to the CCP’s United Front Work Department, an agency that works to advance the regime’s interests abroad by spreading propaganda, conducting foreign influence operations, suppressing dissident movements, gathering intelligence, and facilitating the transfer of technology to communist China.

    As such, many nations have voiced concern that the facilities are a threat to national security and a violation of sovereignty.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 21:30

  • DeSantis Targets 'Cultural Marxism,' Vows 'War On Woke' At Liberty University
    DeSantis Targets ‘Cultural Marxism,’ Vows ‘War On Woke’ At Liberty University

    Authored by Terri Wu via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis speaks at Liberty University in Lynchburg, Va., on Apr. 14, 2023. (Courtesy of Liberty University)

    LYNCHBURG, Va.—Fresh off signing a six-week abortion ban into law the day before, Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis vowed to continue fighting the “war on woke” to about 9,000 students before receiving an honorary degree of the Doctorate of Humanities at Liberty University on Friday.

    Speaking to young evangelicals at the twice-weekly convocation service, which the school calls “the world’s largest gathering of Christian students,” DeSantis touted Florida as the “refuge of sanity” and “a ray of hope” when “freedom and our very own way of life… withered on the vine” in the country.

    In his view, Florida’s population growth and his landslide reelection victory last year are a direct result of his fight against woke ideology—what he called “cultural Marxism”—and Americans “voting with their feet.”

    We have made Florida the state where woke goes to die,” he declared as the audience burst into a loud cheer.

    His statements against gender ideology—prohibiting using puberty blockers or sex change operations on minors in Florida and criticizing biological males competing in women’s sports—were also well-received by the crowd. “Because woke represents a war on truth, we must wage a war on woke,” he added.

    Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis (C) receives an honorary degree of the Doctorate of Humanities at Liberty University from university president Jerry Prevo (L) and pastor Jonathan Falwell in Lynchburg, Va., on Apr. 14, 2023. (Courtesy of Liberty University)

    The governor started his speech by thanking Liberty University students for praying for his wife Casey’s recovery from breast cancer. Casey was diagnosed in 2021 and became cancer-free late last year. “The prayers that we received as a result of that lifted up our spirits,” he said. “The prayers have been answered.”

    In closing, he said he “looked forward to the battles ahead” in the “war on truth,” “I will fight the good fight. I will finish the race. I will keep the faith.”

    Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis speaks at Liberty University in Lynchburg, Va., on Apr. 14, 2023. (Terri Wu/The Epoch Times)

    ‘Uplifting’ and ‘Inspiring’

    Giulia Nicole, a homeschooled high school senior, said DeSantis’s speech was “uplifting.” She has been on dual enrollment at Liberty University online and will attend the college full-time in August, majoring in accounting.

    “A lot of times when you hear people speak, you kind of leave feeling like the world is just going downhill, and there’s not a lot of hope,” she told The Epoch Times. “Gov. DeSantis was very uplifting. He was a breath of fresh air because I feel encouraged right now. I don’t feel worried about the future. So I really enjoyed his speech.”

    She attended the convocation with her mother Carla Nicole, grandmother Maria Shoemaker, and a friend Savannah Dudzik, a Floridian in Lynchburg, for just the weekend for a pro-life event.

    “I would just say I was impressed. Every time he speaks, I’m a little bit more impressed. He’s so genuine. And we need people like that in politics,” Dudzik, a resident in the Tampa Bay area, told The Epoch Times. “We need people who are genuine, people who you can tell he’s not there for the crowd. He’s not there for the applause. He’s there for the people. He’s there for us.”

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 21:00

  • USPS Targets Hiking First Class Mail Prices By 5.4%
    USPS Targets Hiking First Class Mail Prices By 5.4%

    The same U.S. government that is fighting inflation is also succumbing to it: the price of stamps and postage is once again moving higher. Prices on first-class mail stamps will rise to 66 cents from 63 cents in July, pending approval from regulators, according to CNN

    The price hike – which is being put in place to “offset a rise in operating expenses” – amounts to about a 5.4% hike. Someone should tell the government those hikes are “above the Fed’s 2% target”. 

    Among those expenses are a rise in wages and increasing costs of doing business. “These price adjustments are needed to provide the Postal Service with much needed revenue,” the post office commented in a statement

    The price of postcards will also go up, from 48 cents to 51 cents. International postcards will see their prices rise from $1.45 to $1.50.

    As the report notes, regulators turning down USPS requests for prices hikes are rare, though it did happen in 2010 because the Post Office “failed both to quantify the impact of the recession on its finances and to show how its rate request relates to the resulting loss of mail volume.”

    The post office expects to lose $4.5 billion in 2023 and we’re sure these price hikes will do little to help rectify the bottom line. But hey, raising prices 5.4% while the Fed clamors for 2% inflation all while burning cash is American as apple pie.

    Maybe the Post Office should take itself public on the NASDAQ via SPAC, where the market would value it on a price/sales basis instead of focusing on pesky details like actual net income and cash generation…

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 20:40

  • "We're Going To See A Lot Of Bankruptcies": Former Home Depot CEO Warns
    “We’re Going To See A Lot Of Bankruptcies”: Former Home Depot CEO Warns

    Authored by Naveen Anthrapully via The Epoch Times,

    Bob Nardelli, the former CEO of Home Depot, is warning about more bankruptcies hitting the U.S. economy, and blames lawmakers for their delay in coming to terms regarding the country’s debt ceiling.

    I think we’re going to see a lot of bankruptcies. Like Bed, Bath, and Beyond. We got Walmart not only laying people off but closing stores. We got Accenture laying people off. We got Amazon closing distribution centers. So, I think there’s a tremendous-mixed message,” Nardelli said in an April 14 interview with Fox.

    At present, the “complexity” of the American economy is “different than anything I have seen in my 52 years.”

    Nardelli also blamed Congress’ inability to work together to raise the U.S. debt limit as creating a burden on businesses, saying that he is “definitely worried” about the situation.

    The former Home Depot CEO says he is seeing “inventory builds” in a lot of public and private businesses. He pointed to the 2007–09 period when the banking meltdown took “everything down.”

    “I think we’re in a very complex environment. And, of course, this debt issue only adds to that. It adds to the certainty of uncertainty, what’s going to happen.”

    Surge in Bankruptcy Filings

    Bankruptcy filings across the United States rose for the third straight month in March in all major industries. A total of 42,368 new bankruptcies were filed last month, according to data from Epiq Bankruptcy, a provider of U.S. bankruptcy court data, technology, and services.

    This is 17 percent up from the 36,068 filings in March 2022 and is the highest number of monthly bankruptcy filings since April 2021.

    Data from S&P Global Market Intelligence showed 71 corporate bankruptcy petitions in March, a jump from 58 in the previous month. This is the highest monthly total since July 2020 and the fourth straight month of increases.

    First-quarter corporate bankruptcy filings came in at 183, which is “more than any comparable period in the past 12 years,” S&P Global said.

    Bank Lending Dips, Layoffs

    Meanwhile, lending activity by banks suffered the biggest plunge ever in the two weeks ending March 29. Commercial lending in the country declined by $105 billion during this period—the highest since 1973. The collapse in lending was led by declining real estate loans as well as industrial and commercial loans.

    According to financial analyst Andreas Steno Larsen, tough times are ahead for the American economy. “Evidence is gathering that the SVB-fueled banking stress indeed will turn into a recession, but instead of a fast and rapid liquidity-driven recession, we are rather slow-walking into a credit crunch over summer,” he wrote in an April 9 post.

    Indication of an incoming credit crunch was seen in the latest Survey of Consumer Expectations (SCE) by the New York Federal Reserve.

    “Perceptions of credit access compared to a year ago deteriorated in March, with the share of households reporting it is harder to obtain credit than one year ago rising and reaching a series high,” according to an April 10 press release.

    “Respondents were more pessimistic about future credit availability as well, with the share of households expecting it will be harder to obtain credit a year from now also rising.”

    Besides the credit crunch, there has been a quadrupling in worker layoffs.

    The first quarter of 2023 saw job cuts rise by 396 percent compared to the same period a year ago, according to an April report by outplacement firm Challenger, Gray & Christmas, Inc. The total number of job cuts announced by U.S.-based employers during this period came in at 270,416, which is the highest first-quarter number since 2020.

    The number-one reason cited by companies for the job cuts was market or economic conditions, followed by cost-cutting in second place.

    Billions of dollars have flown out from domestically chartered commercial banks in the country following the SVB collapse on March 10. Between the week ending March 8 and April 5, deposits have fallen from $16,249.9 billion to $15,996.7 billion—a decline of $253.2 billion, based on the latest numbers from the Fed.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 20:20

  • Volkswagen Debuts ID7 Mid-Sized EV Sedan, Expected To Start At $38,000
    Volkswagen Debuts ID7 Mid-Sized EV Sedan, Expected To Start At $38,000

    Just as the EV price wars are heating up, Volkswagen has launched its much awaited ID7 sedan. Expected to be priced around $38,000 to $40,000 for the entry level model, the stunning sedan will assuredly be a direct competitor to Tesla’s Model 3.

    A release by the company on Monday details the first all-electric Volkswagen for the upper mid-size sedan class, touting its “combination of excellent aerodynamics and a new, more efficient drivetrain”. 

    The launch is set for Fall 2023 for Europe and China, and then 2024 for North America. The vehicle has a manufacturer’s estimated potential range of up to 435 miles, as well as “a revised powertrain, spacious interior and premium technologies”. 

    The release says of the new drivetrain:

    The new electric drivetrain has been optimized above all for energy efficiency. Depending on the battery size, Volkswagen estimates that, depending on trim, WLTP ranges of up to 435 miles (700 km) and DC fast charging capacities of up to about 200 kW will be possible.  EPA-estimated range is not yet available and will be released closer to the North American launch date.

    “With the ID.7 we are taking the next step in our electric offensive. The ID.7 offers a high level of comfort and long ranges. By 2026, we will offer the broadest electric vehicle range of all manufacturers in Europe—from the entry-level model for less than 25,000 euros up to the ID.7 as the new top model within the EV family. Our goal is to achieve an electric car share of 80 per cent in Europe by 2030. From 2033, Volkswagen will produce only electric vehicles in Europe,” said Thomas Schäfer, CEO of Volkswagen Passenger Cars. 

    Kai Grünitz, Member of the Brand Board of Management responsible for Development said: “The ID.7 sets new efficiency standards on the basis of the modular electric drive matrix (MEB). We are aiming for a range of up to 700 kilometres2 on the WLTP standard. This is made possible by very good aerodynamics and by significantly increased efficiency in the areas of the powertrain and thermal management.”

    “The ID.7 is an extremely important model for the Volkswagen brand in Europe, North America and China. The ID.7 offers an attractive package that will excite both existing and new Volkswagen customers all over the world. With this Volkswagen, we are offering premium technologies that impress through their exclusivity, comfort and high degree of everyday usability,” concluded Imelda Labbé, Member of the Brand Board of Management for Sales, Marketing and Aftersales.

    You can watch the full launch here:

     

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 20:00

  • Private Armies Are Making A Killing
    Private Armies Are Making A Killing

    Authored by Thomas Fazi via UnHerd.com,

    Mercenaries thrive while democracy dies…

    Last week, Russia claimed to have seized control of the city of Bakhmut after an eight-month battle with Ukrainian forces — the longest and bloodiest fight of the war so far. The assault, however, wasn’t led by the Russian Armed Forces, but by a private army that has been fighting alongside regular Russian troops since the invasion: the infamous Wagner Group.

    The Wagner Group has always been cloaked in mystery. In the first days of the war, reports emphasised the secretive nature of its military operations, including a plot to assassinate Zelenskyy and his cabinet. Until recently, it was unclear whether a company registered under the name “Wagner” even existed.

    That all changed in September 2022, when Yevgeny Prigozhin, a close ally of Putin, published a statement claiming that he founded the group in 2014 to “protect the Russians” when “the genocide of the Russian population of Donbas began”. Then, in January this year, he decided to make it official, registering Wagner as a business and opening its “PMC Wagner Center” headquarters in St Petersburg. He didn’t make any secret of its activities: as the company’s name, which also appears on the group’s logo, makes clear, the Wagner Group is a PMC: a private military company, also known as a mercenary group. The Russian government was forced to acknowledge its existence. The Wagner Group’s clandestine status was officially discarded.

    In many ways, Wagner’s emergence from the shadows symbolises the changing nature of modern warfare, in which the traditional Clausewitzian paradigm — based on a clear distinction between public and private, friend and enemy, civil and military, combatant and non-combatant — has given way to a much messier reality, in which state armies now regularly fight alongside private and/or corporate paramilitary and mercenary groups. Today’s conflicts, even when violent in nature, often occur in a “grey zone” below the threshold of conventional military action; adversarial states increasingly confront each other through proxies or surrogates — including private armies — rather than through their own armed forces. And this is not just a Russian issue: the increasingly central role of private military and security companies (PMSCs) in modern warfare is a global phenomenon.

    Private armies have existed for centuries. In recent decades, the use of mercenaries was particularly widespread during the Cold War, especially in Africa, in the context of decolonisation and the ensuing civil wars. In particular, they were widely used between the Sixties and early Eighties by the West to prevent colonies attaining independence or to destabilise or overthrow newly independent governments, such as in the Democratic Republic of Congo, the Republic of Benin and the Republic of Seychelles.

    At the time, there was virtually no international legal framework regarding mercenarism. It was only in 1977 that the Geneva Conventions incorporated an international legal definition of it. A mercenary, it held, is any person who is recruited to fight in an armed conflict, who actively takes a direct part in the hostilities, and who is neither a national of a party to the conflict nor a resident of territory controlled by one. It was a very narrow definition — but one which, at the behest of the newly independent nations, was specifically tailored to address the use of mercenaries by the West against the post-colonial governments.

    This led to the appointment, in 1987, of a Special Rapporteur on the use of mercenaries; and then, in 1989, to the International Convention against the Recruitment, Use, Financing and Training of Mercenaries, which entered into force in 2001 and added language specifying that mercenaries were people undermining legitimate governments — another clause that implicitly reflected the concerns of post-colonial countries. To this day, the Convention — which essentially copies the wording of the 1977 definition — represents the international legal definition of mercenarism.

    As a result, during the Nineties, there was a significant rise in the number of private military and security companies, who sought to distance their activities from the legal definition of mercenarism by presenting themselves as official business entities offering “legitimate” security and defence services allegedly distinguished from that of rogue mercenary groups. And, by and large, they did so successfully. In that decade alone, PMSCs reportedly trained the militaries of 42 nations and took part in more than 700 conflicts.

    There was a broader backdrop to this growth, too. The growing influence of the neoliberal logic of economic rationalisation and deregulation during the Nineties also pushed states to privatise and outsource many government functions and services — including warfare. Security came to be perceived as a commodity, a service like any other that could be sold and bought in the marketplace. This was also part of a broader push towards the transfer of national prerogatives to suprastate or, as in this case, non-state actors as a way to shift the decision-making process away from democratic institutions. This trend was compounded by the global downsizing of national military forces, which also expanded the recruiting pool for PMSCs.

    Even though PMSCs started out by mainly selling their services to developing countries and so-called failed states facing political crises, by the mid-Nineties Western governments, particularly the US, started to use them as well. By contracting them to support, train and equip the military and security forces of friendly governments — most notably in former Yugoslavia — Western powers were able to promote their interests and foreign policy agendas, while avoiding becoming embroiled in unpopular conflicts, and even circumventing national or international constraints on troop deployment. By the end of the decade, NGOs (such as Oxfam) and even the United Nations had also come to rely heavily on PMSCs for their own security and even for peacekeeping missions.

    In this sense, PMSCs did not replace the role of states as much as integrate into them. In some cases, they even bolstered state military power, by allowing governments to engage in forms of warfare that they might otherwise have been prevented from undertaking for fear of provoking a conventional military response by more powerful states, while also escaping public scrutiny. The Wagner Group’s activities in several African and the Middle Eastern countries — such as Syria, Libya, the Central African Republic and Mali — are a good illustration, insofar as they granted Moscow a degree of plausible deniability concerning its foreign interventions and the alleged human rights abuses committed by Wagner.

    Over the years, various efforts have been made to regulate this new phenomenon at the international level, eventually leading to the establishment of a UN Working Group on the use of mercenaries in 2005. But these bodies have, by and large, failed. Today, the sector remains largely unregulated and operates in a de facto legal vacuum. PMSCs can’t be considered soldiers or supporting militias under international humanitarian law, since they are not part of the army or in the chain of command — but nor can they usually be considered to be mercenaries under the narrow legal definition adopted by the UN. In the current conflict in Ukraine, for instance, the Wagner Group can’t be considered a mercenary group by legal standards for the simple fact that its members are nationals of one of the parties to the conflict.

    These private military companies remain largely unaccountable, characterised by a “fundamental lack of transparency around, and oversight over [their operations]”, as the UN Working Group noted in 2021. Indeed, it suggested that this is sometimes “done precisely with the ominous objective of providing ‘plausible deniability’ of direct involvement in a conflict”. Greater regulation would be welcome, of course, but it wouldn’t change the fact that corporate armies intrinsically undermine democratic accountability — arguably one of the reasons that makes them attractive to states in the first place.

    More fundamentally, what we are dealing with here is the legalisation and normalisation of mercenarism. The only real difference between traditional guns-for-hire and PMSCs is that the latter are often legally constituted businesses with corporate organisational structures. This lends them legitimacy and, theoretically, makes the monitoring of their actions and prosecution easier. But ultimately they remain, to all intents and purposes, “new modalities of mercenaries”, as even the UN General Assembly argued some years back.

    Crucially, the UN report acknowledges that the private security and military industry is a global and growing phenomenon. While today’s focus is on Wagner, the real mercenary boom occurred during the US-led military interventions in Afghanistan and Iraq. In both cases, the US relied heavily on PMSCs such as DynCorp and Blackwater (now known as Constellis). Indeed, at points, the number of contractors on the ground actually outnumbered American troops. By 2006, there were estimated to be at least 100,000 PMSC employees in Iraq working directly for the US Department of Defense.

    And like Wagner today, these were involved in several human rights abuses in the country. Blackwater, for example, the most high-profile PMSC in Iraq, was involved in the massacre of 17 Iraqi civilians in 2007 (which led to the conviction of four Blackwater employees), while other PMSCs were involved in the Iraq Abu Ghraib prison scandal (though none faced prosecution) and were alleged to have participated in the CIA’s “extraordinary rendition” programme — the kidnapping and forced removal of individuals to places known to torture. Despite these obvious failures, by the summer of 2020, the US had more than 20,000 contractor personnel in Afghanistan — roughly twice the number of American troops. Before that, in 2017, Erik Prince, founder of Blackwater, had proposed to fully privatise the war effort there.

    What could possibly inspire such chutzpah? Well, although the Iraqi and Afghan conflicts are generally considered to have been a strategic blunder for the US, not to mention a humanitarian tragedy, they were a boon for the PMSC sector: up until 2016, the US State Department spent $196 billion on PMSC contracts for the Iraq war, and $108 billion for the Afghan war. And business hasn’t slowed: in 2022, the PMSC sector — whose largest businesses are now American or British — was valued at $260 billion and is projected to reach a value of around $450 billion by 2030. The largest PMSC in the world, UK-based G4S, alone employs more than 500,000 people and is present in more than 90 countries.

    Should we be surprised? Ultimately, the growth of the PMSC sector is just another example of how economic transformations in recent decades have blurred the boundary between the public and private-corporate sphere to the point of making it indistinguishable. The result has been the rise of a state-corporate Leviathan which has gobbled up every sector of the economy — healthcare, banks, energy, tech — and has now taken over the field of warfare as well, at the expense of democratic control and oversight. This applies to Russia just as much as it applies to Western countries. If the conflict in Ukraine has taught us anything, it’s that war today is a bigger business than it’s ever been. No wonder peace — in Ukraine or elsewhere — seems constantly out of reach.

    *  *  *

    Like what you read? Join like minded readers that support our journalism, read unlimited articles and enjoy other subscriber-only benefits.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 19:40

  • US Navy Sails Destroyer Through Taiwan Strait After China's War Games
    US Navy Sails Destroyer Through Taiwan Strait After China’s War Games

    The US Navy sailed its guided-missile destroyer, the USS Milius, through the Taiwan Strait on Monday as part of a “freedom of navigation” exercise just days after China’s large-scale military drills around Taiwan, reported Reuters

    According to the Navy’s 7th Fleet, the USS Milius conducted a “routine Taiwan Strait transit” through waters “where high-seas freedoms of navigation and overflight apply in accordance with international law.” 

    Last week, Beijing initiated a three-day military exercise around Taiwan on April 8, simulating targeted strikes and an island blockade. The drills were in reaction to Taiwan President Tsai Ing-wen’s meeting with US House of Representatives Speaker Kevin McCarthy earlier this month

    The 7th Fleet tweeted images of the destroyer sailing through the strait. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “The ship transited through a corridor in the Strait beyond the territorial sea of any coastal State,” the Navy said. It added the mission demonstrated the US commitment to a free and open Asia-Pacific region. 

    In response, the Eastern Theatre Command of the Chinese military reported that they were monitoring the movements of the US warship.

    According to a statement from the Eastern Theater Command’s spokesperson Shi Yilu, China stands ready at any time to “resolutely safeguard the country’s sovereignty, safety, and regional peace and stability.” 

    Meanwhile, Taiwan’s defense ministry said it detected 18 Chinese military warplanes and four naval vessels operating around the island. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 19:20

  • Florida Mayor Resigns Over $250M Budget Shortfall
    Florida Mayor Resigns Over $250M Budget Shortfall

    Authored by Adam Andrzejewski via RealClearWire,

    Mayor Frank Hibbard of Clearwater, Florida, resigned his position during a budget meeting after a series of reckless spending proposals that were set to leave Clearwater with over a $250 million budget shortfall, according to Fox News.

    This includes spending $90 million to construct a new city hall and municipal building — more than double the initial price tag of $40 million.

    Hibbard, a full-time financial advisor and wealth manager, cautioned his colleagues at a recent budget meeting that, “I’m concerned where the city is going because this is simple math and we’re not doing very well on the test.” After his emphatic warning, he resigned.

    Despite the city being in an already precarious financial position with a projected budget shortfall of about $250 million, city council members continued to vote for more spending.

    The now-former-mayor was the only one on the council to vote against the construction project, with every other council member voting to increase the deficit by another $90 million.

    Members of the Clearwater City Council have dismissed his concerns, with a council member telling Fox, the budget meeting Hibbard stormed out of was allegedly “to give direction to staff about budget priorities,” and not a formal vote to allocate funds.

    Either way, every council member agreed to spend $90 million, which means the proposal will almost certainly pass when it comes to a vote.

    Hibbard leaves localities and towns with wise words of warning: “Local government and government in general needs to be very careful with their resources and also be more creative in the way we solve problems.”

    Governments everywhere should heed his advice.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 19:00

  • China Trying Its Hand At Israel-Palestine Peace
    China Trying Its Hand At Israel-Palestine Peace

    Coming off its success in getting archrivals Iran and Saudi Arabia to restore ties, China is now trying its hand at Israel-Palestine peace, after weeks of sporadic clashes between Palestinians and Israeli police in the West Bank and Jerusalem’s Al-Aqsa Mosque. 

    China’s foreign minister Qin Gang on Monday said Beijing is ready and willing to “play a constructive role” in promoting peace in the region. He also said he is “very concerned” over ratcheting tensions and violence, also after recent brief flare-ups of rocket fire from Gaza and Israeli return airstrikes.

    Via Reuters

    During prior clashes at al-Aqsa this month, the Chinese foreign ministry issued a statement saying, “We call on all parties, Israel in particular, to show calm and restraint and immediately stop all words and deeds that might heighten tensions.” This followed viral video showing police beating Muslim worshipers inside the mosque for defying a strict curfew at the Temple Mount. 

    Qin Gang’s Monday statements were conveyed in a phone call to Israeli Foreign Minister Eli Cohen, the first such call since the Chinese FM took office. The Israelis and Palestinian Authority were urged to resume peace talks as soon as possible in the call.

    As for the Israeli side, it’s still nervous over Iran-Saudi rapprochement

    “I spoke with the Chinese Foreign Minister, Qin Gang, about the danger we see in the Iranian nuclear program, a danger that is shared by many countries in the region, including countries that have diplomatic relations with Iran. The international community must act immediately to To prevent the Ayatollah regime in Tehran from obtaining nuclear capabilities,” Cohen said, according to the foreign ministry’s statement. 

    The Israelis have been chiefly concerned that the pressure and spotlight will be taken off of Iranian malfeasance in the region, which could in turn be a threat to Israel’s security.

    As Reuters points out, after Washington spent decades trying to find a solution to the conflict, there’s been no progress. “U.S.-brokered peace talks aimed at establishing a Palestinian state in the West Bank, East Jerusalem and Gaza -territories Israel captured in a 1967 war – have stalled for almost a decade and show no sign of revival,” Reuters writes.

    Some have seen China’s recent efforts at stronger diplomacy in the Middle East as a sign of waning US influence; however, the Biden administration has said it welcomes opportunities to forge greater peace and stability.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 18:40

  • Hospital Sues AG Over Probe Into Transgender Care Services
    Hospital Sues AG Over Probe Into Transgender Care Services

    By Kelly Gooch of Becker’s Hospital Review

    Children’s Mercy Hospital in Kansas City, Mo., is suing Missouri Attorney General Andrew Bailey over his demand for records and testimony on gender-affirming care, The Kansas City Star reported. 

    The lawsuit, filed April 14 in Jackson County, asks a judge to deny Mr. Bailey’s investigative demands, saying the requests are a “burdensome overreach” despite “no allegations of wrongdoing,” according to the newspaper.  

    Mr. Bailey’s office made the demand for records and testimony in a letter sent in late March. In February, his office had already confirmed an investigation by Missouri agencies into whistleblower allegations against the Washington University Transgender Center at St. Louis Children’s Hospital. The whistleblower raised allegations that individuals at the transgender center had harmed hundreds of children each year, including by using experimental drugs on them. 

    Now, Mr. Bailey’s office is also looking at Children’s Mercy and made more than 50 requests for documents and information in his office’s March 24 investigative demand letter to the hospital. Requests include all instances when child abuse was reported to law enforcement and questions of whether Children’s Mercy prescribes hormone blockers for, or performs surgery on, transgender individuals, according to The Kansas City Star.

    Madeline Sieren, a spokesperson for Mr. Bailey’s office, said in a statement shared with the newspaper that Children’s Mercy “is refusing to provide even a single document to explain its practices.”

    “That is very concerning,” she said, adding that Mr. Bailey’s office looks forward to “prevailing in this request for information and learning what is truly going on.”

    Children’s Mercy argues that Mr. Bailey is not authorized to investigate and enforce medical standards under the state’s merchandising practices act, and that complying with his requests would require the hospital to violate state and federal laws, including HIPAA, according to NBC affiliate KSHB. The system also said in its suit that it has no connection to the Washington University center under investigation. Children’s Mercy is not mentioned in the allegations against Washington University Transgender Center, according to KSHB

    The lawsuit filed April 14 comes after Mr. Bailey announced emergency rules targeting gender transition procedures for minors, which take effect April 27. The emergency regulations include prohibiting gender-affirming care unless patients have at least 15 sessions with a mental health provider and have experienced at least three consecutive years of a “medically documented, long-lasting, persistent and intense pattern of gender dysphoria.” 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 18:20

  • Dramatic Video Shows Large Mob Looting Compton Gas Station
    Dramatic Video Shows Large Mob Looting Compton Gas Station

    There has been a surge in lawlessness in recent weeks across several large progressive cities. The most recent incident occurred in Compton, a city in southern Los Angeles County, California, over the weekend when a large mob stormed a gas station. 

    Los Angeles-based KABC reported the “large mob” that “bum-rushed” the Arco gas station near Alondra Boulevard and Central Avenue on Saturday night stole thousands of dollars worth of merchandise. A dramatic video of the incident has gone viral on Twitter. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Department told the local news station that much of the store’s merchandise was stolen in minutes. 

    Compton resident and customer of Arco, Greg Johnson, said: 

    “It’s unbelievable. Unreal. I’ve never seen anything like that happen here.” 

    Commenting on the incident is the police advocacy nonprofit organization National Police Association which tweeted: 

    “When your DA hates cops, loves criminals, and dismisses victims, and your state government is focused on de-incarceration this is what you get – Wild video shows large mob ransacking Arco gas station in Compton.” 

    We’ve pointed out to readers that lawlessness is unfolding in multiple liberal cities this spring: 

    If possible, steer clear of liberal-run cities. The growing trend of lawlessness is worrisome.

     

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 18:00

  • Winner Takes All: The US-China Race To AI Mastery
    Winner Takes All: The US-China Race To AI Mastery

    Authored by James Gorrie via The Epoch Times,

    AI competition may prove to be the last technology race in the world…

    The AI-powered ChatGPT is intensifying the competition between the United States and China for artificial intelligence dominance.

    The stakes couldn’t be higher.

    For the sake of clarity, ChatGPT is the AI-driven tool that can create documents, reports, and other content with just a question or a few key words. It was created by OpenAI, a Bay Area technology firm started by tech standouts such as Elon Musk, Peter Thiel, and other tech luminaries.

    The good news is how ChatGPT has brought the race for AI dominance back into the national conversation. The potential for AI technology to alter our world is difficult to overstate, even though ChatGPT technology itself barely scratches the surface of what AI technology can really do.

    AI Will Transform Everything

    Both the United States and China are fully engaged in efforts to master AI technology in its most powerful applications, which includes creating so-called “deep fakes” that put words into people’s mouths and put people in places they never were. Even those capabilities are mere shadows of what is to come.

    In a few short years at most, the way we do even the most common tasks, from manufacturing goods, transporting them, and marketing them will be radically changed. Medicines, machines, and methodologies of inquiry will all be fundamentally different under AI. AI will change every activity or industry to which it is applied, and that includes rapid advancements in biotechnology and its transformational impact on warfare.

    The AI Race Will Be the Last Race

    The race for AI mastery isn’t the first time that nations have raced to achieve technological dominance in the world. The race to reach the moon comes to mind, but it was ideological almost as much as it was technological in its impact. The race to develop the first atomic bomb during the Second World War is a better comparison. Many observers believe that AI represents nothing less than a paradigm shift for the entire world and across the spectrum of industries and scientific applications.

    That’s what makes AI a qualitatively different technology than all others. It will forever alter the relationship between humanity and machines. Humanity’s great innovation was the replication and transformation of the natural world into the mechanization and manipulation of it. It was only just over a century ago that mankind transitioned from horse to automobile, then on to flight, and then to space flight.

    A visitor watches an AI sign on an animated screen at the Mobile World Congress (MWC), the telecom industry’s biggest annual gathering, in Barcelona. (Josep Lago/AFP via Getty Images)

    A concurrent shift occurred with the communication revolution, effectively compressing time and distance by the speed of light. This not only made the world smaller and events more impactful as they’re witnessed in real time, but it also shortened reaction times.

    The AI revolution, however, is a quantum leap in technological advancement. AI is the actual dematerialization of machines and the separation of thought from humanity, neither of which has ever happened before. For the first time ever, mankind is threatened not just with destruction from a man-made device, but by our own creations replacing us altogether.

    China’s Big Data and Surveillance

    That’s no exaggeration. Philosopher Yuval Harari has warned of AI rendering humans as obsolete and “useless.” Harari isn’t the only one to see the red flags. Elon Musk has said that AI is “summoning the demon,” implying that once released, it will be beyond our control.

    That remains to be seen. But both statements are a nod to the power that AI may well yield to those who first acquire the requisite level of skill and technology. Accordingly, Russian President Vladimir Putin observed that whoever masters AI will be master of the world.

    He’s probably right, and the Chinese Communist Party has every intention of doing both.

    A Chinese man plays online games at an internet cafe in Wuhan, China, in this file photo. The Chinese regime’s cyber strategy is not fun and games, however, it is real cyber war against the United States.  (Cancan Chu/Getty Images)

    Despite ChatGPT’s impressive debut, China is ahead of the United States where it really counts: in research. According to their most recent five year plan, Chinese planners have set rigorous goals for 2030 that include investing up to $1.4 trillion in new AI infrastructure such as data centers, 5G, the industrial internet, and other enabling technologies.

    Their objective is to attain an unassailable position in AI-driven technologies, and in some key respects, such as access to big data, they’re well-positioned to reach their goal. With 1.4 billion people and one of the world’s most surveilled populations, Chinese researchers have access to the largest databases in the world with few if any privacy restrictions.

    China Rushing to Create Superior AI-Driven Military

    The time period of 2025 to 2030 has tremendous defense implications for the United States, since that’s when China’s global AI leadership is scheduled to be realized. Indeed, China’s military advancement plan calls for AI implementation by 2030, with an ambitious and comprehensive application across the entire military asset spectrum.

    China’s plan includes integrating neural networks with nuclear armed hypersonic glide vehicles, AI-enhanced automatic target recognition, auto-piloting, missile fusion, precision guidance for hypersonic platforms, maneuverability, and more. Beijing is also looking to AI for heretofore unimaginable ways to wage cyber warfare on its adversaries. The upshot is within a few years, Beijing aims to change the entire calculus of offensive strategic weapons dynamics through deep AI integration.

    Ultimately, the race for AI dominance between the United States and China may not just come down to committing investment and intellectual resources, but rather, how fast the technology can be put into action.

    It may also be a question of keeping technological intellectual property from being sold or stolen, which the U.S. government has shown repeatedly it is unable to prevent.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 17:40

  • Slew Of Cities Suing Kia, Hyundai For Making Easily-Stolen Vehicles
    Slew Of Cities Suing Kia, Hyundai For Making Easily-Stolen Vehicles

    At the same time big cities are going light on criminals, many of them are choosing to instead make an example out of the manufacturers of stolen property. 

    At least eight cities have filed suit against Kia and Hyundai, seeking unspecified damages over the manufacturers’ production of cars lacking common anti-theft technology. The cities include Seattle, Milwaukee, Cleveland, San Diego and St. Louis. Individuals who bought or leased the cars are also suing the companies. 

    “Big corporations like Kia and Hyundai must be held accountable for endangering our residents and putting profit over people,” said St Louis Mayor Tishaura Jones. 

    In a suit filed in February, the city of Columbus, Ohio said, “The security system for these cars is so substandard that it can be exploited by a middle-schooler.” At risk are Kias made from 2011 to 2021, and Hyundais built between 2016 and 2021.   

    Because millions of Hyundai and Kia vehicles lack a common anti-theft device called an “immobilizer,” they can be easily started with a USB cable and a screwdriver. “Immobilizers were standard on 96% of U.S vehicles by 2015 but were standard on only 26% of 2015 model year Hyundai and Kia vehicles,” reports the Wall Street Journal

    Thanks to how-to videos circulated on TikTok and other social media platforms, thefts of Hyundai and Kia vehicles positively skyrocketed in 2021. 

    Screenshot from a video showing how easy it is to steal many Kias and Hyundais with a USB cable

    For example, Milwaukee saw Hyundai and Kia thefts soar from 895 in 2020 to 6,970 in 2021, with other cities also reporting 8- and 10-fold increases.

    To look at the risk in another way, about one in every 10 Kias registered in Chicago was stolen in 2022. Insurers have taken note — and taken action: State Farm and Progressive have each restricted and/or repriced their coverage of affected Kia and Hyundai vehicles. Sales of policies have been limited in certain parts of the country. 

    Scrambling to address the fiasco, both manufacturers distributed steering wheel locks to police departments last year and encouraged them to give them to Kia and Hyundai owners. Now, they’re implementing a software fix that has to be installed by a dealer. The software upgrade isn’t available for all models yet — and for some, it will never come.  

    Of course, even after the upgrade is installed, your vehicle is still seen as a prime target. To notify criminals that it’s been upgraded, Hyundai is giving customers window stickers. Ahead of your upgrade, you can also try bluffing: Enterprising people are selling stickers online. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 17:20

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 17th April 2023

  • Italy's Meloni Declares 'State Of Emergency' As Illegal Immigration Quadruples
    Italy’s Meloni Declares ‘State Of Emergency’ As Illegal Immigration Quadruples

    Authored by John Cody via Remix News,

    Italy could see up to 50,000 migrants arriving a month if current trends hold…

    Italy’s Prime Minister Giorgia Meloni has announced emergency measures to combat a surge in illegal immigration. (AP Photo/Geert Vanden Wijngaert)

    Italy is responding to the number of illegal boat migrants quadrupling by declaring a nationwide state of emergency, with the government of Giorgia Meloni hoping it will help Italy cope with the growing immigration surge. However, experts are warning that if current trends hold, Italy could see up to 50,000 new arrivals a month in the summer months.

    The new measures, which are initially limited to six months, are intended to free up additional resources and money to deal with the crisis. Over Easter alone, around 2,000 people landed in several boats on the Mediterranean island of Lampedusa.

    In addition to emergency aid totaling €5 million, which will flow into the most affected regions of the country, the state of emergency will also see the construction of additional migrant shelters.

    Migrants disembark from a ship in the Sicilian port of Catania, Wednesday, April 12, 2023. (AP Photo/Salvatore Cavalli)

    So far this year, the Italian Interior Ministry has registered over 31,000 illegal entries by sea. In the same period last year, their number was 7,900. However, the real fear is that in the coming months with warmer weather, an unprecedented number of migrants could be arriving.

    “Italy risks seeing something like 50,000 people arrive on its shores a month, i.e., just under 2,000 migrants a day. In March alone, landings exceeded 13,000 units and you don’t need a calculator to project this figure into the summer when sea conditions will be optimal for a greater number of days. If these figures are projected to the end of the year, Italy runs the risk of having over 250,000 migrants as of December 31,” writes Frances Gallici for Il Giornale newspaper.

    Meloni is under pressure over immigration. Despite campaign pledges to reduce migrant flows, Italy has done little to tackle the crisis and has seen illegal immigration numbers rise dramatically. In fact, she has personally greeted migrants rescued from the sea in a photo op, leaving many conservatives questioning whether she has any appetite to tackle the issue. Her coalition partner, Matteo Salvini, is calling for stricter measures, such as the ones he instituted while serving as interior minister in 2019, which saw illegal immigration plummet.

    Salvini, who now serves as deputy prime minister, is not keeping quiet about the issue either. From Udine, he underlined that Europe “has been chatting for years, but has never lifted a finger. It’s time to demonstrate that there is a union and solidarity is not only the responsibility of Italy, Spain, Greece or Malta, because we are unable to support a thousand arrivals a day economically, culturally and socially.”

    Salvini’s League party has introduced 21 amendments to existing immigration laws that the party says will help speed up repatriations and serve as a deterrent to new arrivals.

    A government statement regarding the emergency measures announces “new structures, suitable both for sheltering as well as for the processing and repatriation of migrants who don’t have the requisites to stay” in Italy. However, building new migrant shelters may improve congestion, but it is unlikely to reduce numbers overall.

    According to the Italian Interior Ministry, the most common countries of origin for illegal immigrants are Ivory Coast (17 percent), Guinea (13 percent), Pakistan (11 percent), Egypt and Tunisia (8 percent each), Bangladesh (7 percent), Cameroon (5 percent) and Syria (4 percent). Another 22 percent are from other countries or have unclear status.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 04/17/2023 – 02:00

  • Escobar: All Roads Lead To Beijing
    Escobar: All Roads Lead To Beijing

    Authored by Pepe Escobar,

    This is the tale of two pilgrims following the road that really matters in the young 21st century; one coming from NATOstan and another one from BRICS.

    Let’s start with Le Petit Roi, Emmanuel Macron. Picture him with a plastic grin in his face strolling alongside Xi Jinping in Guangzhou. Following the – long and gentle – sound of classic “High Mountain and Flowing Water”, they enter the Baiyun Hall  to listen to it played by the 1000-year-old Guqin (a beautiful instrument). They taste the fragrance of 1000-year-old tea – and muse on the rise and fall of great powers in the new millennium.

    And what does Xi tell Le Petit Roi? He explains that when you hear this eternal music played by this eternal instrument, you expect to be in the company of a bosom friend; you are in synch as much as the high mountain and the flowing water. That’s the deeper meaning of the ancient tale of musicians Yu Boya and Zhong Ziqi, 25 centuries ago in the Kingdom of Chu: bosom friendship. Only bosom friends can understand the music.

    And with that, as Chinese scholars explained, Xi brought up the concept of Zhiyin. After Zhong Ziqi died, Yu Boya broke his Guqin: he thought that no one else could understand his music. Their story imprinted the term “Zhiyin”: someone who understands music, with the added meaning of close friends that can completely understand each other.

    All bets are off on whether a narcissist puppet like Macron would ever be cultured enough to understand Xi’s subtle, sophisticated message: those that get it are true soul mates. Moreover, Macron was not dispatched to Beijing and Guangzhou by his masters to do soul mating, but to try to bend Xi towards NATO on Russia/Ukraine.

    His body language is a dead giveaway – complete with crossing his arms demonstrating boredom. He may at first have been impervious to the notion that true friendship requires mutual understanding and appreciation.

    But then something extraordinary happened. Xi’s message may have touched a key spot in the tortured inner depths of the narcissist Petit Roi. What if, in international relations, mutual understanding and appreciation is the key for nations to find common ground and work together towards common goals?

    What a revolutionary notion; not exactly the Hegemon-imposed “rules-based international order”.

    Are you a true Sovereign?

    By inviting Le Petit Roi to China, and personally spending no less than 6 hours with his guest, Xi enacted millenniums-old diplomacy at its best. He reminded his guest of the turbulent history between France and the Anglo-Saxon powers; and he talked about sovereignty.

    The key subtle sub-plot: “Europe” better think hard about being subservient to the Hegemon and minimize as best as possible the massive economic turbulence when Confrontation Day with the U.S. arrives. Implied is Beijing’s priority of breaking up growing U.S. attempts to encircle China.

    So Xi treated France as a potential true Sovereign even under the EU; or somewhat splitting from EU dogma.

    Of course another key message was implied under this Confucian invitation to epistemological growth. For those not willing to be friendly to China because of complex geopolitical layers, it will never be too late for Beijing to show the less “friendly” side of the Chinese state – if the situation arises.

    Translation: if the West goes for Total Machiavelli, China will apply Total Sun Tzu. Even if Beijing would rather go for international relations under the aegis of Beauty, Goodness and Truth rather than “you’re with us or against us”, war of terror and sanctions dementia.

    So did Petit Roi have a “road to Damascus” moment? The verdict is open. He literally freaked the Hegemon out with his outburst that Europe must resist pressure to become “America’s followers”. That’s pretty much in synch with the 51 points agreed upon by Beijing and Paris, with emphasis on “legitimate security concerns of all parties”.

    The Americans got even more spooked when Macron asserted that Europe should become an independent “third superpower”. Le Petit Roi even advanced some baby steps in favor of de-dollarization (certainly under supervision of his financial masters) and not in favor of Forever Wars.

    So the Americans, in panic, had to send German 5th column Annalena “360 Degrees” Bearbock in a hurry to Beijing to try to undo Le Petit Roi’s outbursts – and reaffirm the Washington Dictates Brussels official script. No one, anywhere, paid the slightest attention.

    That came on top of the most glaring subplot of the whole tale: how European Commission dominatrix Ursula von der Leyen was treated by Beijing as worse than irrelevant. A Chinese scholar scathingly described her as “just the mouthpiece of a canine organization with no teeth. Even her bark sounds like whimpering from a terminally ill dog that is about to be euthanized.”

    The “terminally ill dog” had to go through passport control and customs (“Anything to declare”?) No diplomatic status. No official invitation. No sovereignty. And no, you cannot take the special high-speed train alongside Macron to go to Guangzhou. So here’s another message – this one quite graphic: Don’t mess with the 3,000-old Middle Kingdom ethos.

    Lula and “Zhiyin”

    Top Chinese scholars were absolutely riveted by Xi applying diplomatic stratagems that had been so useful 25 centuries ago, now re-enacted on the road-to-multipolarity global stage.

    Some are calling for a new “Strategies for the Warring States” rewritten for the 21st century. The massive round table set up by Chinese protocol with the “jungle” in the middle and Macron and von der Leyen positioned as if for a job interview was a monster hit on Weibo and We Chat. That led to endless discussions on how China is now finally able to “drive a wedge among the barbarians”.

    Compared to all this hoopla, the tale of Brazilian President Lula coming to Shanghai and Beijing reads like a graphic illustration of Zhiyin.

    Lula went for the jugular right from the start, during the inauguration of former President Dilma Rousseff  as the new president of the NDB, the BRICS bank.

    In simple, direct language that anyone from Sahara to Siberia can understand, Lula said, “Every night I ask myself why should every country need to be tied to the dollar for trade? Why can’t we trade in our own currencies? And why don’t we have the commitment to innovate?”

    Directly implied is the fact that the expanding BRICS+ should design and promote its own currency (the long, complex process has already started), on top of allowing trade in national currencies.

    Lula’s powerful message was addressed to the whole Global South. A Brazilian example is China’s ICBC setting up a clearing house in Brazil allowing direct yuan-real exchange.

    It’s no wonder that the CIA official rag, the Washington Post, foaming at the mouth, immediately issued the Deep State verdict: Lula is not obeying the “rules-based international order” diktat.

    That means the Deep State will come after Lula and his government – all over again, and will go no holds barred to destabilize it. Because what Lula said is exactly what Saddam Hussein and Colonel Gadaffi said – and tried to implement – in the past.

    So Lula will need all the help he can get. Enter, once again, “Zhiyin”.

    This is how Xi officially welcomed Lula in Beijing. Very few people around the world, non-Chinese, understand that when someone of Xi’s stature tells you, right in front of you, that you are “an old friend of China”, this is it.

    All doors are open. They trust you, embrace you, protect you, listen to you, help you in times of need and will always do their best to keep the friendship close to their hearts.

    And that ends, for now, our tale of “bosom friends” taking the road to Beijing. The BRICS friend certainly understood all there is to know. As for the NATOstan Little King dreaming of becoming a true sovereign leader, the moment of truth is knocking at his door.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 23:30

  • "Newly Discovered Seafloor Seep" Off Oregon Coast On Fault Line May Be Harbinger To Major Quake
    “Newly Discovered Seafloor Seep” Off Oregon Coast On Fault Line May Be Harbinger To Major Quake

    “Chemically distinct liquid shooting up from the seafloor” has been detected by researchers on a stretch of a 600-mile-long fault line in the Pacific Ocean, which is situated only 50 miles away from the Oregon coast, and could potentially trigger a catastrophic earthquake in the Pacific Northwest. 

    Pythia’s Oasis is located on the midcontinental slope ~80 km west of Newport, Oregon

    “Pythia’s Oasis is a newly discovered seafloor seep on the Central Oregon segment of the Cascadia Subduction Zone, where focused venting emits highly altered fluids ~9°C above the background temperature. The seep fluid chemistry is unique for Cascadia and includes extreme enrichment of boron and lithium and depletion of chloride, potassium, and magnesium. We conclude that the fluids are sourced from pore water compaction and mineral dehydration reactions with minimum source temperatures of 150° to 250°C, placing the source at or near the plate boundary offshore Central Oregon,” researchers at the University of Washington wrote in a study. 

    This sonar image of the Pythias Oasis site shows bubbles rising from the seafloor about two-thirds of a mile deep and 50 miles off Newport, Oregon. These bubbles are a byproduct of a unique site where warm, chemically distinct fluid gushes from the seafloor. Researchers believe this fluid comes directly from the Cascadia megathrust zone, or plate boundary, and helps control stress buildup between the two plates. Philip et al./Science Advances

    Researchers said the seep is nearly a mile below the surface of the ocean at the plate boundary and was first observed in 2015. They fear the leak could be a sign of future earthquake activity:

    “The megathrust fault zone is like an air hockey table.

    “If the fluid pressure is high, it’s like the air is turned on, meaning there’s less friction and the two plates can slip. If the fluid pressure is lower, the two plates will lock – that’s when stress can build up,” co-author Evan Solomon, a University of Washington associate professor of oceanography who studies seafloor geology, wrote. 

    Video of an underwater drone surveying the seafloor seeps. 

    The Cascadia Subduction Zone parrels several major West Coast cities, including Seattle and Portland, Oregon, as well as Northern California and Vancouver Island in Canada. And researchers fear the seismically quiet fault line could be awakened and “unleash a magnitude-9 earthquake in the Pacific Northwest.” 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 23:00

  • 10 Years On – The Boston Bombing Backstory
    10 Years On – The Boston Bombing Backstory

    Authored by Lloyd Billlingsley via AmGreatness.com,

    Local police, not the FBI, are the true warriors against terrorism…

    Ten years ago, at the April 15, 2013 running of the Boston Marathon, Tamerlan and Dzhokhar Tsarnaev planted pressure-cooker bombs that wounded more than 250 and killed Lingzi Lu, 23, Krystle Campbell, 29, and Martin Richard, only eight years old.

    The 2016 film “Patriots Day” dramatizes the story but doesn’t start at the beginning. 

    A year and a half before the bombing, the FBI ignored warnings from Russia about the Tsarnaevs’ terrorist connections. In the film, Kevin Bacon plays special agent Richard DesLauriers, in charge of the “counterterrorism investigation,” after the fact.  

    Local police, not the FBI, go after the bombers and manage to take down Tamerlan. Dzhokhar hid in a boat and suffered several wounds, including one to the mouth that may have been self-inflicted

    The brothers had murdered MIT police officer Sean Collier, as U.S. Attorney William Weinreb explained, “shooting him in the head at point-blank range twice in the side of the head and once right between the eyes.” 

    That brought the death toll to four. As they buried their dead, Bostonians had cause to wonder why the FBI failed to learn from previous bombings. 

    In 1993, the FBI failed to prevent Islamic terrorists from detonating approximately 1,200 pounds of explosives at the World Trade Center. The blast claimed the lives of John DiGiovanni, Robert Kirkpatrick, Stephen Knapp, William Macko, Wilfredo Mercado, and Monica Rodriguez Smith. The blast wounded more than 1,000, including 88 firefighters, 35 police officers, and a medical worker. 

    Three years later, at the 1996 Olympics in Atlanta, the FBI failed to stop Eric Robert Rudolph from planting a bomb, packed with nails, that killed Alice Hawthorne of Albany, Georgia. Turkish cameraman Melih Unzonyol suffered a fatal heart attack and the bomb wounded more than 100 others. 

    The FBI then tried to frame security guard Richard Jewell, subject of the eponymous Clint Eastwood film, who tried to evacuate the area before the blast. For his part, Rudolph had an example to follow. 

    Back in 1978 Ted Kaczynski mailed a bomb that wounded Northwestern University professor Buckley Crist. Kaczynski’s bombs also wounded United Airlines president Percy Wood, Vanderbilt University secretary Janet Smith, UC Berkeley electrical engineering professor Diogenes Angelakos, engineering student John Hauser, University of Michigan professor James McConnell, his assistant Nicklaus Suino, and computer store owner Gary Wright. 

    Kaczinski’s explosive devices maimed renowned computer scientist David Gelernter in 1993 and killed computer store owner Hugh Scrutton, advertising executive Thomas Mosser and lobbyist Gilbert Murray, in 1994. The so-called Unabomber had been active for 17 years, during the administrations of Jimmy Carter, Ronald Reagan, George H. W. Bush, and Bill Clinton—all without detection by the FBI. 

    Only with the aid of Kaczynski’s brother, who identified the bomber through his public manifesto, was the FBI able to track down Ted. He pleaded guilty in 1998 and was sentenced to life without parole. 

    Three years later, the FBI failed to prevent the attack of September 11, 2001, with 3,000 casualties, billions in damages, and suffering that endures to this day. It remains unclear whether any FBI bosses were disciplined, demoted, or discharged over that deadly failure. It was hardly the bureau’s only lapse. 

    The FBI had been tracking Army psychiatrist Maj. Nidal Hasan, a self-described “soldier of Allah” who was communicating with al Qaeda terrorist Anwar al Awlaki about killing Americans. Someone in the FBI’s Washington office dropped the surveillance. 

    On November 5, 2009 at Fort Hood, Hasan murdered 13 unarmed American soldiers, including Pvt. Francheska Velez. She was pregnant and pleaded “My baby! My baby,” before Hasan shot her through the chest, bringing the death toll to 14 with the death of her unborn child. 

    Hasan was only stopped when civilian police officers Kim Munley and Mark Todd returned fire and wounded the mass murderer. Munley was wounded in both legs and a wrist but “she stayed upright and kept firing at the charging gunman.” Had Munley not done so, Hasan would have claimed many more lives. 

    The FBI played no role in the takedown.

    There is still no word if any FBI bosses were ever disciplined, demoted, or dismissed for the lapses that enabled this massacre, the worst ever on a U.S. military base. The broader public also stood at risk. 

    On December 2, 2015, in San Bernardino, California, Syed Farook and Tashfeen Malik murdered 14 people at a holiday office party. The FBI did nothing to prevent the attack and played no role in the takedown. The fleeing terrorists fired at least 81 rounds at police officers, who shot the terrorists dead with no loss of civilian life. 

    In 2013, the FBI twice interviewed Omar Mateen about his connections to the Islamic State, and questioned him again the following year. Knowing his terrorist connections, the FBI did nothing to prevent Omar Mateen from murdering 49 people at the Pulse nightclub in Orlando, Florida, on June 12, 2016. Orlando police, not the FBI, took down the mass murderer. 

    The composite character president David Garrow described in Rising Star: The Making of Barack Obama, downplayed Islamic terrorism and cast his domestic opposition as the true threat. That is also true of Joe Biden, as the Delaware Democrat made perfectly clear in an angry speech last September 1. 

    For the FBI, just about everybody less-than-worshipful of Joe Biden is a domestic terrorist or violent extremist. The bureau has even deployed informers in Catholic churches. FBI boss Christopher Wray is “aghast” and wants to “figure out how we can make sure something like this doesn’t happen again.” 

    If Catholics, Baptists, or Presbyterians thought that meant the FBI would do it more it would be hard to blame them. The FBI has never been held to account and, indeed, is about to be rewarded with a new headquarters bigger than the Pentagon

    With actual terrorism, the FBI prefers to look the other way and leave the front-line combat to the police, as in Boston in 2013. Ten years later in 2023, actual domestic terrorists are again on the march. 

    Audrey Hale, a woman who thought she was a man, planned an attack on the Covenant School for months, without detection by the FBI. Hale murdered Evelyn Dieckhaus, 9, Mike Hill, 61, William Kinney, 9, Katherine Koonce, 60, Cynthia Peak, 61, and nine-year-old Hallie Scruggs, daughter of Chad Scruggs, senior pastor at the Covenant Presbyterian Church. 

    Nashville police officers Michael Collazo and Rex Engelbert took down Hale before she could take more innocent lives. The FBI is now controlling Hale’s manifesto, which at this writing is still unreleased. 

    As with his statement after Fort Hood, Joe Biden failed to name or condemn the shooter, and failed to name a single victim. Under the Delaware Democrat, every year is the year of living dangerously. 

    *  *  *

    Go Emma, run great tomorrow, we’re all very proud of you…

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 22:30

  • These Are The Largest Bond Markets In The World
    These Are The Largest Bond Markets In The World

    In 2022, the global bond market totaled $133 trillion.

    As one of the world’s largest capital markets, debt securities have grown sevenfold over the last 40 years. As Visual Capitalists Dorothy Neufeld details below, government and corporate debt sales across major economies and emerging markets have fueled this dramatic growth. Over the last three years, China’s bond market has grown 13% annually.

    Based on estimates from the Bank for International Statements, this graphic shows the largest bond markets in the world.

    Total debt numbers here include both domestic and international debt securities in each particular country or region. BIS notes that international debt securities are issued outside the local market of the country where the borrower resides and cover eurobonds as well as foreign bonds, but exclude negotiable loans.

    Ranked: The World’s Top Bond Markets

    Valued at over $51 trillion, the U.S. has the largest bond market globally.

    Government bonds made up the majority of its debt market, with over $26 trillion in securities outstanding. In 2022, the Federal government paid $534 billion in interest on this debt.

    China is second, at 16% of the global total. Local commercial banks hold the greatest share of its outstanding bonds, while foreign ownership remains fairly low. Foreign interest in China’s bonds slowed in 2022 amid geopolitical tensions in Ukraine and lower yields.\

    *Represent countries where total debt securities were not reported by national authorities. These figures are the sum of domestic debt securities reported by national authorities and/or international debt securities compiled by BIS.

    Data as of Q3 2022.

    As the above table shows, Japan has the third biggest debt market. Japan’s central bank owns a massive share of its government bonds. Central bank ownership hit a record 50% as it tweaked its yield curve control policy that was introduced in 2016. The policy was designed to help boost inflation and prevent interest rates from falling. As inflation began to rise in 2022 and bond investors began selling, it had to increase its yield to spur demand and liquidity. The adjustment sent shockwaves through financial markets.

    In Europe, France is home to the largest bond market at $4.4 trillion in total debt, surpassing the United Kingdom by roughly $150 billion.

    Banks: A Major Buyer in Bond Markets

    Like central banks around the world, commercial banks are key players in bond markets.

    In fact, commercial banks are among the top three buyers of U.S. government debt. This is because commercial banks will reinvest client deposits into interest-bearing securities. These often include U.S. Treasuries, which are highly liquid and one of the safest assets globally.

    As we can see in the chart below, the banking sector often surpasses an economy’s total GDP.

    As interest rates have risen sharply since 2022, the price of bonds has been pushed down, given their inverse relationship. This has raised questions about what type of bonds banks hold.

    In the U.S., commercial banks hold $4.2 trillion in Treasury bonds and other government securities. For large U.S. banks, these holdings account for almost 24% of assets on average. They make up an average 15% of assets for small banks in 2023. Since mid-2022, small banks have reduced their bond holdings due to interest rate increases.

    As higher rates reverberate across the banking system and wider economy, it may expose further strains on global bond markets which have expanded rapidly in an era of dovish monetary policy and ultra-low interest rates.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 22:00

  • Anheuser-Busch Transitions Into Damage Control Mode – And People Aren't Buying It
    Anheuser-Busch Transitions Into Damage Control Mode – And People Aren’t Buying It

    After rolling out a Bud Light ad campaign featuring flamboyant transgender influencer Dylan Mulvaney – whose ditzy caricature of a woman mocks decades of actual progress by feminists (who have apparently been wokeshamed into silence), Anheuser-Busch’s damage control team kicked into action on Friday after the Mulvaney ad sparked a massive backlash.

    “We never intended to be part of a discussion that divides people,” said Anheuser-Busch InBev CEO Brendan Whitworth in a carefully crafted, heavily focus-grouped press release which failed to mention Mulvaney, Bud Light, or transgender issues. “We are in the business of bringing people together over a beer.”

    I care deeply about this country, this company, our brands and our partners. I spend much of my time traveling across America, listening to and learning from our customers, distributors and others,” the statement continued. “Moving forward, I will continue to work tirelessly to bring great beers to consumers across our nation.”

    Translation: Let’s all forget about this over a beer.

    The company then went with a ‘hey fellow beer drinkers’ ad campaign, tweeting “TGIF” along with a picture of a Bud Light can. It was received about as well as one would imagine… with a massive ratio of people commenting vs. ‘liking’ it.

    The campaign was mocked mercilessly.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    More via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Brand Damage

    Some analysts and investors said that the damage likely won’t sink Anheuser-Busch, but the damage has been done to the Bud Light brand.

    The logo of Anheuser-Busch InBev pictured outside the brewer’s headquarters in Leuven, Belgium, on Feb. 28, 2019. (Francois Lenoir/Reuters)

    “I simply don’t understand why they hired the person who was doing the marketing,” Oxygen Financial CEO Ted Jenkin told Fox News Thursday. “I mean, if your target customer is Kid Rock, and then all of a sudden you decide to go to RuPaul, that just doesn’t make any sense at all.

    Because Bud Light generally targets “blue-collar workers and younger adults that are 25 to 29 years old,” the campaign should be problematic for the firm. “So, I don’t think that this one campaign is going to colossally destroy the brand,” it said.

    “But certainly short term, it puts doubt into their loyal drinkers of Bud Light to say, ‘Do I want to continue to be drinking Bud Light based upon who they’re showing representing Bud Light?’” he asked. “Anytime a company puts on a national spokesperson that has backlash, it certainly can affect your business.”

    A research fellow with the National Center for Public Policy Research wrote this week that Anheuser-Busch is owned by InBev, a multinational conglomerate worth tens of billions of dollars. One product, he wrote, won’t do a huge amount of damage to the brand or value.

    But that seems like a plausible result. The Venn diagram of people interested in drinking Bud Light and those eager to support the issue at the sharp edge of the wokist culture war is pretty much just two circles vaguely near one another,” Shepard wrote. “While InBev investors won’t suffer too much, distributors of AB products and others who do business with the company surely will.”

    Shepard further stipulated in the article that the “bottom-line effects of wokeness are clearer at other American companies that have abandoned fiduciary duty for politics,” referring to large corporations’ having adopted left-wing talking points and narratives around race and sex.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 21:44

  • Is Free Speech Killing Us? FDA Commissioner Declares "Misinformation" A Medical Risk
    Is Free Speech Killing Us? FDA Commissioner Declares “Misinformation” A Medical Risk

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    Last year, we discussed the declaration of WHO Director-General Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus that censorship was needed to combat what he called the “infodemic.” It was a jarring position given the censorship of experts and scientists who have now been vindicated in raising questions over mask protection to natural immunities to school closings to the origins of Covid 19. Nevertheless, U.S. Food and Drug Administration Commissioner Robert Califf added his own voice to call for censorship. Califf declared that life expectancy rates are being suppressed due to “misinformation.” His call for action against ill-defined “disinformation” or “misinformation” is being echoed throughout the Biden Administration.

    In a CNBC interview,  Califf lashed out at “health misinformation” which he said was one of his top priorities to address through “specific authorities at FDA, FTC and other areas.”

    Califf noted:

    “You think about the impact of a single person reaching a billion people on the internet all over the world, we just weren’t prepared for that. We don’t have societal rules that are adjudicating it quite right, and I think it’s impacting our health in very detrimental ways.”

    He does not elaborate on what would be those “societal rules” for “adjudication” of access to information. However, it holds a familiar ring for free speech advocates.

    In recent months, the Twitter Files revealed an extensive and secret effort by the FBI and other agencies to censor citizens on social media. I testified on that effort. New emails uncovered in the ongoing Missouri v. Biden litigation reportedly show that the Biden Administration’s censorship efforts extended to Facebook to censor private communications on its WhatsApp messaging service.

    We also know of backchannel communications with the CDC and other agencies.

    As officials like Califf call for continued crackdowns, there is no recognition of how the government worked to silence opposing views that have been vindicated in recent months.

    For years, scientists faced censorship for even raising the lab theory as a possible explanation for the virus. Their reputations and careers were shredded by a media flash mob. The Washington Post declared this a “debunked” coronavirus “conspiracy theory.” The New York Times’ Science and Health reporter Apoorva Mandavilli was calling any mention of the lab theory “racist.”

    When a Chinese researcher told Fox News that this was man-made, the network was attacked and the left-leaning PolitiFact slammed her a “pants on fire rating.”

    The mask mandate and other pandemic measures like the closing of schools are now cited as fueling emotional and developmental problems in children. The closing of schools and businesses was challenged by some critics as unnecessary. Many of those critics were also censored. It now appears that they may have been right. Many countries did not close schools and did not experience increases in Covid. However, we are now facing alarming drops in testing scores and alarming rises in medical illness among the young.

    The point is only that there were countervailing indicators on mask efficacy and a basis to question the mandates. Yet, there was no real debate because of the censorship supported by many Democratic leaders in social media. To question such mandates was declared a public health threat and what the WHO called our “infodemic.”

    A lawsuit was filed by Missouri and Louisiana and joined by leading experts, including Drs. Jayanta Bhattacharya (Stanford University) and Martin Kulldorff (Harvard University). Bhattacharya previously objected to the suspension of Dr. Clare Craig after she raised concerns about Pfizer trial documents. Those doctors were the co-authors of the Great Barrington Declaration, which advocated for a more focused Covid response that targeted the most vulnerable population rather than widespread lockdowns and mandates. Many are now questioning the efficacy and cost of the massive lockdown as well as the real value of masks or the rejection of natural immunities as an alternative to vaccination.  Yet, these experts and others were attacked for such views just a year ago. Some found themselves censored on social media for challenging claims of Dr. Fauci and others.

    The media has quietly acknowledged the science questioning mask efficacy and school closures without addressing its own role in attacking those who raised these objections.

    What is most striking about Califf’s comments is the failure to address how censorship in the last three years may have increased public health risks by suppressing opposing or dissenting scientific views. Indeed, just this week, a new British study came out directly refuting CDC guidance on masks and suggesting that, while not appreciably reducing the risk of serious Covid symptoms, masks may have caused health problems. Other studies have rejected the mask efficacy argument though this remains a matter of intense debate.

    The point is that there is now a debate after social media companies allowed people to discuss these views and the media is no longer labelling dissenters as conspiracists or racists.

    Before we continue to make these government efforts a top priority, we should have a public debate over the means used to combat misinformation and what constitutes misinformation. That should start with a full investigation of past government efforts to censor or blacklist individuals or groups.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 21:30

  • FAA Grants SpaceX Launch License For Starship Orbital Flight
    FAA Grants SpaceX Launch License For Starship Orbital Flight

    The Federal Aviation Administration granted SpaceX final regulatory approval to launch the world’s biggest rocket on Monday morning. 

    “After a comprehensive license evaluation process, the FAA determined SpaceX met all safety, environmental, policy, payload, airspace integration, and financial responsibility requirements,” the FAA said in a statement, adding, “The license is valid for five years.” 

    Elon Musk’s SpaceX said the Starship spacecraft and Super Heavy booster are ready for launch at its facility in Boca Chica, Texas, beginning at 0700 CT for a 150-minute window.

    SpaceX explained this Starship launch is the first “integrated flight test.” This means it’s the first time the Super Heavy rocket and Starship will have taken off together. 

    If the launch is successful, the Super Heavy booster will attempt landing at SpaceX’s base, while Starship will attempt a splashdown in the Pacific Ocean near the Hawaiian island of Kauai.

    SpaceX developed Starship to haul people and cargo to the moon, Mars, and deep space.

    Over the weekend, Musk retweeted images of the Starship rocket on the launch pad. 

    The billionaire recently said the Starship test has a 50% chance of succeeding on its first orbital flight. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 21:00

  • "Nowhere Else In The World Was Such Open Dissent Amongst Appointed Leaders On Display"
    “Nowhere Else In The World Was Such Open Dissent Amongst Appointed Leaders On Display”

    By Eric Peters, CIO of One River Asset Management

    “Rather than embracing the promise of new technology as we have done in the past, here we propose to embrace stagnation, force centralization, urge expatriation, and welcome extinction of new technology,” said SEC Commissioner Hester Pierce, a registered Republican, first nominated to the SEC by Obama in 2015, appointed by Trump in 2017, and will serve through 2025.

    “Accordingly, I dissent,” she said, directly to Chairman Gensler and the three additional Commissioners who collectively lead the SEC.

    “No longer does this Commission consider the real-world effects of its exercise of authority. No longer does this Commission think creatively about regulatory alternatives that advance the Commission’s mission while preserving space for potentially disruptive innovation. No longer does this Commission worry that regulatory bullheadedness often produces absurd consequences,” said Hester, a courageous public servant in a world short of inspired leaders, determined to call things as she sees them.

    “Rather, today’s Commission aggressively expands its regulatory reach to solve problems that do not exist. Today’s Commission treats its basic approach to exchange regulation as something that must not – indeed cannot – be altered to allow room for new technologies or for new ways of doing business,” she said.

    “The release sends a message that we are uninterested in facilitating innovation and competition in the financial markets and instead seek to protect incumbents. Accordingly, although I am generally supportive of reopening comment periods where it is clear that the Commission will benefit from further good faith engagement with the public, I cannot support what the Commission is doing in this release,” said Hester.

    Nowhere else in the world was such open dissent amongst appointed leaders on display. And it doesn’t matter whether you agree or not with Pierce’s position on the matter of distributed ledger technological innovation, it is the spirit and substance of her public stand that reminds us of what makes America great.

    For the complete SEC Commissioner Hester Pierce speech [click here].

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 20:30

  • CVS 'Gender Transition' Guide Requires Use Of Preferred Pronouns, Sharing Bathrooms
    CVS ‘Gender Transition’ Guide Requires Use Of Preferred Pronouns, Sharing Bathrooms

    CVS has issued ‘gender transition guidelines’ which put employees on notice that people must be addressed by their preferred pronouns and names, and that they may use whichever restroom or locker room they wish, whether or not they identify as transgender, Fox Business reports.

    According to the guidelines, employees are notified that they may be entitled to medial leave “under the Family and Medical Leave Act, state law, and/or CVS Health policy,” while transitioning employees are encouraged to tell their immediate supervisor about their decision so that the company “can provide support and to make your transition as smooth as possible.”

    “You may also wish to have appropriate medical care to support your transition, including treatments such as hormone replacement therapy and/or gender confirmation surgery,” the guide continues.

    “During and after the transition has occurred, CVS Health encourages you to continue to partner with your Leader and your Advice & Counsel representative, and to immediately report any issues that you might have with your employment, your work environment, and/or your Leader, co-workers, clients, and customers.”

    In a section titled, “Guidelines for Supporting a Colleague who is Transitioning,” the guide encourages employees to be an ally by asking colleagues to let them know if they say or do anything that makes them uncomfortable. It also urges employees to not make assumptions about a person’s gender.

    It says employees should become an ally to make a positive impact on a co-worker’s life, become an inclusive leader, champion and celebrate all aspects of diversity and to show compliance with the CVS Health Equal Employment, Affirmative Action, AntiDiscrimination, Anti-Harassment, and Anti-Retaliation Policy. -Fox Business

    According to the company’s Affirmative Action, AntiDiscrimination, Anti-Harassment, and Anti-Retaliation Policy, the company is “committed to the principle of equal employment opportunity and takes affirmative action to recruit, hire, employ, develop, compensate, promote and advance in employment based on an individual’s job-related qualifications, abilities, and job performance,” and prohibits discrimination and harassment.

    Transgender CVS employees are encouraged to include their preferred pronouns in email signatures, and let people know during meeting introductions. After this is done, co-workers are instructed not to refer to the individual by other pronouns or their previous name.

    “People use different terms to refer to themselves, but some terms are universally considered disrespectful and violate CVS’s policy against discrimination and harassment,” states the guide. “Terms like transgender, trans-male/trans-female, non-binary or ‘male’ or ‘female’ should be used.”

    What’s more, according to company policy, all workers “should determine the most appropriate” bathroom and locker room based on their gender identity.

    “Any colleague, customer, or patient—transgender or otherwise–may choose to use the restroom and/or locker room that is appropriate to the gender they identify with,” according to the guide, which adds that transgender employees have “Any colleague, customer, or patient—transgender or otherwise–may choose to use the restroom and/or locker room that is appropriate to the gender they identify with.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 20:00

  • US Appeals Court Judge Rejects ProPublica Story On Justice Clarence Thomas
    US Appeals Court Judge Rejects ProPublica Story On Justice Clarence Thomas

    Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Two appeals court judges recently weighed in on reporting around Supreme Court Justice Clarence Thomas and that he and his wife were gifted with trips and vacations from a billionaire friend for decades.

    Associate Justice Clarence Thomas sits during a group photograph of the justices at the Supreme Court in Washington on April 23, 2021. (Erin Schaff/Pool/AFP via Getty Images)

    Judge Thomas Hardiman of the United States Court of Appeals for the Third Circuit dismissed the notion of a “scandal” surrounding Supreme Court Justice Clarence Thomas. Last week, left-wing outlet ProPublica published an article in which “experts,” some unnamed, argue Justice Thomas violated disclosure obligations by neglecting to report luxury gifts he received from billionaire friend Harlan Crow.

    “The thing that I thought was weird about the Justice Thomas thing is the ‘scandal,’ to use your word, there was no intimation at any time, ever, that his billionaire friend ever had any business before the Supreme Court. So, how’s he helping his friend? He’s not even in a position to help his friend because his friend had exactly zero cases in the Supreme Court,” Judge Hardiman said in response to a question asked by an undergraduate during this week’s event, according to the National Review.

    He was making reference to a ProPublica article published earlier this month that cited several unnamed experts who claimed that Thomas violated disclosure obligations by not reporting luxury gifts he received from billionaire Harlan Crow, a friend of his. The move prompted some Democratic lawmakers—namely Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez—to propose impeaching Thomas.

    “You know, I decide cases involving lawyers in Pittsburgh. And I know these lawyers, some of them are former law partners of mine. I belong to organizations with them, I go to lunch with them. Should I not hear their cases? If you have such suspicion about our integrity, you could really end up in a situation where judges can’t even do their jobs because at some point you’re attached to everybody,” Hardiman continued.

    If someone wanted to make me look bad and I happened to rule in favor of a client in an immigration case that was argued by my former law clerk, oh, there would be a big exposé, ‘oh, Hardiman chose partiality to his law clerk,’” Hardiman then said.

    The judge then gave an example:  “I’ve had my former law clerks stand up in court and argue cases. And I don’t think they’ve ever won a case. And it’s not because they’re not brilliant lawyers. They are. But usually they’re doing pro bono immigration cases, and sadly, for the immigrants, those cases can be very difficult to win.”

    Judge James Ho of the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Fifth Circuit said that there is a difference between “an actual instance of corruption” and “the mere perception” during remarks he made during the event. “I think the appearance issue is absolutely important” as “the judiciary basically rests on its credibility,” he said, according to the National Review.

    Judge Thomas Hardiman, a federal judge on the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Third Circuit is seen in Washington, on Nov. 17, 2016. (AP Photo/Cliff Owen)

    The judiciary, like any human institution, isn’t perfect, because none of us are perfect,” Ho added.

    Earlier in the month, a report published by nonprofit news organization ProPublica, which receives some funding from billionaire financier George Soros, said that Thomas had accepted luxury trips almost every year over the past 20 years or so without disclosing them.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 19:30

  • All Hell Breaks Out In Chicago As Hundreds Of Teenagers Wreak Havoc
    All Hell Breaks Out In Chicago As Hundreds Of Teenagers Wreak Havoc

    A trend of lawlessness has unfolded in cities run by progressive leaders this spring. The latest incident occurred on Saturday night in Downtown Chicago, where hundreds of teenagers wreaked havoc by smashing car windows and destroying public and private property. They also attempted to enter Millennium Park, which prompted a significant police response. There was even a shooting that resulted in multiple injuries. 

    FOX 32 Chicago reported massive crowds of teenagers that unleashed chaos in the downtown district last night. Besides the rogue kids smashing and breaking anything in their sight, there were reports of shots fired and two teenagers wounded by gunfire near the corner of Madison and Michigan. 

    Even FOX 32 said the chaos last night was “unsafe to keep our news crew on the scene.” There was even footage of kids jumping on top of a bus.  

    Watch the dramatic video of Chicago’s youth ‘gone wild.’ 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “This is the second time this weekend that a group of rowdy teenagers has prompted a police response,” the local media outlet pointed out. 

    The culture of lawlessness continues, and it’s not even summer. The video is proof of the rapid moral decay of the younger generation that has been educated in failed liberal institutions. 

    Meanwhile, Chicago’s new mayor, Brandon Johnson, is another soft-on-crime progressive who comes after Lori Lightfoot was ejected from office for failing to make the city safer. 

    Chicago is not the only city dealing with out-of-control youth. Another failed liberal city, Baltimore, experienced similar chaos just one week ago. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    What’s the pattern here? Progressives are transforming their cities into lawless hellholes. 

    And the response?.. People are leaving these dumps for safer areas. Even Walmart closed half of its stores in Chicago last week because of the deteriorating environment. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 19:00

  • Even ChatGPT Can Figure Out What Is Going On
    Even ChatGPT Can Figure Out What Is Going On

    By Eric Peters, CIO of One River Asset Management

    Answers

    “What happens when governments stifle innovation?” I asked.

    GPT4 answered: “When governments stifle innovation, it can lead to reduced economic growth, decreased competitiveness, and a slower pace of technological advancement. Businesses may face regulatory barriers, restricted access to resources, and limited incentives for research and development. As a result, talented individuals might seek opportunities in more innovation-friendly environments, causing a brain drain and hindering the nation’s progress.”

    “Why would governments ever stifle innovation?”

    GPT4 answered: “Governments may inadvertently stifle innovation due to bureaucracy, excessive regulation, or protectionist policies aimed at preserving domestic industries. They might also prioritize short-term political gains over long-term economic benefits, leading to misguided policies. Additionally, some governments may lack the foresight to recognize the potential of new technologies or may act in response to pressure from special interest groups resistant to change.”

    “When governments stifle innovation, what is the best way to correct such mistakes?”

    GPT4 answered: “It is crucial to identify and eliminate barriers to innovation, such as excessive regulations and bureaucracy. Governments should establish policies that incentivize research and development, invest in education, and promote collaboration between the public and private sectors. Encouraging open dialogue, fostering competition, and ensuring transparent and evidence-based decision-making can help create a more innovation-friendly environment.”

    “Why do governments avoid near-term pain, even if that amplifies longer-term costs?”

    GPT4 answered: “Governments often prioritize near-term pain avoidance due to electoral cycles, political pressures, and the need for public support. Short-term benefits may secure votes or address immediate crises, even at the expense of long-term consequences. The complexity and uncertainty of long-term issues are challenging for policymakers. This short-termism can hinder the development of policies that serve society’s broader interests in the long run.”

    “Why do individuals do the same?”

    GPT4 answered: “Humans tend to avoid near-term pain due to cognitive biases and psychological factors. Present bias, for instance, makes immediate rewards and consequences appear more significant than future ones. Additionally, humans have difficulty accurately predicting long-term outcomes, leading to a focus on short-term gratification. Uncertainty, fear of failure, and aversion to change also contribute to this preference for avoiding short-term discomfort, even if it compromises long-term success.”

    Anecdote

    “Why are we so often our own worst enemies?” I asked myself. I didn’t bother asking GPT4, it couldn’t possibly give me the real answer. We feed these large language models everything we’ve ever learned, which is why they tell us what we already know. And this question remains as deep a mystery as any in the universe.

    I first started to appreciate it as a young trader. The profession requires one to make frequent decisions, many of which are wrong. Both winning and losing trades can be cut short or left to run. And the profit/loss score card cannot be denied. In such a pursuit, each decision should be made coldly, rationally, with the sole objective to maximize profit while minimizing loss.

    Yet there are times when traders act otherwise. We trade out of fear, greed, arrogance, stubbornness, narcissism, boredom, addiction. We add to losing longs in the irrational belief that by buying more, we may reverse a declining market. Or vice versa. We swear that if the market lets us get away with it one last time, we’ll never do it again. Sometimes a Hail Mary trade may work, even spectacularly.

    And so reckless behavior is occasionally rewarded. But of course, in time, the market hunts down those unable to control their self-destructive impulses and ruins them. The ones who survive this battle with themselves learn to make decisions that are hard, humbling, and exploit the behavioral weaknesses and lack of discipline in others. Naturally, such elemental flaws manifest in every aspect of who we are; personally, professionally, politically. They are the source of the world’s infinite complexity, our pain, political dysfunction too.

    It is why we must celebrate those rare dissenters with the courage to take a stand, forcing us to face our reflection when we succumb to our inner enemies. But these mysterious flaws are also the source of our sublime beauty. If we optimized for cold rationality, we would be utterly boring algorithms. Perhaps like the AIs we are creating. Which I suspect will never fully appreciate us.     

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 18:30

  • South Korea Fires Warning Shots At North Korean Patrol Boat That Breached Boundary
    South Korea Fires Warning Shots At North Korean Patrol Boat That Breached Boundary

    A dangerous live-fire incident has been reported in a disputed sea border patrolled by both North and South Korea on Saturday. 

    Reportedly a North Korean vessel had been pursuing a Chinese fishing boat, according to the military statement, and subsequently retreated after warning shots were fired from a South Korean military patrol boat.

    Illustrative, via Reuters

    “Our military maintains decisive battle posture while monitoring the enemy’s movements in preparation for potential provocations regarding NLL (Northern Limit Line) violations by North Korean patrol boats,” the South Korean Joint Chiefs of Staff said in a Sunday Statement, confirming the prior day’s incident.

    Tensions are already soaring after a series of joint US-South Korea military drills which have been answered with the north conducting a series of major weapons tests, including of ballistic missiles and what’s been described as an underwater nuclear drone.

    Saturday’s incident on the seas may have involved a collision, as The Hill describes:

    The disputed sea border between the two countries, the Northern Limit Line, has served as a theater for provocation and naval showdowns in the past. South Korean officials said one of its ships came into “minor” contact with a Chinese vessel due to poor visibility, but said there were only slight injuries reported.

    As for Pyongyang’s spate of recent missile tests, Time has analyzed missile launch data by North Korea and compared it to last year’s:

    Last year was already record-breaking: data from the James Martin Center for Nonproliferation Studies, which has been documenting North Korean missile launches since 1984, showed 68 tests in 2022—10 times more than in 2021. And there are no signs that the country plans to let up.

    Already the country is on track to surpass this: 

    On Thursday morning local time, prompting a temporary evacuate-or-seek-shelter warning in Japan, North Korea reportedly fired a ballistic missile toward the East Sea—Pyongyang’s 12th test of the year so far, according to a review by TIME of reports by North Korea’s state news agency, South Korea’s military, and international media.

    Regional US ally Japan in particular has been fearful of the increasing tests ordered by the Kim Jong-Un regime. Upon a last Thursday launch, Japan issued an evacuation order for a northern island but soon retracted it when the missile’s flight path was believed no longer a threat.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 18:00

  • Dramatic Video Shows Indian Gangster-Turned-Politician Gun Down On Live TV
    Dramatic Video Shows Indian Gangster-Turned-Politician Gun Down On Live TV

    A dramatic video shared on Twitter shows the Indian gangster turned politician Atiq Ahmed was gunned down on live TV with his brother while being escorted by police. The incident occurred Saturday night in Prayagraj, also called Allahabad, located in the northern Indian state of Uttar Pradesh.

    Ahmed was speaking with reporters while in police custody when three men posing as journalists shot the former politician and his brother, reported BBC News. Both died on the spot. 

    The Ahmed family has been involved in dozens of kidnappings, murders, and extortion over the past two decades. A court recently sentenced the former politician to life in jail over corruption and violent crimes. 

    In the footage shared on Twitter, Ahmed is asked whether he attended his son’s funeral.

    His final words were: “They did not take us, so we did not go.” Then all hell breaks out… 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    After carrying out the shooting, the suspected gunmen shouted Hindu religious chants. They surrender to the police at the scene. 

    “Experts have raised questions on how a man could be killed in front of the media and the police,” BBC noted. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 17:00

  • Biden Announces New Actions On Secret Documents After 'Embarrassing' Leak
    Biden Announces New Actions On Secret Documents After ‘Embarrassing’ Leak

    Authored by Tom Ozimek via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    President Joe Biden on Friday announced new actions that restrict access to classified materials in the wake of an embarrassing leak of apparent classified U.S. military intelligence that ended up spreading widely on social media.

    President Joe Biden adjusts his microphone during a meeting with the President’s Council of Advisors on Science and Technology in the State Dining Room of the White House in Washington, on April 4, 2023. (Patrick Semansky/ AP Photo)

    The suspected leaker, a 21-year-old member of the Massachusetts Air National Guard named Jack Teixeira, was on Thursday arrested and charged in federal court on two counts, including unauthorized retention and transmission of national defense information charges.

    I commend the rapid action taken by law enforcement to investigate and respond to the recent dissemination of classified U.S. government documents,” Biden said in a statement.

    “While we are still determining the validity of those documents, I have directed our military and intelligence community to take steps to further secure and limit distribution of sensitive information, and our national security team is closely coordinating with our partners and allies,” the president added.

    Teixeira was an IT specialist responsible for military communications networks, which allowed him to get a higher level security clearance.

    The leaked documents include maps and details about deliveries of weapons, with some bearing markings classifying them as “Secret” and “Top Secret.” Some showed what looks like locations for front-line Russian and Ukrainian military units and artillery guns.

    Jack Douglas Teixeira poses for a selfie at an unidentified location in a file photo. (Social Media Website via Reuters)

    ‘Damaging’ Leak

    Former Defense Secretary Mark Esper said in an appearance on Fox News on Friday that he’s baffled as to why someone like Teixeira would have had access to the sensitive materials.

    I don’t understand why a 21-year-old national guardsmen had access to some of the most highly kept secrets in the United States, and in particular, finished products from the Joint Staff or finished products from the CIA operation center,” Esper said. “I just don’t know why he would have access to those.”

    Asked about reports that Teixeira worked in IT and needed clearance to work on computer networks and equipment, Esper said that his access should have been more limited and that information carried on military communication systems should have been ring-fenced.

    There’s not a need for him to have access to the information on that system, let alone finished products from the Joint Staff and CIA,” Esper replied, adding that an investigation into the leak shows that the Pentagon has a problem “not just over classification, but in this case, over distribution.”

    “There’s too many people that have access to this information. It should really only be for the highest levels of our government,” Esper said. “And we need to get that under control.”

    It’s not just embarrassing, but it’s damaging,” Esper said, noting that the leak hurt Ukraine’s ability to mount an effective counter-offensive against Russian forces while burning U.S. access to Russian military and intelligence systems.

    The leak may also have exposed sources and techniques of collecting intelligence on Chinese operations, he added.

    Then Secretary of Defense Mark Esper testifies before a House Armed Services Committee hearing at Capitol Hill in Washington on July 9, 2020. (Michael Reynolds/Pool/Getty Images)

    Pentagon Takes Action

    Besides Biden announcing action to limit access to classified materials, Defense Secretary Lloyd Austin has vowed to take “any additional measures necessary” to safeguard against national security leaks and has ordered a review of intelligence access.

    Austin said during a press conference on Thursday that he’s “directing the Under Secretary of Defense for Intelligence and Security to conduct a review of our intelligence access, accountability, and control procedures within the Department to inform our efforts to prevent this kind of incident from happening again.”

    He said the Department of Defense, in close partnership with the Intelligence Community and its interagency partners, “will continue to review the national security implications of this unauthorized disclosure.”

    Austin also stressed that “every U.S. service member, DoD civilian, and contractor with access to classified information has a solemn legal and moral obligation to safeguard it and to report any suspicious activity or behavior.”

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 16:30

  • California Utilities Propose Charging Customers Based On How Rich They Are
    California Utilities Propose Charging Customers Based On How Rich They Are

    As if the relatively affluent needed another reason to escape California… If you earn more, you pay more.

    That’s the bottom-line impact on your electricity bill if a proposal from California’s three largest power companies is passed.

    As KTLA5 reports, Southern California Edison, Pacific Gas & Electric, and San Diego Gas & Electric submitted a joint proposal to the state’s Public Utilities Commission last week that outlines the new rate structure. It follows last year’s passage of Assembly Bill 205 which requires a fixed rate and generally simpler bills.

    The plan would break monthly bills in two parts: The fixed-income rate, plus a reduced usage charge based on consumption.

    Under the proposal, the fixed charges increase as follows:

    • Households earning less than $28,000 a year would pay a fixed charge of $15 a month on their electric bills in Edison and PG&E territories and $24 a month in SDG&E territory.

    • Households with annual income from $28,000 – $69,000 would pay $20 a month in Edison territory, $34 a month in SDG&E territory and $30 a month in PG&E territory.

    • Households earning from $69,000 – $180,000 would pay $51 a month in Edison and PG&E territories and $73 a month in SDG&E territory.

    • Those with incomes above $180,000 would pay $85 a month in Edison territory, $128 a month in SDG&E territory and $92 a month in PG&E territory.

    Southern California Edison says approximately 1.2 million of its lower-income customers will see their bills drop by 16%-21%.

    “We have listened to and heard from our customers that fundamental change is needed to provide bill relief,” SDG&E CEO Caroline Winn said in a statement.

    So ‘some folks’ want energy bill relief… so the wealthy will have to pay their ‘fair-er share’ for the same power consumption.

    “When we were putting together the reform proposal, front and center in our mind were customers who live paycheck to paycheck, who struggle to pay for essentials such as energy, housing and food.”

    Of course, this is being directed from the top-down…

    The income-based bill proposal is part of the companies’ compliance with legislation passed by the California state government last year requiring these types of plans for utilities.

    Ironically, it is only the relatively affluent (we use that term because what is ‘poor’ in California is likely a considerably wealthier situation in most other US states) are the only residents of California that can afford an electric vehicle (which the state is demanding everyone transition to within the next few years) and thus ave higher electricity power demands broadly speaking.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 16:00

  • Both Bulls And Bears Have Experienced Multiple "Lucy" Moments In The Past Year
    Both Bulls And Bears Have Experienced Multiple “Lucy” Moments In The Past Year

    By Peter Tchir, chief strategist at Academy Securities

    Peanuts & Lula

    This weekend’s T-Report will be mercifully short as I’m in Patagonia on vacation.

    Last week, we saw consistently weak economic data. On Thursday, the market decided that this was good news (lower inflation, the Fed off the table, etc.), but it didn’t feel like the squeezes of past weeks. Shorts got cut, but there wasn’t a fear that the market was going to run away with things (like we’ve seen in past squeezes). There were even some moments where it felt like the Russell 2000 could significantly outperform the Nasdaq 100. Yields were also higher across the board by the end of the week (which made sense).

    Peanuts – Charlie Brown & Lucy

    Charlie Brown (hoping that Lucy wouldn’t lift the football before he kicked it) always struck me as absurd. Couldn’t he just buy a “kick-off tee”? Just put the ball on the tee and kick it without relying on Lucy! Yet time after time, he ran to the ball only to have it snatched away with him winding up on his back wondering what had happened.

    I feel like both bulls and bears have experienced multiple “Lucy” moments in the past year. Every time it looked like we were going to break one way or the other, there goes the ball and we found ourselves on our backs as markets reversed course.

    I continue to believe that it is the bulls (this time) who are about to get “Lucy’d”. This Fed has no intention of cutting rates and might have every intention of remaining hawkish. Inflation, like the Monty Python Knight, has been utterly vanquished, but the Fed seems to think that “it’s only a flesh wound.” I think that they are wrong and we’ve already gone too far, but they don’t see it that way. The market seems to have gotten ahead of itself on the “weaker inflation data is good” theme because:

    1. The Fed is going to remain hawkish. Even if hikes are almost done, it is difficult to imagine cuts without serious data deterioration (which may be coming, but they will be slow to respond). Stopping at current levels will remain a headwind for the economy.
    2. The inflation data is “good” because the economy is showing many signs of weakness. Given where we saw freight and shipping data a few weeks ago (along with OPEC+ needing to cut), I expect that the weak data will continue, but this will not be enough to support stocks.

    I recommend that positioning should remain unchanged from last week (Davy Jones and the Six).

    Peanuts – Actual Peanuts

    On flights within Argentina, peanuts are served to passengers. In one country, “free” peanuts on flights still exist. However, in another country, people are asked not to even open anything that might have touched a peanut because someone on board might have an extreme allergy.

    Not sure what to make of this, but maybe it is a reminder that when we evaluate geopolitics, we really need to work hard to see it from the perspective of the other country.

    Lula and Xi

    China and Xi seem to have taken the lead in global diplomacy. Xi has gone far beyond just meeting with Putin and submitting peace proposals (albeit fake and self-serving). The Chinese deal with Brazil and their influence in encouraging the Iran deal with the Saudis have positioned China well on the world’s stage.

    Many will focus on the “disparagement” of the dollar. While that is important, there is a much clearer message being sent when you look at the headlines around the autos. For all who keep arguing that “China needs us as much or more than we need them” I say bah humbug!

    • China made things for American companies under the brand names of those companies.

    That is what China did and continues to do.

    • China is also going to sell Chinese brands to other countries.

    China will manufacture their own brands and find willing buyers.

    • The autocratic/resource rich nations of the world have potential trade surpluses with China that can be spent on Chinese manufactured goods (especially as trade is increasingly done between those countries in Yuan).
    • The Chinese goods, which are generally cheaper (and not of the same quality, in my opinion) may be better priced for the citizens of those resource rich nations (where the wealth is often concentrated).

    Our view that “China is aligning itself with the autocratic/resource rich nations” continues. We have argued that while the dollar will remain the reserve currency, there is increasingly a “dark web” of business shifting to the Yuan.

    This doesn’t impact us much today (or tomorrow) and there is still plenty of time to change the direction of these trends, but we better get our act together sooner rather than later!

    Bottom Line

    Still medium bearish (last week’s recommended positioning and trading style remain the same).

    I am increasingly concerned that we are missing China’s ascendance on the global stage and are too inward looking to recognize it.

    Academy was on Bloomberg TV last Monday and not only did we get to discuss markets, banks, and the Nasdaq 100 versus the Russell 2000, but we also got to discuss geopolitics and Academy’s edge on that front (starts around the 51 minute mark). As we stated last week (and the Lula visit supports), people are paying lip service to geopolitics, but aren’t worried enough. Admittedly some geopolitics will take time to develop and shift economies and markets, but companies need to be taking into account these potential (and even likely) shifts in their current planning.

    I can’t help but think about peanuts and my reaction to them on a flight versus the typical Argentinian’s view. I need to make sure that I’m applying the viewpoints of others correctly in my geopolitical analysis. In the meantime, before aggressively kicking the football, think about who is holding it and if they can be trusted!

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 15:30

  • Border Patrol "Brace For F**king Impact" As End Of Trump-Era Immigration Policy Looms
    Border Patrol “Brace For F**king Impact” As End Of Trump-Era Immigration Policy Looms

    Earlier this week, President Biden signed a joint resolution ending the COVID-19 national emergency on Monday, bringing an end to some of the emergency authority the president and Congress wielded to deal with the pandemic. The real authority granted to the executive during the pandemic was in the public health emergency, and that won’t be ended until May 11.

    And that means the lifting of Title 42 restrictions on border-crossers and the nightmare scenario of tens of thousands of illegal aliens rushing the border. Biden has severely curtailed the asylum program already but has yet to deal with the potential flood of illegals from Central America who will attempt to cross the border once Title 42 is lifted.

    Border Patrol agents are being given limited word on how to prepare for a flood of illegal immigrants when Title 42, a major Trump-era expulsion order, ends May 11, according to two agents who spoke anonymously with the Daily Caller News Foundation (DCNF) and an internal Department of Homeland Security (DHS) memo.

    “There are thousands and thousands just waiting for Title 42 to end. I would say a fear is that the Biden admin has no clue just how bad it’s going to get. We can barely actively patrol the border now. When Title 42 ends, all of our resources, all of our little manpower that we do have, are going to be focused on processing. Field work will nearly cease to exist in my opinion,” one Border Patrol agent working along the southern border told the DCNF.

    One agent working along the southern border, who requested anonymity because they weren’t authorized to speak, told the DCNF that the extent they were told about preparations was just to “brace for fucking impact” and to prepare to “weather the storm.”

    “Most of the time, we are just told that Title 42 will end eventually and to be mentally prepared for the influx of migrants when it does. Regular line agents don’t seem to be offered an outline or plan as to how we will actually deal with the large numbers at the processing level,” the second agent said.

    There are only so many ways to control our sovereign border and, as Rick Moran writes at PJMedia.com, what Biden is finding is that Trump’s policies don’t look so bad now that he has the responsibility to protect us.

    “At this point, I can’t tell the difference between Biden immigration policy and Trump immigration policy,” one asylum officer told CNN.

    One policy among them – once described as “cruel” and “inhuman” – is reinstating family detention at the border.

    Will AOC be crying at empty fences again?

    Some asylum officers are none too pleased with Biden’s Trumpy policies.

    “It feels like Groundhog Day,” another asylum officer told CNN.

    “With the Trump era, it felt like we had really gotten to rock bottom and when Biden took over, it seemed like a light ahead of us. It feels very disheartening.”

    Rick sums up the situation perfectly:

    Asking Biden and the Democrats to apologize for all those nasty things they said about Trump and his policies is a waste of time. But they know the truth. They know that Trump chose the correct path to deal with a nearly impossible situation.

    But it would be nice if Mayorkas or Biden acknowledged at least in some respect.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 04/16/2023 – 15:00

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 16th April 2023

  • The Disruptive Military Technologies The Pentagon Is Spending Nearly $150 Billion On
    The Disruptive Military Technologies The Pentagon Is Spending Nearly $150 Billion On

    Authored by John Haughey via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    President Joe Biden’s $886.3 billion Fiscal Year 2024 (FY24) defense budget request includes $145 billion for research and development into emerging technologies to create new weapons systems using Artificial Intelligence (AI), hypersonic munitions, and electromagnetic swarms.

    The U.S. Department of Defense launches a sounding rocket from NASA’s launch range at Wallops Flight Facility on Wallops Island, Va., on Oct. 26, 2022. (Evelyn Hockstein/Reuters)

    The Department of Defense (DOD) and its subsidiary military branch technology laboratories, working in tandem with universities and high-tech contractors that increasingly include small businesses, have produced such big-ticket splashes as newly deployed directed-energy weapons systems and hypersonic/ballistic sensors.

    Among prospective products and systems seeking funding in the FY24 spending request is a ‘Rocket Cargo’ transport that can move 100 tons of cargo anywhere on Earth within an hour; a counter-swarm electromagnetic weapon that can disable drones and be powered from a wall plug; a rotating detonation engine without moving parts; a “pop-up hide” that can make Marines disappear in plain sight; a Predictive Vehicle Activity for Identification and Location (PreVAIL) program that “will bring a novel approach to automated target detection and recognition.”

    There are also less sexy utilitarian products being tested in the budget, such as a Portable Fluid Analyzer, a ship-to-ship system that converts Morse code into text messages, and an assembly line of bigger, faster, better-armed unmanned aircraft, from micro-drones to the latest Unmanned Long-endurance Tactical Reconnaissance Aircraft (ULTRA.)

    All have survived, or must soon traverse, “The Valley of Death.”

    Unlike notable valleys in American military history—Valley Forge, the Chosin, Khe Sanh, the Korengal—this “Valley of Death” is not a place on a map but that dreaded moment of realization on a military product development timeline when a cutting-edge weapon that will deliver a decisive battlefield advantage cannot advance out of prototype to production and get onto the battlefield in time.

    An operational version of the Active Denial System, a military counter-personnel directed energy weapon that is the equivalent of science fiction’s heat ray. (Unlisted USAF personnel/Public domain/ Wikimedia Commons )

    ‘The Valley of Death’

    Integrating new, still-maturing technologies into existing programs and platforms without “radical disruption” to multi-year procurement and acquisitions systems is among the most tweaky of challenges confronting the military, Pentagon officials said during a two-hour April 13 webinar presented by the National Defense Industrial Association (NDIA).

    The DOD’s Under Secretary of Defense for Research & Engineering Heidi Shyu and the DOD’s Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA) Director, Dr. Stefanie Tompkins, noted the proposed $145 billion Research, Development, Test, and Evaluation (RDT&E) budget is up 12 percent from this year with the Air Force receiving one-third of the requested outlay.

    Shyu said the Science and Technology component of the RDT&E budget request is $17.8 billion, up 8.3 percent over this year’s $16.5 billion budget.

    The annually updated National Defense Science & Technology Strategy is on Secretary of Defense Lloyd Austin’s desk, she said.

    Shyu said the strategy will focus on joint mission; creation and deployment of capabilities at speed and scale; establishment of an enduring advantage in talent, infrastructure, research, and collaboration; directed energy weapons; and hypersonic/ballistic sensors.

    Technology leaders for three military branches—Army Deputy Assistant Secretary for Research & Technology William Nelson, Naval Research Chief Rear Adm. Lorin Selby, Air Force Research Laboratory Commander Maj. Gen. Heather Pringle—outlined cooperative ventures with industry and workforce development plans, especially in currying bids and participation in projects by small businesses.

    The $886.3 billion FY24 defense request includes $842 billion for the Pentagon with emphasis on the “growing multi-domain threat posed by the People’s Republic of China (PRC),” which the DOD has again named the nation’s most pressing “pacing challenge.”

    March and April is typically when DOD and military command officers testify before congressional panels about their spending requests during the annual budget cycle leading up to Oct. 1, the official start of the federal fiscal year.

    All five of the panelists at the NDIA webinar have been making the rounds on Capitol Hill to meet with congressional bean-counters to discuss funding for new whiz-bang weapons, such as fusion-based target recognition systems, to such relatively mundane innovations as snow tires for Humbles, since February.

    But on April 13 before the NDIA, a Washington-based nonprofit that represents 1,800 corporations and nearly 60,000 individuals working in the defense manufacturing industry, it was all about “The Valley of Death.”

    The USS Ponce conducts an operational demonstration of the Laser Weapon System while deployed to the Arabian Gulf. (U.S. Navy photo by John F. Williams/Released)

    ‘Moats of Despair’

    Delivering new technologies developed in the commercial sector under DOD contract into the field in a seamless transition, especially when so many weapons systems are interrelated, is a daunting challenge, the officials said.

    In fact, in June 2022, Deputy Secretary of Defense Kathleen Hicks called transition discord “one of our biggest problems—the so-called ‘Valley of Death,’ scaling up to full-scale production and fielding” new weapons systems.

    Selby said there isn’t just one “Valley of Death” but at least three, which he described as “moats of despair.”

    “The first ‘Valley of Death’” is the stage where “the first identified prototype” is manufactured and tested and “it didn’t pan out or we failed internally” to properly build and test it, he said.

    That ‘Valley of Death’ is within my control” at that point, Selby said.

    The next “Valley of Death” is moving a product from prototype to production, he said, which is when other factors come into play, such as costs and manufacturing capabilities, which can make further development unfeasible. “This is a deep valley,” where many projects go to die, he said.

    The final ‘Valley of Death” is “getting that production to scale,” Selby said. “You got something, something that is ready to go onto a platform, as part of a modernization package” but you don’t control production schedules especially for an item that was previously manufactured at a “low rate production.”

    “The warfighter is screaming, ‘I need that and need that tomorrow’—that is [a problem] we have to solve. We have not solved it,” he said. “How do I rapidly go to scale? That’s the question. That’s how you win.”

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 23:30

  • Watch: Beyond The Reset
    Watch: Beyond The Reset

    This excellent animated short film about the not-too-distant-but-very-dystopian future is at once humorous and terrifying.

    It speculates on the potential consequences of the infamous Great Reset, medical tyranny, woke culture, and green agenda.

    Everything, that World Economic Forum (WEF) is planning for us.

    If you’d like to buy the creator a beer, his PayPal address is oleg@3depix.com

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 23:00

  • They Must Have A Good Reason
    They Must Have A Good Reason

    Authored by Todd Hayen via Off-Guardian.org,

    There is a strange idea hovering about that if you don’t know something then it doesn’t exist.

    Kind of like the image of the proverbial ostrich with his head in the sand. But it goes beyond denial. Ignorance is when you don’t know something at all, denial is when you know it, but you ignore it.

    What I am talking about here is when you know something and do not deny it, but simply rationalize it away with a statement like “they must have a good reason for doing that,” or similarly, “maybe we don’t know all that there is to know about that.” Which is often followed with, “and I don’t have the time, (inclination, care, interest, curiosity, ability, intelligence, etc.) to look into it further.”

    This has always bugged me to some extent, but I must admit I have been marginally guilty of this sort of thinking myself. I mean, do we really have the time to check everything? Well, now I think we have to make the time, and, of course, not everything is important enough to require vetting it for truth. That is an awful thing to say, but I am afraid it is the truth.

    Part of this “gullibility” that causes many people to just brush things off assuming that all is ok comes from indoctrination from an early age. I grew up in a culture that seemed to be really obsessed with people’s safety—particularly the safety of children. Think of all the recalls of toys and such. If some toy comes out that has the slightest bit of uncertainty about how it might harm your child, it is pulled.

    I should not say I “grew up” with this because most of the crap I played with as a kid would be considered a lethal weapon today—Lawn Darts, BB and pellet guns, Vac-U-Forms, chemistry sets, Easy Bake ovens (this was my sister’s toy, she was a little girl, I was a little boy—I tell you this for clarity). The “safety craze” didn’t really start until a decade or so later. I even remember some kid I knew got an “Atomic Energy Lab” toy that had actual uranium ore in the kit.

    I would have died (literally) to get my hands on one of these.

    Those were the days.

    So over the decades, due to these recalls and safety concerns, we have developed a false sense of security. What regulation agency would bother to recall Lawn Darts but at the same time allow an unsafe vaccine to reach the unwilling arms of children? Well, toys are toys, vaccines are medicine. There ‘ya go.

    The government, and other regulatory agencies, know what’s right, right?

    Being born into a culture (US) that was known for its integrity, truthfulness, righteousness, and a penchant for character and goodness (ha, ha), no one would ever think that the CIA would have been actively trying to assassinate Fidel Castro, among others, for decades.

    I remember first hearing a rumor about this when I was about 15. “No way,” I thought to myself. “Assassinations are illegal! My country would never be involved in such a thing!” Especially attempting to murder a leader of a country that really was just minding their own business. At least so it seemed. (Today, when we hear of such things, we shrug our shoulders and say, “They must know what they are doing.”)

    And what about Iran’s Mosaddegh? He was minding his own business overseeing the affairs of Iran as Prime Minister from 1951 to 1953. The US wasn’t happy with him for a number of reasons (primarily economic, like, for example, Mosaddegh wanted Iran to get a bigger share of oil profits that the US and UK were sucking out of his nation’s oil fields, imagine that! What audacity!). The CIA bopped him off as well—indirectly with a CIA created insurrection, which led to Mosaddegh’s imprisonment and more than likely contributed to his health issues, then he died). Sure there is detail here I am not presenting, but you get the picture.

    The US Government must have had a good reason.

    How about Obama’s drone war? Killing a whole whack of people, including children (I would say “women and children” but I might get in trouble for that).

    He must have had a good reason.

    Personally, I don’t think there is any “good” reason to kill children—even if as collateral damage or unintentionally.

    I am presenting here only a few examples among thousands…more than we even know of course. And this is just government actions, what about pharmaceutical actions, or other medical actions? They all must have good reasons.

    As a whole most people seem to think that atrocities cannot happen in the US (or Canada, or the UK, or other countries in the “civilized” West). We are just too sophisticated for that. The irony here is the official spokespeople for the US, for example, actually present themselves as do-gooders. They either keep their actions covert and Top Secret, or they present them as “good things.” We only have to look to people like Julian Assange and Edward Snowden to see how the US treats whistleblowers who seek to expose the fact the US really doesn’t have a good reason to do much that it does—at least no reason that benefits us.

    If you ever corner a sheep and throw this sort of stuff at them, they will first hit you with the statement, “why do you have to be so negative? Why can’t you just trust your government to take care of business in our best interests as a nation?” They will say that the government has to have secrets in order to keep us safe, and those people who break the law (Assange and Snowden, among many others. Since we are counting, let’s include the truckers of Canada as well) are criminals, and it doesn’t matter if your intention is good, if you break the law you are a criminal and should be punished.

    If you try to argue with these sheep about anything more complex, like the CIA’s intervention into Middle Eastern affairs, they will just blow it off and say something like, “All that overseas stuff is just too complicated to sort out. And those Middle Eastern countries (except Israel) are all bad guys, I don’t really care what the US does to them, they know what they are doing.”

    Sheep are funny that way. “La, la, la, la, la, la” with fingers plugging their ears. It is easy to push them to this point. Sheep poking. Try it some time for fun and pleasure.

    One good way to get them there really quickly is to bring up some false flag issue that has been in the big time news within the last few decades. The 9-11 fiasco is my favorite. You’ll get the sheep fingers into the ears really quickly with the “la la la’s” going full blast. Don’t try something too far out there though, like the moon landing, or the hot ticket now, germ vs. terrain theory. You’ll only just get eye rolls for those whacko topics.

    I am curious though…speaking of 9-11… what will happen when that incident is exposed for what it was? (Assuming that will ever occur.)

    I will bet you money, no matter how ludicrous it would be, their first response to the realization that their own government was responsible for the destruction of those buildings at the World Trade Center, will be, “They must have had a good reason.”

    Actually they did, but it wasn’t a good reason for us.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 22:30

  • US Criticizes China's Death Sentence Of 'Wrongfully Detained' American Citizen
    US Criticizes China’s Death Sentence Of ‘Wrongfully Detained’ American Citizen

    Authored by Aldgra Fredly via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The United States on Thursday expressed its “disappointment” over China’s decision to uphold a death sentence of an American man who had been “wrongfully detained” for over a decade on drug-related charges.

    Texas resident Katherine Swidan holds a picture of her son Mark Swidan who has been held in China for a decade. (Courtesy of the Swidan family)

    Mark Swidan, a Houston resident, was detained on Nov. 13, 2012, while on a business trip to China. He was accused of being a part of a network involved in the manufacturing and trafficking of drugs.

    Swidan pleaded not guilty to all charges but was denied by the Jiangmen Intermediate Court, which upheld his death sentence with a two-year suspended sentence, according to the U.S. Department of State.

    “We are disappointed by this decision and will continue to press for his immediate release and return to the United States,” Vedant Patel, a Department of State spokesman, said in a statement.

    “U.S. officials have repeatedly expressed their concerns to senior PRC [People’s Republic of China] officials about Swidan’s treatment, medical care, and his inability to send or receive mail in a timely manner,” he added.

    Patel said that President Joe Biden and Secretary of State Antony Blinken will “continue to remain personally focused” on the release of Swidan and other U.S. nationals who were “wrongfully detained” or held hostage around the world.

    Lack of Evidence

    Swidan was aged 37 at the time of his arrest. He was sentenced to death in 2018 despite a lack of evidence presented against him.

    No drugs were found on Swidan’s body or in his hotel room when he was arrested, according to a report [pdf] released by the United Nations Working Group on Arbitrary Detention in 2020.

    The prosecution failed to produce forensic or telecommunications evidence, such as emails, phone call records, or letters. His passport records showed that Swidan was not in China when the alleged offense occurred.

    U.S. officials had previously called for his release. In February, Texas Republicans—including Sen. Ted Cruz, Sen. John Cornyn, and Congressman Michael Cloud—introduced a resolution demanding his release ahead of Blinken’s planned trip to Beijing.

    They’ve sentenced him to death on charges for which they have little to no evidence, and I had been urging Tony Blinken when he was going to Beijing to raise Mark’s case and to make the case for Mark to be released,” Cruz said in a statement.

    Blinken indefinitely postponed his visit after a suspected Chinese spy balloon was detected flying over the continental United States. A U.S. military jet later shot down the balloon on Feb. 4.

    “Bringing Mark Swidan home to his family should be a top priority for this administration,” Cloud said. “Too many innocent Americans remain wrongfully imprisoned by authoritarian regimes who are happy to collect human lives as a capital for future political bargaining.”

    ‘Badly Mistreated’

    According to the U.N. report, Swidan was “badly mistreated” while in detention and exposed to “poor sanitary conditions.” He was denied medical treatment and barred from communicating with his family or U.S. Consulates.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 22:00

  • Hacking Humanity: Transhumanism
    Hacking Humanity: Transhumanism

    Authored by Michael Rectenwald via The Mises Institute,

    The notion that the world can be replicated and replaced by a simulated reality says a great deal about the beliefs of those who promote the metaverse [treated in the previous chapter]. The conception is materialist and mechanistic at base, the hallmarks of social engineering. It represents the world as consisting of nothing but manipulable matter, or rather, of digital media mimicking matter. It suggests that human beings can be reduced to a material substratum and can be induced to accept a technological reproduction in lieu of reality. Further, it assumes that those who inhabit this simulacrum can be controlled by technocratic means. Such a materialist, mechanistic, techno-determinist, and reductionist worldview is consistent with the transhumanist belief that humans themselves will soon be succeeded by a new transhuman species, or humanity-plus (h+)—perhaps a genetically and AI-enhanced cyborg that will outstrip ordinary humans and make the latter virtually obsolete.

    The term transhumanism was coined by Julian Huxley, the brother of the novelist Aldous Huxley and the first director-general of the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO). In an essay entitled “Transhumanism,” published in the book New Bottles for New Wine (1957), Huxley defined transhumanism as the self-transcendence of humanity:

    The human species can, if it wishes, transcend itself—not just sporadically, an individual here in one way, an individual there in another way, but in its entirety, as humanity. We need a name for this new belief. Perhaps transhumanism will serve: man remaining man, but transcending himself, by realizing new possibilities of and for his human nature.

    One question for transhumanism is indeed whether this transcendence will apply to the whole human species or rather for only a select part of it. But Huxley gave some indication of how this human self-transcendence might occur: humanity would become “managing director of the biggest business of all, the business of evolution . . .” As the first epigraph to this Part makes clear, Julian Huxley was a proponent of eugenics. And he was the President of the British Eugenics Society. It was in his introduction of UNESCO, as the director-general that he suggested that eugenics, after the Nazi regime had given it such a bad name, should be rescued from opprobrium, “so that much that now is unthinkable may at least become thinkable.” As John Klyczek has noted, “In the wake of vehement public backlash against the atrocities of the Nazi eugenic Holocaust, Huxley’s eugenics proper was forced to go under-ground, repackaging itself in various crypto-eugenic disguises, one of which is ‘transhumanism.’” Transhumanism, Klyczek suggests, is “the scientific postulate that human evolution through biological-genetic selection has been largely superseded by a symbiotic evolution that cybernetically merges the human species with its own technological handiwork.”

    Contemporary transhumanist enthusiasts, such as Simon Young, believe that humanity can take over where evolution has left us to create a new and improved species—either ourselves, or a successor to ourselves:

    We stand at a turning point in human evolution. We have cracked the genetic code; translated the Book of Life. We will soon possess the ability to become designers of our own evolution.

    In “A History of Transhumanist Thought,” Nick Bostrom details the lineage of transhumanist thought from its prehistory to the present and shows how transhumanism became wedded to the fields of genomics, nanotechnology, and robotics (GNR), where robotics is inclusive of Artificial Intelligence (AI). It is the last of these fields that primarily concerns us here. The transhumanist project has since envisioned the transcendence of humanity via technological means. In the past thirty years, this technological transcendence has been figured as “the singularity.”

    Vernor Vinge, the mathematician, computer scientist, and science fiction author introduced the notion of the technological singularity in 1993. The singularity, Vinge suggested, is the near-future point at which machine intelligence will presumably supersede human intelligence. Vinge boldly declared: “Within thirty years, we will have the technological means to create superhuman intelligence. Shortly after, the human era will be ended.” Vinge predicted that the singularity would be reached no later than, you guessed it, 2030. The question Vinge addressed was whether, and if so, how, the human species might survive the coming singularity.

    The inventor, futurist, and now Google Engineering Director Raymond Kurzweil has since welcomed the technological singularity as a boon to humanity. Kurzweil, whose books include The Age of Spiritual Machines (1999), The Singularity Is Near (2005), and How to Create a Mind (2012), suggests that by 2029, technologists will have successfully reverse-engineered the brain and replicated human intelligence in (strong) AI while vastly increasing processing speeds of thought. Having mapped the neuronal components of a human brain, or discovered the algorithms for thought, or a combination thereof, technologists will convert the same to a computer program, personality and all, and upload it to a computer host, thus grasping the holy grail of immortality. Finally, as the intelligence explosion expands from the singularity, all matter will be permeated with data, with intelligence; the entire universe will “wake up” and become alive, and “about as close to God as I can imagine,” writes Kurzweil.

    Thus, in a complete reversal of the Biblical creation narrative, Kurzweil posits a dumb universe that begins with a cosmic singularity (the Big Bang) and becomes God by a technological singularity. This second singularity, Kurzweil suggests, involves the universe becoming self-aware, vis-à-vis the informational, technological agent, humanity. Thus, in the technological singularity, the technological and the cosmic converge, as Kurzweil resembles a techno-cosmic Hegelian. (Hegel figured collective human self-consciousness progressing in self-actualization and self-realization, finally becoming and recognizing itself as God, “through the State [as] the march of God in the world.”) Incidentally, according to Kurzweil, our post-human successors will bear the marks of their human provenance. Thus, the future intelligence will remain “human” in some sense. Human beings are the carriers of universal intelligence and human technology is the substratum by which intelligence will be infinitely expanded and universalized.

    More recently, Yuval Noah Harari—the Israeli historian, WEF-affiliated futurist, and advisor to Klaus Schwab—has also hailed this singularity, although with dire predictions for the vast majority. According to Harari, the 4-IR will have two main consequences: human bodies and minds will be replaced by robots and AI, while human brains become hackable with nanorobotic brain-cloud interfaces (B/CIs), AI, and biometric surveillance technologies. Just as humans are functionally replaced, that is, they will be subject to the total control of powerful corporations or the state (or, what’s more likely, a hybrid thereof, a neo-fascist state). Rather than a decentralized, open-access infosphere of exploding intelligence available to all, Singularitarian technologies will become part of the arsenal for domination. The supersession of human intelligence by machine intelligence will involve the use of such data and data processing capabilities to further predict and control social behavioral patterns of the global population. In addition, the biotechnical enhancement of the few will serve to exacerbate an already wide gulf between the elite and the majority, while the “superiority” of the enhanced functions ideologically to rationalize differences permitted by such a division. That is, Harari suggests that if developments proceed as Vinge and Kurzweil predict, this vastly accelerated information-collecting and processing sphere will not constitute real knowledge for the enlightenment of the vast majority. Rather, it will be instrumentalist and reductionist in the extreme, facilitating the domination of human beings on a global scale, while rendering opposition impossible.

    In an article in Frontiers in Neuroscience, Nuno R. B. Martins et al. explain just how such control could be implemented through B/CIs, which the authors claim will be feasible within the next 20 to 30 years:

    Neuralnanorobotics may also enable a B/CI with controlled connectivity between neural activity and external data storage and processing, via the direct monitoring of the brain’s ~86 x 109 neurons and ~2 x 1014 synapses. . .

    They would then wirelessly transmit up to ~6 x 1016 bits per second of synaptically processed and encoded human–brain electrical information via auxiliary nanorobotic fiber optics (30 cm3) with the capacity to handle up to 1018 bits/sec and provide rapid data transfer to a cloud-based supercomputer for real-time brain-state monitoring and data extraction. A neuralnanorobotically enabled human B/CI might serve as a personalized conduit, allowing persons to obtain direct, instantaneous access to virtually any facet of cumulative human knowledge (emphasis mine).

    Such interfaces have already reached the commercialization stage with Elon Musk’s Neuralink, Kernel, and through DARPA, among others.

    When neuralnanorobotic technologies that conduct information and algorithms that make decisions interface with the brain, the possibilities for eliminating particular kinds of experiences, behaviors, and thoughts becomes possible. Such control of the mind through implants was already prototyped by Jose Delgado as early as 1969. Now, two- way transmission of data between the brain and the cloud effectively means the possibility of reading the thoughts of subjects, interrupting such thoughts, and replacing them with other, machine-cloud-originating information. The desideratum to record, label, “informationalize,” rather than to understand, let alone critically engage or theorize experience will take exclusive priority for subjects, given the possibilities for controlling neuronal switching patterns. Given the instrumentalism of the Singularitarians— or, as Yuval Harari has called them, the “Dataists”— decisive, action-oriented algorithms will dominate these brain-cloud interfaces, precluding faculties for the critical evaluation of activity, and obliterating free will. Given enough data, algorithms will be better able to make decisions for us. Nevertheless, they will have been based on intelligence defined in a particular way and put to particular ends, placing considerable emphasis on the speed and volume of data processing and decision-making based on data construed as “knowledge.” Naturally, Aldous Huxley’s Brave New World comes to mind. Yet, unlike Huxley’s mind-numbing soma, brain-cloud interfaces will have an ideological appeal to the masses; they are touted as enhancements, as vast improvements over standard human intelligence.

    Harari peels back the curtain masking transhumanism’s Wizard of Oz promises, suggesting that even before the singularity, robotics and machine intelligence will make the masses into a new “useless class.” Given the exorbitant cost of entry, only the elite will be able to afford actual enhancements, making them a new, superior species—notwithstanding the claim that Moore’s Law closes the technological breach by exponentially increasing the price-performance of computing and thus halving its cost per unit of measurement every two years or less. How the elite will maintain exclusive control over enhancements and yet subject the masses to control technologies is never addressed. But perhaps a kill switch could be implemented such that the elite will not be subjected to brain-data mining—unless one runs afoul of the agenda, in which case brain-data mining could be (re)enabled.

    In a 2018 WEF statement, Harari spoke as the self-proclaimed prophet of a new transhumanist age, saying:

    We are probably among the last generations of homo sapiens. Within a century or two, Earth will be dominated by entities that are more different from us, than we are different from Neanderthals or from chimpanzees. Because in the coming generations, we will learn how to engineer bodies and brains and minds. These will be the main products of the 21st century economy (emphasis mine).

    No longer capable of mounting a challenge to the elite as in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, and having no function, the feckless masses will have no recourse or purpose. Exploitation is one thing; irrelevance is quite another, says Harari. And thus, as Harari sees it, the remaining majority will be condemned to spend their time in the metaverse, or worse. If they are lucky, they will collect universal basic income (UBI) and will best occupy themselves by taking drugs and playing video games. Of course, Harari exempts himself from this fate.

    As for the elite, according to Harari, their supposed superiority to the masses will soon become a matter of biotechnological fact, rather than merely an ideological pretension, as in the past. The elite will not only continue to control the lion’s share of the world’s material resources; they will also become godlike and enjoy effective remote control over their subordinates. Further, via biotechnological means, they will acquire eternal life on Earth, while the majority, formerly consoled by the fact that at least everybody dies, will now lose the great equalizer. As the supernatural is outmoded, or sacrificed on the altar of transhumanism, the majority will inevitably forfeit their belief in a spiritual afterlife. The theistic religions that originated in the Middle East will disappear, to be replaced by new cyber-based religions originating in Silicon Valley. Spirituality, that is, will be nothing but the expression of reverence for newly created silicon gods, whether they be game characters, game designers, or the elites themselves.

    Harari’s pronouncements may amount to intentional hyperbole to make a point, but his statements are remarkable for the cynicism and disdain for humanity they betray. They are revelatory of the unmitigated gall of believers in the transhuman future. Coupled with the neo-Malthusian impulses of the elite, centered around the UN and the WEF, a picture emerges of an elite whose objective is to reduce the population of “useless eaters,” while keeping the remainder in their thrall.

    [This piece is an excerpt from The Great Reset and the Struggle for Liberty.]

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 21:30

  • Stunning Satellite Images Show Rare "Superbloom" Blanketing California's Hillsides
    Stunning Satellite Images Show Rare “Superbloom” Blanketing California’s Hillsides

    After a deluge of atmospheric rivers that dumped 78 trillion gallons of water on California, effectively ending a severe multi-year drought within several months, a rare superbloom has emerged in the state’s southern region across hillsides, and it’s even visible from space.

    CBS News reported new photos via NASA’s Landsat 9 satellite show a rare wildflower superbloom in Southern California after years of drought. The wet conditions spurred the germination of flower seeds all at once, leading to large swaths of land covered in various colors. 

    Southern California’s superbloom phenomenon. Source: NASA 

    Maxar Technologies also published satellite photos showing the hillside outside Palmdale covered in yellow and orange flowers.

    Another image shows a hillside covered in purple. 

    And another shows hillsides covered in yellow. 

    The rare desert botanical phenomenon has captured the attention of Southern California residents. Many have taken day trips to see the colorful hillsides. 

    Although severe drought conditions have largely subsided and wildflowers blanket the hillsides, this abundance of vegetation could potentially serve as fuel for fires when drought conditions reemerge. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 21:00

  • Contentious COVID-19 Drugs Are All Anti-Malarial: May Not Be A Coincidence
    Contentious COVID-19 Drugs Are All Anti-Malarial: May Not Be A Coincidence

    Authored by Marina Zhang via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The COVID-19 recommendations hydroxychloroquine, ivermectin, and now artemisinin all have one thing in common: They are antimalarial drugs or have such properties.

    Yet studies suggest that this may not be a mere coincidence; malaria and COVID-19 may be more similar than people may realize.

    Malaria Versus COVID-19

    From the outset, malaria and COVID-19 are very distinct diseases.

    Malaria is a parasitic disease. An infection starts when an individual is bitten by a mosquito carrying a parasite from the Plasmodium genus. Upon infection, the parasite first goes to the liver and multiplies in liver cells. Then it migrates to the bloodstream, invades and proliferates in red blood cells, and causes these cells to expand and burst.

    Common malaria symptoms such as fever, chills, and sweating occur during the blood-stage infection. Complications include anemia, and on rare occasions, cerebral malaria, liver failure, fluid buildup in the lungs, and acute respiratory distress syndrome.

    COVID-19, on the other hand, is a viral disease. Infection occurs primarily through the inhalation of contaminated droplets. The virus invades the body through the nasal cavities, entering the upper and then lower respiratory tracts.

    Inflammation of the lungs ensues as the body’s immune cells fight off the infection. The person’s oxygen levels start dropping as inflammation worsens in the advent of a cytokine storm, and the lungs become damaged. Some of the virus can also go into the bloodstream and invade other organs, causing systemic inflammation and damage.

    Several Commonalities

    While one mainly affects blood cells and the other primarily affects the lungs, both diseases are characterized by a strong inflammatory response early in the infection, according to a 2022 paper in Frontiers in Immunology.

    Symptoms-wise, both infections from malaria and COVID-19 can lead to fever, fatigue, shortness of breath, diarrhea, and muscle pain.

    If inflammation is prolonged, the body will experience a significant increase in cytokines, and individuals can become severely injured or even die.

    The two diseases are also similar in that they both sequester iron, use the same receptors in their pathogenesis, and even share similar structures in their proteins.

    Iron Storage

    Both the Plasmodium parasite and the SARS-CoV-2 virus require iron to proliferate. Therefore, both the parasite and the virus need to store iron inside the ferritin protein within infected cells. High or increased levels of ferritin are therefore an indication of severe disease and inflammation.

    Drugs that are capable of targeting iron storage or preventing proliferation may therefore be successful in treating both malaria and COVID-19.

    Similar Receptors

    The angiotensin-converting enzyme 2 (ACE-2) receptor is involved in both malaria and COVID-19 infections.

    In COVID-19, the virus binds to ACE-2 to invade cells. ACE-2 is ubiquitous within the human body, present within at the very least:

    • Lungs
    • Blood vessels
    • Muscles
    • The gut
    • Nerves
    • Stomach
    • Heart
    • Kidneys
    • Pancreas
    • Testes
    • Uterus

    Organs that have a high number of ACE-2 receptors are therefore at a higher risk of COVID-19 infection.

    The significance of ACE-2 in malaria is uncertain. However, one study, as well as the one published in Frontiers in Immunology, showed that people who have their ACE-2 receptors reduced due to genetic predispositions are more resistant to malaria.

    According to the Frontiers in Immunology study, malaria parasites use the CD147 receptors on red blood cells to gain entry into the cell. The COVID-19 virus also uses CD147 in the absence of ACE-2 receptors. CD147 has also been linked to the formation of blood clots in COVID-19 infections.

    Therapeutics that can target CD147 and ACE-2 may be successful in treating both malaria and COVID-19.

    Similar Protein Structures

    Additionally, both pathogens share a degree of overlap in their protein structures. The COVID-19 surface N protein has at least 40 percent structural similarity with important malarial proteins in charge of transport, attachment, and invasion.

    This means that drugs that can target malarial proteins may also be able to target SARS-CoV-2 viral proteins.

    Antimalarial Drugs Used in COVID-19

    Early in the pandemic, many studies recommended antimalarial and anti-parasitic drugs such as hydroxychloroquine, chloroquine, ivermectin, and artemisinin as potential treatment options for COVID-19. These recommendations, however, soon received backlash, with one reason being that malaria and COVID-19 seem to be very different diseases.

    But many doctors and studies found these therapeutics helpful in treating acute COVID-19. Professor Jose Luis Abreu, whose specialty is in plant science at The State University of Nuevo León, used the proposition of “parallelism between malaria and COVID-19” as an explanation for why antimalarial drugs such as ivermectin, artemisinin, and hydroxychloroquine may be applied to COVID-19 in his protocol.

    Block COVID-19 Receptors and Proteins

    In simulation studies, ivermectin, hydroxychloroquine, and artemisinin can bind to SARS-CoV-2 N proteins, which have structural similarities with malaria proteins. In treating malaria, hydroxychloroquine and artemisinin have been shown to block malarial proteins from replicating and proliferating.

    All three drugs can also bind to CD147 and ACE-2 receptors, as previously reported by The Epoch Times. These drugs can also bind to COVID-19 spike proteins directly to prevent viral attachment to cell receptors and also prevent viral proliferation by blocking proteins that take part in viral replication.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 20:30

  • Have Internal-Combustion-Engine Vehicle Sales Already Peaked?
    Have Internal-Combustion-Engine Vehicle Sales Already Peaked?

    Electric vehicle (EV) sales have grown rapidly over the past few years, but have they managed to make a dent in the global market?

    To find out, Visual Capitalist’s Marcus Lu visualized data from BloombergNEF that breaks down annual vehicle sales by three categories:

    • Internal combustion (including traditional hybrids)

    • Plug-in hybrids

    • Battery electric

    From this, we can see that EVs are definitely building up market share. In fact, combustion vehicle sales appear to have peaked in 2017.

    Growth in EV Market Share

    The following table lists global EV sales, as well as their relative market share.

    Year EV Sales EV Market Share (%)
    2013 206,000 0.2
    2014 320,000 0.4
    2015 543,000 0.6
    2016 791,000 0.9
    2017 1,262,000 1.3
    2018 2,082,000 2.2
    2019 2,276,000 2.5
    2020 3,244,000 4.2
    2021 6,768,000 8.3
    2022 10,522,000 13.0

    *Includes plug-in hybrids. Source: EV Volumes

    We can see that EV sales really picked up steam around 2019. This is likely due to various government subsidies and a growing list of models to choose from.

    EV ranges, once a major limiting factor, are also becoming less of a concern as battery technology improves and more charging stations become available.

    Will Combustion Vehicle Sales Stage a Comeback?

    It seems unlikely that combustion vehicles will be able to reclaim much of their lost market share.

    China, the world’s largest car market, is leading the world in terms of EV adoption. As of 2022, one in four new cars sold in the country is electric. The U.S. and EU are transitioning slower, but should catch up thanks to government subsidies and a planned phase-out of fossil fuel vehicles.

    In the EU, the sale of new internal combustion vehicles will be banned by 2035. However, an exemption was recently made on behalf of Germany to allow the sale of cars that run on synthetic fuels.

    In the U.S., the 13 states that adhere to California’s Zero Emissions Vehicle (ZEV) Program are aiming for 100% of cars sold in 2035 to be ZEVs. These states include California, Colorado, Connecticut, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Minnesota, New Jersey, New York, Oregon, Rhode Island, Vermont, and Washington.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 20:00

  • How AI Can Track, Manipulate Voters
    How AI Can Track, Manipulate Voters

    Authored by Kevin Stocklin via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    How well do artificial intelligence (AI) programs know us humans?

    A visitor watches an AI (Artificial Intelligence) sign on an animated screen at the Mobile World Congress (MWC), the telecom industry’s biggest annual gathering, in Barcelona. (Josep Lago/AFP via Getty Images)

    In most cases, it’s quite well and, in some ways better than we know ourselves.

    A study by AI experts at Brigham Young University, titled “Out of One, Many: Using Language Models to Simulate Human Samples,” found that predictive AI programs exhibited a striking degree of what they call “algorithmic fidelity,” or precise mapping to actual human behavior.

    “Because these AI tools are basically trained on stuff that humans produce, things that we write, documents we make, websites we write, they can reflect back to us a lot of interesting and important things about ourselves,” Ethan Busby, political psychologist and co-author of the study, told The Epoch Times. “Kind of like if someone read your diary from start to finish, they would know a lot of things about you, and you’re not going to like every single thing.

    “In a similar way,” Busby said, “these tools have read so many things that humans have produced, and they can replicate or say back to us things about ourselves that we didn’t necessarily know.”

    The study sought to analyze human behavior in the context of elections and asked how accurately a GPT-3 language model could predict voting patterns based on socio-demographic factors like a person’s gender, age, location, religion, race, and economic status. The authors used these factors to create “silicon samples,” or composite personas based on varying combinations of these attributes.

    You can basically ask these tools to put themselves in a specific frame of mind and pretend to be essentially this person, pretend to have these characteristics,” Busby said. They asked the program how these “silicon samples” would vote in specific campaigns, then they compared the results to actual voters’ behavior in elections between 2012 and 2020, using data from the American National Elections studies.

    For example, Busby said, regarding the 2016 election, “We could say what kinds of groups are going to be pivotal in Ohio?” What they found was that AI quickly learned to accurately predict how people would vote, based on their attributes.

    Left and Right Decry AI, When It Costs Elections

    Artificial intelligence is highly useful to organizations that want to target things like political messaging campaigns or fundraising efforts. But some political analysts have raised red flags about this, inferring unfairness and election interference. Their degree of outrage, however, largely depends on whether their candidates or causes succeeded or failed.

    In 2017, The Guardian, a left-wing British newspaper, wrote a series of articles claiming that conservative tech entrepreneur Robert Mercer, whom it called “the big data billionaire waging war on the mainstream media,” had financed a campaign strategy using AI to circumvent mainstream media narratives. This, the paper alleged, illicitly swayed voters in favor of Donald Trump, resulting in his victory in the presidential election in 2016.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 19:30

  • Data-Centers & Small Nuclear Reactors – A Match Made In Heaven?
    Data-Centers & Small Nuclear Reactors – A Match Made In Heaven?

    Authored by Brian Gitt via RealClear Wire,

    Most of us don’t think about the huge data centers that enable our constant internet usage. But they’re essential to our civilization—and they consume enormous amounts of electricity 24/7.

    Powering these data centers is fast becoming a problem. Northern Virginia, for instance, hosts the largest concentration of data centers in the world. Tech giants like Amazon, Facebook, Microsoft, and Google have invested $126 billion in Virginia data centers. And the region’s insatiable appetite for power continues to grow due to surging demand for cloud computing services. 

    Without reliable power, cloud service providers can’t grow to match the pace of increasing demand. But the electrical grid can’t keep up. Right now, power transmission bottlenecks in Northern Virginia could delay new data center development into 2026.

    Data center developers across the pond are facing the same problem. Microsoft and Amazon halted plans to build new data centers in Dublin, Ireland, because of power shortages and threats of rolling blackouts. And British officials paused construction on new houses in West London until 2035 because data centers had already maxed out the local grid’s capacity. 

    And it’s not just power consumption that is sparking opposition to data centers. Concerns about greenhouse gas emissions, water usage, noise pollution, and the overall sustainability of data centers are fueling local opposition that is constraining where—or even whether—data centers get built. 

    Google, Amazon, Microsoft, and Facebook have responded to the demand for clean energy by investing heavily in wind and solar projects. But wind and solar alone can’t solve the problem. Those energy sources simply can’t deliver the uptime that data centers need. Consider the European wind drought of 2021 that cut wind power in the UK by 32 percent for 6 months. The need for round-the-clock uptime presents a serious—perhaps insurmountable—obstacle to data centers relying solely on sources of power like wind and solar that don’t generate power at night, or on cloudy days, or when the wind doesn’t blow.

    Some people hope we’ll eventually be able to store surplus wind and solar energy in batteries. But the reality is that batteries are too expensive to store enough energy to supply reliable power for weeks (let alone months) of uncooperative weather. 

    The good news is that there’s a solution—a power source reliable enough to provide uptime round-the-clock at low cost and with zero emissions: a small onsite nuclear power plant dedicated to supplying power to a data center. 

    Small modular reactors (SMRs) supply between 10 and 300 MW of power 24/7. A data center supplied by an SMR would face no more competition for power with local communities. No more waiting for new transmission lines or power plants to be built. And no more emissions. When we consider the full lifecycle of different power sources (including mining, manufacturing, and disposal), solar emits four times more carbon than SMRs.

    SMRs differ from large conventional nuclear plants as much as modern smartphones differ from old rotary phones. Conventional plants are large and complicated, and cumbersome US and European regulations make them expensive to build. Two units (1,117 MWs each) currently being built in the US state of Georgia have cost upwards of $30 billion. Construction on them, moreover, is six years behind schedule, and when they finally come online in 2023, they will have taken 14 years to complete. These kinds of costs and delays present a capital risk factor for large conventional nuclear plants. 

    Large nuclear reactors are also land-intensive. They typically require over 800 acres and usually need to be sited near a lake, river, or the ocean to access water for cooling. Plus, they don’t recycle spent fuel.

    SMRs are simpler and much less expensive to construct. Off-the-shelf components and factory prefabrication bring construction costs as low as $60 million. SMRs have a small footprint—about two acres for the smallest reactors, which is less than 0.5% of the land used by traditional reactors. Most don’t use water for cooling and therefore don’t have to be sited near a lake, river, or ocean. They can be installed on site or at a nearby location in under a year, and developers needn’t put capital at risk as some SMR companies offer power purchase agreements (PPAs).

    Oklo, for instance, owns and operates the power plant and sells 24/7 clean power at costs equal to or less than traditional energy sources. Oklo’s streamlined regulatory approach and extensive experience working with the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission minimizes the time required to get a license to operate. The expected timeline from a signed PPA to powering servers (including licensing, permitting, and constructing) is two to three years. Plus, SMRs can be designed to recycle spent fuel—both their own fuel and fuel from large nuclear plants.

    SMRs promise data centers what they’re looking for: a reliable, low-cost, carbon-free energy source that yields round-the-clock uptime. Data centers of all sorts (hyperscale, colocation, or telecom) can use SMRs to secure the energy independence they need to overcome bottlenecks in the grid and to avoid competition for energy with local communities. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 19:00

  • The E. Coli Super-Pathogens You Should Know About
    The E. Coli Super-Pathogens You Should Know About

    Authored by Dr. Sean Lin and Jacky Guan via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Foodborne illnesses, also known as food poisoning, are a serious public health issue. Each year, they make 48 million people get sick, hospitalize 128,000, and cause the death of 3,000. Pathogenic E. coli is one of the most common known foodborne pathogens. However, the severity of various E. coli strains varies tremendously and the public should be cautious about one particularly dangerous type of E. coli.

    E. Coli 101

    Escherichia coli, also known as E. coli, is one of the most common types of bacteria known to mankind. From helping with digestion in your stomach to being a producer of artificial insulin, the bacteria discovered in 1885 have been studied countless times and improved our understanding of the microscopic world.

    The E. coli we infamously know from the news belong to the group Enteropathogenic E. coli (EPEC) and are pathogens responsible for food poisoning. Foodborne illnesses also include Salmonella and Norovirus (responsible for the recent cruise ship outbreaks). Typically, an E. coli infection occurs when a person comes into contact with contaminated food, animals, or water. It usually only causes mild abdominal pain or brief diarrhea. Other symptoms include stomach cramps, nausea, vomiting, and fever.

    Typical treatment usually involves rest, hydration, and nutritional support. The disease is usually self-limiting as the body can normally clear it. The use of antibiotics is common in treating E. coli, yet antibiotic resistance is also a problem worldwide. However, severe forms of E. coli are the Shiga toxin-producing variants of the bacteria that can have dire consequences.

    STEC Variants Severely Damage Intestinal Linings and Kidneys

    The variants of E. coli that produce Shiga toxins (Stx) are called Shiga toxin-producing E. coli, or STEC. They have gained a lot of attention in the past few decades, as they are known for causing severe disease.

    STEC belongs to the EPEC group. STEC strains are capable of producing toxins named Shiga toxin type 1 (Stx1), type 2 (Stx2), or both, encoded by stx1 and stx2 genes, respectively.

    The toxins are named after Kiyoshi Shiga, who first described the bacterial origin of dysentery caused by Shigella dysenteriae. Historically, the toxin produced by E. coli was named Shiga-like toxin (SLT). Now, Shigella dysenteriae and STEC are regarded as the most common sources of Shiga toxins.

    Symptoms of a STEC infection include abdominal pain and watery diarrhea. There are also severe—possibly life-threatening—cases characterized by hemorrhagic colitis. These types of E. coli are also called Enterohemorrhagic E. coli (EHEC). Shiga toxins are also associated with hemolytic uremic syndrome (HUS).

    In particular, the STEC O157:H7 and STEC O104:H4 are the two most notorious STEC strains. One could say these STEC groups are something like super soldiers in the E. coli army.

    Shiga toxin-producing bacteria are E. coli strains one does not want to encounter. (The Epoch Times)

    The Shiga toxin does most of its work in small blood vessels, as it is rather ineffective in large vessels such as major veins and arteries. This is how the toxin can specialize against the digestive tract, kidney, and lungs. For example, the Shiga toxins are good at destroying clusters of nerve endings or small blood vessels in the kidneys, which can lead to kidney failure and even HUS. It can severely damage the lungs as well, so food poisoning associated with Shiga toxins is often also associated with lung and nervous system damage.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 18:30

  • Visualizing Air Pollution Levels Around The World In 2022
    Visualizing Air Pollution Levels Around The World In 2022

    The World Health Organization (WHO) estimates that air pollution leads to 7 million premature deaths every year.

    Out of the six common air pollutants, particulate matter measuring 2.5 microns or smaller in diameter, or PM2.5, is accepted as the most harmful to human health. This is due to its prevalence in the atmosphere and the broad range of adverse health effects associated with its exposure, such as heart disease, stroke, lung cancer and chronic respiratory diseases.

    With that context in mind, this visualization from Visual Capitalist’s Selin Oğuz and Miranda Smith uses IQAir’s World Air Quality Report to map out the 2022 average PM2.5 concentrations in select major cities around the globe, expressed in micrograms per cubic meter (μg/m³).

    Understanding the WHO Air Pollution Guidelines

    Did you know that in 2019, only 1% of the global population lived in places where WHO global air quality guidelines were met?

    Designed to protect public health from the harmful effects of air pollution, the guidelines cover a range of air pollutants, including particulate matter, ozone, nitrogen dioxide, sulfur dioxide, and carbon monoxide.

    The healthy limits for PM2.5 are set at an annual average of 0-5 μg/m³.

    WHO Classification Annual Average PM2.5 Concentration (μg/m³) % of countries within classification, 2022*
    WHO Air Quality Guideline 0 – 5 9.9%
    Interim Target 4 5.1 – 10 18.3%
    Interim Target 3 10.1 – 15 19.8%
    Interim Target 2 15.1 – 25 28.2%
    Interim Target 1 25.1 – 35 9.9%
    Exceeds Target Levels 35.1 – 50 7.6%
    Exceeds Target Levels > 50 6.1%

    *Percentages are calculated as a proportion of the 131 countries that had sufficient air quality data and were included in IQAir’s World Air Quality Report in 2022.

    According to IQAir’s World Air Quality Report, only 13 countries or territories met the recommended concentration of PM2.5 in 2022. Among them were Australia, Finland, Puerto Rico, Iceland, Bermuda, and Guam.

    Above this guideline, many countries fell within the four interim targets, while nearly 14% recorded air pollution levels that exceeded all target levels.

    The Effects of Air Quality on Mortality

    While it can be a little difficult to grasp what the above concentrations represent, thinking of them in terms of their effect on mortality can shed some light on their significance.

    According to the WHO, non-accidental mortality rates multiply by 1.08 per 10 µg/m³ increase in PM2.5 concentration, but only up to 35 μg/m³. Above that, mortality growth rates may not be linear, resulting in many more deaths.

    Here is an example to highlight what that means.

    • Say that, for a population living within the WHO PM2.5 guideline, the non-accidental mortality rate is arbitrarily set to 100 deaths for a given period.

    • If this area’s PM2.5 concentration goes up to 10 μg/m³, putting them at Interim Target 4, they would see 104 deaths in that same amount of time.

    • At Interim Target 3, where their PM2.5 concentration would be 15 μg/m³, they would see 108 deaths.

    • At Interim Target 2, they’d see 117.

    • Finally, at Interim Target 1, they’d see 126.

    Beyond Interim Target 1 (above 35 μg/m³), deaths would potentially grow much faster. As of 2022, around 14% of countries report levels above this threshold, including Chad, India, Pakistan, Qatar, and Nigeria.

    The State of Air Pollution Around the World

    While many cities in North America and Europe have seen steady and relatively lower PM2.5 concentrations during the last few years, many cities (especially those in Asia) have been making strides in lowering their air pollution levels.

    Nonetheless, many of them still record PM2.5 concentrations that are more than six times the WHO guideline.

    City 2022 annual average PM2.5 concentration (μg/m³) 2018 annual average PM2.5 concentration (μg/m³)
    🇪🇬 Cairo, Egypt 47.4 N/A
    🇮🇳 Mumbai, India 46.7 58.6
    🇦🇪 Dubai, UAE 43.7 55.3
    🇮🇩 Jakarta, Indonesia 36.2 45.3
    🇳🇬 Lagos, Nigeria 36.1 N/A
    🇨🇳 Beijing, China 29.8 50.9
    🇵🇪 Lima, Peru 25.6 28
    🇲🇽 Mexico City, Mexico 22.1 19.7
    🇨🇳 Guangzhou, China 21.3 33.2
    🇵🇭 Manila, Philippines 14.6 N/A
    🇦🇷 Buenos Aires, Argentina 14.2 12.4
    🇸🇬 Singapore, Singapore 13.3 14.8
    🇮🇹 Rome, Italy 12.6 N/A
    🇰🇪 Nairobi, Kenya 11.5 N/A
    🇷🇺 Moscow, Russia 10.8 10.1
    🇧🇷 Rio de Janeiro, Brazil 10.6 N/A
    🇺🇸 Los Angeles, USA 10.5 14.4
    🇺🇸 New York, USA 9.9 N/A
    🇬🇧 London, UK 9.6 12
    🇯🇵 Tokyo, Japan 9.2 13.1
    🇨🇦 Toronto, Canada 8.5 7.8
    🇨🇦 Vancouver, Canada 7.6 N/A
    🇳🇴 Oslo, Norway 6.9 8.2
    🇿🇦 Cape Town, South Africa 6.7 N/A
    🇺🇸 Miami, USA 6.4 7.8
    🇦🇺 Perth, Australia 4.9 N/A
    🇦🇺 Sydney, Australia 3.1 7.6

    Most parts of the world did not meet the annual WHO recommendation for clean and healthy air in 2022.

    However, the cost of inaction toward cleaner air is very high. In addition to the millions of premature deaths each year, the global cost of health damages associated with air pollution currently sits at $8.1 trillion.

    Unfortunately, things that are integral to our quality of life, such as industrial activities, transportation, energy production, and agricultural practices, are also the leading causes of air pollution around the world.

    As such, a multi-faceted approach to lowering pollution is essential to protect lives, especially to benefit those already more vulnerable to poor air quality, such as kids and the elderly.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 18:00

  • Lula: Peace Club To De-Dollarization
    Lula: Peace Club To De-Dollarization

    Authored by Andrew Korybko via The Automatic Earth blog,

    Brazilian President Lula was successful in reaching an agreement to de-dollarize his country’s trade with China, the significance of which was earlier explained in the context of his country’s grand strategy here, but failed to convince his counterpart to join a so-called “peace club” on Ukraine during their summit. This is no small shortcoming either since it was promoted by his Foreign Minister as one of the reasons behind his trip in an interview that he gave to the Financial Times (FT) late last month.

    Globally prominent outlets such as BloombergFrance24, the US Government-run “Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty” (RFERL), and others all accordingly reported that this issue would be high on the agenda during Lula’s talks with President Xi. His supporters on social media also went wild getting everyone’s expectations up about this as well, even though “Brazil & China Are Poles Apart When It Comes To Their Envisaged End Games In Ukraine” so it was never likely that anything would come of this.

    While China, India, and South Africa have consistently abstained from anti-Russian UNGA Resolutions, Brazil bucked the BRICS trend by always voting against Russia except when it came to suspending it from the Human Rights Council. Lula became the first BRICS leader to personally condemn Russia in his joint statement with Biden back in February, after which he ordered his diplomats to vote in support of the latest anti-Russian UNGA Resolution later that same month.

    Foreign Minister Vieira was obviously well aware of the sharp differences between Brazil and China’s officially envisaged end games to this conflict yet he still made it seem to FT like there was a chance that the People’s Republic would tacitly support his country’s position via participation in the “peace club”. That was nothing more than wishful thinking, which belied Brazilian diplomats’ refusal to acknowledge China’s principled approach to this conflict since they in hindsight seemed to assume that it was flexible.

    Reality slapped them and their supporters in the face upon the publication of the joint Brazilian-Chinese communique on Friday, which can be read in English on the official website of the Brazilian Ministry of Foreign Affairs here. The ninth paragraph of that document will now be shared in full so as to prove Lula’s failure to sway President Xi to his country’s side contrary to the unrealistic expectation that Vieira set for his trip when talking to the FT late last month:

    “Both parties stated that dialogue and negotiation are the only viable way out of the crisis in Ukraine and that all efforts leading to a peaceful solution to the crisis must be encouraged and supported. Brazil received in a positive way the proposal by China that offers reflections conducive to the search for a peaceful solution to the crisis. China received in a positive way the efforts by Brazil in favour of peace. The parties made an appeal for more countries to play a constructive role in the promotion of a political solution to the crisis in Ukraine. The parties decided to keep in contact on this matter.”

    As can be seen, absolutely nothing of tangible significance came from Lula’s over-hyped “peace club” proposal. This paragraph of their joint statement is purely perfunctory and simply acknowledges their shared interest in peace without touching upon their sharp differences in terms of how this should be achieved. The “positive way” in which China “received” “the efforts by Brazil in favour of peace” is similar in spirit to Russia’s reported support of the optics connected to Lula’s peace rhetoric.

    What’s meant by this was explained more in detail here last week but just refers to Russia and China’s interest in showing the world that the international community wants peace as soon as possible instead of indefinitely perpetuating this proxy war. Their soft power interests in no way even remotely imply endorsement of Lula’s envisaged end game as articulated in his joint condemnation of Russia with Biden and the anti-Russian UNGA Resolution that he ordered his country’s diplomats to vote in support of.

    China wasn’t ever going to be manipulated into de facto taking the US’ political side in this conflict against Russia by dint of joining Lula’s “peace club” and thus extending credence to his hostile demand that their shared BRICS partner immediately withdraw from all the territory that Kiev claims as its own. Doing so would have discredited President Xi’s signature peace proposal that his diplomats unveiled on the one-year anniversary of the conflict and which he discussed at length with President Putin in March.

    Lula therefore failed in his function as Biden’s “Trojan Horse” for tricking the Chinese leader into informally adopting an anti-Russian policy, but this unfriendly gamble didn’t spoil their much larger success in agreeing to de-dollarize bilateral trade. About that, while it’s indisputably a positive development that’ll accelerate the global systemic transition to multipolarity, his Finance Minister Fernando Haddad made it clear that neither this nor the trip in general were aimed against the US.

    In his own words, “It doesn’t make sense to get closer to China and move away from the United States. We want the best relations with the United States and the European Union.” This aligns with the insight that was hyperlinked to in the introduction regarding Brazil’s grand strategy, which was elaborated upon in this piece here from Friday that discusses the significance of Lula’s reported plans to launch a global influence platform in joint partnership with the US Democrats.

    To summarize, he believes that Brazil can “balance” – however clumsily and imperfectly – between de-dollarizing with China and aggressively propagating liberalglobalism across the world with the US, thus enabling his country to preemptively avert potentially disproportionate dependence on either. Relations with Russia are limited in this paradigm to commodities (including energy investments) and cooperation on BRICS’ new reserve currency, which are important but pale in comparison to China and the US’ roles.

    All told, the grand strategic significance of Lula’s de-dollarization success with China far outweighs his failure to trick it into tacitly adopting an anti-Russian policy by joining his proposed “peace club”, but the second-mentioned outcome still deserves to be discussed. Those who expected this to happen must cogently account for the fact that it didn’t occur, though without resorting to the conspiracy theories that have become popular among his supporters, if they want to retain a semblance of credibility.

    *  *  *

    Support the Automatic Earth via Patreon.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 17:30

  • Thieves Steal 2 Million Dimes Worth $200,000 From Big Rig Parked In Philadelphia Walmart
    Thieves Steal 2 Million Dimes Worth $200,000 From Big Rig Parked In Philadelphia Walmart

    Talk about taking QE to another level.

    Today in “if Fed policy was an 18-wheeler” news, a trailer containing 2 million dimes was broken into and looted in Northeast Philadelphia this week.

    The trailer contained “hundreds of thousands of dollars” worth of dimes, 6ABC reported.

    After a discovery of the trailer was made at 6AM on Thursday morning, police commented that roughly 2 million dimes, worth about $200,000 were stolen. 

    The truck had $750,000 in dimes in it altogether. Many were found strewn about in a Walmart parking lot where the trailer was parked. 

    The dimes had been picked up at the Philadelphia Mint on Wednesday, but the driver of the truck went home to sleep before planning to drive the next day to Florida. 

    Capt. Jack Ryan of Northeast Detectives commented: “This is common practice – to pick up a load going to Florida and go home for the night, get to sleep, and get on the road in the morning.”

    He didn’t comment on the driver’s decision to leave $750,000 in dimes in a trailer in the Walmart parking lot overnight, however. 

    “They were trying to cross-load the dimes into other things. There are dimes all over the parking lot,” Ryan added, telling 6ABC.

    Police are reviewing camera footage to try and get a suspect description.

    One bystander asked: “I feel like if they try to go to the bank and cash it in, they’re going to get caught. They’ll be like, ‘Well, where did you get all of these dimes from?'”

    Oh and don’t worry: we’re sure by next week the incident will be used as an example of why we absolutely must use central bank digital currencies. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 17:00

  • US Arms Industry Planning 1st Taiwan Trip In Years To Talk Joint Production
    US Arms Industry Planning 1st Taiwan Trip In Years To Talk Joint Production

    Authored by Dave DeCamp via AntiWar.com,

    Around 25 US defense contractors plan to send representatives to Taiwan next month, marking the first time the arms industry will send a delegation to the island since 2019, Nikkei Asia reported this week.

    Rupert Hammond-Chambers, president of the US Taiwan Business Council, said the delegation will look to boost cooperation with Taiwan’s industry and wants to explore jointly producing weapons. The arms that Taipei is interested in producing include drones and ammunition.

    Taiwan’s domestic-made Teng Yun 2 drone, via Asia Times

    The planned arms industry trip to Taiwan comes as the US is looking to ramp up arms sales and general military cooperation with Taiwan, which will further exacerbate tensions with Beijing.

    The delegation plans to meet with Taiwanese President Tsai Ing-wen, who recently provoked major Chinese military drills by meeting with US House Speaker Kevin McCarthy in California.

    When asked about the prospect of US companies jointly producing arms with Taiwan, a Biden administration official expressed support for the idea.

    “From a very high-level perspective, we think that co-production arrangements make sense, but we need to take a look at them on a case-by-case basis, and it has to be at the request of US industry,” the official told Nikkei.

    Since Washington severed diplomatic relations with Taipei in 1979, the US has always sold weapons to Taiwan. But the US is now looking to expand support by providing billions in military aid included in the 2023 National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA).

    Some of the Taiwan aid has hit a snag with the appropriations committees, but the Pentagon has said it plans to use the $1 billion in Presidential Drawdown Authority to start arming Taiwan. The authority is what President Biden has been using to arm Ukraine by sending weapons directly from US military stockpiles.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 16:30

  • The Biden Administration Is Once Again Tightening Rules On Vehicles Emissions
    The Biden Administration Is Once Again Tightening Rules On Vehicles Emissions

    It’s a case of Joe Biden versus the free market. 

    Recall, just yesterday, we wrote about how, despite enormous subsidies, EV adoption in the United States was slowing. In other words, it turns out, not everybody shares the virtue signaling stance of blindly switching to a more expensive method of driving with more complex refueling demands…just because the government “said so”.

    Enter the Biden administration, yet again, which is now unveiling what Fox News is calling “the most aggressive tailpipe emissions ever crafted” to try and further the push into EVs.

    The new rules proposed by the EPA and White House “will impact car model years 2027 through 2032”. The White House claims they will result in “carbon emission reductions of nearly 10 billion tons by 2055 and would save consumers an average of $12,000 over the lifetime of vehicles,” the report says.

    The White House stated: “Cars and truck manufacturers have made clear that the future of transportation is electric. The market is moving.”

    It added: “As a car enthusiast and self-proclaimed car guy, President Biden is seizing the moment. His Investing in America agenda is expanding domestic manufacturing and accelerating adoption of zero-emission vehicles, including battery electric, plug-in hybrid electric, and fuel cell electric vehicles.”

    The administration also estimates that the new rules will “reduce oil imports by 20 billion barrels”.

    Meanwhile, critics state the obvious: that new rules on emission standards will make the cost of all vehicles rise. If its rules are enacted, “67% of new sedan, crossover, SUV and light truck purchases could be electric by 2032,” the White House predicts. 

    Myron Ebell, the director of the Competitive Enterprise Institute’s Center for Energy and Environment told Fox News: “The Biden administration is trying to bend every federal rule they can find to force people into buying EVs. There is still a market that allows drivers to buy the vehicles of their choice, but government coercion is rapidly limiting those choices.” 

    He concluded: “If Biden policies are successful, we will soon have a choice between buying an EV and not being able to afford a vehicle at all.”

    Conspicuously, the White House didn’t mention any restrictions or concerns about the way that heavy metals are being mined for use in EV batteries, because – well, child labor and toxic work conditions in continents in Africa aren’t in vogue, popular, trendy talking points.

    But…but…carbon!

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 16:00

  • SEC Sides With Conservatives Over Launching PayPal Discrimination Probe
    SEC Sides With Conservatives Over Launching PayPal Discrimination Probe

    Authored by Kevin Stocklin via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) sided with conservative investors this week in their request to investigate what they say is PayPal’s systematic political and religious discrimination against customers.

    Over the objections of PayPal’s management, the SEC allowed a proposal by the National Center for Public Policy Research (NCPPR) to go to a shareholder vote at the company’s next annual meeting. This decision follows a similar decision on March 29, in which the SEC green-lighted a proposal regarding alleged political and religious discrimination at JPMorgan Chase, America’s largest bank.

    In an April 10 letter to PayPal’s attorneys, the SEC stated that NCPPR’s proposal “requests that the board conduct an evaluation and issue a report within the next year evaluating how it oversees risks related to discrimination against individuals based on their race, color, religion (including religious views), sex, national origin, or political views, and whether such discrimination may impact individuals’ exercise of their constitutionally protected civil rights.”

    Responding to PayPal’s request to block the proposal from going to a shareholder vote, the SEC stated: “We are unable to concur in your view that the Company may exclude the Proposal under Rule 14a-8(i)(7). In our view, the Proposal transcends ordinary business matters.”

    PayPal had argued that its shareholders should not consider NCPPR’s request because the issue of viewpoint discrimination is part of the company’s “ordinary business operations” and that “the proposal seeks to ‘micro-manage’ the company by probing too deeply into matters of a complex nature upon which shareholders, as a group, would not be in a position to make an informed judgment.”

    The NCPPR proposal stated, among other things, that “companies that provide banking or financial services are essential pillars of the marketplace. On account of their unique and pivotal role in America’s economy, many federal and state laws already prohibit them from discriminating when providing financial services to the public. And the UN Declaration of Human Rights, consistent with many other laws and the U.S. Constitution, recognizes that ‘everyone has the right to freedom of thought, conscience and religion.’”

    Conservatives Charge Viewpoint Discrimination

    We know from news stories that PayPal has been discriminating on the basis of viewpoints, shutting down accounts that differ from their ‘woke’ political principles,” Scott Shepard, a director at NCPPR and co-author of the proposal, told The Epoch Times. “We’re giving them a chance with this to consider ways to rectify those problems.”

    PayPal has scored well in terms of its support for progressive causes. Standard & Poor’s ranked it a 49 out of 100 in the social-justice category of its environmental, social, and governance (ESG) score, more than double the industry average of 22, though below the industry best of 90. Its overall ESG rating increased steadily from 18 in 2018 to 58 today.

    The logo of online payment company PayPal during LeWeb 2013 event in Saint-Denis near Paris on Dec.10, 2013. (Eric PiermontI /AFP via Getty Images)

    PayPal scored a perfect 100 percent on the Corporate Equality Index (CEI), published by the Human Rights Campaign (HRC). The HRC publishes various corporate indices that it says are “benchmarks of LGBTQ-inclusive policies, practices, and benefits of our nation’s employers.” Noting left-wing philanthropist George Soros’s funding of the HRC, some analysts have suggested that campaigns such as Bud Light’s endorsement of trans activist Dylan Mulvaney were part of a standard corporate practice of pursuing high scores from ESG rating agencies and progressive organizations like the HRC. Anheuser-Busch, the brewer of Bud Light beer, scored 100 on HRC’s Corporate Equality Index.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 15:30

  • Anheuser-Busch Transitions Into Damage Control Mode – And People Aren't Buying It
    Anheuser-Busch Transitions Into Damage Control Mode – And People Aren’t Buying It

    After rolling out a Bud Light ad campaign featuring flamboyant transgender influencer Dylan Mulvaney – whose ditzy caricature of a woman mocks decades of actual progress by feminists (who have apparently been wokeshamed into silence), Anheuser-Busch’s damage control team kicked into action on Friday after the Mulvaney ad sparked a massive backlash.

    “We never intended to be part of a discussion that divides people,” said Anheuser-Busch InBev CEO Brendan Whitworth in a carefully crafted, heavily focus-grouped press release which failed to mention Mulvaney, Bud Light, or transgender issues. “We are in the business of bringing people together over a beer.”

    I care deeply about this country, this company, our brands and our partners. I spend much of my time traveling across America, listening to and learning from our customers, distributors and others,” the statement continued. “Moving forward, I will continue to work tirelessly to bring great beers to consumers across our nation.”

    Translation: Let’s all forget about this over a beer.

    The company then went with a ‘hey fellow beer drinkers’ ad campaign, tweeting “TGIF” along with a picture of a Bud Light can. It was received about as well as one would imagine… with a massive ratio of people commenting vs. ‘liking’ it.

    The campaign was mocked mercilessly.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    More via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Brand Damage

    Some analysts and investors said that the damage likely won’t sink Anheuser-Busch, but the damage has been done to the Bud Light brand.

    The logo of Anheuser-Busch InBev pictured outside the brewer’s headquarters in Leuven, Belgium, on Feb. 28, 2019. (Francois Lenoir/Reuters)

    “I simply don’t understand why they hired the person who was doing the marketing,” Oxygen Financial CEO Ted Jenkin told Fox News Thursday. “I mean, if your target customer is Kid Rock, and then all of a sudden you decide to go to RuPaul, that just doesn’t make any sense at all.

    Because Bud Light generally targets “blue-collar workers and younger adults that are 25 to 29 years old,” the campaign should be problematic for the firm. “So, I don’t think that this one campaign is going to colossally destroy the brand,” it said.

    “But certainly short term, it puts doubt into their loyal drinkers of Bud Light to say, ‘Do I want to continue to be drinking Bud Light based upon who they’re showing representing Bud Light?’” he asked. “Anytime a company puts on a national spokesperson that has backlash, it certainly can affect your business.”

    A research fellow with the National Center for Public Policy Research wrote this week that Anheuser-Busch is owned by InBev, a multinational conglomerate worth tens of billions of dollars. One product, he wrote, won’t do a huge amount of damage to the brand or value.

    But that seems like a plausible result. The Venn diagram of people interested in drinking Bud Light and those eager to support the issue at the sharp edge of the wokist culture war is pretty much just two circles vaguely near one another,” Shepard wrote. “While InBev investors won’t suffer too much, distributors of AB products and others who do business with the company surely will.”

    Shepard further stipulated in the article that the “bottom-line effects of wokeness are clearer at other American companies that have abandoned fiduciary duty for politics,” referring to large corporations’ having adopted left-wing talking points and narratives around race and sex.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 15:00

  • Fungal Outbreak Affects Over 90 Workers At Michigan Paper Mill
    Fungal Outbreak Affects Over 90 Workers At Michigan Paper Mill

    Authored by Jane Ngyuen via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Nineteen confirmed cases of blastomycosis, a type of fungal infection, have been linked with a northern Michigan paper mill, with a further 74 people believed to be probable cases, according to local health authorities.

    A medical illustration of Blastomyces, the fungus that causes blastomycosis. (Courtesy of CDC)

    Public health officials said on April 7 that both confirmed and probable cases are workers at Escanaba Billerud Paper Mill infected with Blastomycosis after showing symptoms. A probable case is a person with symptoms with a positive antigen or antibody test.

    Blastomycosis is an infection caused by a fungus called blastomyces that live in soil and decaying wood.

    Earlier on Feb. 28, the Public Health Delta and Menominee Counties (PHDM) was first alerted of several atypical pneumonia infections in individuals employed at the mill.

    On March 3, the mill learned of the infections from the PHDM.

    The exact source of the fungus has not yet been found. However, it is believed that it arrived on damp and rotten wood at the mill.

    Although the source of the infection has not been established, we continue to take this matter very seriously and are following recommendations from health and government officials and implementing numerous, proactive steps to protect the health and safety of our employees, contractors, and visitors,” Brian Peterson, the mill’s vice president of operations, said in a statement.

    An investigation into an outbreak of blastomycosis is ongoing and includes health and safety officials at the local, state, and federal levels.

    Experts said that an outbreak that affects a large number of people is highly unusual as the fungal disease is not usually transmitted from person to person.

    Workers at the mill are now being asked to wear company-provided N95 masks. Deep cleaning of ventilation systems in the plant is underway, as advised by health officials, to avoid disease spreading.

    Billerud AB, an American subsidiary of the Swedish pulp and paper manufacturer, operates the mill.

    About Blastomycosis

    According to the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), the Blastomyces fungus lives in moist soil and decomposing matter.

    People can get blastomycosis after breathing in fungal spores from the air, which can infect the lungs.

    Most people who breathe in the spores don’t get sick, but some might experience the following symptoms: cough, fever, chest pain, difficulty breathing, night sweats, fatigue, weight loss, muscle aches, and joint pain.

    In severe cases, the fungus spreads from the lungs to other organs, including the muscles, bones, and brain. It can take anywhere from three weeks to three months for symptoms to appear after exposure to the fungus, the CDC says.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 04/15/2023 – 14:30

Digest powered by RSS Digest